Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2018 with funding from
Wellcome Library

https://archive.org/details/b29324920_0003

THE HEIMSKKINGLA ;

OR,

CHRONICLE

THE KINGS OF NORWAY.

TRANSLATED

FROM THE ICELANDIC OF SNORRO STURLESON,

a ^relimmatg Bismtation,

BY

BAMUBL LAING, ESQ.

AUTHOR OF “a RESIBENCE IN NORWAY,” “A TOUR IN SWEDEN,”
“ NOTES OF A TRAVELLER,” ETC.

m THREE VOLUMES.

VOL. III.

LONDON :

PRINTED FOR

LONGMAN, BROWN, GREEN, AND ^ONGMANS,

PATERNOSTER-ROW.

1844.

London ;

Printed by A. Spottiswoode,
N ew- Street- Sq uare.

CONTENTS

OP

THE T H I E D VOLUME.

HEIMSKRINGrLA {continued).

PAGE

SAGA IX.

Saga of Harald Hardrada - - - - 1

SAGA X.

Saga of Olaf Kyrre - - - - - 105

SAGA XI.

Magnus Barefoot’s Saga - - - - - 1 1 5

SAGA XII.

Saga of Sigurd the Crusader, and his Brothers Eystein and
Olaf - - - - - - - 148

SAGA XIII.

Saga of Magnus the Blind and of Harald Gille - - 205

SAGA XIV.

Saga of Sigurd, Inge, and Eystein, the sons of Harald - 233

SAGA XV.

Saga of Hakon Herdabreid (Hakon the Broad-shouldered) - 274

SAGA XVI.

Magnus Erlingsson’s Saga ----- 300

Appendix ------- 343

Additional Notes - - - - - - 365

I

THE

HEIMSKRINGLA;

OR,

CHllONICLE OF THE KINGS OF NOEWAY.

IX.

SAGA OF HAEALD HAEDEADA.^^

Harald,. son of Sigurd Syr, brother of Olaf the Saint
by the same mother, was at the battle of Stiklestad,
and was fifteen years old when King Olaf the Saint
fell, as before related. Harald was wounded, and
escaped with other fugitives. Of this ThiodoE the
scald makes mention in the poem he composed about
King Harald, which he called “ SexstefiaF’ —

At Haugl the fire-sparks from his shield
Flew round the king’s head on the field.

As blow for blow, for Olaf’s sake.

His sv/ord and shield would give and take.

Bulgaria’s conqueror p I ween.

Had scarcely fifteen winters seen.

When from his murdered brother’s side
His unhelmed head he had to hide.”

Eognvald Brusesson led Harald from the battle, and
the night after the fray took him to a bonder who
dwelt in the forest far from other people. The pea¬
sant received Harald, and kept him concealed ; and
Harald was waited upon until he was quite cured of

* Harald Hardrada (the Stern) reigned from about 1046 to 1066.

f Haug is a farm near Stiklestad farm in Værdal, where the battle
was fought.

^ An allusion to Plarald’s exploits in the East with the Væringers.

VOL. III. B

/

SAGA IX.

Chapier

I.

Harald
escapes
from the
battle of
Stiklestad.

2

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX.

Chapter

II.

Harald’s
journey to
Constan¬
tinople.

his wounds. Then the bonder’s son attended him on
the way east over the ridge of the land, and they
went by all the forest paths they could, avoiding the
common road. The bonder’s son did not know who
it was he was attending ; and as they were riding to¬
gether between two uninhabited forests, Harald made
these verses : —

My wounds were bleeding as I rode ;

And down below the bonders strode.

Killing the wounded with the sword.

The followers of their rightful lord.

From wood to wood I crept along.

Unnoticed by the bonder-throng ;

Who knows,* I thought, a day may come
My name will yet be great at home.* ”

He went eastward over the ridge through Jemte-
land and Helsingialand, and came to Sweden, where
he found Kognvald Brusesson, and many others of
King Olaf’s men who had fled from the battle at
Stiklestad, and they remained there till winter was
over.

The spring after Harald and Kognvald got ships,
and went east in summer to Kussia to King Jarisleif,
and were with him all tlie following winter. So says
the scald Bolverk, in the poem he composed about
King Harald : —

The king’s sharp sword lies clean and bright,

Prepared in foreign lands to fight :

Our ravens croak to have their fill.

The wolf howls from the distant hill.

Our brave king is to Russia gone, —

Braver than he on earth there’s none:

His sharp sword will carve many a feast
To wolf and raven in the East.”

King Jarisleif gave Harald and Kognvald a kind
reception, and made Harald and Eilif the son of Earl
Kognvald chiefs over the land-defence"^ men of the
king. So says Thiodolf : —

* Landvarnar-madr konungs — the landwehr men of the king. The
landvær or landwehr force appears to have been very early an un¬
bodied military standing army in every country.

KINGS OF NOliWAY.

3

Where Eilif was^ one heart and hand
The two chiefs had in their command;

In wedge or line their battle order
Was ranged by both without disorder.

The eastern Vendland'^ men they drove
Into a corner; and they move
The Lesians j", although ill at ease.

To take the laws their conquerors please.”

Arnor, the earl’s scald, relates that Rognvald
Brusesson was for a long time land-defence man in
Russia, and fought many battles there : —

In Russia, though now grown old.

The battle-loving earl, the bold.

Of Gondult favoured, in the field
Raised in ten fights his battered shield.”

Harald remained several years in Russia, and tra¬
velled far and wide in the Eastern land. Then he
began his expedition out to Greece, and had a great
suite of men with him ; and on he went to Constanti¬
nople. So says Bolverk : —

Before the cold sea-curling blast
The cutter from the land flew past.

Her black yards swinging to and fro,

Her shield-hung gunwale dipping low.

The king saw glancing o’er the bow
Constantinople’s metal glow
From tower and roof, and painted sails
Gliding past towns and wooded vales.”

At that time the Greek empire was ruled by the em¬
press Zoe the Great, and with her Michael Catalactus.
iiow when Harald came to Constantinople he pre¬
sented himself to the empress, and went into her pay ;

* Vendland people, in its widest sense, appears to have been a name
comprehending all the Slavonic race, which then extended to the borders
of Holstein on the Trave at Lubeck. East Vendland was the country
beyond the Oder, or Poland; and West Vendland was Pomerania,
Mecklenburg, &c.

■j" Lesians^ refers to a people not known. Lazii, Lezilii, are similar
names in the^arly history of Poland.

f Gondul, one of the Valkyria, who selected the slain for Odin’s
hall.

B 2

SAGA IX.

Chapter

III.

Of Harald.

4

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX;.

Chapter

IV,

Of Harald
and G}'r-
ger casting
lots.

and immediately, in autumn, went on board tlie gal¬
leys manned with troops which went out to the Greek
sea. Harald had his own men along with him. Now
Harald had been but a short time in the army before
all the Yæringers^' flocked to him, and they all joined
together when there was a battle. It thus came to
pass that Harald was made chief of the Yæringers.
There was a chief over all the troops who was called
Gyrger, and who was a relation of the empress. Gyrger
and Harald went round among all the Greek islands,
and fought much against the corsairs.

It happened once that Gyrger and theYaeringers were
going through the country, and they resolved to take
their night quarters in a wood ; and as the Y æringers
came first to the ground, they chose the place which
was best for pitching their tents upon, which was the
highest ground; for it is the nature of the land there
to be soft when rain falls, and therefore it is bad to
choose a low situation for your tents. Now when
Gyrger, the chief of the army, came up, and saw where
the Yæringers had set up their tents, he told them to

* The Væringers were the body-guard of the emperors^ and were
composed mostly of Northmen. Gibbon speaks of them, chap. Iv.;
and refers to Boyer^ Du Cange^ and other authors who have written of
theVarangi, orVaragi, at Constantinople. Væringers, — the defenders, —
appears to have been the true name of this body-guard, taken from the
words Wehr, Vær, Ware, which belong to every branch of the great
Northern language in the meaning of active defence. The best proof
that this body-guard was composed principally of Northmen is, that
almost every year coins of the Greek emperors, Cuftish coins, and gold
chains and other ornaments, apparently of Eastern workmanship, are
found in Norway about the houses of bonders, being probably the
hidden treasures of their forefathers, brought with them from their ser¬
vice in Constantinople. The number of Greek and Arabic (Cuftish)
coins found in these hoards, with scarcely any admixture of Anglo-
Saxon or other Northern money, is very considerable. They are to be
seen in the museums of Christiania and Copenhagen. The time Avhen
Harald joined the Vœringers, according to Schöning, w^as about 1034,
when Zoe was empress. Her husband Ilomanus Argyrus died that year;
and after him was Michael Baphlago, who dying 1042 was succeeded
by Michael Calaphatcs, who was the husband of Zoe, — called Catalactus
by the saga men.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

5

remove, and pitch their tents elsewhere, saying he saga ix.
would himself pitch his tents on their ground. Harald
replies, “If ye come first to the night quarter, ye
take up your ground, and we must go pitch our tents
at some other place where we best can. Now do ye
so, in the same way, and find a place where ye will.

It is, I think, the privilege of us Yæringers here in the
dominions of the Greek emperor to be free, and inde¬
pendent of all but their own commanders, and bound
only to serve the emperor and empress.’’ They dis¬
puted long and hotly about this, and both sides armed
themselves, and were on the way to fight for it ; but
men of understanding came between and separated
them. They said it would be better to come to an
agreement about such questions, so that in future no
dispute could arise. It came thus to an arbitration
between them, at which the best and most sagacious
men should give their judgment in the case. At this
arbitration it was determined, with the consent of all
parties, that lots should be thrown into a box, and the
Greeks and V æringers should draw which was first to
ride, or to row, or to take place in a harbour, or to
choose tent ground ; and each side should be satisfied
with what the drawing of the lots gave them. Ac¬
cordingly the lots were made, and marked. Harald
said to Gyrger, “ Let me see what mark thou hast j)ut
upon thy lot, that we may not both mark our lots in
the same way.” He did so. Then Harald marked
his lot, and put it into the box along with the other.

The man who was to draw out the lots then took up
one of the lots between his fingers, held it up in the
air, and said, “ This lot shall be the first to ride, and
to row, and to take place in harbour and on the tent
field.” Harald seized his hand, snatched the die, and
threw it into the sea, and called out, “ That was our
lot ! ” Gyrger said, “ Why did you not let other people
see it? ” Harald replies, “ Look at the one remaining

B 3

6

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX.

Chavteu

V.

Ilarald’s
expedition
in the land
of the Sa¬
racens.

in the box, — there you see your own mark upon it.”
Accordingly the lot which was left behind was ex¬
amined, and all men saw that Gyrger’s mark was
upon it, and accordingly the judgment was given that
the Væringers had gained the first choice in all they
had been quarrelling about. There were many things
they quarrelled about, but the end always was that
Harald got his own way.

They went out all on a campaign in summer.
When the whole army was thus assembled Harald
kept his men out of the battle, or wherever he saw
the least danger, under pretext of saving his men;
but where he was alone Avith his own men only, he
fought so desperately that they must either come off
victorious or die. It thus happened often that Avhen
he commanded the army he gained victories, while
Gyrger could do nothing. The troops observed this,
and insisted they Avould be more successful if Harald
alone Avas chief of the Avhole army, and upbraided the
general Avith never effecting any thing, neither himself,
nor his people. Gyrger again said that the Væringers
Avould give him no assistance, and ordered Harald to
go Avith his men somewhere else, and he, Avith the
rest of his army, Avould Avin Avhat they could. Harald
accordingly left the army Avith the Yæringers and the
Latin men, and Gyrger on his side Avent off Avith the
Greek troops. Then it Avas seen Avhat each could do.
Harald always gained victories and booty ; but the
Greeks Avent home to Constantinople Avith their army,
all except a feAV brave men, Avho, to gain booty and
money, joined themselves to Harald, and took him
for their leader. He then Avent Avith his troops Avest-
Avard to Africa, Avhich the Y æringers call Saracen’s
land, Avhere he Avas strengthened Avith many men.
In the Saracen’s land he took eighty castles, some of
Avhich surrendered, and others Avere stormed. He
then Avent to Sicily. So says Thiodolf : —

KINGS or NORWAY.

7

The serpent’s bed of glowing gold saga ix.

He hates * — the generous king, the bold i
He who four score towers laid low,

Ta’en from the Saracenic foe.

Before upon Sicilian plains,

Shield joined to shield, the fight he gains,

The victory at Hilda’s gamef;

And now the heathens dread his name.”

So says also Illuge Bryndæla-scald : — ■

“ For Michael’s empire Harald fought.

And southern lands to Michael brought;

So Budle’s son his friendship showed
When he brought friends to his abode.”

Here it is said that Michael was king of the Greeks
at that time. Harald remained many years in Africa,
where he gathered great wealth in gold, jewels, and
all sorts of precious things ; and all the wealth he
gathered there which he did not need for his expenses,
he sent mth trusty men of his own north to Novogorod
to King Jarisleif ’s care and keeping. He gathered
together there extraordinary treasure, as is reasonable
to suppose ; for he had the plundering of the part of
the world richest in gold and valuable things, and he
had done such great deeds as with truth are related,
such as taking eighty strong“holds by his valour.

Now when Harald came to Sicily he plundered Chapter
there also, and sat doAvn with his army before a strong Battle in
and populous castle. He surrounded the castle; but
the walls were so thick there was no possibility of
breaking into it, and the people of the castle had
enough of provisions, and all that was necessary for

* The hater of the serpent’s bed is the figurative expression of the
scald for the generous man. The serpent’s bed was, in the Odin
mythology, gold ; and its hater is the man who parts with it as with a
thing he hates — the generous giver.

■j" Hilda’s game, the game of war.

t Atle, according to the Edda, invited his wife’s friends to him, and
killed them ; so Harald, according to the saga, put out the eyes of the
emperor Michael, with all the appearances of friendship. This seems to
be the meaning of the allusion of the scald to Budle’s son.

B 4

8

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX.

Chapter
VII.
Battle at
another
castle.

defence. Then Harald hit upon an expedient. He
made his bird-catchers catch the small birds which
had their nests within the castle, but flew into the
woods by day to get food for their young. He had
small splinters of tarred wood bound upon the backs
of the birds, smeared these over mth wax and sulphur,
and set fire to them. As soon as the birds were let
loose they all flew at once to the castle to their young,
and to their nests, which they had under the house
roofs that were covered with reeds or straw. The
fire from the birds seized upon the house roofs ; and
although each bird could only carry a small burden
of fire, yet all at once there v/as a mighty flame,
caused by so many birds carrying fire with them and
spreading it widely among the house roofs. Thus
one house after the other was set on fire, until the
castle itself was in flames. Then the people came out
of the castle and begged for mercy ; the same men who
for many days had set at defiance the Greek army and
its leader. Harald granted life and safety to all who
asked quarter, and made himself master of the place.

There was another castle before which Harald had
come with his army. This castle was both full of
people, and so strong that there was no hope of break¬
ing into it. The castle stood upon a flat hard plain.
Then Harald undertook to dig a passage from a place
where a stream ran in a bed so deep that it could
not be seen from the castle. They threw out all the
earth into the stream, to be carried away by the
water. At this work they laboured day and night,
and relieved each other in gangs ; while the rest
of the army went the whole day against the castle,
where the castle people shot through their loop-holes.
They shot at each other all day in this way, and at
night they slept on both sides. Now when Harald
perceived that his underground passage was so long
that it must be within the castle walls, he ordered his

KINGS OF NOKWAY.

9

people to arm themselves. It was towards daybreak
that they went into the passage. When they got to
the end of it they dug over their heads until they
came upon stones laid in lime, which was the floor of
a stone hall. They broke open the floor, and rose
into the hall. There sat many of the castle-men eating
and drinking, and not in the least expecting such un¬
invited wolves; for the Yæringers instantly attacked
them sword in hand, and killed some, and those who
could get away fled. The Væringers pursued them;
and some seized the castle gate, and opened it, so that
the whole body of the army got in. The people of the
castle fled; but many asked quarter from the troops,
which was granted to all who surrendered. In this
way Harald got possession of the place, and found an
immense booty in it.

They came to a third castle, the greatest and
strongest of them all, and also the richest in property
and fullest of people. Around this castle there were
great ditches, so that it evidently could not be taken
by the same device as the former ; and they lay a long
time before it without doing any thing. When the
castle-men saw this they became bolder, drew up their
array on the castle walls, threw open the castle gates,
and shouted to the Yæringers, urging them, and jeer¬
ing at them, and telling them to come into the castle,
and that they were no more fit for battle than so
many poultry. Harald told his men to make as if
they did not know what to do, or did not understand
what was said. “ For,’’ says he, “if we do make an
assault we can eifect nothing, as they can throw their
Aveapons under their feet among us ; and if we get
into the castle Avith a party of our people, they have
it in their power to shut them in, and shut out the
others ; for they have all the castle gates beset with
men. We shall therefore shoAV them the same scorn
they shoAv us, and let them see Ave do not fear them.

SAGA IX.

Chapter
VI 1 1.
Battle at a
third castle.

10

CrmONICLE OE THE

SAGA IX.

Chapter

IX.

Of Ulf and
Ilaldor.

Our men shall go out upon the plain nearest to the
castle ; taking care, however, to keep out of bow-shot.
All our men shall go unarmed, and be playing with
each other, so that the castle-men may see we do not
regard them or their array.” Thus it went on for
some days, without any thing being done.

Two Iceland men were then with Harald : the one
was Haldor, a son of the godar Snorro, who brought
this account to Iceland ; the other was Ulf Ospaksson,
a grandson of Osvifer Spake. Both were very strong
men, bold under arms, and Harald’s best friends ; and
both were in this play. Now when some days were
passed the castle people showed more courage, and
would go without weapons upon the castle wall, while
the castle gates were standing open. The Yæringers
observing this, went one day to their sports with the
sword under their cloaks, and the helmet under their
hats. After playing a while they observed that the
castle people were off their guard ; and instantly seizing
their weapons, they made a rush at the castle gates.
When the men of the castle saw this they went against
them armed completely, and a battle began in the
castle gate. The Yæringers had no shields, but wrap¬
ped their cloaks round their left arms. Some of them
were wounded, some killed, and all stood in great
danger. Now came Harald, with the men who had
remained in the camp, to the assistance of his people ;
and the castle-men had now got out upon the walls,
from which they shot and threw stones down upon
them ; so that there was a severe battle, and those
who were in the castle gates thought that help was
brought them slower than they could have wished.
AYhen Harald came to the castle gate his standard-
bearer fell, and Harald said to Haldor, “ Do thou take
up the banner now.” Haldor took up the banner,
and said foolishly, “ AVho will carry the banner before
thee, if thou followest it so timidly as thou hast done

KINGS OF NORWAY.

11

for a while But these were words more of auger
than of truth ; for Harald was one of the boldest of
men under arms. Then they pressed in, and had a
hard battle in the castle ; and the end was that Harald
gained the victory, and took the castle. Haldor was
much wounded in the face, and it gave him great
pain as long as he lived.

The fourth castle which Harald came to was the
greatest of all we have been speaking about. It was
so strong that there was no possibility of breaking
into it. They surrounded the castle, so that no sup¬
plies could get into it. When they had remained
here a short time Harald fell sick, and he betook him¬
self to his bed. He had his tent put up a little from
the camp, for he found quietness and rest out of the
clamour and clang of armed men. His men went
usually in companies to or from him to hear his orders ;
and the castle people observing there was something
new among the Yæringers, sent out spies to discover
what this might mean. When the spies came back to
the castle they had to tell of the illness of the com¬
mander of the Yæringers, and that no assault on that
account had been made on the castle. A while after
this Harald’ s strength began to fail, at which his men
were very melancholy and cast down ; all which was
news to the castle-men. At last Harald’ s sickness
increased so rapidly that his death was expected
• through all the army. Thereafter the Yæringers
went to the castle-men ; told them, in a parley, of the
death of their commander ; and begged of the priests
to grant him burial in the castle. When the castle
people heard this news, there were many among them
who ruled over cloisters or other great establishments
within the place, and who were very eager to get the
corpse for their church, knowing that upon that there
would follow very rich presents. A great many
priests, therefore, clothed themselves in all their robes,

SAGA IX.

Chapter

X.

Battle at
a fourth
castle.

12

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX.

Chapter

XI.

Of Harald.

and went out of the castle with cross, and shrine,
and relics, and formed a beautiful procession. The
Yæringers also made a great burial. The coffin
was borne high in the air, and over it was a tent of
costly linen, and before it were carried many banners.
Now when the corpse was brought within the castle
gate the Væringers set down the coffin right across
the entry, fixed a bar to keep the gates open, and
sounded to battle with all their trumpets, and drew
their swords. The whole army of the Yæringers,
fully armed, rushed from the camp to the assault of
the castle with shout and cry ; and the monks and
other priests Avho had gone to meet the corpse, and
had striven with each other who should be the first
to come out and take the offering at the burial, were
now striving much more who should first get away
from the Yæringers; for they killed before their feet
every one who was nearest, whether clerk or uncon¬
secrated. The Yæringers rummaged so well this
castle, that they killed all the men, pillaged every
thing, and made an enormous booty.

Harald was many years in these campaigns, both
in Saracen land and in Sicily. Then he came back to
Constantinople with his troops, and staid there but a
little time before he began his expedition to Jerusalem.
There he left the pay he had received from the Greek
emperor, and all theYæringers who accompanied him
did the same. It is said that on all these expeditions
Harald had fought eighteen regular battles. So says
Thiodolf: —

Harald the Stern ne’er allowed
Peace to his foemen, false and proud :

In eighteen battleS;, fought and won,

The valour of the Norseman shone.

The king, before his home return.

Oft dyed the bald head of the erne
With bloody specks, and o’er the waste
The sharp-claw’d wolf his footsteps traced.”

KINGS OF NOllWAY.

13

Harald went with his men to the land of Jerusalem,
and then up to the city of Jerusalem, and wheresoever
he came in the land all the towns and strong-holds
were given up to him. So says the scald Stuff, who
had heard the king himself relate these tidings : —

He went, the warrior bold and brave,

Jerusalem, the holy grave.

And the interior of the land.

To bring under the Greeks’ command;

And by the terror of his name
Under his power the country came.

Nor needed wasting fire and sword
To yield obedience to his word.”

Here it is told that this land came without fire and
sword under Harald’s command. He then went out
to Jordan, and bathed therein, according to the custom
of other pilgrims. Harald gave great gifts to our
Lord’s grave, to the Holy Cross, and other holy relics
in the land of Jerusalem. He also cleared the whole
road all the way out to Jordan, by killing the robbers
and other disturbers of the peace. So says the scald
Stuff : —

The Agder king cleared far and wide
Jordan’s fair banks on either side;

The robber-bands before him fled,

And his great name was widely spread.

The wicked people of the land
W ere punished here by his dread hand,

And they hereafter will not miss

Much worse from Jesus Christ than this.”

Thereafter he went back to Constantinople. When
Harald returned to Constantinople from Jerusalem he
longed to return to the North to his native land; and
when he heard that Magnus Olafsson, his brother’s
son, had become king both of Norway and Denmark,
he gave up his command in the Greek service. And
when the empress Zoe heard of this she became angry,
and raised an accusation against Harald, that he had
misapplied the property of the Greek emperor which
he had received in the campaigns in which he was

SAGA TX.

Chapteh

xir.

Harald ’s
expedition
to Pales¬
tine.

Chapter
XIIL
Harald put
in prison.

14

CHRONICLE OF THE

SACxA IX.

Chapter
XIV.
King
Olaf’s mi¬
racle, and
putting out
the eyes of
the Greek
emperor.

commander of the army. There was a young and
beautiful girl called Maria, a brother’s daughter of
the empress Zoe, and Harald had paid his addresses
to her; but the empress had given him a refusal.
The Væringers, who were then in pay in Constanti¬
nople, have told here in the North that there went a
report among well-informed people that the empress
Zoe herself wanted Harald for her husband, and that
she chiefly blamed Harald for his determination to
leave Constantinople, although another reason was
given out to the public. Constantinus Monomachus ^
was at that time emperor of the Greeks, and ruled
along with Zoe. On this account the Greek em¬
peror had Harald made prisoner, and carried to
prison.

When Harald drew near to the prison King Olaf
the Saint stood before him, and said he would assist
him. On that spot of the street a Miapel has since
been built, and consecrated to Saint Olaf, and which
chapel has stood there ever since. The prison was so
constructed that there was a high tower open above,
but a door below to go into it from the street.
Through it Harald was thrust in, along with Haldor
and Ulf. Next night a lady of distinction with two
servants came, by the help of ladders, to the top of
the tower, let down a rope into the prison, and hauled
them up. Saint Olaf had formerly cured this lady of
a sickness, and he had appeared to her in a vision,
and told her to deliver his brother. Harald went
immediately to the Yæringers, who all rose from their
seats when he came in, and received him with joy.
The men armed themselves forthwith, and went to
where the emperor slept. They took the emperor

* Constantine X. Monomachus appears to have married the empress
Zoe about the year 1042, to have survived her, and to have died 1054.
No mention is made by historians of this emperor having been blinded
by his body-guards, as stated in the next chapter.

KINGS OK NORWAY.

15

prisoner, and put out both the eyes of him. So says
Thorarin Skeggesson in his poem : —

“ Of glowing gold that decks the hand
The king got plenty in this land ;

But its great emperor in the strife
Was made stone-blind for all his life.”

So says Thiodolf the scald also : —

He who the hungry wolf’s wild yell
Quiets with prey_, the stern, the fell.

Midst the uproar of shriek and shout
Stung the Greek emperor’s eyes both out:

The Norse king’s mark will not adorn.

The Norse king’s mark gives cause to mourn ;

His mark the Eastern king must bear.

Groping his sightless way in fear.”

In these two songs, and many others, it is told that
Harald himself blinded the Greek emperor ; and they
would surely have named some duke, count, or other
great man, if they had not known this to be the true
account; and King Harald himself, and other men
who were with him, spread this account.

The same night King Harald and his men went to
the house where Maria slept, and carried her away
by force. Then they went down to where the galleys
of the Yæringnrs lay, took two of them, and rowed
out into Sævids sound. When they came to the
place where the iron chain is drawn across the sound,
Harald told his men to stretch out at their oars in
both galleys ; but the men who were not rowing to
run all to the stern of the galley, each with his lug¬
gage in his hand. The galleys thus ran up, and lay
on the iron chain. As soon as they stood fast on it,
and would advance no farther, Harald ordered all the
men to run forward into the bow. Then the galley
in which Harald was balanced forwards, and swang
down over the chain ; but the other, which remained

* Sævids sound — the Bosphorus; where the Black Sea widens, as
the name implies, from a narrow strait.

SAGA IX.

Chapter

XV.

Harald’s

journey

from

Constan¬

tinople.

16

CHEONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX.

Chapter
XVI.
Of King
Harald.

fast athwart the chain, split in two, by which many
men were lost ; but some were taken up out of the
sound. Thus Harald escaped out of Constantinople,
and sailed thence into the Black Sea ; but before he
left the land he put the lady ashore, and sent her
back with a good escort to Constantinople, and bade
her tell her relation, the empress Zoe, how little power
she had over Harald, and how little the empress could
have hindered him from taking the lady. Harald
then sailed northwards in the Ellepallta^, and then all
round the Eastern empire. f On this voyage Harald
composed sixteen songs for amusement, and all ending
with the same words. This is one of them : —

Past Sicily’s wide plains we flew,

A dauntless, never-wearied crew ;

Our viking steed rushed through the sea,

As viking-like fast, fast sailed we.

Never, I think, along this shore
Did Norseman ever sail before ;

Yet to the Russian queen, I fear.

My gold-adorned, I am not dear.”

With this he meant Ellisof, daughter of King
Jarisleif in Novogorod.

When Harald came to Kovogorod, King Jarisleif
received him in the most friendly way, and he re¬
mained there all mnter. Then he took into his own
keeping all the gold, and the many kinds of precious
things which he had sent there from Constantinople,
and which together made up so vast a treasure, that
no man in the northern lands ever saw the like of it in
one man’s possession. Harald had been three times
in the Polota-svarf J while he was in Constantinople.

* Ellepallta appears a corruption of the Hellespont; but must here
mean the sea of Asoph, if Harald sailed north through the Black Sea.

t This East kingdom, or empire, may have been the country about
Kiev, then an independent sovereignty.

:{: Polota is supposed to be a corruption of Palatium, and polota-svarf
is whatever is taken from the palaces. The custom is descriptive of the
state of the emperors at Constantinople and their guards.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

17

It is the custom, namely, there, that every time one
of the Greek emperors dies, the Yæringers are al¬
lowed polota-svarf ; that is, they may go through all
the emperor’s palaces where his treasures are, and
each may take and keep what he can lay hold of while
he is going through them.

This winter King Jarisleif gave Harald his daugh¬
ter Elizabeth in marriage. She is called by the North¬
men Ellisof. This is related by Stuff the Blind,
thus : —

Agder’s chief now got the queen
Who long his secret love had been.

■ Of gold, no doubt, a mighty store
The princess to her husband bore.”

In spring he began his journey from Novogorod,
and came to Aideigoburg, where he took shipping,
and sailed from the East in summer. He turned first
to Sweden, and came to Sigtuna. So says Y algard of
Yalli : —

The fairest cargo ship e’er bore,

From Russia’s distant eastern shore
The gallant Harald homeward brings —

Gold, and a fame that scald still sings.

The ship through dashing foam he steers.

Through the sea-rain to Sweden veers,

And at Sigtuna’s grassy shores
His gallant vessel safely moors.”

Harald found there before him Swend Ulfsson, who
the autumn before had fied from King Magnus at
Helgeness ; and when they met they were very
friendly on both sides. The Swedish king, Olaf the
Swede, was brother of the mother of Ellisof, Harald’s
wife ; and Astrid, the mother of Sivend, Avas King
Olaf ’s sister. Harald and SAvend entered into friend¬
ship Avith each other, and confirmed it by oath. All
the SAvedes Avere friendly to Swend, because he be¬
longed to the greatest family in the country ; and
thus all the SAvedes Avere Harald’ s friends and helpers

VOL. HI. c

SAGA IX.

Chatter
XVII.
King Ha-
r aid’s mar¬
riage.

Chatter
XVllI.
The league
between
King 11a-
rald and
Swend
Ulfsson.

18

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX. also, for many great men were connected with him
by relationship. So says Thiodolf : —

Cross the East sea the vessel flew, —

Her oak-keel a white furrow drew
From Russia’s coast to Swedish land.

Where Harald can great help command.

The heavy vessel’s leeward side
Was hid beneath the rushing tide;

While the broad sail and gold-tipped mast
Swung to and fro in the hard blast.”

Chapter Then Harald and Swend fitted out ships, and ga-
thered together a great force ; and when the troops
Haraid’s were ready they sailed from the East towards Den-
mark. So says Valgard : —

Brave Yngve! to the land decreed
To thee by fate, with tempest speed
The winds fly with thee o’er the sea —

To thy own udal land with thee.

As past the Scanian plains they fly.

The gay ships glance ’twixt sea and sky.

And Scanian brides look out, and fear
Some ill to those they hold most dear.”

They landed first in Sealand with their men, and
herried* and burned in the land far and wide. Then
they went to Fyen, where they also landed and
wasted. So says Yalgard : —

Harald! thou hast the isle laid waste.

The Sealand men away hast chased.

And the wild wolf by daylight roams
Through their deserted silent homes.

Fiona too could not withstand
The fury of thy wasting hand.

Helms burst, shields broke, — Fiona’s bounds
Were filled with death’s terrific sounds.

Red flashing in the southern sky.

The clear flame sweeping broad and high.

From fair Roskilde’s lofty towers,

On lowly huts its fire-rain pours;

* Heriodo. The old North-country word, to herry,” — to waste or
plunder out, — revived by Sir Walter Scott, is derived from the Icelandic
Heria, as many of the old words, and still more of the phrases and con¬
struction of the old Scotch, are.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

19

And shows the housemates’ silent train
In terror scouring o’er the plain,

Seeking the forest’s deepest glen.

To house with wolves, and ’scape from men.

Few were they of escape to tell.

For, sorrow- worn, the people fell:

The only captives from the fray
Were lovely maidens led away.

And in wild terror to the strand,

Down to the ships, the linked band
Of fair-haired girls is roughly driven,

Their soft skins by the irons riven.”

King Magnus Olafsson sailed north to Norway
after the battle at Helganess. There he hears the
news that Harald Sigurdsson, his relation, was come
to Sweden ; and moreover that Swend Ulfsson and
Harald had entered into a friendly bond with each
other, and gathered together a great force, intending
first to subdue Denmark, and then Norway. King
Magnus then ordered a general levy over all Norway,
and he soon collected a great army. He hears then
that Harald and Swend were come to Denmark, and
were burning and laying waste the land, and that the
country people were every where submitting to them.
It was also told that King Harald was stronger and
stouter than other men, and so wise withal that
nothing was impossible to him, and he had always the
victory when he fought a battle ; and he was also so
rich in gold that no man could compare with him in
wealth. Thiodolf speaks thus of it : —

Norsemen, who stand the sword of foe
Like forest-stems, unmoved by blow !

My hopes are fled, no peace is near, —

People fly here and there in fear.

On either side of Sealand’s coast
A fleet appears — a white- winged host:

Magnus from Norway takes his course,

Harald from Sweden leads his force.”

Those of Harald’s men who were in his counsel
said that it would be a great misfortune if relations
like Harald and Magnus should fight, and throw a

c 2

SAGA IX,

Chapter

XX.

King

Magnus’s

levy.

Chapter
XXL
Treaty
between
Harald and
Magnus.

20

CIIIIONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX.

Chapter

XXII.

T reaty
between
Harald and
Swend
broken.

death-spear against each other; and therefore many
offered to attempt bringing about some agreement
between them, and the kings, by their persuasion,
agreed to it. Thereupon some men were sent off in a
light boat, in which they sailed south in all haste
to Denmark, and got some Danish men, who were
proven friends of King Magnus, to propose this mat¬
ter to Harald. This affair was conducted very secretly.
Now when Harald heard that his relation King Mag¬
nus would offer him a league and partition, so that
Harald should have half of Norway with King Mag¬
nus, and that they should divide all their moveable
property into two equal parts, he accepted the pro¬
posal, and the people went back to King Magnus with
this answer.

A little after this it happened that Harald and
Swend one evening were sitting at table drinldng and
talking together, and Swend asked Harald what
valuable piece of all his property he esteemed the
most.

He answered, it was his banner Land-wmster.*

Swend asked what was there remarkable about it,
that he valued it so highly.

Harald replied, it was a common saying that he
must gain the victory before whom that banner is
borne, and it had turned out so ever since he had
owned it.

Swend replies, I will begin to believe there is
such virtue in the banner when thou hast held three
battles with thy relation Magnus, and hast gained
them all.”

Then answered Harald with an angry voice, “ I
know my relationship to King Magnus, without thy
reminding me of it ; and although we are now going
in arms against him, our meeting may be of a better
sort.”

* Landcyda — land-destroyer.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

21

Swend changed colour, and said, There are people, ix.
Harald, who say that thou hast done as much before
as only to hold that part of an agreement which ap¬
pears to suit thy own interest best.’’

Harald answers, “ It becomes thee ill to say that I
have not stood by an agreement, when I know what
King Magnus could tell of thy proceedings with
him.”

Thereupon each went his own way. At night,
when Harald went to sleep within the bulwarks of his
vessel, he said to his footboy, “I will not sleep in
my bed to-night, for I suspect there may be treachery
abroad. I observed this evening that my friend
Swend was very angry at my free discourse. Thou
shalt keep watch, therefore, in case any thing happen
in the night.” Harald then went away to sleep some¬
where else, and laid a billet of wood in his place. At
midnight a boat rowed alongside to the ship’s bul¬
wark; a man went on board, lifted up the cloth of
the tent over the bulwarks, went up, and struck in
Harald’s bed with a great axe, so that it stood fast in
the lump of wood. The man instantly ran back to
his boat again, and rowed away in the dark night, for
the moon was set ; but the axe remained sticking in
the piece of wood as an evidence. Thereupon Harald
waked his men, and let them know the treachery
intended. “We can now see sufficiently,” said he,

“ that we could never match Swend, if he practises
such deliberate treachery against us ; so it will be
best for us to get away from this place while we
can. Let us cast loose our vessel, and row away as
quickly as possible.” They did so, and rowed during
the night northwards along the land ; and then pro¬
ceeded night and day until they came to King Mag¬
nus, where he lay with his army. Harald went to
his relation Magnus, and there was a joyful meeting
betwixt them. So says Thiodolf : —

c 3

22

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX,

CHAfTEll

XXIII.
King Mag¬
nus gives
Harald half
of Norway.

The far-known king the order gave^

In silence o’er the swelling wave,

With noiseless oars, his vessels gay
From Denmark west to row away;

And Olaf ’s son, with justice rare.

Offers with him the realm to share.

People, no doubt, rejoiced to find
The kings had met in peaceful mind.”

Afterwards the two relatives conversed with each
other, and all was settled by peaceful agreement.

King Magnus lay at the shore, and had set up tents
upon the land. There he invited his relation King
Harald to be his guest at table ; and Harald went to
the entertainment with sixty of his men, and was
feasted excellently. Towards the end of the day
King Magnus went into the tent where Harald sat,
and with him went men carrying parcels consisting of
clothes and arms. Then the king went to the man
who sat lowest, and gave him a good sword, to the
next a shield, to the next a kirtle, and so on, — clothes,
or weapons, or gold ; to all he gave one or the other
valuable gift, and the more costly to the more distin¬
guished men among them. Then he placed himself
before his relation Harald, holding two sticks in his
hand) and said, Which of these two sticks wilt thou
have, rny friend ?

Harald replies, The one nearest me.’^

“ Then,’’ said King Magnus, “with this stick I give
thee half of the Norwegian power, with all the scatt
and duties, and all the domains thereunto belonninsr,
with the condition that every where thou shalt be as
lawful king in Norway as I am myself ; but when we
are both together in one place, I shall be the first man
in seat, service, and salutation ; and if there be three
of us together of equal dignity, that I shall sit in the
middle, and shall have the royal tent-ground, and the
royal landing-place. Thou shalt strengthen and ad¬
vance our kingdom, in return for making thee tliat

KINGS OK NORWAY.

23

man in Norway whom we never expected any man
should be so long as our head was above ground.’’

Then Harald stood up, and thanked him for the
high title and dignity. Thereupon they both sat
down, and were very merry together. The same
evening Harald and his men returned to their ships.

The following morning King Magnus ordered the
trumpets to sound to a General Thing of the people ;
and when it was seated, he made known to the whole
army the gift he had given to his relation Harald.
Thorer of Steig gave Harald the title of king there at
the Thing ; and the same day King Harald invited
King Magnus to table with him, and he went with
sixty men to King Harald’ s land-tent, where he had
prepared a feast. The two kings sat together on a
high seat, and the feast was splendid ; every thing
went on with magnificence, and the kings were
merry and glad. Towards the close of the day King
Harald ordered many caskets to be brought into the
tent, and in like manner people bore in weapons,
clothes, and other sorts of valuables ; and all these
King Harald divided among King Magnus’s men who
were at the feast. Then he had the caskets opened,
and said to King Magnus, “Yesterday you gave us a
large kingdom, which your hand won from your and
our enemies, and took us in partnership with you,
which was well done ; and this has cost you much.
Now we on our side have been in foreign parts, and
oft in peril of life, to gather together the gold which
you here see. Now, King Magnus, I will divide this
with you. We shall both own this moveable pro¬
perty, and each have his equal share of it, as each has
his equal half share of Norway. I know that our
dispositions are different, as thou art more liberal
than I am ; therefore let us divide this property
equally between us, so that each may have his share
free to do with as he will.” Then Harald had a large

c 4

SAGA IX.

Chaptek.
XXIV.
Harald
gives King
Magnus the
half of his
treasures.

24

CHliONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX. ox-hide spread out, and turned the gold out of the
caskets upon it. Then scales and weights were taken,
and the gold separated, and divided by weight into
equal parts ; and all people wondered exceedingly that
so much gold should have come together in one place
in the northern countries. But it was , understood
that it was the Greek emperor’s property and wealth ;
for, as all people say, there are whole houses there
full of red gold. The kings were now very merry.
Then there appeared an ingot among the rest as big
as a man’s hand. Harald took it in his hands, and
said, “ Where is the gold, friend Magnus, that thou
canst show against this piece ? ”

King Magnus replied, “ So many disturbances and
levies have been in the country, that almost all the
gold and silver I could lay up is gone. I have
no more gold in my possession than this ring.” And
he took the ring off his hand, and gave it to Harald.

Harald looked at it, and said, “ That is but little
gold, friend, for the king who owns two kingdoms ;
and yet some may doubt whether thou art rightful
owner of even this ring.”

Then King Magnus replied, after a little reflection,
“If I be not rightful owner of this ring, then I know
not what I have got any right to ; for my father King
Olaf the Saint gave me this ring at our last parting.”

Then said King Harald, laughing, “ It is true. King
Magnus, what thou sayest. Thy father gave thee this
ring, but he took the ring from my father for some
trifling cause ; and in truth it was not a good time
for small kings in Norway when thy father was in
full power.”

King Harald gave Thorer of Steig at that feast a
bowl of mountain birch, that was encircled with a
silver ring and had a silver handle, both which parts
were gilt; and the bowl was filled with money of
pure silver. With that came also two gold rings,

KINGS OF NOKWAY.

25

wliicli together stood for a mark. He gave him also
his cloak of dark purple lined with white skins within,
and promised him besides his friendship and great
dignity. Thorgils Snorresson, an intelligent man,
says he has seen an altar-cloth that was made of this
cloak ; and Gudrid, a daughter of Guttorm the son of
Thorer of Steig, said, according to Thorgifs account,
that she had seen this bowl in her father Guttorm’s
possession. Bolverk also tells of these matters: —

Thou, generous king, I have been told,

For the green land hast given gold ;

And Magnus got a mighty treasure.

That thou one half might’st rule at pleasure.

The people gained a blessed peace.

Which Twixt the kings did never cease;

While Swend, disturbed with war’s alarms,

Had his folk always under arms.”

The kings Magnus and Harald both ruled in Nor¬
way the winter after their agreement, and each had
his court. In winter they went around the Upland
country in guest-quarters ; and sometimes they were
both together, sometimes each was for himself. They
went all the way north to Drontheim, to the town of
Nidaros. King Magnus had taken special care of the
holy remains of King Olaf after he came to the coun¬
try; had the hair and nails clipped every twelve-
month, and kept himself the keys that opened the
shrine. Many miracles were worked by King Olaf ’s
holy remains. It was not long before there was a
breach in the good understanding between the two
kings, as many were so mischievous as to promote
discord between them.

Swend Ulfsson remained behind in the harbour
after Harald had gone away, and inquired about his
proceedings. When he heard at last of Magnus and
Harald having agreed and joined their forces, he steered
with his forces eastward along Scania, and remained
there until towards winter, when he heard that King

SAGA IX.

Chapter
XXV.
Of King
Magnus.

Chapter
XXVI.
Of Swend
Ulfsson.

26

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX.

ChAI’TER

XXVII.
Of the levy
of the two
kings.

Magnus and King Harald had gone northwards to
Norway. Then Swend, with his troops, came south
to Denmark, and took all the royal income that
winter.

Towards spring King Magnus and his relation King
Harald ordered a levy in Norway. It happened once
that the kings lay all night in the same harbour, and
next day, King Harald being first ready, made sail.
Towards evening he brought up in the harbour in
which Magnus and his retinue had intended to pass
the night. Harald laid his vessel in the royal ground,
and there set up his tents. King Magnus got under
sail later in the day, and came into the harbour just
as King Harald had done pitching his tents. They
saw then that King Harald had taken up the king’s
ground, and intended to lie there. After King Mag¬
nus had ordered the sails to be taken in, he said.
The men will now get ready along both sides of the
vessel to lay out their oars, and some will open the
hatches and bring up the arms and arm themselves ;
for if they will not make way for us, we will fight
them.’^ Now when King Harald sees that King
Magnus will give him battle, he says to his men.
Cut our land-fastenings, and back the ship out of
the ground, for friend Magnus is in a passion.” They
did so, and laid the vessel out of the ground, and
King Magnus laid his vessel in it. When they were
now ready on both sides with their business. King
Harald went with a few men on board of Kino; Mas;-
nus’s ship. King Magnus received him in a friendly
way, and bade him welcome. King Harald answered,
“ I thought we were come among friends ; but just
now I was in doubt if ye would have it so. But it is
a truth that childhood is hasty, and I will only con¬
sider it as a childish freak.” Then said King Magnus,
“ It is no childish whim, but a trait of my family,
that I never forget what I have given, or what I have

KINGS OF NORWAY.

27

not given. If this trifle had been settled against my
will, there would soon have followed some other dis¬
cord like it. In all particulars I will hold the agree¬
ment between us ; but in the same way we will have
all that belongs to us by that right.” King Harald
coolly replied, that it is an old custom for the wisest
to give way; and returned to his ship. From such
circumstances it was found difficult to preserve good
understanding between the kings. King Magnuses
men said he was in the right ; but others, less wise,
thought there was some slight put upon Harald in
the business. King Harald’s men, besides, insisted
that the agreement was only that King Magnus should
have the preference of the harbour-ground when they
arrived together, but that King Harald was not bound
to draw out of his place when he came first. They
observed, also, that King Harald had conducted himself
well and wisely in the matter. Those who viewed
the business in the worst light insisted that King
Magnus wanted to break the agreement, and that he
had done King Harald injustice, and put an affront
on him. Such disputes were talked over so long
among foolish people, that the spirit of disagreeing
aflected the kings themselves. Many other things
also occurred, in which the kings appeared determined
to have each his own way ; but of these little will be
set down here.

The kings Magnus and Harald sailed with their
fleet south to Denmark ; and when Swend heard of
their approach, he fled away east to Scania. Magnus
and Harald remained in Denmark late in summer,
and subdued the whole country. In autumn they
were in Jutland. One night, as King Magnus lay in
his bed, it appeared to him in a dream that he was in
the same place as his father Saint Olaf, and that he
spoke to him thus : “ Wilt thou choose, my son, to
follow me, or to become a mighty king, and have long

SAGA IX.

Chapter
XXVJII.
King
Magnus
the Good’s
death.

28

CHRONICLE or THE

SAGA IX.

CaAPTEa

XXIX.

King

Magnus’s

funeral.

life ; but to commit a crime which thou wilt never be
able to expiate?” He thought he made the answer,
Do thou, father, choose for me.” Then the king
thought the answer was, “ Thou shalt follow me.”
Kin^ Mamus told his men this dream. Soon after
he fell sick, and lay at a place called Sudathorp.
When he was near his death he sent his brother
Thorer with tokens to Swend Ulfsson, Avith the re¬
quest to give Thorer the aid he might require. In
this message King Magnus also gave the Danish do¬
minions to Swend after his death; and said it was just
that Harald should rule over Norway, and Swend
over Denmark. Then King Magnus the Good died,
and great was the sorrow of all the people at his
death. So says Odd Kikinascald : —

The tears o’er good King Magnus’ bier^

The people’s tears^ were all sincere:

Even they to whom he riches gave
Carried him heavily to the grave.

All hearts were struck at the king’s end ;

His house- thralls wept as for a friend ;

His court-men oft alone would muse.

As pondering o’er un thought -of news.”

After this event King Harald held a Thing of his
men-at-arms, and told them his intention to go with
the army to Viburg^ Thing, and make himself be pro¬
claimed king over the whole Danish dominions, to
which, he said, he had hereditary right after his relation
Magnus, as well as to Norway. He therefore asked
his men for their aid, and said he thought the Norway
man should show himself always superior to the Dane.
Then Einar Tambarskelver replies, that he considered
it a greater duty to bring his foster- son King Magnus’s
corpse to the grave, and lay it beside his father King
Olaf’s north in Drontheim town, than to be fighting

* Viburg, a small town in North Jutland ; the Things at which place
appear to have had some claim, like the Ore Thing at Drontheim, to
confer the sovereign power in Denmark.

KINGS OE NOKWAY.

29

abroad, and taking another king’s dominions and pro¬
perty. He ended his speech with saying that he would
rather follow King Magnus dead than any other king
alive. Thereupon he had the body adorned in the
most careful way, so that the most magnificent pre¬
parations were made in the king’s ship. Then all the
Drontheim people and all the Northmen made them¬
selves ready to return home with the king’s body, and
so the army was broken up. King Harald saw then
that it was better for him to return to Norway to
secure that kingdom first, and to assemble men anew ;
and so King Harald returned to Norway with all his
army. As soon as he came to Norway he held a
Thing with the people of the country, and had him¬
self proclaimed king every where. He proceeded thus
from the East through Yiken, and in every district in
Norway he was named king. Einar Tambarsk elver,
and with him all the Drontheim troops, went with
King Magnus’s body, and transported it to the town
of Nidaros, where it was buried in Saint Clement’s
church, where also was the shrine of King Olaf the
Saint. King Magnus was of the middle size, of long
and clear-complexioned countenance, and light hair,
spoke well and hastily, was brisk in his actions, and
extremely generous. He was a great warrior, and
remarkably bold in arms. He was the most popular
of kings, prized even by enemies as well as friends.

Swend Ulfsson remained that autumn in Scania,
and was making ready to travel eastward to Sweden,
with the intention of renouncing the title of king
he had assumed in Denmark ; but just as he was
mounting his horse, some men came riding to him
with the first news that King Magnus was dead, and
all the Northmen had left Denmark. Swend answered
in haste, “ I call God to witness that I shall never
again hy from the Danish dominions as long as I live.”
Then he got on his horse, and rode south into Scania,

SAGA IX.

Chapter
XXX.
Of Swend
Ulfsson.

30

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX.

Chapter

xxxr.

Of King
Harald Si-
gurdsson.

where immediately many people crowded to him.
That winter he brought under his poAver all the
Danish dominions, and all the Danes took him for
their king. Thorer, King Magnus’s brother, came to
SAvend in autumn with the message of King Magnus,
as before related, and Avas well received ; and Thorer
remained long with Swend, and Avas Avell taken
care of.

King Harald Sigurdsson took the royal power over
all KorAvay after the death of King Magnus Olafsson;
and when he had reigned OA^er NorAvay one Avinter,
and spring Avas come, he ordered a levy through all
the land of one half of all men and ships, and Avent
south to Jutland. He berried and burned all summer
Avide around in the land, and came into Godnar fiord
Avhere King Harald made these verses : —

While wives of husbands fondly dream,

Here let us anchor in the stream.

In Godnar fiord ; we’ll safely moor
Our sea-homes, and sleep quite secure.”

Then he spoke to Thiodolf the scald, and asked
him to add to it Avhat it Avanted ; and he sang, —

In the next summer, I foresee,

Our anchorage in the South will be;

To hold our sea-homes on the ground.

More cold-tongued anchors will be found.”

To this Bolverk alludes in his song also, that Harald
Avent to Denmark the summer after King Magnus’s
death. Bolverk sings thus : —

Next summer thou the levy raised.

And seawards all the people gazed.

Where thy sea-steeds in sunshine glancing
Over the waves were gaily prancing ;

AVhile the deep ships that plunder bore
Seemed black specks from the distant shore.

The Danes, from hanks or hillocks green.

Looked with dismay upon the scene.”

^ Godnar fiord is supposed to be the present Randers fiord, in North
Jutland, into which a river runs called Gudin-aa, or Gudnar-aa.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

31

Then they burned the house of Thorkill Geysu,
who was a great lord, and his daughters they carried
off bound to their ships. They had made a great
mockery the winter before of King Harald’s coming
with war-ships against Denmark ; and they cut their
cheese into the shape of anchors, and said such anchors
might hold all the ships of the Norway king. Then
this was composed : —

The island-girlsj we were told_,

Made anchors all our fleet to hold:

Their Danish jest cut out in cheese
Did not our stern king’s fancy please.

Now many a maiden fair^ may be_,

Sees iron anchors splash the sea.

Who will not wake a maid next morn
To laugh at Norway’s ships in scorn.”

It is said that a spy who had seen the fleet of King
Harald said to Thorkill Geysu’s daughters, “Ye said,
Geysu’s daughters, that King Harald dared not come
to Denmark.” Dotta, Thorkill’s daughter, replied,
“ That was yesterday.” Thorkill had to ransom his
daughters with a great sum. So says Granc : —

The gold-adorned girl’s eye

Through Hornskof wood was never dry,

As down towards the sandy shore
The men their lovely prizes bore.

The Norway leader kept at bay
The foe who would contest the way.

And Dotta’s father had to bring
Treasure to satisfy the king.”

King Harald plundered in Denmark all that sum¬
mer, and made immense booty ; but he had not any
footing in the land that summer in Denmark. He
went to Norway again in autumn, and remained there
all winter.

The winter after King Magnus the Good died. King
Harald took Thord, daughter of Thorberg Arneson,
and they had two sons ; the oldest called Magnus,
and the other Olaf. King Harald and Queen Ellisof

SAGA IX.

Chapter

xxxir.

Of Geysu’s
daughters.

Chapter
XXXllI.
Of the
marriages
and chil¬
dren of

32

CHEONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX.

King Ha-
rald the
Stern.

Chapter
XXXIV.
Of the ar¬
maments
of King
Svvend
Ulfsson
and King
Harald.

had two daughters ; the one Maria, the other Ingigerd.
The spring after the foray which has just been re¬
lated King Harald ordered the people out, and went
with them to Denmark, and berried there, and did
so summer after summer thereafter. So says Stuff
the Scald: —

“ Falster lay wasfce^ as people tell_, —

The raven in other isles fared well.

The Danes were every where in fear.

For the dread foray every year.”

King Swend ruled over all the Danish dominions
after King Magnus’s death. He sat quiet all the
winter ; but in summer he lay out in his ships with
all his people, and it was said he would go north to
Norway with the Danish army, and make not less
havoc there than King Harald had made in Denmark.
King Swend proposed to King Harald in winter to
meet him the following summer at the Gotha river,
and fight until in the battle-field their differences
were ended, or they were settled peacefully. They
made ready on both sides all winter with their ships,
and called out in summer one half of all the fighting
men. The same summer came Thorleik the Fair out
of Iceland, and composed a poem about King Swend
Ulfsson. He heard, when he arrived in Norway, that
King Harald had sailed south to the Gotha river
against King Swend. Then Thorleik sang this : —

“ The wily Swend, I think, will meet
These inland Norsemen fleet to fleet :

The arrow-storm, and heaving sea.

His vantage-fight and field will be.

God only knows the end of strife,

Or which shall have his land and life:

This strife must come to such an end.

For terms will never bind King Swend.”

He also sang these verses : —

“ Harald, whose red shield oft has shone
O’er berried coasts, and fields hard won.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

Rides in hot wrath, and eager speeds
O’er the blue waves his ocean-steeds.

Swend, who in blood his arrows stains.

Brings o’er the ocean’s heaving plains
His gold-beaked ships, which come in view
Out from the Sound with many a hue.”

King Harald came with his forces to the appointed
meeting-place ; but there he heard that King Swend
was lying with his fleet at the south side of Sealand.
Then King Harald divided his forces ; let the greater
part of the bonder-troops return home ; and took with
him his court-men, his lendermen, the best men-at-
arms, and all the bonder-troops who lived nearest to
the Danish land. They sailed over to Jutland to the
south of Yendilskaga*, and so south to Thiodöf ; and
over all they carried fire and sword. So says Stuff
the scald : —

‘‘ In haste the men of Thyland fly
From the great monarch’s threat’ning eye:

At the stern Harald’s angry look,

The boldest hearts in Denmark shook.”

They went forward all the way south to Heidaby,
took the merchant town, and burnt it. Then one of
HaralTs men made the following verses : —

All Heidaby is burned down !

Strangers will ask where stood the town.

In our wild humour up it blazed.

And Swend looks round him all amazed.

All Heidaby is burned down !

From a far corner of the town
I saw, before the peep of morning.

Roofs, walls, and all in flame high burning.”

To this also Thorleik alludes in his verses, when
he heard there had been no battle at the Gotha
river : —

The stranger- warrior may inquire
Of Harald’s men, why in his ire

* Vendilskaga, now Vendsyssel, is the northern district of Jutland, in
which the Scaw Point is situated.

t Thyodo is now Thyland in Jutland.

VOL. III. D

31

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX.

Chapter
XXXV.
Harald’s
escape into
the Jut¬
land sea.

On Heidaby his wrath he turns,

And the fair town to ashes burns
Would that the day had never come
When Harald’s ships returned home
From the East sea, since now the town.

Without his gain, is burned down !”

Then King Harald sailed north, and had sixty
ships, and the most of them large and heavily laden
with the booty taken in summer ; and as they sailed
north past Thiodö, came King Swend down from the
land with a great force, and he challenged King
Harald to land and fight. King Harald had little
more than half the force of King Swend, and therefore
he challenged Swend to fight at sea. So says Thorleik
the Fair : —

Swend, who of all men under heaven
Has had the luckiest birth-hour given.

Invites his foemen to the field.

There to contest with blood-stained shield.

The king, impatient of delay,

Harald, will with his sea-hawks stay ;

On board will fight, and fate decide
If Swend shall by his land abide.”

After that King Harald sailed north along V endil-
skaga ; and the wind then came against them, and they
brought up under Lesso, where they lay all night. A
thick fog lay upon the sea ; and when the morning
came, and the sun rose, they saw upon the other side
of the sea as if many lights were burning. This was
told to King Harald ; and he looked at it, and said
immediately, “ Strike the tilts down on the ships, and
take to the oars. The Danish forces are coming upon
us ; and the fog there where they are must have
cleared off, and the sun shines upon the dragon-heads
of their ships, which are gilded, and that is what Ave
see.” It Avas so as he had said. SAvend had come
there Avith a prodigious armed force. They roAved
noAV on both sides all they could. The Danish ships
fleAv lighter before the oars ; for the Northmen’s ships
Avere both soaked Avith Avater and heavily laden, so tliat

KINGS OF NORWAY.

35

the Danes approached nearer and nearer. Then Ha- saga ix.
raid, whose own dragon- ship was the last of the fleet,
saw that he could not get away ; so he ordered his
men to throw overboard some wood, and lay upon it
clothes and other good and valuable articles ; and it
was so perfectly calm, that these drove about with the
tide. Now when the Danes saw their own goods
driving about on the sea, they who were in advance
turned about to save them ; for they thought it was
easier to take what was floating freely about, than to
go on board the Northmen to take it. They dropped
rowing, and lost ground. Now when King Swend
came up to them with his ship, he urged them on ;
saying it would be a great shame if they, with so
great a force, could not overtake and master so small
a number. The Danes then began again to stretch out
lustily at their oars. When King Harald saw that
the Danish ships went faster, he ordered his men to
lighten their ships, and cast overboard malt, wheat,
bacon, and to let their liquor run out, which helped
a little. Then Harald ordered the bulwark-screens,
the empty casks and puncheons, and the prisoners
to be thrown overboard; and when all these were
driving about on the sea, Swend ordered help to
be given to save the men. This was done; but so
much time was lost, that they separated from each
other. The Danes turned back, and the Northmen
23roceeded on their way. So says Thorleik the Fair: —

Swend drove his foes from Jutland’s coasts —

The Norsemen’s ships would have been lost,

But Harald all his vessels saves.

Throwing his booty on the waves.

The Jutlanders saw, as he threw,

Their own goods floating in their view:

His lighten’d ships fly o’er the main.

While they pick up their own again.”

King Swend returned southwards with his ships to
Lesso, where he found seven ships of the Northmen.

3) 2

36

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX.

Chapter
XXXVL
Of Harald.

with bonders and men of the levy. ^Adien King
Swend came to them they begged for mercy, and
oifered ransom for themselves. So says Thorleik the
Fair : —

The stern king’s men good oflPers make,

If Swend will ransom for them take;

Too few to fight, they boldly say
Unequal force makes them give way. ^

The hasty bonders for a word
Would have betaken them to the sw^ord.

And have prolonged a bloody strife —

Such men can give no price for life.”

King Harald was a great man, who ruled his king¬
dom well in home-concerns. Very prudent was he,
of good understanding ; and it is the universal opinion
that no chief ever was in northern lands of such deep
judgment and ready counsel as Harald. He was a
great warrior ; bold in arms ; strong and expert in the
use of his weapons beyond any others, as has been
before related, although many of the feats of his
manhood are not here written down. This is omng
partly to our uncertainty about them, partly to our
wish not to put stories into this book for which there
is no testimony. Although we have heard many
things talked about, and even circumstantially related,
yet we think it better that something may be added
to, than that it should be necessary to take something
away from, our relation. A great part of his history
is put in verse by Iceland men, which poems they pre¬
sented to him or his sons, and for which reason he
was their great friend. He was, indeed, a great friend
to all the people of that country; and once, Avhen a very
dear time set in, he allowed four ships to transport
meal to Iceland, and fixed that the shippund should
not be dearer than 100 ells of wadmah* He permitted

* Wadmal was a coarse woollen home-made cloth, undyed, spun and
woven by the country-people in Iceland ; and being their only native
product of value, rents, taxes, and prices were, until a late period, valued
in wadmal.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

37

also all poor people, who could find provisions to keep
them on the voyage across the sea, to emigrate from
Iceland to Norway; and from that time there was
better subsistence in the country, and the seasons
also turned out better. King Harald also sent from
Norway a bell for the church of which Olaf the Saint
had sent the timbers to Iceland, and which was erected
on the Thing -plain. Such remembrances of King
Harald are found here in the country*, besides many
great gifts which he presented to those who visited
him.

Haldor Snorresson and Ulf Ospaksson, as before
related, came to Norway with King Harald. They
were, in many respects, of diiferent dispositions.
Haldor was very stout and strong, and remarkably
handsome in appearance. King Harald gave him this
testimony, that he, among all his men, cared least
about doubtful circumstances, whether they betokened
danger or pleasure; for, whatever turned up, he was
never in higher nor in lower spirits, never slept less
nor more on account of them, nor ate or drank but
according to his custom. Haldor was not a man of
many Avords, but short in conversation, told his opi¬
nion bluntly, and was obstinate and hard ; and this
could not please the king, Avho had many clever people
about him zealous in his service. Haldor remained a
short time with the king; and then came to Iceland,
where he took up his abode in Hiardarholt, and dwelt
in that farm to a very advanced age.

Ulf Ospaksson stood in great esteem Avith King
Harald; for he was a man of great understanding,
clever in conversation, active and brave, and Avithal
true and sincere. King Harald made Ulf his marshal,
and married him to Jorun, Thorberg’s daughter, a
sister of Harald’s wife Thora. Ulf and Jorun’s chil-

SAGA IX.

Chapter

xxxvir.

Of Haldor
Snorresson.

Chapter
XXXVIII.
Of Ulf
Ospaksson.

* Viz. in Iceland, where Snorro was writing.

D 3

38

CHliONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX.

Chapteh
XXXIX.
Of the

building of
churches
and houses.

Chapter

XL.

Beginning
of Hakon
Ivarsson’s
story.

dren were, Jan Stærke of Kosvold, and Brigita mother
of Sauda Ulf, who was father of Peter Byrde-Swend,
grandfather of Swend and Ulf Flys. Jan Stærke’s
son was Erlind Hirnalde, father of Archbishop Eystein
and his brothers. King Harald gave Ulf the marshal
the rights of a lenderman, and a fief of twelve marks
income, besides a half-district in the Drontheim land.
Of this Stein Herdissesson speaks in his song about
Ulf.

King Magnus Olafsson built Olaf’s church in the
town (Nidaros), on the spot where Olaf’s body was
set down for the night, and which, at that time, was
above the town. He also had the king’s house- built
there. The church was not quite finished when the
kino; died ; but Kino; Harald had what was wantins;
completed. There, beside the house, he began to con¬
struct a stone hall, but it was not finished when he
died. King Harald had the church called Mary
Church built from the foundations up, at the sand¬
hill close to the spot where the king’s holy remains
were concealed in the earth the first winter after his
fall. It was a large temple, and so strongly built
with lime that it was difficult to break it when the
archbishop Eystein had it pulled down. Olaf’s holy
remains were kept in Olaf’s church while Mary
church was building. King Harald had the king’s
house erected below Mary Kirk, at the side of the
river, where it now is ; and he had the house in which
he had made the great hall consecrated, and called
Gregorius Church.

There was a man called Ivar Huide, who was a
brave lenderman dwelling in the Uplands, and was a
daughter’s son of Earl Hakon the Great. Ivar was
the handsomest man that could be seen. Ivar’s son
Avas called Hakon ; and of him it Avas said that he Avas
distinguished aboA^e all men then in Konvay for
beauty, strength, and perfection of figure. In his

KINGS OF NORWAY.

39

very youth he had been sent out on war expeditions,
where he acquired great honour and consideration,
and became afterwards one of the most celebrated
men.

Einar Tambarskelver was the most powerful lender-
man^ in the Drontheim land. There was but little
friendship between him and King Harald, although
Einar retained all the fiefs he had held while Magnus
the Good lived. Einar had many large estates, and
was married to Bergliot, a daughter of Earl Hakon,
as related above. Their son Endrid was grown up,
and married to Sigrid, a daughter of Ketil Kalfsson
and Gunhild, King Harald’s sister’s daughter. Endrid
had inherited the beauty of his mother’s father Earl
Hakon, and his sons ; and in size and strength he
took after his father Einar, and also in all bodily per¬
fections by which Einar had been distinguished above
other men. He was also, as well as his father, the
most popular of men, which the sagas, indeed, show
sufficiently.

Orm was at that time earl in the Uplands. His
mother was Kagnhild, a daughter of Earl Hakon the
Great, and Orm was a remarkably clever man. Aslak
Erlingsson was then in Jedderen at Sole, and was mar¬
ried to Sigrid, a daughter of Earl Swend Hakonsson.
Gunhild, Earl Swend’s other daughter, was married
to the Danish king Swend Ulfsson. These were
the descendants of Earl Hakon at that time in Nor¬
way, besides many other distinguished people; and
the whole race was remarkable for their very beauti-

* The fiefs of these feudatories not being hereditary, nor conveying
the feudal baronial privileges and powers over the sub-vassals belonging
to the fiefs in feudally constituted countries, and being in reality only
life-rent tacks of crown lands, or collectorships of crown rents and taxes
in certain districts, the original word Lendermen (Lendr Madr) is pre¬
ferred, in this translation, to the word Baron, which denotes feudal
rights and powers which the lendermen had not. The King’s Sheriffs
might, perhaps, express this condition and class better.

D 4

SAGA IX.

Chapter
XLl.
Of Einar
Tambar¬
skelver.

Chapter
XLII.
Of Earl
Orm.

40

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX.

Chapter

XLIIL

Ilarald’s

pride.

Chapter
XLIV.
Ol’ the
quarrel
of King
Harald
and Einar
Tambar-
skelver.

ful appearance, and the most of them were gifted with
great bodily perfection, and were all distinguished
and important men.

King Harald was very proud, and his pride in¬
creased after he Avas established in the country ; and it
came so far that at last it Avas not good to speak
against him, or to propose any thing diiferent from
what he desired. So says Thiodolf the scald: —

In arms ’tis right the common man
Should follow orders^ one by one^ —

Should stoop or rise^ or run or stand,

As his war-leader may command;

But now to the king who feeds the ravens
The people bend like heartless cravens — ■

Nothing is left them, but consent
To what the king calls his intent.”

Einar Tambarskelver Avas the principal man among
the bonders all about Drontheim, and ansAvered for
them at the Things even against the king’s men.
Einar kncAV Avell the laAV, and did not Avant boldness
to bring forward his opinion at Things, even if the
king Avas present ; and all the bonders stood by him.
The king was very angry at this, and it came so far
that they disputed eagerly against each other. Einar
said that the bonders would not put up Avith any un¬
lawful proceedings from him if he broke through the
law of the land ; and this occurred several times be¬
tween them. Einar then began to keep people about
him at home, and he had many more Avhen he came
into the toAvn if the king Avas there. It once hap¬
pened that Einar came to the toAvn Avith a great
many men and ships ; he had Avith him eight or nine
great war-ships, and nearly 500 men. AVhen he came
to the toAvn he went up from the strand Avith his
attendants. King Harald AA^as then in his liouse,
standing out in the gallery of the loft; and Avhen he
saw Einar’s people going on shore, it is said Harald
composed these verses : —

KINGS OF NORWAY.

41

I see great Tambarskelver go.

With mighty pomp, and pride, and show.

Across the ehh-shore up the land, —

Before, behind, an armed band.

This bonder-leader thinks to rule,

* And fill himself the royal stool.

A goodly earl I have known
With fewer followers of his own.

He who strikes fire from the shield,

Einar, may some day make us yield.

Unless our axe-edge quickly ends.

With sudden kiss, what he intends.^’

Einar remained several days in the town.

One day there was a meeting held in the town,, at
which the king himself was present. A thief had
been taken in the town, and he was brought before
the Thing. The man had before been in the service
of Einar, who had been very well satisfied with him.
This was told to Einar, and he well knew the king
Avould not let the man off, and the more because he
took an interest in the matter. Einar, therefore, let
his men get under arms, went to the Thing, and took
the man by force. The friends on both sides then came
between, and endeavoured to effect a reconciliation;
and they succeeded so far that a meeting-place was
appointed, to which both should come. There was a
Thing-room in the king’s house at the river Nid, and
the king went into it with a few men, while the most
of his people were out in the yard. The king ordered
the shutters of the loft-opening to be turned, so that
there was but a little space left clear. When Einar
came into the yard with his people, he told his son
Endrid to remain outside with the men, for there is
no danger here for me.” Endrid remained standing
outside at the room-door. When Einar came into the
Thing-room, he said, “ It is dark in the king’s Thing-
room.” At that moment some men ran against him,
and assaulted him, — some with spears, some with
swords. When Endrid heard this he drew his sword,
and rushed into the room ; but he was instantly killed

SAGA IX.

Chatter
XLV.
The fall of
Einar and
Endrid.

42

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX.

Chapter
XLVI.
Of King
Harald
and Finn
A meson.

along with his father. The king’s men then ran up
and placed themselves before the door, and the bonders
lost courage, having no leader. They urged each
other on, indeed, and said it was a shame they should
not avenge their chief ; but it came to nothing with
their attack. The king went out to his men, arrayed
them in battle order, and set up his standard ; but the
bonders did not venture to assault. Then the king
went with all his men on board of his ships, rowed
down the river, and then took his way out of the
fiord. When Einar’s wife Bergliot, who was in the
house which Einar had possessed in the town, heard
of Einar’s fall, she went immediately to the king’s
house where the bonders’ army was, and urged them
to the attack; but at the same moment the king
was rowing out of the river. Then said Bergliot,
Now we want here my relation Hakon Ivarsson ;
Einar’s murderer would not be rowing out of the
river if Ivar stood here on the river-bank.” Then
Bergliot adorned Einar’s and Endrid’s corpses, and
buried them in Olaf ’s church, beside King Magnus
Olafsson’s burial-place. After Einar’s murder, the
king was so much disliked for that deed, that there
was nothing that prevented the lendermen and bonders
from attacking the king, and giving him battle, but
the want of some leader to raise the banner in the
bonder army.

Finn Arneson dwelt at Austratt in Yrjar, and was
King Harald’s lenderman there. Finn was married
to Bergliot, a daughter of Halfdan, Avho was a son of
Sigurd Syr, and brother of Olaf the Saint and of King
Harald. Thora, King Harald’s wife, was Finn Arne-
son’s brother’s daughter ; and Finn and all his bro¬
thers were the king’s dearest friends. Finn Arneson
had been for some summers on a vikins: cruise in
the AWst sea; and Finn, Guttorm Gunhildsson, and
Hakon Ivarsson had all been toi^ether on that cruise.

O

KINGS OF NORWAY.

43

King Harald now proceeded out of Drontlieim fiord sag^ix.
to Austratt, where he was well received. Afterwards
the king and Finn conversed with each other about
this new event of Einar’s and his son’s death, and of
the murmuring and threatening which the bonders
made against the king.

Finn took up the conversation briskly, and said,

“ Thou art managing ill in two ways : first in doing
all manner of mischief ; and next in being so afraid
that thou knowest not what to do.”

The king replied, laughing, “ I will send thee,
friend, into the town to bring about" a reconciliation
v,^ith the bonders ; and if that will not do, thou must
go to the Uplands, ánd bring matters to such an un¬
derstanding with Hakon Ivarsson that he shall not be
my opponent.”

Finn replies, “ And how wilt thou reward me if I
undertake this dangerous errand ; for both the people
of Drouth eim and the people of Upland are so great
enemies to thee, that it would not be safe for any of
thy messengers to come among them, unless he were
one who would be spared for his own sake?”

The king replies, “ Go thou on this embassy, for I
know thou wilt succeed in it if any man can, and
bring about a reconciliation ; and then choose what¬
ever favour from us thou wilt.”

Finn says, “ Hold thou thy word, king, and I will
choose my petition. I will desire to have peace and
safe residence in the country for my brother Kalf, and
all his estates restored ; and also that he receive all the
dignity and power he had when he left the country.”

The king assented to all that Finn laid down, and
it was confirmed by witnesses and shake of hand.

Then said Finn, What shall I offer Hakon, who
rules most among his relations in the land, to induce
him to agree to a treaty and reconciliation with
thee? ”

44

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX.

Chapter
XLVIl.
Of Finn
A meson’s
journey.

Chapter
XLVIII.
Of Finn
and Hakon
Ivarsson.

The king replies, Thou shalt first hear what
Hakon on his part requires for making an agreement ;
then promote my interest as thou art best able ; and
deny him nothing in the end short of the kingdom/’

Then King Harald proceeded southwards to Mære,
and drew together men in considerable numbers.

Finn Arneson proceeded to the town, and had with
him his house servants, nearly eighty men. When
he came into the town he held a Thing with the
town’s people. Finn spoke long and ably at the
Thing; and told the town’s people, and bonders,
above all things not to have a hatred against their
king, or to drive him away. He reminded them of
how much evil they had suffered by acting thus
against King Olaf the Saint ; and added, that the king
was willing to pay penalty for this murder, according
to the judgment of understanding and good men.
The effect of Finn’s speech was, that the bonders pro¬
mised to wait quietly until the messengers came back
whom Bergliot had sent to the Uplands to her relative
Hakon Ivarsson. Finn then went out to Orkadal
with the men who had accompanied him to the town.
From thence he went up to the Dovrefield, and east¬
wards over the Fielde* He went first to his son-in-
law Earl Orm, who was married to Sigrid, Finn’s
daughter, and told him his business.

Then Finn and Earl Orm appointed a meeting with
Hakon Ivarsson ; and when they met Finn explained
his errand to Hakon, and the offer which King Harald
made him. It was soon seen, from Hakon’s speech,
that he considered it to be his great duty to avenge
the death of his relative Endrid ; and added, that word
was come to him from Drontheim, from which he
might expect help in making head against the king.
Then Finn represented to Hakon how much better it
would be for him to accept of as high a dignity from
the king as he himself could desire, rather than to at-

KINGS OF NORWAY.

45

tempt raising a strife against the king to whom he
was owing service and duty. He said if he came out
of the conflict without victory, he forfeited life and
property : “ And even if thou hast the victory, thou
wilt still be called a traitor to thy sovereign.” Earl
Orm also supported Finn’s speech. After Hakon had
reflected upon this he disclosed what lay on his mind,
and said, “ I will be reconciled with King Harald if he
will give me in marriage his relation Ragnhild, King
Magnus Olafsson’s daughter, with such dower as is
suitable to her and she will be content with.” Finn
said he would agree to this on the king’s part ; and
thus it was settled among them. Finn then returned
to Drontheim, and the disturbance and enmity was
quashed, so that the king could retain his kingdom in
peace at home; and the league was broken which
Endrid’s relations had made among themselves for
opposing King Harald.

When the day arrived for the meeting at which
this agreement with Harald should be finally con¬
cluded, Hakon went to King Harald; and in their con¬
ference the king said that he, for his part, would adhere
to all that was settled in their agreement. Thou,
Hakon,” says he, “ must thyself settle that which
concerns Ragnhild, as to her accepting thee in mar¬
riage ; for it would not be advisable for thee, or for
any one, to marry Ragnhild without her consent.”
Then Hakon went to Ragnhild, and paid his addresses
to her. She answered him thus : have often to

feel that my father King Magnus is dead and gone
from me, since I must marry a bonder ; although I
acknowledge thou art a handsome man, expert in all
exercises. But if Kin^ Magnus had lived he would
not have married me to any man less than a king ; so
it is not to be expected that I will take a man
who has no dignity or title.” Then Hakon went to
King Harald, and told him his conversation with

SAGA IX.

Chapter.
XLIX.
Of the
courtship
of Hakon
Ivarsson.

46

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX.

Chapter

L.

Hakon’s
journey to
Denmark.

Chapter

LI.

Murder of
Asmund.

Ragnliild, and also repeated the agreement which was
made between him and Finn, who was with him, together
with many others of the persons who had been present
at the conversation between him and Finn. Hakon
takes them all to witness that such was the agreement
that the king should give Ragnhild the dower she
might desire. “ And now since she will have no man
who has not a high dignity, thou must give me such
a title of honour ; and, according to the opinion of the
people, I am of birth, family, and other qualifications,
to be called earl.’’

The king replies, When my brother King Olaf
and his son King Magnus ruled the kingdom, they
allowed only one earl at a time to be in the country,
and I have done the same since I came to the kingly
title ; and I will not take away from Orm the title of
honour I had before given him.”

Hakon saw now that his business had not advanced,
and was very ill pleased; and Finn was outrageously
angry. They said the king had broken his word ; and
thus they all separated.

Hakon then went out of the country with a well-
manned ship. When he came to Denmark he went
immediately to his relative King Swend, who received
him honourably, and gave him great fiefs. Hakon
became King Swend’ s commander of the coast defence
against the vikings, — the Y endland people, Courland
people, and others from the East countries, — who in¬
fested the Danish dominions ; and he lay out with his
ships of war both winter and summer.

There was a man called Asmund, who is said to
have been King Swend’s sister’s son, and his foster-
son. This Asmund was distinguished among all by
his boldness, and was much disliked by the king.
When Asmund came to years, and to age of discretion,
he became an ungovernable person given to murder
and manslaughter. The king was ill pleased at this.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

47

and sent him away, giving him a good fief, which sag^ix.
might keep him and his followers well. As soon as
Asmund had got this property from the king, he drew
together a large troop of people ; and as the estate he
had got from the king was not suificient for his ex¬
penses, he took as his own much more which belonged
to the king. When the king heard this he summoned
Asmund to him, and when they met the king said
that Asmund should remain with the court without
keeping any retinue of his own ; and this took place
as the king desired. But when Asmund had been a
little time in the king’s court he grew weary of being
there, and escaped in the night, returned to his for¬
mer companions, and did more mischief than ever.

Now when the king was riding through the country,
he came to the neighbourhood where Asmund was,
and he sent out men-at-arms to seize him. The king
then had him laid in irons, and kept him so for some
time in hope he would reform ; but no sooner did
Asmund get rid of his chains than he absconded again,
gathered together people and men-at-arms, and betook
himself to plunder, both abroad and at home. Thus
he made great forays, killing and plundering all
around. When the people who sulFered under these
disturbances came to the king, and complained to him
of their losses, he replied, “ Why do ye tell me of
this? Why don’t you go to Hakon Ivarsson, who is
my officer for the land-defence, placed on purpose to
keep the peace for you peasants, and to hold the vik¬
ings in check? I was told that Hakon was a gallant
and brave man, but I think he is rather shy when any
danger of life is in the way.” These words of the
king were brought to Hakon, with many additions.

Then Hakon went with his men in search of Asmund,
and when their ships met Hakon gave battle imme¬
diately; and the conflict was sharp, and many men
were killed. Hakon boarded Asmund’s ship, and cut

48

CrmONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX.

Chaptek,

LIL

Ilakon

Ivar.sson’s

marriage.

Chapter
LIII.
Reconci¬
liation of
King Ha-
rald and
Kalf.

down the men before his feet. At last he and Asmund
met, and exchanged blows until Asmund fell. Hakon
cut off his head, went in all haste to King Swend,
and found him just sitting down to the dinner-
table. Hakon presented himself before the table, laid
Asmund^ s head upon the table before the king, and
asked if he knew it. The king made no reply, but
became as red as blood in the face. Soon after the
king sent him a message, ordering him to leave his
service immediately. “ Tell him that I will do him
no harm ; but I cannot keep watch over all our re¬
lations.” ^

Hakon then left Denmark, and came north to his
estates in Norway. His relation Earl Orm was dead.
Hakon’ s relations and friends were glad to see Hakon,
and many gallant men gave themselves much trouble
to bring about a reconciliation between King Harald
and Hakon. It was at last settled in this way, that
Hakon got Ragnhild, the king’s daughter, and that
King Harald gave Hakon the earldom, with the same
power Earl Orm had possessed. Hakon swore to
King Harald an oath of fidelity to all the services he
was liable to fufil.

Kalf Arneson had been on a viking cruise to the
Western countries ever since he had left Norway ; but
in winter he was often in the Orkney Islands with his
relative Earl Thorfinn. Finn Arneson sent a message
to his brother Kalf, and told him the agreement which
he had made with King Harald, that Kalf should enjoy
safety in Norway, and his estates, and all the fiefs he
had held from King Magnus. When this message
came to Kalf he immediately got ready for his voyage,
and went east to Norway to his brother Finn. Then

* This incident shows how strong, in those ages, was the tie of
relationship, and the point of honour of avenging its injuries — the
clanship spirit.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

49

Finn obtained the king’s peace for Kalf, and when
Kalf and the king met they went into the agreement
which Finn and the king had settled upon before.
Kalf bound himself to the king in the same way as he
had bound himself to serve King Magnus, according
to which Kalf should do all that the king desired and
considered of advantage to his realm. Thereupon
Kalf received all the estates and fiefs he had before.

The summer following King Harald ordered out a
levy, and went to Denmark, where he plundered during
the summer ; but when he came south to Fyen he
found a great force assembled against him. Then the
king prepared to land his men from the ships, and to
engage in a land-fight. He drew up his men on board
in order of battle ; set Kalf Arneson at the head of one
division; ordered him to make the first attack, and
told him where they should direct their assault, pro¬
mising that he would soon make a landing with the
others, and come to their assistance. When Kalf
came to the land with his men a force came down
immediately to oppose them, and Kalf without delay
engaged in battle, which, however, did not last long ;
for Kalf was immediately overpowered by numbers,
and betook himself to flight with his men. The Danes
pursued them vigorously, and many of the Northmen
fell, and among them Kalf Arneson. Now King Ha^
raid landed with his array; and they soon came on
their way to the field of battle, where they found
Kalf ’s body, and bore it down to the ships. But the
king penetrated into the country, killing many people,
and destroying much. So says Arnor : —

His shining sword with blood he stains^

Upon Fyona’s grassy plains;

And in the midst of fire and smoke.

The King Fyona’s forces broke.”

After this Finn Arneson thought he had cause to
be an enemy of the king upon account of his brother

VOL. III. E

SAGA IX.

Chapter

LIV.

Fall of Kalf
Arneson.

Chapter

LV.

Finn Arne^

50

CHRONICLE OE THE

SAGA IX.

son’s expe¬
dition out
of the
country.

Chapter
LVI.
Of Gut-
torm Gun-
hilclsson.

Kalf’s deatli; and said the king had betrayed Kalf to
his fall, and had also deceived him by making him
entice his brother Kalf to come over from the West
and trust to King Harald’s faith. When these speeches
came out among people, many said that it was very
foolish in Finn to have ever supposed that Kalf could
obtain the king’s sincere friendship and favour ; for
they thought the king was the man to seek revenge
for smaller offences than Kalf had committed against
the king. The king let every one say what he chose,
and he himself neither said yes nor no about the affair ;
but people perceived that the king Avas very Avell
pleased with what had happened. King Harald once
made these verses : —

I have, in all, the death-stroke given
To foes of mine at least eleven ;

Two more, perhaps, if I remember.

May yet be added to this number.

I prize myself upon these deeds,

My people such examples needs.

Bright gold itself they would despise,

Or healing leek-herb* underprize.

If not still brought before their eyes.”

Finn Arneson took the business so much to heart
that he left the country, and went to Denmark to
King SAvend, Adhere he met a friendly reception.
They spoke together in private for a long time ; and
the end of the business Avas that Finn went into King
SAvend’s service, and became his man. King SAvend
then gave Finn an earldom, and placed him in Hal-
land, Avhere he was long earl, and defended the coun¬
try against the Northmen.

Ketil Kalf and Gunhild of Kinganess had a son
called Guttorrn, and he Avas a sister’s son to King Olaf

* The leek appears to have been held in great esteem among the
Northmen for its healing qualities when applied to wounds. The mean¬
ing of the king seems to be, that his people require examples of his
power always before them; for they would forget the virtue of gold or
of leeks without examples.

KINGS OF NOKWAY.

5]

and Harald Sigurdsson. Guttormwasa gallant man,
early advanced to manhood. He was often with King
Harald, who loved him much, and asked his advice ;
for he was of good understanding, and very popular.
Guttorm had also been engaged early in forays, and
had marauded much in the Western countries with a
large force. Ireland was for him a land of peace; and
he had his winter quarters often in Dublin, and was
in great friendship with King Margad.

The summer after King Margad, and Guttorm with
him, went out on an expedition against Bretland, where
they made immense booty. But when the king saw
the quantity of silver which was gathered he wanted
to have the whole booty, and regarded little his friend-
ship for Guttorm. Guttorm was ill pleased that he
and his men should be robbed of their share ; but the
king said, “ Thou must choose one of two things, —
either to be content with what we determine, or to
fight ; and they shall have the booty who gain the
victory : and likewise thou must give up thy ships,
for them I will have,” Guttorm thought there were
great difficulties on both sides ; for it was disgraceful
to give up ships and goods without a stroke, and yet
it was highly dangerous to fight the king and his force,
the king having sixteen ships and Guttorm only five.
Then Guttorm desired three days’ time to consider the
matter with his people, thinking in that time to pacify
the king, and come to a better understanding with
him through the mediation of others ; but he could
not obtain from the king what he desired. This was
the day before Saint Olaf’s day. Guttorm chose the
condition that they would rather die or conquer like
men, than suffer disgrace, contempt, and scorn, by
submitting to so great a loss. He called upon God,
and his uncle Saint Olaf, and entreated their help and
aid ; promising to give to the holy man’s house the
tenth of all the booty that fell to their share, if they

E 2

SAGA IX.

Chapter
LVII.
Guttorm’s
junction
with the
Irish king
Margad.

52

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX.

Chapter,
LVIIL
Miracle of
King Olaf
in Den¬
mark.

gained the victory. Then he arranged his men, placed
them in battle-order against the great force, prepared
for battle, and gave the assault. By the help of God,
and the holy Saint Olaf, Guttorm won the battle.
King Margad fell, and every man, old and young,
who followed him ; and after that great victory, Gut¬
torm and all his people returned home joyfully with
all the booty they had gained by the battle. Every
tenth penny of the booty they had made was taken,
according to the vow, to King Olaf the Saint’s shrine ;
and there was so much silver that Guttorm had an
image made of it, with rays round the head, which
was the size of his own, or of his forecastle-man’s
head ; and the image was seven feet high. The image
thus produced was given by Guttorm to King Olaf
the Saint’s temple, where it has since remained as a
memorial of Guttorm’ s victory and King Olaf the
Saint’s miracle.

There was a wicked, evil-minded count in Denmark,
who had a Norwegian servant-girl whose family be-*
longed to Drontheim district. She worshipped King
Olaf the Saint, and believed firmly in his sanctity.
But the above-mentioned count doubted of all that
was told of the holy man’s miracles, insisted that it
was nothing but nonsense and idle talk, and made a
joke and scorn of the esteem and honour which all the
country people showed the good king. Now when
his holy day came, on which the mild monarch ended
his life, and which all Northmen kept sacred, this
unreasonable count would not observe it, but ordered
his servant-girl to bake and put fire in the oven that
day. She knew well the count’s mad passion, and
that he would revenge himself severely on her if she
refused doing as he ordered. She went, therefore, of
necessity, and baked in the oven, but wept much at
her work ; and she threatened King Olaf that she
never would believe in him, if he did not avenge this

KINGS OE NOEWAY.

misdeed by some miscbance or other. And now shall saga ix.
ye come to hear a well-deserved vengeance, and a true
miracle. It happened, namely, in the same hour, that
the count became blind of both eyes, and the bread
which she had shoved into the oven was turned into
stone! Of these stones some are now in Saint Olaf’s
temple, and in other places ; and since that time Olafs-
mas has been always held holy in Denmark.

West in Yalland^, a man had such bad health that chapter

1 • • Iw I X.

he became a cripple, and went on his knees and elbows,

One day he was upon the road, and had fallen asleep,

nuTcicl© on.

He dreamt that a gallant man came up to him, and a cripple,
asked him where he was going. When he named the
neighbouring town, the man said to him, “ Go to Saint
Olaf’s church that stands in London, and there thou
shaft be cured.” Thereupon he awoke, and went
straightway to inquire the road to Olaf’s church in
London. At last he came to London Bridge, and
asked the men of the castle if they could tell him
where Olaf’s church was ; but they replied, there
were so many churches that they could not tell to
whom each of them was consecrated. Soon after a
man came up, and asked him where he wanted to
go, and he answered to Olaf’s church. Then said
the man, “We shall both go together to Olaf’s church,
for I know the way to it.” Thereupon they went
over the bridge to the shrine where Olaf’s church
was ; and when they came to the gates of the church¬
yard the man mounted over the half-door that was in
the gate, but the cripple rolled himself in, and rose
up immediately sound and strong : when he looked
about him his conductor had vanished.

King Harald had built a merchant town in the East ' Chapter
at Opslof , where he often resided ; for there was good '
supply from the extensive cultivated district wide Haraid’s

^ foray in

* The west coast of France. Denmark,

t Opslo is now a suburb of Christiania, on the south side of the
town and bay.

E 3

54

CHRONICLE OF THE

around. There also he had a convenient station to
defend the country against the Danes, or to make an
attack upon Denmark, which he was in the custom of
doing often, although he kept no great force on foot.
One summer King Harald went from thence with a
few light ships and a few men. He steered south¬
wards out from Viken, and, when the wind served,
stood over to Jutland, and marauded ; but the country
people collected and defended the country. Then
King Harald steered to Lymiiord, and went into the
fiord. Lymfiord is so formed that its entrance is like
a narrow river ; but when one gets farther into the
fiord, it spreads out into a wide sea. King Harald
marauded on both sides of the land ; and when the
Danes gathered together on every side to oppose him,
he lay at a small island which was uncultivated.
They wanted drink on board his ships, and went up
into the island to seek water ; but finding none, they
reported it to the king. He ordered them to look for
some long earth-worms on the island, and when they
found them they brought them to the king. He
ordered the people to bring the worms to a fire, and
bake them before it, so that they should be thirsty.
Then he ordered a thread to be tied round the tails
of the worms, and to let them loose. The worms
crept away immediately, while the threads were wound
off from the clew as the worms took them away; and
the people followed the worms until they sought
' downwards in the earth. There the king ordered
them to dig for water, which they did, and found so
much water that they had no want of it. King Harald
now heard from his spies that King Swend was come
with a large armament to the mouth of the fiord; but
that it was too late for him to come into it, as only
one ship at a time can come in. King Harald then
steered with his fleet in through the fiord to where
it was broadest, to a place called Lygsbreid. In the

KINGS OF NOKWAY.

55

inmost bight, there is but a narrow neck of land di¬
viding the fiord from the West sea.* Thither King
Harald rowed with his men towards evening ; and at
night when it was dark he unloaded his ships, drew
them over the neck of land into the West sea, loaded
them again, and was ready with all this before day.
He then steered northwards along the Jutland coast.
People then said that Harald had escaped from the
hands of the Danes. Harald said that he would
come to Denmark next time with more people and
larger vessels. King Harald then proceeded north to
Drontheim.

King Harald remained all winter at Nidaros, and
had a vessel built out upon the strand, and it was a
buss.^ The ship was built of the same size as the
Long Serpent, and every part of her was finished
with the greatest care. On the stem was a dragon¬
head, and on the stern a dragon-tail, and the sides of
the bows of the ship were gilt. The vessel was of
thirty -five rowers’ benches, and was large for that
size, and was remarkably handsome; for the king
had every thing belonging to the ship’s equipment of
the best, both sails and rigging, anchors and cables.

King Harald sent a message in winter south to
Denmark to King Swend, that he should come north¬
wards in spring ; that they should meet at the Gotha
river and fight, and so settle the division of the coun¬
tries that the one who gained the victory should have
both kingdoms. King Harald during this winter
called out a general levy of all the people of Norway,

SAGA IX.

Chapter
LXI.
King Ha¬
rald had a
ship built.

Chapter
■ LXII.
King
Harald’s
challenge.

* This narrow neck of land has^ within these few years^ been
broken across by the North Sea; and there is now a navigable passage
into the Baltic, besides that of the Sound and of the Belts, for small
vessels. It has eight or ten feet water, and is used by small vessels.

'j' Bussu-skip. A buss is a word still used for a fishing- vessel. It
appears to have been applied to ships of burden of greater breadth than
the war-ships. (See Spelman and Du Fresne.) The buss was a three
masted ship.

E 4

56

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX. and assembled a great force towards spring. Then
Harald had his great ship drawn down and put into
the river Md, and set up the dragon’s head on her.
Thiodolf the scald sang about it thus : —

My lovely girl ! the sight was grand
When the great war-ship down the strand
Into the river gently slid.

And all below her sides was hid.

Come, lovely girl, and see the show ! —

Her sides that on the water glow.

Her serpent-head with golden mane.

All shining back from the Nid again.”

Then King Harald rigged out his ship, got ready
for sea, and when he had all in order went out of the
river. His men rowed very skilfully and beautifully.
So says Thiodolf : —

It was upon a Saturday,

Ship-tilts were struck and stowed away^

And past the town our dragon glides.

That girls might see our glancing sides.

Out from the Nid brave Harald steers ;

Westward at first the dragon veers ;

Our lads together down with oars.

The splash is echoed round the shores.

Their oars our king’s men handle well.

One stroke is ail the eye can tell:

All level o’er the water rise;

The girls look on in sweet surprise.

Such things, they think, can ne’er give way;

They little know the battle-day.

The Danish girls, who dread our shout.

Might wish our ship-gear not so stout.

’Tis in the fight, not on the wave.

That oars may break and fail the brave.

At sea, beneath the ice-cold sky.

Safely our oars o’er ocean ply;

And when at Drontheim’s holy stream
Our seventy oars in distance gleam.

We seem, while rowing from the sea.

An erne with iron wings to be.”

King Harald sailed south along the land, and called
out the levy every where of men and ships. When
they came south to Viken they got a strong wind
against them, and the forces lay dispersed about in

KINGS OF NOEWAY.

57

the harbour ; some in the isles outside, and some in
the fiords. So says Thiodolf : —

“ The cutters’ sea-bleached bows scarce find
A shelter from the furious wind
Under the inland forests’ side^

Where the fiord runs its farthest tide.

In all the isles and creeks around
The bonders’ ships lie on the ground.

And ships with gunwales hung with shields
Seek the lee-side of the green fields.”

In the heavy storm that raged for some time the
great ship had need of good ground tackle. So says
Thiodolf : —

With lofty bow above the seas,

Which curl and fly before the breeze.

The gallant vessel rides and reels.

And every plunge her cable feels.

The storm that tries the spar and mast
Tries the main-anchor at the last:

The storm above, below the rock.

Chafe the thick cable with each shock.”

When the weather became favourable King Harald
sailed eastwards to the Gotha river with his fleet, and
arrived there in the evening. So says Thiodolf : — -

The gallant Harald now has come
To Gotha, half way from his home.

And on the river frontier stands.

To fight with Swend for life and lands.

The night passed o’er, the gallant king
Next day at Thumle calls a Thing,

Where Swend is challenged to appear —

A day which ravens wish were near.”

When the Danes heard that the Northmen’s army
was come to the Gotha river*, they all fled who had
opportunity to get away. The Northmen heard that
the Danish king had also called out his forces, and
lay in the south, partly at Fyen and partly about
Sealand. When King Harald found that King Swend
would not hold a meeting with him, or a fight, ac-

^ The country round the river Gotha, as well as Scania on the north
side of the Sound, was part of the kingdom of Denmark.

SAGA IX.

Chapter
LXIIÍ.
Of King
Harald’s
fleet.

58

CHRONICLE OE THE

saga IX. cording to what had been agreed upon between them,
he took the same course as before, — letting the bonder
troops return home, but manning 150 ships, with
which he sailed southwards along Halland, where he
herried all round, and then brought up with his fleet
in Lofo fiord, and laid waste the country. A little
afterwards King Swend came upon them with all the
Danish fleet, consisting of 300 ships. When the
Northmen saw them, King Harald ordered a general
meeting of the fleet to be called by sound of trumpet ;
and many there said it was better to fly, as it was not
now advisable to fight. The king replied, “ Sooner
shall all lie dead one upon another than flyf’ So
says Stein Herdisarson : —

With falcon eye, and courage bright.

Our king saw glory in the fight;

To fly, he saw, would ruin bring
On them and him — the folk and king.

‘ Hand up the arms to one and all I ’

Cries out the king; we’ll win or fall!

Sooner than fly, heaped on each other
Each man shall fall across his brother ! ’ ”

Then King Harald drew up his ships to attack, and
brought forward his great dragon in the middle of
his fleet. So says Thiodolf : —

The brave king through his vessels’ throng
His dragon war-ship moves along;

He runs her gaily to the front.

To meet the coming battle’s brunt.”

The ship was remarkably well equipt, and fully
manned. So says Thiodolf : —

The king had got a chosen crew —

He told his brave lads to stand true.

The ring of shields seemed to enclose
The ship’s deck from the boarding foes.

The dragon, on the Nisaa flood,

Reset with men, who thickly stood.

Shield touching shield, was something rare,

That seemed all force of man to dare.”

Ulf the marshal laid his ship by the side of tlie

KINGS OF NOKWAY.

59

king’s, and ordered his men to bring her well for¬
ward. Stein Herdisarson, who was himself in Ulf’s
ship, sings of it thus : —

Our oars were stowed, our lances high.

As the ship moved swung in the sky.

The marshal Ulf went through our ranks,

Drawn up beside the rowers’ banks :

The brave friend of our gallant king
Told us our ship well on to bring.

And fight like Norsemen in the cause' —

Our Norsemen answered with huzzas.”

Hakon Ivarsson lay outside on the other wing, and
had many ships with him, all well equipped. At the
extremity of the other side lay the Drontheim chiefs,
who had also a great and strong force.

Swend the Danish king also drew up his fleet, and
laid his ship forward in the centre against King
Harald’s ship, and Finn Arneson laid his ship next ;
and then the Danes laid their ships, according as they
were bold or well equipped. Then, on both sides, they
bound the ships together all through the middle of
the fleets ; but as the fleets were so large, very many
ships remained loose, and each laid his ship forward
according to his courage, and that was very unequal.
Although the difference among the men was great,
altogether there was a very great force on both sides.
King Swend had six earls among the people following
him. So says Stein Flerdisarson : —

Danger our chief would never shun.

With eight score ships he would not run :

The Danish fleet he would abide.

And give close battle side by side.

From Loire’s coast the Danish king
Three hundred ocean steeds could bring.

And o’er the sea- weed plain in haste
Thought Harald’s vessels would be chased.”

As soon as King Harald was ready with his fleet,
he orders the war-blast to sound, and the men to row
forward to the attack. So says Stein Herdisarson: —

SAGA IX.

Chapter
LXIV.
Of King
Swend’s
armament.

Chapter
LXV.
Beginning
of the battle
of Nisaa.

60

CHRONICLE OE THE

SAGA IX. Harald and Swend first met as foes^

- Where Nisaa in the ocean flows ;

For Swend would not for peace entreaty
BuC strong in ships, would Harald meet.

The Norsemen prove, with sword in hand,

That numbers cannot skill withstand.

Off HallancTs coast the blood of Danes
The blue sea’s calm smooth surface stains.”

Soon the battle began, and became very sharp;
both kings urging on their men. So says Stein
Herdisarson : —

“ Our king, his broad shield disregarding.

More keen for striking than for warding,

Now tells his lads their spears to throw, —

Now shows them where to strike a blow.

From fleet to fleet so short the way.

That stones and arrows have full play ;

And from the keen sword dropped the blood
Of short-lived seamen in the flood.”

It was late in the day when the battle began, and
it continued the whole night. King Harald shot for
a long time with his bow. So says Thiodolf : —

The Upland king was all the night
Speeding the arrows’ deadly flight.

All in the dark his bow-string’s twang
W as answered ; for some white shield rang,

Or yelling shriek gave certain note

The shaft had pierced some ring-mail coat.

The foemen’s shields and bulwarks bore
A Lapland arrow-scatt* or more.”

Earl Hakon, and the people who followed him, did
not make fast their ships in the fleet, but rowed
against the Danish ships that were loose, and slew
the men of all the ships they came u]) with. When
the Danes observed this, each drew his ship out of
the way of the earl ; but he set upon those who were
trying to escape, and they were nearly driven to
■flight. Then a boat came rowing to the earfs ship,
and hailed him, and said that the other wing of King

* The Laplanders paid their scatt, or yearly tax, in bows and arrows ;
and the meaning of the scald appears to be, that as many as were paid in
a year were shot at the foe.

KINGS OF NORVfAY.

61

I Harald’s fleet was giving way, and many of their saga ix.
Í people had fallen. Then the earl rowed thither, and
2:ave so severe an assault that the Danes had to

■

Í retreat before him. The earl went on in this way all
I the night, coming forward where he was most wanted,
and wheresoever he came none could stand against
him. Hakon rowed outside around the battle. To¬
wards the end of the night the greatest part of the
Danish fleet broke into flight, for then King Harald
with his men boarded the vessel of King Swend ; and
it was so completely cleared that all the crew fell in
the ship, except those who sprang overboard. So
says Arnor, the earl’s scald : —

Brave Swend did not his vessel leave
Without good cause, as I believe:

Oft on his casque the sword-blade rang,

Before into the sea he sprang.

Upon the wave his vessel drives ;

All his brave crew had lost their lives.

O’er dead courtmen into the sea
The Jutland king had now to flee.”

And when King Swend’s banner was cut down,
and his ship cleared of its crew, all his forces took to
flight, and some were killed. The ships which were
bound together could not be cast loose, so the people
who were in them sprang overboard, and some got to
the other ships that were loose ; and all King Swend’s
men who could get off rowed away, but a great many
of them were slain. Where the king himself fought
the ships were mostly bound together, and there were
more than seventy left behind of King Swend’s vessels.

So says Thiodolf : —

Sweud’s ships rode proudly o’er the deep.

When, by a single sudden sweep,

I Full seventy sail, as we are told,

I Were seized by Norway’s monarch hold.”

King Harald rowed after the Danes, and pursued
them ; but that was not easy, for the ships lay so thick
together that they scarcely could move. Earl Finn

62

CHEONICLE OE THE

SAGA IX. Arneson would not flee; and being also short-sighted,
was taken prisoner. So says Thiodolf : —

To the six Danish earls who came
To aid his force^ and raise his name,

No mighty thanks King Swend is owing
For mighty actions of their doing.

Finn Arneson, in battle known,

With a stout Norse heart of his own.

Would not take flight his life to gain.

And in the foremost ranks was ta’en.”

Chapter,

LXVI.

King

Swend’s

flight.

Earl Hakon lay behind with his ships, while the
king and the rest of the forces were pursuing the
fugitives ; for the earl’s ships could not get forward
on account of the ships which lay in the way before
him. Then a man came rowing in a boat to the earl’s
ship, and lay at the bulwarks. The man was stout,
and had on a xvhite hat. He hailed the ship. Where
is the earl ?” said he.

The earl was in the fore-hold, stopping a man’s
blood. The earl cast a look at the man in the hat,
and asked what his name was. He answered, “ Here
is Vandraade^: speak to me, earl.”

The earl leant over the ship’s side to him. Then
the man in the boat said, Earl, I will accept of my
life from thee, if thou wilt give it.”

Then the earl raised himself up, called two men
who were friends dear to him, and said to them, “ Go
into the boat ; bring Y andraade to the land ; attend
him to my friend’s Karl the bonder; and tell Karl, as a
token that these words come from me, that he let
Vandraade have the horse which I gave to him
yesterday, and also his saddle, and his son to attend
him.”

Thereupon they went into the boat, and took the
oars in hand, while Vandraade steered. This took
place just about daybreak, while the vessels were
in movement, some rowing towards the land, some

* The unlucky, the ill-fated.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

63

towards the sea, both small and great. Vandraade
steered where he thought there was most room be¬
tween the vessels; and when they came near to Norway
ships the earPs men gave their names, and then they
all allowed them to go where they pleased. Van¬
draade steered along the shore, and only set in towards
the land when they had come past the crowd of
ships. They then went up to Karl the bonder’s
farm, and it was then beginning to be light. They
went into the room where Karl had just put on his
clothes. The earl’s men told him their message, and
Karl said they must first take some food ; and he set a
table before them, and gave them water to wash
with.

Then came the housewife into the room, and said,

I wonder why we could get no peace or rest all
night with the shouting and screaming.”

Karl replies, Dost thou not know that the kings
were fighting all night?”

She asked which had the best of it.

Karl answered, “ The Northmen gained.”

Then,” said she, “ our king will have taken
flight.”

“ Nobody knows,” says Karl, “ whether he has fled
or is fallen.”

She says, “ What a useless sort of king we have!
He is both slow and frightened.”

Then said Vandraade, Frightened he is not ; but
he is not lucky.”

Then Vandraade washed his hands; but he took
the towel and dried them right in the middle of the
cloth. The housewife snatched the towel from him,
and said, “Thou hast been taught little good; it is
wasteful to wet the whole cloth at one time.”

Vandraade replies, “ I may yet come so far forward
in the world as to be able to dry myself with the
middle of the towel.”

64

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX.

Chapter
LXVII.
Of King
Harald.

Chapter
LXVIII.
Finn Arne-
son gets
quarter.

Thereupon Karl set a table before them, and Y an-
draade sat down between them. They ate for a while,
and then went out. The horse was saddled, and
Karl’s son ready to follow him with another horse.
They rode away to the forest ; and the earl’s men
returned to the boat, rowed to the earl’s shij), and
told the success of their expedition.

King Harald and his men followed the fugitives
only a short way, and rowed back to the place where
the deserted ships lay. Then the battle-place was
ransacked, and in King Swend’s ship was found a heap
of dead men ; but the king’s body was not found,
although people believed for certain that he had
fallen. Then King Harald had the greatest attention
paid to the dead of his men, and had the wounds of
the living bound up. The dead bodies of Swend’s
men were brought to the land, and he sent a message
to the peasants to come and bury them. Then he let
the booty be dmded, and this took up some time. The
news came now that King Swend had come to Sea-
land, and that all who had escaped from the battle
had joined him, along with many more, and that he
had a great force.

Earl Finn Arneson was taken prisoner in the
battle, as before related ; and when he was led
before King Harald, the king was very merry, and
said, “ Finn, we meet here now, and we met last
in Norway. The Danish court has not stood very
firmly by thee ; and it will be a troublesome business
for Northmen to drag thee, a blind old man, with
them, and preserve thy life.”

The earl replies, “ The Northmen find it very diffi¬
cult now to conquer, and it is all the worse that thou
hast the command of them.”

Then said King Harald, “ AYilt thou accept of life
and safety, although thou hast not deserved it?”

The earl replies, ‘‘Not from thee, thou dog.”

KINGS OF NOEWAY.

65

The king: “ Wilt thou, then, if thy relation Mag¬
nus gives thee quarter ?

Magnus, King Haralcf s son, was then steering the
ship.

The earl replies, “ Can the whelp rule over life and
quarter ? ”

The king laughed, as if he found amusement in
vexing him. — “Wilt thou accept thy life, then, from
thy she -relation Thor a ?

The earl : “Is she here ? ’’

“ She is here,’’ said the king.

Then Earl Finn broke out with the ugly expres¬
sions which since have been preserved, as a proof that
he was so mad with rage that he could not govern his
tongue : — “ No wonder thou hast bit so strongly, if the
mare was with thee.”

Earl Finn got life and quarter, and the king kept
him a while about him. But Finn was rather melan¬
choly, and obstinate in conversation ; and King Harald
said, “ I see, Finn, that thou dost not live willingly in
company with me and thy relations ; now I will give
thee leave to go to thy friend King Swend.”

The earl said, “ I accept of the offer willingly,
and the more gratefully the sooner I get away from
hence.”

The king afterwards let Earl Finn be landed, and
the traders going to Halland received him well. King
Harald sailed from thence to Norwav with his fleet ;
and went first to Opslo, where he gave all his people
leave to go home who wished to do so.

King Swend, it is told, sat in Denmark all that
winter, and had his kingdom as formerly. In winter
he sent men north to Halland for Karl the bonder
and his wife. When Karl came the king called him
to him, and asked him if he knew him, or thought
he had ever seen him before.

Karl replies, “I know thee, sire, and knew thee

VOL. III. F

SAGA IX.

Cha pter,
LXIX.
Of King
Swend.

66

CHKONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX.

Chapter
LXX.
Of the talk
of the
court-men.

before, the moment I saw thee ; and God be praised
if the small help I could give was of any use to
thee.”

The king replies, I have to reward thee for all the
days I have to live. And now, in the first place, I will
give thee any farm in Sealand thou wouldst desire to
have ; and, in the next place, will make thee a great
man, if thou knowest how to conduct thyself.”

Karl thanked the king for his promise, and said he
had now but one thing to ask.

The king asked what that was.

Karl said that he would ask to take his wife with
him.

The king said, “ I will not let thee do that ; but I
will provide thee a far better and more sensible wife.
But thy wife can keep the bonder-farm ye had before,
and she will have her living from it.”

The king gave Karl a great and valuable farm, and
provided him a good marriage ; and he became a con¬
siderable man. This was reported far and Avide, and
much praised ; and thus it came to be told here north
in Norway.

King Harald staid in Opslo the Avinter after the
battle at Nisaa. In autumn, when the men came
from the south, there Avas much talk and many
stories about the battle Avhich they had fought at
Nisaa, and every one Avho had been there thought he
could tell something about it. Once some of them
sat in a cellar and drank, and Avere very merry and
talkative. They talked about the Nisaa battle, and
who had earned the greatest praise and renoAAui. They
all agreed that no man there had been at all equal to
Earl Hakon. He Avas the boldest in arms, the quick¬
est, and the most lucky: Avhat he did Avas of the
greatest help, and he Avon the battle. King Harald,
in the mean time, Avas out in the yard, and spoke Avith
some people. He Avent then to the room-door, and

KINGS OF NOWAY.

67

said, “ Every one here would now willingly be called
Hakon and tdien went liis way.

Earl Hakon went in winter to the Uplands, and was
all winter in his domains. He was much beloved by
all the Laplanders. It happened, towards spring, that
some men were sitting drinking in the town, and the
conversation turned, as usual, on the Nisaa battle;
and some praised Earl Hakon, and some thought
others as deserving of praise as he. When they had
thus disputed a while, one of them said, “It is pos¬
sible that others fought as bravely as the earl at Nisaa ;
but none, I think, has had such luck with him as he.”

The others replied, that his best luck was his
driving so many Danes to flight along with other men.

The same man replied, “ It was a greater luck that
he gave King Swend quarter.”

One of the company said to him, “ Thou dost not
know what thou art saying.”

He replied, “ I know it for certain, for the man
told me himself who brought the king to the land.”

It went according to the old proverb, that the king
has many ears. This was told the king, and he imme¬
diately ordered horses to be gathered, and rode away
directly with 200 men. He rode all that night, and the
following day. Then some men met them, who were
riding to the town with mead and malt. In the
kin O’’ s retinue was a man called Gammel, who rode to
one of these bonders who was an acquaintance of
his, and spoke to him privately. “I will pay thee,”
said he, “to ride with the greatest speed, by the shortest
private paths that thou knowest, to Earl Hakon, and
tell him the king will kill him ; for the king has got
to the knowledge that Earl Hakon set King Swend on
shore at Msaa.” They agreed on the payment. The
bonder rode, and came to the earl just as he was
sitting drinking, and had not yet gone to bed. When
the bonder told his errand, the earl immediately stood

F 2

SAGA IX.

Ch APTEa

LXXI.
Of the
attempt
to take
Earl Ha-
kon.

68

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX.

Chapter
LXXII.
Of Earl
Hakon.

Chapter
LXXIIL
Agreement
between
King Ha-
rald and
King
Swend.

up with all his men, had all his loose property re¬
moved from the farm to the forest, and all the people
left the house in the night. When the king came he
halted there all night ; but Hakon rode away, and
came east to Sweden to King Steinkel, and staid with
him all summer. King Harald returned to the town,
travelled northwards to Drontheim district, and re¬
mained there all summer ; but in autumn he returned
eastwards to Yiken.

As soon as Earl Hakon heard the king had gone
north, he returned immediately in summer to the
Uplands, and remained there until the king had
returned from the north. Then the earl went east
into Yermeland, where he remained during the winter,
and where the Swedish king gave him fiefs. For
a short time in winter he went west to Rauma-
rige Avith a great troop of men from Gotland and
Yermeland, and received the scatt and duties from
the Upland people Avhich belonged to him, and then
returned to Gotland, and remained there till spring.
King Harald had his seat in Opslo all Avinter, and
sent his men to the Uplands to demand the scatt,
together Avith the king’s land dues, and the mulcts of
court ; but the Uplanders said they Avould pay all
the scatt and dues Avhich they had to pay, to Earl
Hakon as long as he Avas in life, and had not forfeited
his life or his fief ; and the king got no land dues that
Avinter.

This Avinter messengers and embassadors Avent be-
tAveen KorA\^ay and Denmark, Avhose errand Avas that
both Korthmen and Danes should make peace, and a
league with each other, and to ask the kings to agree
to it. These messages gave favourable hopes of a
peace ; and the matter proceeded so far, that a meet¬
ing for peace was appointed at the Gotha river be-
tAveen King Harald and King Swend. When spring
approached, both kings assembled many ships and

KINGS OF NORWAY.

people for this meeting. So says a scald in a poem
on this expedition of the kings, which begins thus : —

The king, who from the northern sound
His land with war-ships girds around.

The raven -feeder, filled the coast
With his proud ships, a gallant host !

The gold-tipped stems dash through the foam
That shakes the seamen’s planked home ;

The high wave breaks up to the mast.

As west of Halland on they passed.

Harald, whose word is fixed and sure.

Whose ships his land from foes secure.

And Swend, whose isles maintain his fleet.

Hasten as friends again to meet;

And every creek with vessels teems, —

All Denmark men and shipping seems ;

And all rejoice that strife will cease.

And men meet now hut to make peace.”

Here it is told that the two kings held the meeting
that was agreed upon between them, and both came
to the frontiers of their kingdoms. So says Halle
Stride : —

‘^‘^To meet (since peace the Dane now craves)

On to the south upon the waves
Sailed forth our gallant northern king,

Peace to the Danes with him to bring.

Swend northward to his frontier hies
To get the peace his people prize.

And meet King Harald, whom he finds
On land, hard used by stormy winds.”

When the kings found each other, people began at
once to talk of their being reconciled. But as soon
as peace was proposed, many began to complain of the
damage they had sustained by berrying, robbing, and
killing men ; and for a long time it did not look very
like peace. It is here related : —

“ Before this meeting of the kings
Each bonder his own losses brings,

And loudly claims some recompence
From his king’s foes, at their expense.

It is not easy to make peace.

Where noise and talking never cease :

The bonders’ warmth may quickly spread.

And kings he by the people led.

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX.

Chapter
LXXIV.
King
Harald’s
quarrel
with Earl
Hakon.

When kings are moved, no peace is sure ;

For that peace only is secure

Which they who make it fairly make, —

To each side give, from each side take.

The kings will often rule but ill
Who listen to the people’s will:

The people often have no view
But their own interests to pursue.”

At last the best men, and those who were the wisest,
came between the kings, and settled the peace thus :
— that Harald should have Norway, and Swend Den¬
mark, according to the boundaries of old established
between Denmark and Norway ; neither of them should
pay to the other for any damage sustained ; the war
should cease as it now stood, each retaining what he
had got ; and this peace should endure as long as
they were kings. This peace was confirmed by oath.
Then the kings parted having, given each other hos¬
tages, as is here related : —

And I have heard that to set fast
The peace God brought about at last,

Swend and stern Harald pledges sent.

Who witnessed to their sworn intent ;

And much I wish that they and all

In no such perjury may fall

That this peace ever should be broken,

And oaths should fail before God spoken.”

King Harald with his people sailed northwards to
Norway, and King Swend southwards to Denmark.

King Harald was in Yiken in the summer, and he
sent his men to the Uplands after the scatt and duty
which belonged to him ; but the bonders paid no at¬
tention to the demand, but said they would hold all
for Earl Hakon until he came for it. Earl Hakon
was then up in Gotland with a large armed force.
When summer was past King Harald went south to
Konghelle. Then he took all the light-sailing vessels
he could get hold of, and steered up the river. He
had the vessels drawn past all the waterfalls, and
brought them thus into the Wener lake. Then he

KINGS OF NORWAY.

71

rowed eastward across tlie lake to where lie heard Earl
Hakon was j but when the earl got news of the king s
expedition he retreated down the country, and would
not let the king plunder the land. Earl Hakon had
a large armed force which the Gotland people had
raised for him. Iving Harald lay with his ships up in
a river, and made a foray on land, but left some of his
men behind to protect the ships. The king himself
rode with a part of the men, but the greater part
were on foot. They had to cross a forest, where they
found a mire or lake, and close to it a wood , and when
they reached the wood they saw the earl s men, but
the mire was between them. They drew up their
people now on both sides. Then King Harald ordered
his men to sit down on the hill- side. W^e will
first see if they will attack us. Earl Hakon does not
usually wait to talk.” It was frosty weather, mth
some snow -drift, and Harald’s men sat down under
their shields ; but it was cold for the Gotlanders, who
had but little clothing with them. The earl told them
to wait until King Harald came nearer, so that all
would stand equally high on the ground. Earl Hakon
had the same banner which had belonged to King
Magnus Olafsson.

The lagman of the Gotland people, Thorvid, sat
upon a horse, and the bridle was fastened to a stake
that stood in the mire. He broke out with these
words : '' God knows we have many brave and hand¬
some fellows here, and we shall let King Steinkel heai
that we stood by the good earl bravely. I am sure
of one thing : we shall behave gallantly against these
Northmen, if they attack us 5 but if our young people
give way, and should not stand to it, let us not
farther than to that stream 5 but if they should give
way farther, which I am sure they will not do, let it
not be farther than to that hill.” At that instant the
Northmen sprang up, raised the war-cry, and struck

F 4

SAGA IX.

72

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX

Chapter
LXXV.
Death of

on their shields ; and the Gotland army began also to
shout. The lagman’s horse got shy with the war cry,
and backed so hard that the stake flew up and struck
the lagman on the head. He said, “ Ill luck to thee,
Northman, for that arrow!” and away fled the lag-
man. King Harald had told his people, “ If we do
make a clash with the weapons, we shall not, however,
go down from the hill until they come nearer to us;”
and they did so. When the war-cry was raised the earl
let his banner advance ; but when they came under
the hill the king’s army rushed down upon them, and
killed some of the earl’s people, and the rest fled.
The Northmen did not pursue the fugitives long, for
it was the fall of day ; but they took Earl Hakon’s
banner, and all the arms and clothes they could get
hold of. King Harald had both the banners carried
before him as they marched away. They spoke among
themselves that the earl had probably fallen. As they
were riding through the forest they could only ride
singly, one following the other. Suddenly a man
came full gallop across the path, struck his spear
through him who was carrying the earl’s banner,
seized the banner-staff, and rode into the forest on
the other side with the banner. When this was told
the king he said, Bring me my armour, for the earl
is alive.” Then the king rode to his ships in the
night ; and many said that the earl had now taken
his revenge. But Thiodolf sang thus : —

Steinkel’s troops, who were so bold,

Who the Earl Hakon would uphold.

Were driven by our horsemen’s pow'^er
To Hel, death goddess, in an hour;

And the great earl, so men say
Who won’t admit he ran away.

Because his men fled from the ground.

Retired, and cannot now he found.”

The rest of the night Harald passed in his ships ;
but in the morning, when it was daylight, it was

KINGS OF NORWAY.

73

found that so tliick ice had gathered about the vessels
that one could walk around them. The king ordered
his men to cut the ice from the ships all the way out
to the clear water ; on which they all went to break
the ice. King Harald’s son Magnus steered the vessel
that lay lowest down the river and nearest the water.
When the people had cleared the ice away almost en¬
tirely, a man ran out to the ice, and began hewing
away at it like a madman. Then said one of the men,
“ It is going now as usual, that none can do so much
as Hall who killed Kodran, when once he lays himself
to the work. See how he is heaving away at the ice.’’
There was a man in the crew of Magnus the king’s
son who was called Thormod Eindredsson ; and when
he heard the name of Kodran’s murderer he ran up
to Hall, and gave him a death-wound. Kodran was
a son of Gudmund Eyolfsson ; and Yolgerd, who was a
sister of Gudmund, was the mother of Jorna, and the
grandmother by the mother’s side of this Thormod.
Thormod was a year old when Kodran was killed,
and had never seen Hall Otrygsson until now. When
the ice was broken all the way out to the water, Mag¬
nus drew his ship out, set sail directly, and sailed
westward across the lake ; but the king’s ship, which
lay farthest up the river, came out the last. Hall had
been in the king’s retinue, and was very dear to him ;
so that the king was enraged at his death. The king
came the last into the harbour, and Magnus had let
the murderer escape into the forest, and offered to
pay the mulct for him ; and the king had very nearly
attacked Magnus and his crew, but their friends came
up and reconciled them.

That winter King Harald went up to Raumarike, and
had many people with him ; and he accused the bonders
there of having kept from him his scatt and duties,
and of having aided his enemies to raise disturbance
ao'ainst him. He seized on the bonders, and maimed

SAGA IX.

Hall, the
murderer of
Kodran.

Chapteii
LXXVI.
Of King
Harald.

74

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX. some, killed others, and robbed many of all their pro-
perty. They who could do it fled from him. He
burned every thing in the districts, and laid them
altogether waste. So says Thiodolf : —

He who the island-people drove,

When they against his power strove.

Now bridles Raumarike’s men.

Marching his forces through their glen.

To punish them the fire he lights
That shines afar off in dark nights
From house and yard, and, as he says.

Will warn the man who disobeys.”

Thereafter the king went up to Hedemark, burnt
the dwellings, and made no less waste and havoc there
than in Raumarike. From thence he went to Hade-
land and Ringarike, burning and ravaging all the
land. So says Thiodolf: —

“ The bonder’s household goods are seen
Before his door upon the green,

Smoking and singed; and sparks red hot
Glow in the thatched roof of his cot. '

In Hedemark the bonders pray
The king his crushing hand to stay ;

In Ringarike and Hadeland,

None ’gainst his fiery wrath can stand.”

Then the bonders left all to the king’s mercy.
After the death of King Magnus fifteen years had
passed when the battle at Kisaa took place, and after¬
wards two years elapsed before Harald and Swend
made peace. So says Thiodolf : —

The Hordland king under the land
At anchor lay close to the strand,

At Hvarf, prepared with shield and spear;

But peace was settled the third year.”

After this peace the disturbances with the people
of the Upland districts lasted a year and a half. So
says Thiodolf: —

“ No easy task it is to say
How the king brought beneath his sway
The Upland bonders, and would give
Nought but their ploughs from which to live.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

75

The king in eighteen months brought down
Their bonder power_, and raised his own^

And the great honour he has gained
Will still in memory be retained.”

Edward, Ethelred’s son, was king of England after
liis brother Hardacanute. He was called Edward the
Good ; and so he was. King Edward’s mother was
Queen Emma, daughter of Kichard earl of Kouen.
Her brother was Earl Robert, whose son was William
the Bastard, who at that time was earl at Rouen in
Kormandy. King Edward’s queen was Gyda"^, a
daughter of Earl Godwin the son of Ulfnad.f Gyda’s
brothers were, Earl TosteJ, the eldest; Earl Mauro-
kari§ the next; Earl Walter || the third; Earl Swend
the fourth ; and the fifth was Harald, who was the
youngest, and he was brought up at King Edward’s
court, and was his foster-son. The king loved him
very much, and kept him as his own son^; for he had
no children.

One summer it happened that Harald, the son of
Godwin, made an expedition to Bretland^^ with his
ships ; but when they got to sea they met a contrary
wind, and were driven off into the ocean. They
landed west in Normandy, after suffering from a
dangerous storm. They brought up at Rouen, where

* She is called Githa and Editha by English writers. See Rapin,
vol. i. p. 142.

t Earl Godwin was the son of Ulfnoth ; the same name as Ulfnad.

t Plarald^ and not Toste, was the eldest son of Earl Godwin, accord¬
ing to our English historians; but the enmity of Toste and others at
his assuming the royal title is better accounted for by supposing he was
the youngest, and the foster-son of King Edward.

§ Earl Morcar, as he is called in English history, was not Harald’s
brother, but the brother of his wife only.

II Earl Walter was not a son of Earl Godwin, but of Si ward, earl of
Northumberland.

^ This does not agree with the account of our historians, who say
that King Edward favoured Edgar, son of his brother Edmund, who
was brought up in Hungary.

. * * * § ** This expedition has been against Wales — - Bretland — by the

context.

SAGA IX.

Chapter
LXXVII.
Of the
kings of
England.

Chapter
LXXYJIL.
Of Harald
Godwins-
son.

7G

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX.

Chapter

LXXIX.

King

Edward’s

death.

they met Earl William, who received Harald and his
company gladly. Harald remained there late in
harvest, and was hospitably entertained ; for the
stormy weather continued, and there was no getting
to sea, and this continued until winter set in ; so the
earl and Harald agreed that he should remain there
all winter. Harald sat on the high seat on one side
of the earl ; and on the other side sat the earhs wife,
one of the most beautiful women that could be seen.
They often talked together for amusement at the
drinking-table ; and the earl went generally to bed,
but Harald and the earl’s wife sat long in the even¬
ings talking together, and so it went on for a great
part of the winter. In one of their conversations
she said to Harald, “ The earl has asked me what it
is we have to talk about so much, for he is angry at
it.” Harald replies, “We shall then at once let him
know all our conversation.” The following day,
Harald asked the earl to a conference, and they went
together into the conference-chamber ; where also the
queen was, and some of the councillors. Then Ha¬
rald began thus : — “ I have to inform you, earl, that
there lies more in my visit here than I have let you
know. I would ask your daughter in marriage, and
have often spoken over this matter with her mother,
and she has promised to support my suit with you.”
As soon as Harald had made known this proposal of
his, it was well received by all who were present.
They explained the case to the earl ; and at last it
came so far, that the girl was contracted to Harald ;
but as she was very young, it was resolved that the
wedding should be deferred for some years.

When spring came Harald rigged his ships, and set
off ; and he and the earl parted with great friendship.
Harald sailed over to England to King Edward, but
did not return to Valland to fulfil the marriage agree¬
ment. Edward was king over England for twenty-

KINGS OF NOKWAY.

77

three years, and died * on a bed of sickness in London
on the 5th of January, and was buried in Paul’s
church. Englishmen call him a saint.

The sons of Earl Godwin were the most powerful
men in England. Toste was made chief of the English
Idng’s army, and was his land- defence man when the
king began to grow old ; and he was also placed above
all the other earls. His brother Harald was always
with the court itself, and nearest to the king in all
service, and had the charge of the king’s treasure-
chamber. It is said that when the king was ap¬
proaching his last hour, Harald and a few others were
with him. Harald first leant down over the king,
and then said, “ I take you all to witness that the
king has now given me the kingdom, and all the
realm of England:” and then the king was taken
dead out of the bed. The same day there was a
meeting of the chiefs, at which there was some
talk of choosing a king ; and then Harald brought
forward his witnesses that King Edward had given
him the kingdom on his dying day. The meeting
ended by choosing Harald as king, and he was con¬
secrated and crowned the 13th day of Yule, in
Paul’s church. Then all the chiefs and all the people
submitted to him. Now when his brother Earl Toste
heard of this he took it very ill, as he thought him¬
self quite as well entitled to be king. “ I want,” said
he, “ that the principal men of the country choose
him whom they think best fitted for it.” And sharp
words passed between the brothers. King Harald
says he will not give up his kingly dignity, for he
is seated on the throne which kings sat upon, and is
anointed and consecrated a king. On his side also
was the strength of the people, for he had the king’s
whole treasure.

SAGA IX.

Chapter,
LXXX.
Harald
Godwi ns-
son made
king of
England.

* In the year 106G according to the Saxon Chronicle.

78

CHRONICLE OE THE

SAGA IX.

Chapter
LXXXI.
Earl
Toste’s
expedition
to Den¬
mark.

Now when King Harald perceived that his brother
Toste wanted to have him deprived of the kingdom,
he did not trust him ; for Toste was a clever man, and
a great warrior, and was in friendship with the prin¬
cipal men of the country. He therefore took the
command of the army from Toste, and also all the
power he had beyond that of the other earls of the
country. Earl Toste, again, would not snbmit to be
his own brother’s serving-man ; therefore he went
with his people over the sea to Flanders, and staid
there a while, then went to Friesland, and from thence
to Denmark to his relation King Swend. Earl Ulf,
King Swend’ s father, and Gy da, Earl Toste’s mother,
were brother’s and sister’s children. The earl now asked
King Swend for support and help of men ; and King
Swend invited him to stay with him, with the pro¬
mise that he should get so large an earldom in Den¬
mark that he would be an important chief.

The earl replies, “ My inclination is to go back to
my estate in England ; but if I cannot get help from
you for that purpose, I will agree to help you mth all
the power I can command in England, if you will go
there with the Danish army, and win the country, as
Canute your mother’s brother did.”

The king replied, “ So much smaller a man am I
than Canute the Great, that I can with difficulty
defend my own Danish dominions against the North¬
men. King Canute, on the other hand, got the Danish
kingdom in heritage, took England by slash and blow,
and sometimes was near losing his life in the contest ;
and Norway he took mthout slash or blow. Now it
suits me much better to be guided by my own slender
ability, than to imitate my relation King Canute’s
lucky hits.”

Then Earl Toste said, “ The result of my errand
here is less fortunate than I expected of thee who art
so gallant a man, seeing tliat thy relative is in so

KINGS OF NOEWAY.

79

great need. It may be that I will seek friendly help
where it could less be expected ; and that I may find
a chief who is less afraid, king, than thou art of a
great enterprise.^’

Then the king and the earl parted, not just the
best friends.

Earl Toste turned away then, and went to Norway,
where he presented himself to King Harald, who was
at that time in Yiken. When they met the earl ex¬
plained his errand to the king. He told him all his
proceedings since he left England, and asked his aid
to recover his dominions in England.

The king replied, that the Northmen had no great
desire for a campaign in England, and to have English
chiefs over them there. “ People say,” added he,
“ that the English are not to be trusted.”

The earl replied, “Is it true what I have heard
people tell in England, that thy relative King Mag¬
nus sent men to King Edward with the message that
King Magnus had right to England as well as to
Denmark, and had got that heritage after Harda-
canute, in consequence of a regular agreement?”

The king replied, “ How came it that he did not
get it, if he had right to it ? ”

“ Why,” replied the earl, “ hast thou not Denmark,
as King Magnus thy predecessor had it ? ”

The king replies, “ the Danes have nothing to
brag of over us Northmen; for many a place have we
laid in ashes to thy relations.”

Then said the earl, “ If thou wilt not tell me, I
will tell thee. Magnus subdued Denmark, because
all the chiefs of the country helped him ; and
thou hast not done it, because all the people of the
country were against thee. Therefore, also. King
Magnus did not strive for England, because all the
nation would have Edward for king. Wilt thou
take England now ? I mil bring the matter so far

SAGA IX.

Chapter
LXXXII.
Earl
Toste’s
expedition
to Norway.

80

CHRONICLE OF THE

most of the principal men in England shall be
thy friends, and assist thee ; for nothing is wanting to
place me at the side of mybrother Harald but the
king’s name. All men allow that there never was
such a warrior in the northern lands as thou art ; and
it appears to me ext /aordinary that thou hast been
lighting for fifteen years for Denmark, and wilt not
take England that lies open to thee.”

King Harald weighed carefully the earl’s words,
and perceived at once that there was truth in much
of what he said ; and he himself had also a sreat
desire to acquire dominions. Then King Harald and
the earl talked long and frequently together; and at
last he took the resolution to proceed in summer to
England, and conquer the country. King Harald
sent a message-token through all Norway, and orderd
out a levy of one half of all the men in Norway able to
carry arms. When this became generally knomi, there
were many guesses about what might be the end of
this expedition. Some reckoned up King Harald’s great
achievements, and thought he was also the man Avho
could accomplish this. Others, again, said that Eng¬
land was diificult to attack ; that it was very full of peo¬
ple; and the men-at-arms, Avho were called Thing-men,
were so brave, that one of them was better than two
of Harald’s best men. Then said Ulf the marshal: —

I am still ready gold to gain ;

But truly it would be in vain^

And the king’s marshal in the hall
Might leave his good post once for all.

If two of us in any strife

Must from one Thingman fly for life.

My lovely Norse maid, in my youth
We thought the opposite the truth.”

Ulf the marshal died that spring. King Harald
stood over his grave, and said, as he was leaving it.

There lies now the truest of men, and the most de¬
voted to his king.”

KINGS OF NORWAY.

81

Earl Toste sailed in spring west to Flanders, to
meet the people who had left England with him, and
others besides who had gathered to him both out of
England and Flanders.

King Harald’s fleet assembled in Solundir.^ When
King Harald was ready to leave Nidaros he went to
King Olaf ’s shrine, unlocked it, clipped his hair and
nails, and locked the shrine again, and threw the keys
into the Nid. Some say he threw them overboard
outside of Agdaness ; and since then the shrine of
Saint Olaf the king has never been opened. Thirty-
five years had passed since he was slain ; and he lived
thirty-five years here on earth. King Harald sailed
with the ships he had about him to the south to meet
his people, and a great fleet was collected ; so that, ac¬
cording to the people’s reckoning. King Harald had
nearly 200 ships, besides provision- ships and small
craft.

While they lay in Solundir a man called Gyrder,
on board the king’s ship, had a dream. He thought
he was standing in the king’s ship, and saw a great
witch-wife standing on the island, with a fork in one
hand and a trough in the other. He thought also that
he saw over all the fleet, and that a fowl was sitting
upon every ship’s stern, and that these fowls were all
ravens or ernes; and the witch-wife sang this song: —

From the east Fll ’tice the kiiig^

To the west the king I ll bring;

Many a noble bone will be
In battle left for me.

Ravens o’er Ginke’s^ ship are flitting,

Eyeing the prey they think most fitting.

Upon the stem I’ll sail with them!

Upon the stem I’ll sail with them!”

* Solundir, the Sulen Isles, at the mouth of Sogne fiord.

Ginke, a celebrated viking. Here Ginke’s ship means Harald’s, the
leader of the army.

VOL. Ill. G

SAGA rx.

Chapter

LXXXTII.

Gyrder’s

dream.

82

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX.

ChAPI’E 11

LXXXIV.

Thord’s

dream.

Chapter

LXXXV.

King

Harald’s

dream.

There was also a man called Tliord, in a ship which
lay not far from the king’s. He dreamt one night
that he saw King Harald’s fleet coming to land, and

he knew the land to be England. He saw a great

battle-array on the land; and he thought both sides
began to fight, and had many banners flapping in the
air. And before the army of the people of the coun- i

try was riding a huge witch- wife upon a wolf; and |

the wolf had a man’s carcass in his mouth, and the i
blood was dropping from his jaws ; and when he had
eaten up one body she threw another into his mouth,
and so one after another, and he swallowed them all.
And she sang thus : —

Skade’s eagle eyes |

The king’s ill luck espies; 1

Though glancing shields j

Hide the green fields^ !

The king’s ill luck she spies. j

To hode the doom of this great king, I

The flesh of bleeding men I fling
To hairy jaw and hungry maw !

To hairy jaw and hungry maw! ”

King Harald also dreamt one night that he was in
Nidaros, and met his brother King Olaf, who sang to
him these verses : —

In many a fight
My name was bright ;

Men weep, and tell
How Olaf fell.

Thy death is near ;

Thy corpse, 1 fear,

The crow will feed.

The witch- wife’s steed.”

Many other dreams and forebodings were then told
of, and most of them gloomy. Before King Harald left
Drontheim, he let his son Magnus be proclaimed
king, and set him as king over Norway while he Avas
absent. Thora, the daughter of Thorberg, also re¬
mained behind ; but he took Avith him Queen Elisof

KINGS OF NORWAY.

83

and her two daughters, Maria and Ingigerd. Olaf,
King Harakhs son, also accompanied his father abroad.

When King Harald was clear for sea, and the wind
became favourable, he sailed out into the ocean ; and
he himself landed in Shetland, but a part of his fleet
in the Orkney Islands. King Harald stopped but a
short time in Shetland before sailing to Orkney,
from whence he took with him a great armed force,
and the earls Paul and Erling, the sons of Earl Thor-
finn ; but he left behind him here the Queen Ellisof,
and her daughters Maria and Ingigerd. Then he
sailed, leaving Scotland and England westward of
him, and landed at a place called Kliílönd.^ There
he went on shore and plundered, and brought the
country in subjection to him without opposition. Then
he brought up at Skardaborg f, and fought with the
people of the place. He went up a hill which is
there, and made a great pile upon it, which he set on
fire; and when the pile was in clear flame, his men
took large forks and pitched the burning wood down
into the town, so that one house caught fire after the
other, and the town surrendered. The Northmen
killed many people there, and took all the booty they
could lay hold of. There was nothing left for the
Englishmen now, if they would preserve their lives,
but to submit to King Harald ; and thus he subdued
the country wherever he came. Then the king pro¬
ceeded south along the land, and brought up at Hellor-
ness J, where there came a force that had been assem¬
bled to oppose him, with which he had a battle, and
gained the victory.

Thereafter the king sailed to the Humber, and up
along the river, and then he landed. Up in Jorvik§
were two earls, Earl Mauro-kaare || , and his bro-

SAGA IX.

Chapter
LXXXVI.
Battle at
Scarbo¬
rough.

Chapter

Lxxxvir.

Of Harald’s
order of
battle.

Cleveland. I Scarborough,

ij; Holderness. § York.

II Morcar, or Morcad^ in our histories.

G 2

84

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX.

Chapteii
LXXXVIll
The battle
at the
Humber.

ther Earl Walthiof of Hundatunir and they had
an immense army. While the army of the earls
Avas coming doAvn from the upper part of the coun¬
try, King Harald lay in the Usa. f King Harald
now went on the land, and dreAv up his men. The
one arm of his line stood at the outer edge of
the river, the other turned up toAvards the land
along a ditch ; and there Avas also a morass, deep,
broad, and full of Avater. The earls let their army
proceed slowly doAAui along the river, Avith all their
troops in line. The king’s banner was next the river,
where the line was thickest. It Avas thinnest at the
ditch, where also the Aveakest of the men were.
When the earls advanced downwards along the ditch,
the arm of the Northmen’s line which was at the
ditch gave way ; and the Englishmen followed, think¬
ing the Northmen would fly. The banner of Earl
Mauro-kaare advanced then bravely.

When King Harald saw that the English array had
come to the ditch against him, he ordered the charge
to be sounded, and urged on his men. He ordered
the banner Avhich was called the Land-ravager to be
carried before him, and made so severe an assault
that all had to give Avay before it; and there was a
great loss among the men of the earls, and they soon
broke into flight, some running up the river, some
doAvn, and the most leaping into the ditch, AAdiich was
so tilled Avith dead that the Norsemen could go dry-
foot over the fen. There Earl Mauro-kaare fell. So
says Stein Herdisarson : —

The gallant Harald drove along,

Flying but fighting, the whole throng.

At last, confused, they could not fight.

And the whole body took to flight.

Up from the river’s silent stream
At once rose desperate splash and scream;

* Huntington.

f The Ouse.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

85

But they who stood like men this fray
Round Mauro-kaare’s^' body lay.”

This song was composed by Stein Herdisarson
about Olaf, son of King Harald ; and he speaks of
Olaf being in this battle with King Harald his father.
These things are also spoken of in the song called
“ Harald’ s Stave : ” —

“ Earl W^althiof ’s men
Lay in the fen^

By sword down hewed,

So thickly strewed.

That Norsemen say
They paved a way
Across the fen
For the hrave Norsemen.”

Earl Walthiof, and the people who escaped, fled up
to the castle in Y ork ; and there the greatest loss of
men had been. This battle took place upon the Wed¬
nesday next Mathias’ day.f

Earl Toste had come from Flanders to King Harald
as soon as he arrived in England, and the earl was pre¬
sent at all these battles. It happened, as he had fore¬
told the king at their first meeting, that in England
many people would flock to them, as being friends and
relations of Earl Toste, and thus the king’s forces were
much strengthened. After the battle now told of, all
people in the nearest districts submitted to Harald,
but some fled. Then the king advanced to take the
castle, and laid his army at Stafnfurdo-bryggia J ; and
as King Harald had gained so great a victory against
so great chiefs and so great an army, the people were
dismayed, and doubted if they could make any oppo¬
sition. The men of the castle therefore determined,

* This appears to be a mistake of Snorro, or of the scald Stein
Herdisarson. Mauro-kaare was not slain in this battle of Battlebridge.
(See Torfæus, Histor. Norv. pt. hi. p. 308.) Mauro-kaare, or Morcad and
Walthiof, were not brothers, as stated in chap. 87. Morcad’s brother
was Edwin, earl of Mercia.

t Saint Matthew’s Day is the 20th September,
t Stanford Bridge.

G 3

SAGA IX.

Chapter
LXXXIX.
Of Earl
Toste.

86

CimONICLE OE THE

SAGA IX.

CilAlTEIl

xc.

Of King
Harald’s
landing.

in a council, to send a message to King Harald, and
deliver up the castle into his power. All this was
soon settled ; so that on Sunday the king proceeded
with the whole army to the castle, and appointed a
Thing of the people without the castle, at which the
people of the castle were to be present. At this
Thing all the people accepted the condition of sub¬
mitting to Harald, and gave him, as hostages, the
children of the most considerable persons ; for Earl
Toste was well acquainted with all the people of that
town. In the evening the king returned down to his
ships, after this victory achieved with his own force,
and was very merry. A Thing was appointed within
the castle early on Monday morning, and then King
Harald was to name officers to rule over the town, to
give out laws, and bestow fiefs. The same evening,
after sunset, King Harald Godwinsson came from the
south to the castle with a numerous army, and rode
into the city with the good-will and consent of the
people of the castle. All the gates and walls were
beset so that the Northmen could receive no intelli¬
gence, and the army remained all night in the town.

On Monday, when King Harald Sigurdsson had
taken breakfast, he ordered the trumjDets to sound
for going on shore. The army accordingly got ready,
and he divided the men into the parties who should
go, and who should stay behind. In every division
he allowed two men to land, and one to remain behind.
Earl Toste and his retinue prepared to land with
King Harald ; and, for watching the ships, remained
behind the king’s son Olaf; the earls of Orkney, Paul
and Erlend ; and also Eystein Orre, a son of Thorberg
Arneson, who was the most able and best beloved by
the king of all the lendermen, and to whom the king
had promised his daughter jMaria. The weatlier was
uncommonly fine, and it was hot sunshine. The
men therefore laid aside their armour, and went on

KINGS OF NOEWAY.

87

the land only with their shields, helmets, and spears,
and girt with swords ; and many had also arrows and
bows, and all were very merry. Now as they came
near the castle a great army seemed coming against
them, and they saw a cloud of dust as from horses^
feet, and under it shining shields and bright armour.
The king halted his people, and called to him Earl
Toste, and asked him what army this could be. The
earl replied, that he thought it most likely to be a
hostile army; but possibly it might be some of his
relations who were seeking for mercy and friendship,
in order to obtain certain peace and safety from the
king. Then the king said, We must all halt, to dis¬
cover what kind of a force this is.” They did so ;
and the nearer this force came the greater it appeared,
and their shining arms were to the sight like glancing
ice.

Then said King Harald, “ Let us now fall upon
some good sensible counsel ; for it is not to be con¬
cealed that this is an hostile army, and the king him¬
self without doubt is here.”

Then said the earl, “The first counsel is to turn
about as fast as we can to our ships to get our men
and our we^ons, and then we will make a defence
according to our ability ; or otherwise let our ships
defend us, for there these horsemen have no power
over us.”

Then King Harald said, “ I have another counsel.
Put three of our best horses under three of our brisk¬
est lads, and let them ride with all speed to tell our
people to come quickly to our relief. The Englishmen
shall have a hard fray of it before we give ourselves
up for lost.”

The earl said the king must order in this, as in all
things, as he thought best ; adding, at the same time,
it was by no means his wish to fly. Then King Harald

G 4

SAGA IX.

Chapter
XCI.
Of Eail
Toste’s
counsel.

88

CHRONICLE OE THE

SAGA IX.

CHAPTEa

XCII.
Of King
Harald’s
arra}'.

Chapteii
XCII I.
Of King
Harald
Godwins-
son.

Chapter
XCIV.
or the

ordered his banner Land-ravager to be set up ; and
Frirek was the name of him who bore the banner.

Then King Harald arranged his army, and made the
line of battle long, but not deep. He bent both mngs
of it back, so that they met together; and formed a
wide ring equally thick all round, shield to shield,
both in the front and rear ranks. The king himself
and his retinue were within the circle ; and there was
the banner, and a body of chosen men. Earl Toste,
with his retinue, was at another place, and had a dif¬
ferent banner. The army was arranged in this way,
because the king knew that horsemen were accustomed
to ride forwards with great vigour, but to turn back
immediately. Now the king ordered that his own
and the earl’s attendants should ride forwards where
it was most required. And our bowmen,” said he,
“ shall be near to us ; and they who stand in the first
rank shall set the spear-shaft on the ground, and the
spear-point against the horseman’s breast, if he rides
at them; and those who stand in the second rank
shall set the spear-point against the horse’s breast.”

King Harald Godwinsson had come with an immense
army, both of cavalry and infantry. Now King Harald
Sigurdsson rode around his array, to see how every
part was drawn up.. He was upon a black horse, and
the horse stumbled under him, so that the king fell
off. He got up in haste, and said, “ A fall is lucky
for a traveller.”

The English king Harald said to the Northmen
who were with him, Do ye know the stout man who
fell from his horse, with the blue kirtle and the beau¬
tiful helmet?”

“ That is the king himself,” said they.

The English king said, “A great man, and of stately
appearance is he; but I think his luck has left him.”

Twenty horsemen rode forward from the Thing-
men’s troops against the Northmen’s array ; and all

KINGS OF NORWAY.

89

of them, and likewise their horses, were clothed in saga ix.
armour. troop of the

One of the horsemen said, “ Is Earl Toste in this
army ? ”

The earl answered, “ It is not to be denied that ye
will find him here.”

The horseman says, Thy brother King Harald sends
thee salutation, with the message that thou shalt have
the whole of Northumberland; and rather than thou
shouldst not submit to him, he will give thee the third
part of his kingdom to rule over along with himself.”

The earl replies, “ This is something dificrent from
the enmity and scorn he offered last winter; and if
this had been offered then it would have saved many
a man’s life who now is dead, and it would have been
better for the kingdom of England. But if I accept
of this ofier, what will he give King Harald Sigurdsson
for his trouble?”

The horseman replied, “ He has also spoken of this;
and will give him seven feet of English ground, or as
much more as he may be taller than other men.”

“ Then,” said the earl, “ go now and tell King
Harald to get ready for battle ; for never shall the
Northmen say with truth that Earl Toste left King
Harald Sigurdsson to join his enemy’s troops, when
he came to fight west here in England. We shall
rather all take the resolution to die with honour, or
to gain England by a victory.”

Then the horsemen rode back.

King Harald Sigurdsson said to tlie earl, “ Who
was the man who spoke so well ?”

The earl replied, “ That was King Harald Godwins-
son.”

Then said King Harald Sigurdsson, “ That was by
far too long concealed from me ; for they had come so
near to our army, that this Harald should never have
carried back the tidings of our men’s slaughter.”

CHRONICLE OF THE

Then said the earl, “ It was certainly imprudent
for such chiefs, and it may be as you say ; but I saw
he was going to offer me peace and a great dominion,
and that, on the other hand, I would be his mur¬
derer if I betrayed him ; and I would rather he
should be my murderer than I his, if one of two be |
to die.’’ I

King Harald Sigurdsson observed to his men, “ That |
was but a little man, yet he sat firmly in his stir- I
rups.”

It is said that Harald made these verses at fhis
time : —

Advance! advance! |

No helmets glance^ |

But blue swords play
In our array.

Advance ! advance !

No mail-coats glance.

But hearts are here
That ne’er knew fear.’"

His coat of mail was called Emma ; and it was so
long that it reached almost to the middle of his leg,
and so strong that no weapon ever pierced it. Then
said King Harald Sigurdsson, “ These verses are but
ill composed; I must try to make better;” and he
composed the following : —

In battle-storm we seek no lee.

With skulking head, and bending knee,

Behind the hollow shield.

With eye and hand we fend the head;

Courage and skill stand in the stead
Of panzer, helm, and shield.

In Hilda’s bloody field.”

Thereupon Thiodolf sang : —

^‘'And should our king in battle fall, —

A fate that God may give to all, —

His sons will vengeance take ;

And never shone the sun upon
Two nobler eaglets in his run.

And them we’ll ne’er forsake.”

KINGS OF NOKWAY.

91

Now the battle began. The Englishmen made a
hot assault upon the Northmen, who sustained it
bravely. It was no easy matter for the English to
ride against the Northmen on account of their spears;
therefore they rode in a circle around them. And the
light at first was but loose and light, as long as the
Northmen kept their order of battle ; for although
the English rode hard against the Northmen, they
gave way again immediately, as they could do nothing
against them. Now when the Northmen thought
they perceived that the enemy were making but weak
assaults, they set after them, and would drive them
into flight ; but when they had broken their shield-
rampart the Englishmen rode up from all sides, and
threw arrows and spears on them. Now when King
Harald Sigurdsson saw this, he went into the fray
where the greatest crash of weapons was ; and there
was a sharp conflict, in which many people fell on
both sides. King Harald then was in a rage, and ran
out in front of the array, and hewed down with both
hands ; so that neither helmet nor armour could with¬
stand him, and all who were nearest gave way before
him. It was then very near with the English that
they had taken to flight. So says Arnor, the earl’s
scald : —

Where battle-storm was ringings

Where arrow-cloud was singing,

Harald stood there.

Of armour bare,

His deadly sword still swinging.

The foemen feel its bite;

His Norsemen rush to fight.

Danger to share
With Harald there.

Where steel on steel was ringing.’'

King Harald Sigurdsson was hit by an arrow in
the windpipe, and that was his death-wound. He
fell, and all who had advanced with him, except
those who retired with the banner. There was after-

SAGA IX.

Chapter.

xcv.

Of the
beginning
of the
battle.

Chapter
XCVI.
Fall of
King
Harald

92

CIIEONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX.

Chapter
XCVII.
Skirmish of
Orre.

wards the warmest conflict, and Earl Toste had taken
charge of the king’s banner. They began on both
sides to form their array again, and for a long time
there was a pause in fighting. Then Thiodolf sang
these verses : —

The army stands in hushed dismay;

Stilled is the clamour of the fray.

Harald is dead, and with him goes
The spirit to withstand our foes.

A bloody scatt the folk must pay
For their king’s folly on this day.

He fell ; and now, without disguise.

We say this business was not wise.”

But before the battle began again Harald Godwinsson
offered his brother Earl Toste peace, and also quarter to
the Northmen who were still alive; but the North¬
men called out all of them together that they would
rather fall, one across the other, than accept of quarter
from the Englishmen. Then each side set up a war-
shout, and the battle began again. So says Arnor,
the earl’s scald : —

“ The king, whose name would ill-doers scare.

The gold-tipped arrow would not spare.

Unhelmed, unpan zered, without shield.

He fell among us in the field.

The gallant men who saw him fall
Would take no quarter; one and all
Resolved to die with their loved king,

Around his corpse in a corpse-ring.”

Ey stein Orre came up at this moment from the
ships with the men who followed him, and all were
clad in armour. Then Eystein got King Harald’s
banner Land-ravager ; and now was, for the third time,
one of the sharpest of conflicts, in which many En¬
glishmen fell, and they were near to taking flight.
This conflict is called Orre’s storm. Eystein and his
men had hastened so fast from the ships that they
were quite exhausted, and scarcely fit to fight before
they came into the battle ; but afterwards they became
so furious, that they did not guard themselves witli

KINGS OF NOKWAY.

93

their shields as long as they could stand upright. At
last they threw off their coats of ring-mail, and then
the Englishmen could easily lay their blows at them ;
and many fell from weariness, and died without a
wound. Thus almost all the chief men fell among the
Norway people. This happened towards evening ; and
then it went, as one might expect, that all had not
the same fate, for many fled, and were lucky enough
to escape in various ways ; and darkness fell before
the slaughter was altogether ended.

Styrkar, King Harald Sigurdsson’s marshal, a gal¬
lant man, escaped upon a horse, on which he rode
away in the evening. It was blowing a cold wind,
and Styrkar had not much other clothing upon him
but his shirt, and had a helmet on his head, and a
drawn sword in his hand. As soon as his weariness
was over, he began to feel cold. A waggoner met
him in a lined skin-coat. Styrkar asks him, Wilt
thou sell thy coat, friend ?”

“Not to thee,” says the peasant : “ thou art a
Northman ; that I can hear by thy tongue.”

Styrkar replies, “If I were a Northman, what
wouldst thou do?”

“ I would kill thee,” replied the peasant ; “ but, as
ill luck would have it, I have no weapon just now by
me that would do it.”

Then Styrkar says, “ As you can’t kill me, friend,
I shall try if I can’t kill you.” And with that he
swung his sword, and struck him on the neck, so that
his head came off. He then took the skin-coat, sprang
on his horse, and rode down to the strand.

Olaf Haraldsson had not gone on land with the
others, and when he heard of his father’s fall he made
ready to sail away with the men who remained.

When the Earl of Rouen, William the Bastard,
heard of his relation King Edward’s death, and also
that Harald Godwinsson Avas chosen, croAvned, and

SAGA IX.

Chapter

X evil I.
Of Styrkar
the mar¬
shal.

Chapter
XCIX.
Of William
the Bas¬
tard.

94

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX.

Chapter

C.

Fall of

King

Harald.

Godwins-

son.

consecrated king of England, it appeared to him that
he had a better right to the kingdom of England than
Harald, by reason of the relationship between him
and King Edward.^ He thought, also, that he had
grounds for avenging the affront that Harald had put
upon him with respect to his daughter. From all
these grounds William gathered together a great army
in Normandy, and had many men, and sufficient trans¬
port-shipping. The day that he rode out of the castle to
his ships, and had mounted his horse, his wife came to
him, and wanted to speak with him ; but when he saw
her he struck at her with his heel, and set his spurs
so deep into her breast that she fell down deadf ; and
the earl rode on to his ships, and went with his ships
over to England. His brother. Archbishop Otto, was
with him; and when the earl came to England he
began to plunder, and take possession of the land as
he came along. Earl William was stouter and stronger
than other men; a great horseman and warrior, but
somewhat stern ; and a very sensible man, but not
considered a man to be relied on.

King Harald Godwinsson gave King Harald Sigurds-
son’s son Olaf leave to go away, with the men who
had followed him and had not fallen in battle ; but
he himself turned round with his army to go south,
for he had heard that William the Bastard was over¬
whelming the south of England with a vast army,
and was subduing the country for himself. With
King Harald went his brothers Swend and Gyrder,
and Earl Walthiof. King Harald and Earl William

* The relationship here alluded to is that Emma, the wife of Ethelred
and mother of Edward the Confessor, was a sister of William, and that
he, as uncle of Edward, was nearer than Harald in relationship; but
this is evidently an error of Snorro. William’s father was Robert
Longspear, son of Richard ; and Emma was Richard’s daughter, and
aunt, not sister, of William.

■j* This story is false, or relates to some concubine ; for William’s
queen, Matilda, was crowned in London.

KINGS OE NORWAY.

95

met each other south in England at Helsingja-port."^

( There was a great battle, in which King Harald and
his brother Earl Gyrder and a great part of his men
fell. This was the nineteenth day after the fall of
King Harald Sigurdsson. Harald’ s brother, Earl

Walthiof, escaped by flight, and towards evening fell
in with a division of William’s people, consisting of
100 men; and when they saAV Earl Walthiof ’s troop
they fled to a wood. Earl Walthiof set fire to the
wood, and they were all burnt. So says Thorkel
Skallason in Walthiof ’s ballad: — -

Earl Walthiof the brave
His foes a warming gave:

W’^ithin the blazing grove
A hundred men he drove.

The wolf will soon return,

And the witch’s horse will burn
Her sharp claws in the ash,

To taste the Frenchman’s flesh.”

William was proclaimed king of England. He sent
a message to Earl Walthiof that they should be recon¬
ciled, and gave him assurance of safety to come to the
place of meeting. The earl set out with a few men ;
but when he came to a heath north of Kastala-
bryggiaf, there met him two officers of King William,
with many followers, who took him prisoner, put him
in fetters, and afterwards he was beheaded; and the
English call him a saint. Thorkel tells of this : —

William came o’er the sea,

With bloody sword came he ;

Cold heart and bloody hand
Now rule the English land.

* Helsingja-port — Hastings.

t Kastala-bryggia may be Boroughhridge. According to the Saxon
Chronicle, Earl Walthiof was executed at Winchelsea in the year 1076
for an alleged conspiracy, and his body M^as interred at Croyland.
This is ten years after William’s accession to the crown of England.
He had been taken into favour by William, and sent to command in
Northumberland, and made prisoner for a conspiracy in which he was
accused of taking part. The Saxon Chronicle is certainly much better
authority than the saga for the dates of historical events in England.

SAGA IX.

ClIATTEll

Cl.

Earl

Walthiof ’s
death.

96

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX.

Chapter

CJL

Family

register.

Earl W altliiof he slew, —

Walthiof the brave and true.

Cold heart and bloody hand
Now rule the English land.”

William Avas after this king of England for twenty -
one years, and his descendants have been so ever since.
William died in his bed in Normandy, and after him
his son William the Red was king there for fourteen
years. Then Henry his brother took the kingdom.
He was a son of William the First.

^William’s father was Robert Longspear ; his father
Avas Richard son of Richard, Avho Avas son of William
the son of Hrolf Ganger, Avho first conquered Nor¬
mandy. All these, one after the other, Avere Rouen
earls ; that is, counts of Rothemage f in Normandy.
Hrolf Ganger was a son of Rognvald, earl of More in
Norway, a brother of Earl Thorer the Silent, and of

Torf Einar the earl of Orknev Avho killed Halfdan

«/

Haaleg because he had killed his father Rognvald earl
of More, as is related in the Saga of Harald Haarfager.
King Ethelred of England Avas married to Queen
Emma, a sister of William the Bastard of Normandy J,
and had tAVO sons by her, EdAvard and Edmund §,

* This chapter, says Thorlacius, is only to be found in the Heims-
kringla of Peringskiold, and is therefore suspected to be an interpolation
of the saga transcriber, whose manuscript Peringskiold used.

■j* * * § Rothemagi, Rothemadun, Ruda, Rudaborg, are the names given to
Rouen, and its territory Normandy ; and AVilliam the Conqueror and
his predecessors are called by their contemporaries Ruda-Jarlar, — Earls
of Rouen. The following is the succession of this genealogy : — 1. Rogn¬
vald, earl of More in Norway. 2. Hrolf Ganger, conqueror of
Normandy. 3. William: in his time the language of the Northmen
was not used at Rouen, for he sent his son. Richard to Bayeux to learn
it. Normandy was a conquest, not a colony. (See Gibbon, chapter Ivi.
note.) 4. Richard. 5. Richard his son, the father of Emma. 6. Robert
Longspear. 7* William the Conqueror.

J This is a mistake. Emma, the queen of Ethelred, and afterwards
of Canute, was not the sister, but the aunt by the father’s side, of
William the Conqueror, according to the Saxon Chronicle.

§ It was not Edmund the king who was expelled by Canute, but his
son Edmund. King Edmund died, or was cut off by Duke Eodric, in
1016.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

97

who after him were kings of England, but afterwards saga ix.
were driven out by Canute the Great of Denmark;
and Jatward, or Edward the SainE^, was king of Eng¬
land after Hardacanute. Canute the Great married
I Emma after the death of Ethelred, and had by her
I Haraldf and Hardacanute, or Hardaknut. King Ed¬
ward was married to Gyda daughter of Earl Godwin,
and a grand-daughter of Thorkel Sprakaleg, and sis¬
ter’s daughter to the Danish king Swend Ulfsson.

As she and King Edward had no children, her brother
Harald took the kingdom after King Edward, and thus
came England out of the family of Ethelred the Good.

Harald Godwinsson had been king of England nine
months and a half J when he fell, and there was none
remaining of Earl Godwin’s descendants but Earl
Toste’s sons Ketil and Skule, and Gyde the daughter
: of Harald. She was married to Yaldemar king of
i Kovogorod, a son of Jarisleif and Queen Ingigerd,

1 who was a daughter of King Olaf the Swede. By
\ her he had King Harald, who was married to Chris-
i tina, a daughter of King Inge Steinkelsson of SAveden.

. Their daughters were Malfrid and Ingeborg. Sigurd
1 the Crusader married Malfrid, and afterwards she
; married King Eric Eymund of Denmark. Duke Ca-
. nute Lavard married Ingeborg, Harald’s daughter;

: and their children were the Danish king Yaldemar,
i Christina, Katrina, and Margaret. King Yaldemar
[ married Sophia, a daughter of Yalader king of Poland
■ by Queen Kikize. The children of Yaldemar and
. Sophia were King Yaldemar and King Canute, and
Í Christina, who was married to King Karl Sorkvisson.

Their children were King Sorkvir, King Yaldemar,

I * Edward the Confessor is here meant; not Saint Edward, who was
i killed about 959} was the son of Edgar.

'I I Harald was not a son of Emma, but of Algiva, a former wife or
It concubine of Canute.

Forty weeks and one day, according to the Saxon Chronicle.

VOL. TIT.

H

98

CHEONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX.

Chapter

ciir.

Of Olaf
Haralds-
son’s expe¬
dition to
Norway.

and Queen Rildze. Margaret the daughter of Duke
Canute Lavard married Stig Huitaleder; and their
children were Nicolas and Christina, who was married
to King Karl Swerkersson ; and their son was King
S worker, who was father of King John. King Karl’s
mother was Queen Ulfhild, a daughter of Hakon the
son of Finn, who was a son of Harek of Thiotto.
Ulfhild was first married to the Danish king Nicolas,
and afterwards to King Inge Hallsteinsson of Sweden.
Lastly, she was married to Swerker, a son of Karl
and Queen Kikize, who afterwards married Eric son
of Canute, who was king of Sweden.

Olaf, the son of KingHarald Sigurdsson, sailed with
his fleet from England from Hrafnseyre^, and came
in autumn to the Orkney Isles, where the event had
happened that Maria, a daughter of Harald Sigurds¬
son, died a sudden death the very day and hour her
father King Harald fell. Olaf remained there all
winter ; but the summer after he proceeded east to
Norway, where he was proclaimed king along with
his brother Magnus. Queen Ellisof came from the
West, along with her stepson Olaf and her daughter
Ingigerd. There came also with Olaf over the West
sea Skule, a son of Earl Toste, and who since has been
called the king’s foster-son, and his brother Ketil Krok.
Both were gallant men, of high family in England,
and both were very intelligent ; and the brothers were
much beloved by King Olaf. Ketil Krok went north
to Halogaland, where King Olaf procured him a good
marriage, and from him are descended many great
people.f Skule, the king’s foster-son, was a very clever
man, and the handsomest man that could be seen.

* Hrafnseyri. A town in Holderness^ at the mouth of the Humber,
was called Ravensere^, hut is now lost. See Camden, Brit. p. 9OO.

•f Singular enough that the male line of the great Earl Godwin, and
of his son King Harald, should he to seek among the peasantry of the
north of Norway.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

99

He was the' commander of King Olaf’s court -men, saga ix.
spoke at the Things and took part in all the country
affairs with the king. The king offered to give Skule
whatever district in Norway he liked, with all the
income and duties that belonged to the king in it.

Skule thanked him very much for the offer, but said he
would rather have something else from him. “ For if
there came a shift of kings,” said he, “ the gift might
come to nothing. I would rather take some proper¬
ties lying near to the merchant towns, where you,
sire, usually take up your abode, and then I would
enjoy your Yule-feasts.” The king agreed to this,
and conferred on him lands eastward at Konghelle,

Opslo, Tunsburg, Sarpsburg, Bergen, and north at
Nidaros. These were nearly the best properties at
each place, and have since descended to the family
branches which came from Skule. King Olaf gave
Skule his female relative Gudrun, the daughter of
Nefstein, in marriage. Her mother was Ingerid, a
daughter of Sigurd Syr and Aasta, King Olaf the
Saint’s mother. Ingerid was a sister of King Olaf
the Saint and of King Harald. Skule and Gudrun’s
son was Asolf of Keine, who married Thora, a daugh¬
ter of Skopte Ogmundsson ; and this Skopte was a
grandson of Thorberg Arneson. Skule’s and Gud¬
run’s daughter was Ragnhild, who was married to
Orm Kyrping ; and his daughter was Aasa, mother of
Biorn Buck. Asolf and Thora’s son was Guttorm of
Keine, father of Bard, and grandfather of King Inge
and of Duke Skule. Asolf and Thora’s daughter was
Sigrid, who was married to Halkel Huk ; and their son
was John, father of Halkel, Rognvald, and Gregorius.
Guttorm of Keine married Elrida, sister of Halkel
Huk ; and their daughters were Kangrid, Ingrid, and
Gudrud. Kangrid was married to Biorn Byrdarswend ;

* Another instance of the old Norse or Icelandic tongue having been
generally known in a part of England.

H 2

100

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX and their daughters were Elrid and Ingehorg. Elrid
was married to King Magnus ; and they had a daugh¬
ter, Christine, married to Reidar Sendeman. Thorer
Skirfell had been married before to Elrid, and had two
sons by her, Kiniad and Thorgrim Klofe ; and after
King Magnus Haraldsson’s death ^ she, Elrid, married
the lagman in Gotland, and had a son called Harald.
Among Ingeborg’s sons was Thorstein Skolm-Olld.
Rangrid was afterwards married to Erederic Kiæna,
and their daughter was called Astrid. Ingerid, a
daughter of Guttorm of Reine, was married to Gut-
torm Ostmansson of Jemteland. Guttorm of Reine
afterwards married Bergliot, and their son was called
Asulf, whose daughter Thorbiorg was married to Eric
Griffel ; and they had also a son called Asulf. Thor¬
biorg afterwards was married to the king’s relative
Reider. Guttorm of Reine married afterwards Sigrid,
a daughter of Thorkel and Halkatla. Halkatla was a
daughter of Swend Bryniulfsson and Ingerid, a sister
of Canute the Great f; and Swend was a brother of
Swerker in Sogn. Guttorm’s and Sigrid’s son was
Baard Guttormsson; first married with Ulfhild, a
daughter of Paul the bishop, afterwards with Cecilia,
a daughter of King Sigurd Haraldsson ; and their
children were King Inge, Duke Skule, Guttorm, and
a daughter Sigrid.

Chapter One year after King Harald’s fall his body was
omal’g transported from England north to Nidaros, and was
Harald buified in Mary church which he had built. It was a
"" common observation, that King Harald distinguished

himself above all other men bv wisdom and resources
of mind ; whether he had to take a resolution suddenly

* It was not to King Magnus Haraldsson, but to King Magnus
Erlingsson that this Elrid had been married.

t This Canute the Great (Riki) has been some nobleman, or other
considerable personage, not Canute the king. The term is applied to
any powerful man of great wealth and influence.

KINGS OK NOEWAY.

101

for himself and others, or after long deliberation. He sag^ix
was also, above all other men, bold, brave, and lucky,
until his dying day, as above related ; and bravery is
half victory. So says Thiodolf : —

“ Harald, who till his dying day
Came off the best in many a fray,

Had one good rule in hattle-plain,

In Sealand and elsewhere, to gain —

That, he his foes’ strength more or less.

Courage is always half success.”

King Harald was a handsome man, of noble appear¬
ance ; his hair and beard yellow. He had a short
beard, and long mustachoes. The one eyebrow was
somewhat higher than the other. He had large hands ^
and feet ; but these were well made. His height was
five ells.f He was stern and severe to his enemies,
and avenged cruelly all opposition or misdeed. So
says Thiodolf : —

‘‘ Severe alike to friends or foes,

W^’ho dared his royal will oppose ;

Severe in discipline to hold
His men-at-arms wild and bold;

Severe the bonders to repress ;

Severe to punish all excess;

Severe was Harald — hut we call
That just which was alike to all.”

King Harald was most greedy of power, and of all
distinction and honour. He was bountiful to the
friends who suited him. So says Thiodolf : —

* It is a singular physical circumstance, that in almost all the swords
of those ages to be found in the collection of weapons in the Antiquarian
Museum at Copenhagen, the handles indicate a size of hand very much
smaller than the hands of modern people of any class or rank. No
modern dandy, with the most delicate hands, would find room for his
hand to grasp or wield with ease some of the swords of these North¬
men.

j* The old Norwegian ell was less than the present ell; and Thorlacius
reckons, in a note on this chapter, that Harald’s stature would be about
four Danish ells, viz. about eight feet. It appears that he exceeded the
ordinary height of men by the offer made him of seven feet of English
ground, or as much more as he required for a grave, in chapter 94.

H 3

102

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX.

Chapter

CV.

King

Harald and
King Olaf
.compared.

I got from him, in sea-fight strong,

A mark of gold for my ship-song.

Merit in any way
He generously would pay.”

King Harald was fifty years old when lie fell. We
have no particular account of his youth before he was
fifteen years old, when he was with his brother King
Olaf at the battle of Stiklestad. He lived thirty-five
years after that, and in all that time was never free
from care and war. King Harald never fled from battle,
but often tried cunning ways to escape when he had to
do with great superiority of forces. All the men who
followed King Harald in battle or skirmish said that
when he stood in great danger, or any thing came
suddenly upon him, he always took that course which
all afterwards saw gave the best hope of a fortunate
issue.

When Haldor, a son of Bryniulf Ulfald the Old,
who was a sensible man and a great chief, heard
people talk of how unlike the brothers Saint Olaf and
King Harald were in disposition, he used to say, “ I
was in great friendship with both the brothers, and
knew intimately the dispositions of both, and never
did I know two men more like in disposition. Both
were of the highest understanding, and bold in arms,
and greedy of power and property ; of great courage,
but not acquainted Avith the Avay of Avinning the favour
of the people; zealous in governing, and severe in
their revenge. King Olaf forced the people into
Christianity and good customs, and punished cruelly
those who disobeyed. This just and rightful severity
the chiefs of the country could not bear, but raised an
army against him, and killed him in his own kingdom;
and therefore he is held to be a saint. King Harald,
again, marauded to obtain glory and poAver, forced all
tlie people he could under his poAver, and died in
another king’s dominions. Both brotliers, in daily
life, Avere of a worthy and considerate manner of living :

KINGS OF NOKWAY.

103

they were of great experience, and very laborious,
; and were known and celebrated far and wide for these
: qualities.”

King Magnus Haraldsson ruled over Norway the
I the first winter after King Harald’s death, and after-
j wards two years along with his brother King Olaf.

Thus there were two kings of Norway at that time ;
I and Magnus had the northern and Olaf the eastern
part of the country. King Magnus had a son called
Hakon, who was fostered by Thorer of Steig in Gud-
brandsdal, who was a brother of King Magnus by
the mother’s side ; and Hakon was a most agreeable
man.

After King Harald Sigurdsson’s death the Danish

king Swend let it be known that the peace between

the Northmen and the Danes was at an end, and

insisted that the league between Harald and Swend

was not for longer time than their lives* There was

a levy in both kingdoms. Harald’s sons called out

the whole people in Norway for procuring men and

ships, and Swend set out from the South with the

Danish army. Messengers then went between with

proposals for a peace; and the Northmen said they

would either have the same league as was concluded

between King Harald and Swend, or otherwise give

battle instantly on the spot. Verses were made on.

this occasion ; viz. —

Ready for war or peace.

King Olaf will not cease
From foeman's hand
To guard his land.”

So says also Stein Herdisarson in his song of
Olaf : — -

From Drontheim town, where in repose
The holy king defies his foes.

Another Olaf will defend

His kingdom from the greedy Swend.

H 4

SAGA IX.

Chapteu
CVI.
King
Magnus’s
death .

104

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA IX. King Olaf has both power and right,

- And the Saint’s favour in the fight.

The Saint will ne’er his kin forsake,

And let Swend Ulfsson Norway take.”

And by the intervention of good men a meeting
was agreed upon between the kings, and that it should
be at Konghelle. At this meeting friendship was
concluded between the kings, and peace between the
countries. The agreement was confirmed by Olaf
taking in marriage Ingerid, King Swend’ s daughter ;
and this peace endured long, and Olaf reigned in
quietness unknown before in Norway. King Magnus
fell ill, and died of the ring-worm'^ disease, after
being ill for some time. He died and was buried at
Nidaros. He was an amiable king, and bewailed by
the people.

* The disease of which King Magnus died — reforma-sot — could
scarcely be the ring-worm of modern pathology, hut some kind of scab,
scurvy, or leprosy.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

105

X.

SAGA OF OLAF KYREE.^

Olaf remained sole king of Norway after the death
of his brother King Magnus. Olaf was a stout man,
well grown in limbs ; and every one said a handsomer
man could not be seen, nor of a nobler appearance.
His hair was yellow as silk, and became him well ;
his skin was white and fine over all his body ; his eyes
beautiful, and his limbs well proportioned. He was
rather silent in general, and did not speak much even
I at Things ; but he was merry in drinking parties.
He loved drinking much, and was talkative enough
then ; but quite peaceful. He was cheerful in con¬
versation, peacefully inclined during all his reign, and
loving gentleness and moderation in all things. Stein
Herdisarson speaks thus of him : —

“ Our Drontheim king is brave and wise_,

I His love of peace our bonders prize;

' By friendly word and ready hand

He holds good peace through every land.

He is for all a lucky star;

England he frightens from a war;

The stiff-necked Danes he drives to peace;

Troubles by his good influence cease.”

It was the fashion in Norway in old times for the
king’s high seat to be on the middle of a long bench,
and the ale was handed across the firef ; but King

^ Olaf Kyrre, or the Quiet^ reigned from about IO69 to 1093.

•j* We may understand the arrangement by supposing the fire in the
middle of the room, the smoke escaping by a hole in the roof, and a
long bench on each side of the fire ; one bench occupied by the high seat
of the king and great guests^ the other by the rest of the guests ; and
the cup handed across the fire, which appears to have had a religious
meaning previous to the introduction of Christianity.

SAGA X.

Chapter

I.

Olaf ’s

personal

appearance.

Chapter

II.

Of King
Olaf ’s
manner of
living.

106

CHRONICLE OF THE

sA^x. Olaf had his high seat made on a high bench across
the room; he also first had chimney -places in the
rooms, and the floors strewed* both summer and
winter. In King Olaf ’s time many merchant to^vns
arose in Norway, and many new ones were founded.
Thus King Olaf founded a merchant town at Bergen,
where very soon many wealthy people settled them¬
selves, and it was regularly frequented by merchants
from foreign lands. He had the foundations laid for
the large Christ church, which was to be a stone
church ; but in his time there was little done to it.
Besides, he completed the old Christ church, which
Avas of wood. King Olaf also had a great feasting-
house built in Nidaros, and in many other merchant
towns, where before there Avere only private feasts ; and
in his time no one could drink in Noinvay but in these
houses, adorned for the purpose Avith branches and
leaves, and which stood under the king’s protection.
The great guild-bell in Drontheim, Avhich Avas called
the pride of the toAvn, tolled to call together to these
guilds. The guild-brethren built Margaret’s church
in Nidaros of stone. In King Olaf’s time there Avere
general entertainments, and hand-in-hand feasts, f
At this time also much unusual splendour and foreign
customs and fashions in the cut of clothes were intro-
duced ; as, for instance, costly hose plaited about the
the legs. Some had gold rings about the legs, and
also used coats Avhich had lists doAAUi the sides, and

* Strewing the floors with fresh juniper-tops is still the universal
custom in every house in Norway. It answers the purpose of keeping
the dirt brought in on the shoes from soiling the wood of the floors.

j* The feasts here mentioned in the saga appear to have been regular
meetings of fraternities^ or guilds, of which the members gave each
other mutual protection and aid, and which acted as corporate bodies.
Every private citizen in towns belonged to some guild or fraternity
bound to avenge his death or injuries as brethren, and thus affording
him protection. At the guilds or feasts of these fraternities each appears
to have brought his own liquor : they were pic-nic feasts, and they went
hand-in-hand through the streets to them like our Freemasons.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

107

I arms five ells long, and so narrow that tliey must be
i drawn up with ties, and lay in folds all the way up
j to the shoulders. The shoes were high, and all edged
i with silk, or even Avith gold. Many other kinds of
I Avonderful ornaments were used at that time.

! King Olaf used the fashion, which was introduced
I from the courts of foreign kings, of letting his grand-
I butler stand at the end of the table, and fill the
i table-cups for himself and the other distinguished
I guests who sat at the table. He had also torch-bear-
j ers, who held as many candles at the table as there
( Avere guests of distinction present. There was also a
j marshal’s bench outside of the table-circle^, where
i the marshal and other persons of distinction sat Avith
I their faces toAvards the high seat. King Harald, and
j the kings before him, used to drink out of a deer-
j horn ; and the ale was handed from the high seat to
the other side over the fire, and he drank to the me¬
mory of any one he thought of. So says Stuff the
I scald : —

He who in battle is the firsts
And now in peace is best to trusty
A welcome^ hearty and sincere^

Gave to me on my coming here.

He whom the ravens watch with care,

He who the gold rings does not spare,

A golden horn full to the brink
Gave me himself at Haugt to drink.”

King Olaf had 120 courtmen-at-arms, and 60 pur-
[ suivants, besides 60 house-servants, who provided
1 Avhat was wanted for the king’s house Avherever it
; might be, or did other Avork required for the king.

' When the bonders asked why he kept a greater retinue

* Trapiza, — no doubt from the Greek word, — is used here by the
; saga writer, and seems to mean the space around the king’s table in the
hall, which appears, with the high seat, to have occupied one end ; and by
: this description the fire has been in the middle, and the marshal’s seat
I and the court upon the other side of the fire, facing the king’s table.

t The name of the king’s farm is Værdal.

SACiA X.

Chapteh

III.

Fashion of
King
Olaf’s
court.

Chapter

IV.

Arrange¬
ment of
King
Olaf’s
court.

108

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA X.

Chapter

V.

King

Svvend

Ulfsson’s

death.

Chapter

VI.

Miracles of
King Olaf
the Saint.

than the law allowed, or former kings kept when they
went in guest-quarters or feasts which the bonders
had to provide for them, the king answered, ‘‘ It
does not happen that I rule the kingdom better, or
produce greater respect for me than ye had for my
father, although I have one half more people than he
had. I do not by any means do it merely to plague
you, or to make your condition harder than formerly.”

King Swend Ulfsson died ten years after the fall
of both the Haralds.* After him his son, Harald Hein,
was king for three years ; then Canute the Holy for
seven years; afterwards Olaf, King Swend’s third son,
for eight years. Olaf the king of Norway was mar¬
ried to Ingigerd, a daughter of Swend the Danish
king ; and Olaf the Danish King Swend’s son married
Ingerid, a daughter of King Harald, and sister of King
Olaf of Norway. King Olaf Haraldsson was called
by some Olaf Kyrre, but by many Olaf the Bonder,
because he sat in peace, mthout strife within or with¬
out the country, and gave no reasonable cause for
others to plunder in his dominions. He had a son by
Thora, John’s daughter, who was called Magnus, and
was one of the handsomest lads that could be seen,
and was promising in every respect* He was brought
up in the king’s court.

King Olaf had a church of stone built in Nidaros,
on the spot where King Olaf’s body had first been
buried ; and the altar was placed directly over the
spot where the king’s grave had been. This church
was consecrated, and called Christ Church ; and King
Olaf’s shrine was removed to it, and was placed before
the altar, and many miracles took place there. The
folloAving summer, on the same day of the year as the
church was consecrated, which was the day before

* The Norwegian King Harakt and the English King Harald God-
winsson.

KINGS OF NOKWAY.

109

' Olafsmass, there was a great assemblage of people,

! and then a blind man was restored to sight. And on
; the mass-day itself, when the shrine and the holy
: relics were taken out and carried, and the shrine itself,

: according to custom, was taken and set down in the
; church-jmrd, a man who had long been dumb re¬
covered his speech again, and sang with flowing
tongue praise-hymns to God, and to the honour of
I King Olaf the Saint. The third miracle was of a
' woman who had come from Sweden, and had suffered
I much distress on this pilgrimage from her blindness ;

' but, trusting in God’s mercy, had come travelling to
I this solemnity. She was led blind into the church to
] hear mass this day ; but before the service was ended
Í she saw with both eyes, and got her sight fully and
clearly, although she had been blind fourteen years.

» She returned with great joy, praising God and King
1 Olaf the Saint.

There happened a circumstance in Nidaros, when
' King Olaf ’s coffin was being carried about through
the streets, that it became so heavy that people could
I not lift it from the spot. Now when the coffin was
j set down, the street was broken up to see what was
I under it at that spot, and the body of a child was
found which had been murdered and concealed there.
The body was carried away, the street put in order
again as it had been before, and the shrine carried
on according to custom.

King Olaf Kyrre was a great friend of his brother-
in-law the Danish king, Canute the Holy. They ap¬
pointed a meeting, and met at the Gotha river at
Konghelle^, where the kings used to have their meet¬
ings. There King Canute made the proposal that they

* The estate of Konghelle was lately purchased by an English gen¬
tleman, - Dan, Esq., as a sporting quarter. It was a celebrated

place of meeting for the Swedish, Norwegian, and Danish kings, and
rose to be a town of consequence; hut is now in decay.

SAGA X.

Chapter

VII.

Of the
shrine of
King Olaf
the Saint.

Chapter
VIII.
Meeting of
Olaf Kyrre
and Canute
the Saint,
and their
prepara¬
tions
against
England.

no

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA X.

should send an army westward to England on account
of the revenge they had to take there ; first and fore¬
most King Olaf himself, and also the Danish king.
“ Do one of two things,” said King Canute, — “ either
take sixty ships, which I will furnish thee with, and
he thou the leader ; or give me sixty ships, and I shall
be the leader.” Then said King Olaf, “ This speech of
thine, King Canute, is altogether according to my
mind ; but there is this great difference between us :
your family has had more luck in conquering Eng¬
land with great glory, and, among others. King Canute
the Great ; and it is likely that this good fortune fol¬
lows your race. On the other hand, when King
Harald my father went westward to England, he got
his death there ; and at that time the best men in
Norway followed him. But Norway was so emptied
then of chosen men, that such men have not since
been to find in the country ; nor, especially, such a
leader as King Harald was for msdom and bravery.
For that expedition there was the most excellent
outfit, and you know what was the end of it. Now
I know my own capacity, and how little I am suited
to be the leader ; so I would rather you should go,
with my help and assistance.”

So King Olaf gave Canute sixty large ships, with
excellent equipment and faithful men, and set his
lendermen as chiefs over them ; and all must allow
that this armament was admirably equipped. It is
also told in the saga about Canute, that the Northmen
alone did not break the levy when the army was
assembled, for they were obedient to the king ; but
as the Danes would not obey their king’s orders, the
Northmen also returned to Norway, with the king’s
leave and consent. This King Canute acknowledged,
and gave them, on their way home, leave to trade in
merchandise where they pleased through his country,
and in his rivers, and at the same time sent the king

KINGS OF NOEWAY.

Ill

of Norway costly presents for his assistance. On the
other hand, he was enraged against the Danes, and
laid heavy fines npon them when he returned home
to Denmark. This strife between them was carried
so far that the Danes themselves killed King Canute,
rather than submit to his just judgment against them.

One summer, when King Olaf ’s men had gone round
the country collecting his income and land dues, it
happened that the king, on their return home, asked
them where on their expedition they had been best
entertained. They said it was in the house of a
bonder, in a district in the province of Lister. “ There
is an old bonder there who knows many things before
they happen. We asked him about many things, which
he explained to us; and we never asked him anything
but he was sure to know all about it ; nay, we even
believe that he understands perfectly the language of
birds.” The king replies, “ How can ye believe such
nonsense?” and insisted that it was wrong to put con¬
fidence in such things. It happened soon after that
the king was sailing along the coast ; and as they sailed
through several Sounds the king said, “ What is that
township up in the country ?”

They replied, That is the district, sire, where we
told you we were best entertained.”

Then said the king, “ What house is that which
stands up there, not far from the Sound ?”

They replied, “ That house belongs to the wise old
man we told you of, sire.”

They saw now a horse standing close to the house.
Then said the king, “ Go there, and take that horse,
and kill him.”

They replied, “We would not like to do him such
harm.”

The king : “I will command. Cut off the horse’s
head ; but take care of yourselves that ye let no blood
come to the ground, and bear the horse out to my

SAGA X.

CuAPTEli

IX.

Of Olaf
Kyrre and
a peasant
who under¬
stood the
language
of birds.

112

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA X. ship. Go then and bring to me the old man ; but tell
him nothing of what has happened, as ye shall answer
for it with your lives.

They did as they were ordered, and then came to
the old man, and told him the king’s message. When
he came before the king, the king asked him, “ Who
owns the house thou art dwelling in?”

He replies, Sire, you own it, and take rent for it.”

The king : “ Show us the way round the ness, for
here thou must be a good pilot.”

The old man went into his boat, and rowed before
the king’s ship ; and when he had rowed a little way
a crow came flying over the ship, and croaking hi¬
deously. The peasant listens to the crow. The king
said, “ Do you think, bonder, that betokens any
thing?”

“ Sire, that is certain,” said he.

Then another crow flies over the ship, and screeches
dreadfully. The bonder was so ill hearing this that
he could not row, and the oars hung loose in his
hands.

Then said the king, Thy mind is turned much to
these crows, bonder, and to what they say.”

The bonder replies, “ Now I suspect it is true what
they say.”

The third time the crow came flying screeching at
its very worst, and almost settling on the ship. Now
the bonder threw down his oars, regarded them no
more, and stood up before the king.

Then the king said, “ Thou art taking this much
to heart, bonder; what is it they say?”

The peasant : “It is likely that either they or I
have misunderstood -

“ Say on,” replied the king.

The bonder replied in a song : —

“ The one-year old ’

Mere nonsense told;

KINGS OF NORWAY.

113

The two-years’ chatter
Seemed senseless matter;
The three-years’ croak
Of wonders spoke.

The foul bird said
My old mare’s head
I row along;

And, in her song.

She said the thief
Was the land’s chief.”

-•I

SAGA X.

“ The three-year-old crow says that you bid me row
here before your ship, and yet have taken my property
from me.’’

The king said, What is this, bonder ! Wilt thou
call me a thief? That is not judging well of me.”

“It is true, sire,” said the bonder, “ that would
not be well said, neither do I think you the thief ;
and there has been some joke played on me, for the
crow said my horse is on board the ship.”

After some conversation between the king and the
bonder, the king gave him good presents, and remitted
the land-rent of the place he lived on; and gave him
the farm to be his own property for ever, besides
other considerable gifts.

King Olaf was not niggardly in giving presents to
his men, and gave all kinds of valuable articles. So
says Stuff the scald : —

The pillar of our royal race

Stands forth adorned with every grace.

What king before e’er took such pride
To scatter bounty far and wide ?

To one he gives the ship of war.

Hung round with shields that gleam afar;

The merchant ship on one bestows.

With painted streaks in glowing rows.

The man-at-arms a golden ring
Boasts as the present of his king ;

At the king’s table sits the guest.

By the king’s bounty richly drest.

King Olaf, Norway’s royal son.

Who from the English glory won.

Pours out with ready-giving hand
His wealth on children of the land.

VOL. III. I

114

CHKONICLE OF THE

SAGA X.

Chapter

X.

Of King
Olaf
Kyrre’s
death.

Brave clothes to servants he awards.

Helms and ring-mail coats grace his guards ;

Or axe and sword Hare’s^ warriors gain.

And heavy armour for the plain.

Gold, too, for service duly paid.

Red gold all pure, and duly weighed.

King Olaf gives — he loves to pay
All service in a royal way.”

King Olaf lived principally in his domains on his
large farms. Once when he was east in Kanrike, on
his estate of Haukahy, he took the disease which ended
in his death. He had then been king of Norway for
twenty-six years ; for he was made king of Norway
the year after King Harald’s death. King Olaf’s
body was taken north to Nidaros, and buried in
Christ church, which he himself had built there. He
was the most amiable king of his time, and Norway
was much improved in riches and cultivation during
his reign.

* Hare — a name of Thor or Odin, as wielder of the axe and sword
in battle.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

115

MAGNUS BAREFOOT’S SAGA.^

Magnus, King Olaf’s son, was, immediately after
King Olaf’s deatli, proclaimed at Yiken king of all
Norway ; but the Upland people, on hearing of King
Olaf’s death, chose Hakon, Thorer’s foster-son, a
cousin f of King Magnus, as king. Thereupon Hakon
and Thorer Avent north to the Drontheim country,
and when they came to Nidaros they summoned a
Thing at Ore ; and at that Thing Hakon desired the
bonders to give him the kingly title, which was agreed
to, and the Drontheim people proclaimed him king of
half of Norway, as his father King Magnus had been
before. Hakon relieved the Drontheim people of all
harbour duties, and gave them many other privileges.
He did aAvay with Yule -gifts, and gained by this the
good-will of all the Drontheim people. Thereafter
Hakon formed a court, and then proceeded to the
Uplands, where he gave the Upland people the same
privileges as the Drontheim people ; so that they also
Avere perfectly well affected to him, and were his
friends. The people in Drontheim sang this ballad
about him : —

Young Hakon was the Norseman’s pride.

And Steigar-Thor was on his side.

Young Hakon from the Upland came.

With royal birth, and blood, and name.

Young Hakon from the king demands
His royal birthright, half the lands;

Magnus will not the kingdom break, —

The whole or nothing he will take.”

* Magnus Barefoot reigned from about 1093 to 1103.

■j* Hakon was a son of Magnus, Harald Hardraade’s son; and
Magnus was a son of Olaf Kyrre, Harald Hardraade’s son also.

I 2

SAGA XI.

Chapter

I.

Beginning
of the reign
of King
Magnus
and his
cousin
Hakon.

116

CHEONICLE OF THE

SAGA XI.

Chapter

II.

Hakon’s

death.

King Magnus proceeded north to the merchant
town (Nidaros), and on his arrival went straight to
the king’s house, and there took up his abode. He
remained here the first part of the winter, and kept
seven long-ships in the open water of the river Nid,
abreast of the king’s house. Now when King Hakon
heard that King Magnus was come to Drontheim, he
came from the East over the Dovrefield, and thence
down upon Drontheim to the merchant town, where
he took up his abode in the house of Skule, opposite to
Clement’s church, which had formerly been the king’s
house. King Magnus was ill pleased with the great
gifts which Hakon had given to the bonders to gain
their favour, and thought it was so much given out
of his own property. This irritated his mind ; and he
thought he had suffered injustice from his relative in
this respect, that he must now put ujd with less in¬
come than his father and his predecessors before him
had enjoyed; and he gave Thorer the blame. When
King Hakon and Thorer observed this, they were
alarmed for what Magnus might do ; and they thought
it suspicious that Magnus kept long- ships afloat rigged
out, and with tents. The following spring, after Can¬
dlemas, King Magnus left the town in the night with
his ships; the tents up, and lights burning in the
tents. They brought up at Hafring^, remained there
all night, and kindled a fire on the land. Then Hakon
and the men in the town thought some treachery was
on foot, and he let the trumpets call all the men to¬
gether out on the Ore, where the whole people of the
town came to him, and the people were gathering
together the whole night. When it was light in the
morning. King Magnus saw the people from all dis¬
tricts gathered together on the Ore ; and he sailed out
of the fiord, and proceeded south to where the Gula-

* A promontory about two miles north of the town.

KINGS OF NOKWAY.

117

thing is held. Hakon thanked the people for their
support which they had given him, and got ready to
travel east to Viken. But he first held a meetinof in
the town, where, in a speech, he asked the people for
their friendship, promising them his; and added, that
he had some suspicions of his relation King Magnus’s
intentions. Then King Hakon mounted his horse,
and was ready to travel. All men promised him their
good-will and support whenever he required them,
and the people followed him out to the foot of the
Steinberg. From thence King Hakon proceeded up
the Dovrefield ; but as he was going over the Fielde
he rode all day after a ptarmigan, which flew up be¬
side him, and in this chase a sickness overfell him,
which ended in his death ; and he died on the Fielde.
His body was carried north, and came to the merchant
to^vn just half a month after he left it. The whole
townspeople went to meet the body, sorrowing, and
the most of them weeping; for all people loved him
with sincere affection. King Hakon ’s body was in¬
terred in Christ church, and Hakon and Magnus had
ruled the country for two years. Hakon was a man
full twenty-five years old, and was one of the chiefs
the most beloved by all the people. He had made a
journey to Biarmeland, where he had given battle
and gained a victory.

King Magnus sailed in autumn eastward to Yiken ;
but when spring approached he went southwards to
Halland*, and plundered far and wide. He laid
waste Yiskardal and many other districts, and re¬
turned with a great booty back to his own kingdom.
So says Biorn Cripplehand in his song on Magnus : —

“ Through Halland wide around
The clang and shriek resound ;

* Halland was the district about the Gotha river belonging to Sweden,
and formerly to Denmark.

I 3

SAGA xr.

Chapter

III.

Of a foray
in Halland.

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XI.

CuAPTEli
IV. '
Of Thorer
of Steige.

The houses burn_,

The people mourn,

Through HaUand wide around.

The Norse king strides in flame.

Through Viskadal he came ;

The fire sweeps.

The widow weeps,

The Norse king strides in flame.’^

Here it is told that King Magnus made the greatest
devastation through Halland.

There was a man called Swend, a son of Harald
Flett. He was a Danish man by family, a great
viking and champion, and a very clever man, and of
high birth in his own country. He had been some
time with King Hakon Magnusson, and was very dear
to him ; but after King Hakon’s decease Thorer of
Steige, his foster-father, had no great conhdence in
any treaty or friendship with King Magnus, if the
whole country came into his power, on account of the
position in which Thorer had stood to King Magnus,
and the opposition he had made to him. Thereupon
Thorer and Swend took counsel with each other, which
they afterwards carried into effect, — to raise, with
Thorer^s assistance, and his men, a troop against
Magnus. But as Thorer was old and heavy, Swend
took the command, and name of leader of the troop.
In this design several chiefs took part, among whom
the principal was Egil Aslaksson of Aurland. Egil
was a lenderman, and married to Ingeborg, a daughter
of Ogmund Thorbergsson, a sister of Skopte of Gizko.
The rich and powerful man Skialg Erlingsson from
Jederen also joined their party. Thorkel Hammer-
scald speaks of this in his ballad of Magnus : —

Thorer and Egil were not wise, —

They aimed too high to win a prize :

There was no reason in their plan.

And it hurt many a udalman.

The stone, too great for them to throw.

Fell back, and hurt them with the blow;

And now the udalmen must rue
That to their friends they were so true.’

KINGS OF NORWAY.

119

Thorer and Swend collected a troop in the Uplands,
and went down througdi Raumsdal into Sondmör, and
there collected vessels, with which they afterwards
sailed north to Drontheim.

The lenderman Sigurd Ullstring, a son of Lodin
Viggierskalle, collected men by sending round the
war- token, as soon as he heard of Thorer and the
troop which followed him, and had a rendezvous with
all the men he could raise at Yiggia. Swend and
Thorer also met there with their people, fought with
Sigurd, and gained the victory after giving him a
great defeat; and Sigurd fled, and joined King Mag¬
nus. Thorer and his followers proceeded to the town
(Nidaros), and remained there some time in the fiord,
where many people joined them. King Magnus hear¬
ing this news immediately collected an army, and pro¬
ceeded north to Drontheim. And when he came into
the fiord Thorer and his party heard of it while they
lay at Hafring, and they were ready to leave the fiord;
and they rowed their ships to the strand at Van wick,
and left them, and came into Texdal in Seliowerf,
and Thorer was carried in a litter over the Fielde.
Then they got hold of ships, and sailed north to
Halogaland. As soon as King Magnus was ready for
sea, he sailed from Drontheim in pursuit of them.
Thorer and his party went north all the way to
Biarko ; and John, with his son Vidkunner, fled from
thence. Thorer and his men robbed all the moveable
goods, and burnt the house, and a good long-ship that
belonged to Vidkunner. While the hull was burning
the vessel heeled to one side, and Thorer called out,
“ Hard to starboard, Vidkunner ! ” Some verses were
made about this burning in Biarko : —

The sweetest farm that I have seen
Stood on Biarkö’s island green ;

And now_, where once this farm-house stood^

Fire crackles through a pile of wood;

I 4

SAGA XI.

Chapter

V.

Of Thorer ’s
adventures.

120

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XL

Chapter

VI.

Death of
Thorer and
EgiK

And the clear red flames burning high.

Flashes across the dark night-sky.

John and Vidkunner, this dark night,

Will not be wandering without light.”

John and Yidkunner travelled day and night till
they met King Magnus. Swend and Thorer proceeded
northwards with their men, and plundered far and
wide in Halogaland. But while they lay in a fiord
called Horm, Thorer and his party saw King Magnus
coming under sail towards them ; and thinking they
had not men enough to fight him, they rowed away
and fled. Thorer and Egil brought up at Hesiotun ;
but Swend rowed out to sea, and some of their people
rowed into the fiords. King Magnus pursued Thorer,
and the vessels struck together while they were land¬
ing. Thorer stood in the forecastle of his ship, and
Sigurd Ullstring called out to him, and asked, “ Art
thou well, Thorer?” Thorer replied, I am well in
hands, but ill on my feet.” And some one made these
verses : — ■

The vessels struck, and swords were out.

When Ullstring calls out with a shout,

^ Old Thorer, how d’ye do ? ’

The grey old warrior, firm and true
To his own cause, cries ^ How d’ye do.^

When loving friends, such as we two,

Happen in bloody fray to meet,

I’m brisk in hands, but slow in feet.’ ”

Then said Sigurd Ullstring, “ Thou art pretty fat,
Thorer.” He replied, “ My meat and my ale make
me so.” Then all Thorer’s men fled up the country,
and Thorer was taken prisoner. Egil was also taken
prisoner, for he would not leave his wife. King Mag¬
nus then ordered both of them to be taken out to
Yamber Holm; and when they were leading Thorer
from the ship he tottered on his legs. Then Yid¬
kunner called out, More to larboard, Thorer!”
When he was being led to the gallows he sang, —

“We were four comrades gay, —

Let. one by the helm stay.”

KINGS OF NOEWAY.

121

When he came to the gallows he said, Bad counsel
comes to a bad end.” Then Thorer was hanged; but
when he was hoisted up the gallows tree he was so
heavy that his neck gave way, and the body fell down
to the ground ; for Thorer was a man exceedingly
stout, both high of stature and thick. Egil was also
led to the gallows ; and when the king’s thralls were
about hanging him he said, “Ye should not hang me,
for in truth each of you deserves much more to be
hanged.” People sang these verses about it : —

I hear^ my girl, that Egil said,

When to the gallows he was led.

That the king’s thralls far more than he
Deserved to hang on gallows-tree.

It might he so; but, death in view,

A man should to himself be true, —

End a stout life by death as stout.

Showing no fear, or care, or doubt.”

King Magnus sat near while they were being hanged,
and was in such a rage that none of his men was so bold
as to ask mercy for them. The king said, when Egil
was spinning at the gallows, “ Thy great friends help
thee but poorly in time of need.” From this people
supposed that the king only wanted to have been en¬
treated to have spared Egil’s life. Biorn the Cripple-
hand speaks of these things : —

“ King Magnus in the robbers’ gore
Dyed red his sword ; and round the shore
The wolves howled out their wild delight.

At corpses swinging in their sight.

Have ye not heard how the king’s sword
Punished the traitors to their lord ?

How the king’s thralls hung on the gallows
Old Thorer and his traitor-fellows ? ”

t

After this King Magnus sailed south to Drontheim,
and brought up in the fiord, and punished severely
all who had been guilty of treason towards him ; kill¬
ing some, and burning the houses of others. So says
Biorn Cripplehand : —

SAGA XI.

Chapter

VII.

Of the pu¬
nishment
of the
Drontheim
people.

122

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XI.

Chapter
VÍIL
Of the
peasant
Svveinke
the river
borderer,
and Sigurd
Ullstring.

He who despises fence of shields

Drove terror through the Drontheim fields.

When all the land through which he came
Was swimming in a flood of flame.

The raven-feeder, well I know.

Cut off two chieftains at a blow;

The wolf could scarcely ravenous be.

The ernes flew round the gallows-tree.”

Swend, Harald Flett’s son, fled out to sea first, and
sailed tlien to Denmark, and remained there ; and at
last came into great favour with King Eystein, the
son of King Magnus, who took so great a liking to
Swend that he made him his dish-bearer'^, and held
him in great respect. King Magnus had now alone
the whole kingdom, and he kept good peace in the
land, and rooted out all vikings and lawless men.
He was a man quick, warlike, and able, and more like
in all things to his grandfather King Harald in dis¬
position and talents than to his father.

There was a man called Sweinke Steinarsson, who
was very wealthy, and dwelt in Yikeii at the Gotha
river. He had brought up Hakon Magnusson before
Thorer of Steige took him. Sweinke had not yet
submitted to King Magnus. King Magnus ordered
Sigurd Ullstring to be called, and told him he would
send him to Sweinke with the command that he should
quit the king’s land and domain. “ He has not yet
submitted to us, or shown us due honour.” He added,
that there Avere some lendermen east in Viken, namely,
SAvend Bryggefod, Dag Elifsson, or Kolbiorn Klakka,
Avho could bring this matter into right bearing. Then ’
Sigurd said, “ I did not knoAV there AA^as the man in
KorAvay against Avhom three lendermen besides myself
Avere needful.” The king replied, “ Thou needst not
take this help, unless it be necessary.” Koav Sigurd
made himself ready for the journey Avith a ship, sailed

* The dish-hearer, not cup-bearer, was an office of dignity equivalent
to the chamberlain in modern courts, — the dapifer.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

123

east to Viken, and there summoned the lendermen to sag^i.
him. Then a Thing was appointed in Yiken, to which
the people were called who dwelt on the East river,
besides others ; so that it was a numerous assembly.

When the Thing was formed they had to wait for
Sweinke. They soon after saw a troop of men coming
along, so well furnished with weapons that they looked
like pieces of shining ice ; and now came Sweinke and
his people to the Thing, and set themselves down in a
circle. All were clad in iron, with glowing arms, and
500 in number. Then Sigurd stood up, and spoke. “My
master. King Magnus, sends God’s salutation and his
own to all friends, lendermen and others, his subjects
in the kingdom ; also to the powerful bonders, and the
people in general, with kind words and offers of friend¬
ship ; and to all who will obey him he offers his friend¬
ship and good-will. Now the king will, with all cheer¬
fulness and peace, show himself a gracious master to
all who will submit to him, and to all in his dominions.

He will be the leader and defender of all the men of
Norway ; and it will be good for you to accept his
gracious speech, and this offer.”

Then stood up a man in the troop of the river-
borderers, who Avas of great stature and grim coun¬
tenance, clad in a leather cloak, Avith a halberd on his
shoulder, and a great steel hat upon his head. He
looked sternly, and said, “ Here is no need of Avheels,
says the fox, Avhen he draAA^s the trap over the ice.”

He said nothing more, but sat doAvn again.

Soon after Sigurd Ullstring stood up again, and
spoke thus : “ But little concern or help have Ave for
the king’s affairs from you river-borderers, and but
little friendship ; yet by such means every man shows
hoAV much he respects himself. But now I shall pro¬
duce more clearly the king’s errand.” Thereupon he
demanded land-dues and levy- dues, together Avith all
other rights of the king, from the great bonders. He

124

CHRONICLE OF THE

sAG^xi. “bade each of them to consider with himself how they
had conducted themselves in these matters ; and that
they should now promote their own honour, and do
the king justice, if they had come short hitherto in
doing so. And then he' sat down.

Then the same man got up in the troop of river-
borderers who had spoken before, lifted his hat a little
up, and said, The lads run well, say the Laplanders,
who have scates for nothing.’’ Then he sat himself
down again.

Soon after Sigurd arose, after speaking with the
lendermen, and said that so weighty a message as the
king’s ought not to be treated lightly as a jest. He
was now somewhat angry; and added, that they ought
not to receive the king’s message and errand so scorn¬
fully, for it was not decent. He was dressed in a red
or scarlet coat, and had a blue coat over it. He cast
off his upper coat, and said, “ Now it is come so far
that every one must look to himself, and not loiter
and jest with others ; for by so doing every man will
show what he is. We do not require now to be taught
by others; for now we can see ourselves how much we
are regarded. But this may be borne with ; but not
that ye treat so scornfully the king’s message. Thereby
every one shows how highly he considers himself.
There is one man called Sweinke Steinarsson, who
lives east at the river; and from him the king will
have his just land-dues, together with his own land,
or will banish him from the country. It is of no use
here to seek excuses, or to answer with sharp words ;
for people are to be found who are his equals in power,
although he now receives our speech so unworthily;
and it is better now than afterwards to return to the
right way, and do himself honour, rather than await
disgrace for his obstinacy.” He then sat down.

Sweinke then got up, threw back his steel-hat, and
gave Sigurd many scornful words, and said, Tut !

KINGS OF NORWAY.

125

tut ! ’tis a shame for the dogs, says the proverb, when
the fox is allowed to piss in the peasant’s well. Here
will be a miracle! Thou useless fellow! with a coat
without arms, and a kirtle with skirts, wilt thou drive
me out of the country ? Thy relation Sigurd Woolsack
was sent before on this errand, and one called Gille the
Backthief, and one who had still a worse name. They
were a night in every house, and stole wherever they
came. Wilt thou drive me out of the country ? For¬
merly thou wast not so mighty, and thy pride was
less when King Hakon, my foster-son, was in life.
Then thou wert as frightened for him when he met
thee on the road as a mouse in a mouse-trap, and hid
thyself under a heap of clothes, like a dog on board a
ship. Thou wast thrust into a leather-bag like corn
in a sack, and driven from house and farm like a year-
old colt from the mares ; and dost thou dare to drive
me from the land ? Thou shouldst rather think thy¬
self lucky to escape from hence with life. Let us
stand up and attack him.”

Then all his men stood up, and made a great clash
with their weapons. Then Swend Bryggefod and
the other lendermen saw there was no other chance
for Sigurd but to get him on horseback, which was
done, and he rode off into the forest. The end was
that Sweinke returned home to his farm, and Sigurd
Ullstring came, with great difficulty, by land north
to Drontheim to King Magnus, and told the result of
his errand. “ Did I not say,” said the king, “ that
the help of my lendermen would be needed?” Sigurd
was ill pleased with his journey; insisted that he would
be revenged, cost what it will; and urged the king
s much. The king ordered five ships to be fitted out ;
and as soon as they were ready for sea he sailed south
along the land, and then east to Viken, where he was
entertained in excellent guest-quarters by his lender-
men. The king told them he would seek out Sweinke.

SAGA XI,

126

ClIKONICLE OF THE

SAGA XI,

“For I will not conceal my suspicion that he thinks
to make himself king of Norway.” They said that
Sweinke was both a powerful and an ungovernable
man. Now the king went from Viken until he came
to Sweinke’s farm. Then the lendernien desired that
they might be put on shore to see how matters stood ;
and when they came to the land they saw that SAveinke
had already come doAvn from the farm, and Avas on
the road Avith a number of Avell-armed men. The
lendermen held up a white shield in the air, as a
peace-token ; and Avhen SAveinke saAV it he halted his
men, and they approached each other. Then said
Kolbiorn Klakka, “ King Magnus sends thee God’s
salutation and his OAvn, and bids thee consider Avhat
becomes thee, and do him obedience, and not prepare
thyself to give him battle.” Kolbiorn offered to me¬
diate peace between them, if he could, and told him
to halt his troops.

Sweinke said he Avould Avait for them where he was.
“We came out to meet you,” he said, “that ye might
not tread down our corn-fields.”

The lendermen returned to the king, and told him
all was now at his pleasure.

The king said, “ My doom is soon delivered. He
shall fly the country, and never come back to Norway
as long as the kingdom is mine ; and he shall leave all
his goods behind.”

“ But will it not be more for thy honour,” said
Kolbiorn, “ and give thee a higher reputation among
other kings, if, in banishing him from the country,
thou shouldst alloAV him to keep his property, and
show himself among other people ? And Ave shall take
care that he never come back while we live. Consider
of this, sire, by yourself, and have respect for our
assurance.”

The king replied, “ Let him then go forth imme¬
diately.”

KINGS OF NORWAY.

127

They went back, therefore, to Sweinke, and told him saga xi.
the king’s words ; and also that the king had ordered
him out of the country, and he should show his obe¬
dience, since he had forgotten himself towards the
king. “ It is for the honour of both that thou shouldst
show obedience to the king.”

Then Sweinke said, “ There must be some great
change if the king speaks agreeably to me ; but why
should I fly the country and my properties? Listen
now to what I say. It appears to me better to die
upon my property than to fly from my udal estates.

Tell the king that I will not stir from them even an
arrow-flight.”

Kolbiorn replied, This is scarcely prudent, or
right ; for it is better for one’s own honour to give
way to the best chief, than to make opposition to one’s
own loss. A gallant man succeeds wheresoever he
goes ; and thou wilt be the more respected wheresoever
thou art, with men of power, just because thou hast
made head so boldly against so powerful a chief.

Hear our promises, and pay some attention to our
errand. We offer thee to manage thy estates, and
take them faithfully under our protection ; and also
never, against thy will, to pay scatt for thy land until
thou comest back. We will pledge our lives and pro¬
perties upon this. Do not throw away good counsel
from thee, and avoid thus the ill fortune of other
good men.”

Then Sweinke was silent for a short time, and said
at last, “ Your endeavours are wise; but I have my
suspicions that ye are changing a little the king’s
message. In consideration, however, of the great
good-will that ye show me, I will hold your advice in
such respect that I will go out of the country for the
whole winter, if, according to your promises, I can
then retain my estates in peace. Tell the king, also,

128

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XI. these my words, — that I do this on your account,
not on his.’^

Thereupon they returned to the king, and said that
Sweinke left all in the king’s hands. “ But entreats
you to have respect to his honour. He will be away
for three years, and then come back, if it be the king’s
pleasure. Do this ; let all things be done according
to what is suitable for the royal dignity, and accord¬
ing to our entreaty, now that the matter is entirely
in thy power, and we shall do all we can to prevent
his returning against thy will.”

The king replied, “Ye treat this matter like men,
and, for your sakes, shall all things be as ye desire.
Tell him so.”

They thanked the king, and then went to Sweinke,
and told him the king’s gracious intentions. “We
will be glad,” said they, “if ye can be reconciled. The
king requires, indeed, that thy absence shall be for
three years ; but, if we know the truth rightly, we
expect that before that time he will find he cannot
do without thee in this part of the country. It will
be to thy own future honour, therefore, to agree to
this.”

Sweinke replies, “ What condition is better than
this ? Tell the king that I shall not vex him longer
with my presence here, and accept of my goods and
estates on this condition.”

Thereupon he went home mth his men, and set off
directly ; for he had prepared every thing beforehand.
Kolbiorn remains behind, and makes ready a feast for
King Magnus, which also was thought of and pre¬
pared. Sweinke, on the other hand, rides up to Got¬
land with all the men he thought proper to take with
him. The king let himself be entertained in guest-
quarters at his house, returned to Viken, and Sweinke’s
estates were nominally the king’s, but Kolbiorn had
them under his charge. The king received guest-

KINGS OF NORWAY.

129

quarters in Yikeii, proceeded from tlience northwards,
and there was peace for a while ; hut now that the
river-borderers were without a chief, marauding
gangs infested them, and the king saw that this east¬
ern part of the kingdom would be laid waste. It
appeared to him, therefore, most suitable and advis¬
able to make Sweinke himself oppose the stream, and
twice he sent messages to him. But he did not stir
until Kino; Mao;nus himself was south in Denmark,
when Sweinke and the king met, and made a full
reconciliation ; on which Sweinke returned home to
his house and estates, and was afterwards King Mag¬
nus’s best and trustiest friend, who strengthened his
kingdom on the eastern border ; and their friendship
continued as long as they lived.

King Magnus undertook an expedition out of the
country, with many fine men and a good assortment
of shipping. With this armament he sailed out into
the West sea, and first came to the Orkney Islands.
There he took the two earls, Paul and Erlend, prison¬
ers, and sent them east to Norway, and placed his
son Sigurd as chief over the islands, leaving some
counsellors to assist him. From thence King Magnus,
with his followers, proceeded to the Southern He-
budes'^, and when he came there began to burn and
lay waste the inhabited places, killing the people, and

^ Sudreyia^ or the South Tsles^ were so called in reference to their
situation from the Feroe^ Orkney, and Shetland Isles ; and the name
is still retained in the title of the bishopric of Sodor and Man. The
Sudreyia are the Hebrides, or, as Pinkerton will have it, the Hebudes :
in which he is probably right, the word being Oybodar — island habita¬
tions; reduced to Ebudæ in Latin. The names mentioned in the saga
are Liadhus (Lewis), Ivist (Uist, north and south), Skid (Skye),
Raunoyar (Rasey and Rona), Myl (Mull), Mylarkalfr (Coll ? or Calf
of Mull), Tyroist (Tiree), Helga Oyen (Iona), II (Islay), Gudoy
(Gigha), Heroy or Hersoy (Arran), Bot (Bute), Kumroyjar (the
Cum bray Isles), Mon (Man), Satiri (the peninsula of Cantire). The
Hebudes and Man were sold in 1266 to the Scottish crown by King
Magnus the Law Improver, for 4000 marks sterling, and 100 marks
yearly as feu duty.

VOL. III. K

SAGA XI.

Chai'xer
IX.
King
Magnus
makes war
on the
Southern
Hebudes.

130

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XI.

Chapter

X.

Of Lag-
madr, King
Gudrod’s
son.

plundering wherever he came with his men ; and the
country people fled in all directions, some into Scot-
land-fiord others south to Cantire, or out to Ireland:
some obtained life and safety by entering into his
service. So says Biorn Cripplehand: —

In Lewis Isle with fearful blaze
The house-destroying fire plays ;

To hills and rocks the people fly,

Fearing all shelter but the sky.

In Uist the king deep crimson made
The lightning of his glancing blade ;

The peasant lost his land and life
Who dared to bide the Norseman's strife.

The hungry battle-birds were filled
In Skye with blood of foemen killed,

And wolves on Tyree’s lonely shore
Dyed red their hairy jaws in gore.

The men of Mull were tired of flight;

The Scottish foemen would not fight.

And many an island-girl’s wail

Was heard as through the isles we sail.”

King Magnus came with bis forces to the Holy Island
(Iona), and gave peace and safety to all men there. ;
It is told that the king opened the door of the little j
Columb’s Kirk there, but did not go in, but instantly I
locked the door again, and said that no man should I
be so bold as to go into that church hereafter ; which |
has been the case ever since. From thence King |
Magnus sailed to Islay, where he plundered and burnt ; |
and when he had taken that country he proceeded
south around Cantire, marauding on both sides in
Scotland and Ireland, and advanced with his foray
to Man, where he plundered. So says Biorn Cripple-
hand : —

Sauda’sf plain our shields they spy:

From Isla smoke rose heaven-high.

* Skotland-fiord is the sea between the northern Hebudes and the
mainland of Scotland.

f Sandey is here probably the small isle Sandera, beyond the Mull of
Cantire.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

131

Whirling np from the flashing blaze saga xi.

The king’s men o’er the island raise.

South of Cantire the people fled^

Scared by our swords in blood dyed red_,

And our brave champion onward goes
To meet in Man the Norsemen’s foes.”

Lagmadr (Lawman) was the name of the son of
Gudrod kino; of the Hehudes. Lawman was sent to
defend the most northerly islands ; hut when King
Magnus and his army came to the Hehudes, Lawman
fled here and there about the isles, and at last King
Magnus’s men took him and his ship’s crew as he was
flying over to Ireland. The king put him in irons to
secure him. So says Biorn Cripplehand : —

To Gudrod’s son no rock or cave,

Shore-side or hill, a refuge gave;

Hunted around from isle to isle.

This Lawman found no safe asyle.

From isle to isle, o’er firth and sound.

Close on his track his foe he found.

At Ness* the Agder chief at length
Seized him, and iron-chained his strength.”

Afterwards King Magnus sailed to Walesf ; and Chapter
when he came to the sound of Anglesey there came ofthÍ’
against him an army from Wales, which was led hy fail of Earl

® ^ Hugo the

two earls J, — Hugo the Brave, and Hugo the Stout. Brave.
They began immediately to give battle, and there was
a severe conflict. King Magnus shot with the bow ;
but Hugo the Brave was all over in armour, so that
nothing was bare about him excepting one eye. King

* This Ness is supposed to be in Scalpa, on the south-west side of
Skye.

■j* The country occupied by the ancient Britons, or Wales, is called
Bretlandin the Icelandic sagas, and the inhabitants Brettar; and Saxland
was the part of England occupied by the Anglo-Saxons.

Gibson, in his edition of Cambden, vol. ii. p. 808., shows that
there were two Hugos — an earl of Cheshire, and an earl of Shropshire
— of Norman descent, who had ravaged Anglesey, and built a castle ( Aber
Lhienawg) to keep down the people; and on the arrival of King
Magnus one of them, the Hugo earl of Chester, was killed by an
arrow.

K 2

132

CHRONICLE OF THE

Magnus let ily an arrow at him, as also did a Haloga-
land man who was beside the king. They both shot
at once. The one shaft hit the nose- screen of the
helmet, which was bent by it to one side, and the
other arrow hit the earl’s eye, and went through his
head ; and that was found to be the king’s. Earl
Hugo fell, and the Britons fled with the loss of many
people. So says Biorn Cripplehand : — ■

The swinger of the sword
Stood by Anglesey’s ford;

His quick shaft flew,

And Hugo slew.

i His sword gleamed a while

O’er Anglesey Isle,

And his Norsemen’s band
Scoured the Anglesey land.”

There was also sung the following verse about it : —

On the panzers arrows rattle.

Where our Norse king stands in battle;

From the helmets blood-streams flow,

Where our Norse king draws his bow:

His bowstring twangs, — its biting hail
Rattles against the ring-linked mail.

Up in the land in deadly strife

Our Norse king took Earl Hugo’s life.”

King Magnus gained the victory in this battle, and
then took Anglesey Isle, which was the farthest south
the Norway kings of former days had ever extended
their rule. Anglesey is a third part of Wales. After
this battle King Magnus turned back with his fleet,
and came first to Scotland. Then men went between
the Scottish king Melkolf ^ and King Magnus, and a
peace was made between them ; so that all the islands
lying west of Scotland, between which and the main¬
land he could pass in a vessel with her rudder shipped,
should be held to belong to the king of Norway. Now
when King Magnus came north to Cantire, he had a

* According to Buchanan it was not in the time of King Malcolm III.,
but of his brother Donald Bane, that the Hebudes were conquered by
King Magnus Barefoot.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

133

skiiF drawn over the strand at Cantire, and shipped saga xi.
the rudder of it. The king himself sat in the stern-
sheets, and held the tiller ; and thus he appropriated
to himself the land that lay on the larboard side.

Cantire is a great district, better than the best of the
southern isles of the Hebudes, excepting Man ; and
there is a small neck of land between it and the main¬
land of Scotland, over which long-ships are often
drawn.

Kin^ Magnus was all the winter in the southern Chapter
isles, and his men went over all the fiords of Scotland, Death of
rowing within all the inhabited and uninhabited isles,
and took possession for the king of Norway of all the
islands west, of Scotland. King Magnus contracted
in marriage his son Sigurd to Biadmynia, King Mo-
riartak’s daughter. Moriartak was a son of the Irish
king Thiolfa, and ruled over Connaught. Magnus
gave his son the title of king, and set him over the
Orkneys and Hebudes * and gave him in charge of his
relation Hakon Paulsson. The summer after. King
Magnus, with his fleet, returned east to Norway.

Earl Erlend* died of sickness at Nidaros, and is buried
there; and Earl Paul"^ died in Bergen.

Skopte Ogmundsson, a grandson of Thorberg, was
a gallant lenderrnan, who dwelt at Gizka in Sondmor,
and was married to Gudrun, a daughter of Thord
Eolasson, who carried King Olaf ’s banner at Stikla-
stad when he fell. Their children were Ogmund,

Finn, Thord, and Thora, who was married to Asolf
Skulesson. Skopte’s and Gudrun’s sons were the
most promising and popular men in their youth.

Steinkel the Swedish king died about the same time
as the two Haralds f fell, and the king who came after Quarrels
him in Sweden was called Hakon. Afterwards Inge, MagnS

* The two earls of Orkney, Erlend and Paul.

'I' The two Haralds meant are Harald Haardrade of Norway, and the
English king Harald Godwinsson, who fell at Hastings.

134

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XL

and King
Inge.

Chapter
XIV.
Of the
Northmen,

a son of Steinkel, was king, and was a good and power¬
ful king, strong and stout beyond most men ; and he
was king of Sweden when King Magnus was king of
Norway. King Magnus insisted that the boundaries
of the countries in old times had been so, that the
Gotha river divided the kingdoms of the Swedish and
Norwegian kings, but afterwards the Wener lake up
to Værmeland. Thus King Magnus insisted that he
was owner of all the places lying west of the Wener
lake up to Yærmeland, which are the districts of
Sundal, Nordal, Year, and Yardyniar, with all the
woods belonging thereto. But these had for a long
time been under the Swedish dominion, and with re¬
spect to scatt were joined to West Gotland ; and, besides,
the forest-settlers preferred being under the Swedish
king. King Magnus rode from Yiken up to Gotland
with a great and fine army, and when he came to the
forest-settlements he plundered and burnt all round;
on which the people submitted, and took the oath of
fidelity to him. When he came to the Wener lake,
when autumn was advanced he went out to the island
Qualdinsey, and made a stronghold of turf and wood,
and dug a ditch around it. When the work was
finished, provisions and other necessaries that might
be required were brought to it. The king left in it
300 men, who were the chosen of his forces, and Finn
Skoptesson and Sigurd Ullstring as their commanders.
The king himself returned to Yiken.

When the Swedish king heard this he drew together
people, and the report came that he would ride against
these Northmen ; but there was delay about his riding,
and the Northmen made these lines : —

The fat-hipped king, with heavy sides,

Finds he must mount before he rides.’"

But when the ice set in upon the Wener lake King
luge rode down, and had near 300 men with him.
lie sent a message to the Northmen who sat in the

KINGS OF NORWAY.

burgh that they might retire with all the booty they
had taken, and go to Norway. When the messengers
brought this message, Sigurd Ullstring replied to it ;
saying that King Inge must take the trouble to come,
if he wished to drive them away like cattle out of a
grass field, and said he must come nearer if he wished
them to remove. The messengers returned with this
answer to the king, who then rode out with all his
army to the island, and again sent a message to the
Northmen that they might go away, taking with them
their weapons, clothes, and horses; but must leave
behind all their booty. This they refused. The king
made an assault upon them, and they shot at each
other. Then the king ordered timber and stones to
be collected, and he filled up the ditch ; and then he
fastened anchors to long spars which were brought
up to the timber-walls, and, by the strength of many
hands, the walls were broken down. Thereafter a
large pile of wood was set on fire, and the lighted
brands were flung in among them. Then the North¬
men asked for quarter. The king ordered them to
go out without weapons or cloaks. As they went out
each of them received a stroke with a whip, and then
they set off for Norway, and all the forest-men sub¬
mitted again to King Inge. Sigurd and his people
went to King Magnus, and told him their misfortune.

The spring after, as soon as the ice broke up. King
Magnus, with a great army, sailed eastwards to the
Gotha river, and went up the eastern arm of it, laying
waste all that belonged to the Swedish dominions.
When they came to Foxerne they landed from their
vessels ; but as they came over a river on their way
an army of Gotland people came against them, and
there was immediately a great battle, in which the
Northmen were overwhelmed by numbers, driven to
flight, and many of them killed near to a waterfall.
King Magnus fled, and the Gotlanders pursued, and

K 4

-j O

loo

SAGA XI.

Chapter
XV.
Battle at
Foxerne.

136

CHEONICLE OE THE

SAGA XI.

Chapter
XVI.
Magnus’s
second
battle with
Inge at
Eoxerne.

killed those they could get near. King Magnus was
easily known. He was a very stout man, and had a
red short cloak over him, and bright yellow hair like
silk that fell over his shoulders. Ogmund Skoptesson,
who was a tall and handsome man, rode on one side
of the king. He said, “ Sire, give me that cloak.”

The king said, “ What would you do with it ?”

“ I would like to have it,” said Ogmund ; “ and
you have given me greater gifts, sire.”

The road was such that there were great and wide
plains, so that the Gotlanders and Northmen were
always in sight of each other, unless where clumps of
wood and bushes concealed them from each other now
and then. The king gave Ogmund the cloak, and he
put it on. When they came out again upon the plain
ground, Ogmund and his people rode off* right across
the road. The Gotlanders, supposing this must be
the king, rode all after him, and the king proceeded
to the ships. Ogmund escaped with great difficulty;
however he reached the ships at last in safety. King
Magnus then sailed down the river, and proceeded
north to Yiken.

When King Magnus was east in Yiken, there came
to him a foreigner called Gifford. He gave himself
out for a good knight, and offered his services to King
Magnus ; for he understood that in the king’s do¬
minions there was somethino; to be done. The kina’
received him well. At that time the king was pre¬
paring to go to Gotland, on which country the king
had pretensions ; and besides he would repay the Got¬
land people the disgrace they had occasioned him in
spring, when he was obliged to fly from them. He
had then a great force in arms, and the West Gotland¬
ers in the northern districts submitted to him. He
set up his camp on the borders, intendiug to make a
foray from thence. When King Inge heard of this
he collected troops, and hastened to ojipose King

KINGS OF NOKWAY.

137

Magnus ; and when King Magnus heard of this ex- ‘ag^xi,
pedition, many of the chiefs of the people urged him
to turn hack : but this the king would not listen to,
but in the night-time went unsuspectedly against the
Swedish king. They met at Foxerne; and when he
was drawing up his men in battle order he asked,
“Where is Gilford?” but he was not to be found.

Then the king made these verses : —

Cannot the foreign knight abide

(iur rough array? — where does he hide?’^

. Then a scald who followed the king replied, —

“ The king asks where the foreign knight
In our array rides to the fight :

Gifford the knight rode quite away
When our men joined in bloody fray.

When swords were wet the knight was slow
With his bay horse in front to go:

The foreign knight could not abide
Our rough array, and went to hide.”

There was a great slaughter, and after the battle
the field was covered with the Swedes slain, and King
Inge escaped by flight. King Magnus gained a great
victory. Then came Gilford riding down from the
country, and people did not speak well of him for not
being in the fight. He went away, and proceeded
westward to England ; and the voyage was stormy,
and Gilford lay in bed. There was an Iceland man
called Elldiarn, who went to bale out the water in the
ship’s hold, and when he saw where Gilford was lying
he made this verse : —

Does it beseem a courtman bold
Here to be dosiug in the hold ?

The bearded knight should danger face;

The leak gains on our ship apace.

Here, ply this bucket! bale who can;

We need the work of every man.

Our sea-horse stands full to the breast, —

Sluggards and cowards must not rest.”

; When they came west to England, Gilford said the
I Northmen had slandered him. A meeting was ap-

138

CHRONICLE OF THE

sAOA XI. pointed, and a count came to it, and the case was
iirousfht before him for trial. He said he was not
much acquainted with law cases, as he was but young,
and had only been a short time in office ; and also, of
all things, he said what he least understood to judge
about was poetry. ‘‘But let us hear what it was.”
Then Elldiarn sang : —

I heard that in the bloody fight
Gifford drove all our foes to flight:

Brave Gifford would the foe abide,

AFhile all our men ran oflp to hide.

At Foxerne the fight was won
By Gifford’s valour all alone :

Where Gifford fought, alone was he ;

Not one survived to fight or flee.”

Then said the count, “ Although I know but little
about scald-craft, I can hear that this is no slander,
but rather the highest praise and honour.” Gifford
could say nothing against it, yet he felt it was a
mockery.

Chapter Tlic followin^ sumiiier a meeting of the kin^s was

XVII ^7- ° ^

Meeting* of agfccd upon at Konghelle on the Gotha river; and

the kings King Magiius, the Swedish king Inge^ and the Danish
Gotha king Eric Swendsson all met there, after giving each
other safe conduct to the meeting. Now when the
Thing had sat down the kings went forward upon the
plain, apart from the rest of the people, and they
talked with each other a little while. Then they re¬
turned to their people, and a treaty was brought
about, by which each should possess the dominions
his foreffithers had held before him ; but each should
make good to his own men the waste and manslaugh¬
ter suffered by them, and then they should agree be¬
tween themselves about settling this with each other.
Iving Magnus should marry King Inge’s daughter
Margaret, who afterwards was called Peace-offering.
This was proclaimed to the people ; and thus, within

KINGS OF NOKWAY.

139

a little hour, the greatest enemies were made the best
of friends.

It was observed by the people that none had ever
seen men with more of the air of chiefs than these
had. King Inge was the largest and stoutest, and,
from his age, of the most dignified appearance. King
Magnus appeared the most gallant and brisk, and
King Eric the most handsome. But they were all
handsome men ; stout, gallant, and ready in speech.
After this was settled they parted.

King Magnus got Margaret, King Inge’s daughter,
as above related ; and she was sent from Sweden to
Norway with an honourable retinue. King Magnus
had some children before, whose names shall here be
given. The one of his sons who was of a mean
mother was called Eystein ; the other, who was a year
younger, was called Sigurd, and his mother’s name
was Thora. Olaf was the name of a third son, vdio
was much younger than the two first mentioned, and
whose mother was Sigrid, a daughter of Saxe of
Yik, who was a respectable man in the Drouth eim
country ; she was the king’s concubine. People say
that when King Magnus came home from his viking
cruise to the Western countries, he and many of his
people brought with them a great deal of the habits
and fashion of clothing of those western parts. They
Avent about on the streets Avith bare legs, and had
short kirtles and over-cloaks ^ ; and therefore his men
called him Magnus Barefoot or Bareleg. Some called
him Magnus the Tall, others Magnus the Strife-lover.
He Avas distinguished among other men by his tall
stature. The mark of his height is put doAvn in
Mary church, in the merchant town of Nidaros, which
King Harald built. In the northern door there were

* This proves that the kilt or philibeg and plaid were used in the
Western countries^ the Hebudes, in 1099-

saga XI.

CuArTEIl

XVIIJ.

King

Magnus’s

marriage.

140

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XI. wall three crosses, — one for Harald’s

stature, one for Olaf’s, and one for Magnus’s; and
which crosses each of them could with the greatest
ease kiss. The upper was Harald’s cross ; the loYfest
Avas Magnus’s ; and Olaf ’s was in the middle, about
equally distant from both.

It is said that Magnus composed the folio Aving
verses about the emperor’s daughter : —

The ring of arms where blue swords gleam.

The battle-shout, the eagle’s scream.

The joy of war, no more can please :

Matilda* is far o’er the seas.

My sword may break, my shield be cleft.

Of land or life I may be reft ;

Yet I could sleep, but for one care, —

One, o’er the seas, with light-brown hair.”

He also composed the following : —

The time that breeds delay feels long.

The scald feels weary of his song ;

What sweetens, brightens, eases life.^

’Tis a sweet-smiling lovely wife.

My time feels long in Thing affairs,

In Things my loved one ne’er appears.

The folk full-dressed, while I am sad.

Talk and oppose — can I be glad ”

ÁVhen King Magnus heard the friendly Avords the
emperor’s daughter had spoken about him, — that she
had said such a man as King Magnus Avas appeared
to her an excellent man, he composed the foUoAV-
ing : —

The lover hears, — across the sea,

A favouring word was breathed to me.

The lovely one with light-brown hair
May trust her thoughts to senseless air :

Her thoughts will find like thoughts in me;

And though my love I cannot see.

Affection’s thoughts fly in the wind.

And meet each other, true and kind.”

* This Matilda is considered by Torfæus (Hist. Norv. vol. iii. lib. 7.
c. 5. p. 439.) to have been a daughter of the emperor Henry IV.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

141

Skopte Ogmundsson came into variance with King
Magnus, and they quarrelled about the inheritance
of a deceased person which Skopte retained ; but the
king demanded it with so much earnestness, that it
had a dangerous appearance. Many meetings were
held about the affair, and Skopte took the resolution
that he and his son should never put themselves into
the king’s power at the same time ; and besides there
was no necessity to do so. When Skopte was with
the king he represented to him that there Avas rela¬
tionship betAveen the king and him ; and also that he,
Skopte, had always been the king’s friend, and his
father’s likeAvise, and that their friendship had never
been shaken. He added, “ People might know that
I have sense enough not to hold a strife, sire, with
you, if I Avas wrong in what I asked ; but it is in¬
herited from my ancestors to defend my rights against
any man, Avithout distinction of persons.” The king
was just the same on this point, and his resolution
Avas by no means softened by such a speech. Then
Skopte went home.

Then Finn Skoptesson Avent to the king, spoke Avith
him, and entreated him to render justice to the father
and son in this business. The king answers angrily
and sharply. Then said Finn, “ I expected something
else, sire, from you, than that you would use the laAv’s
vexations against me when I took my seat in Qual-
dlnsey Island, which íe^v of your other friends Avould
do ; as they said, Avhat Avas true, that those who Avere
left there Avere deserted and doomed to death, if King
Inge had not shoAvn greater generosity to us than
you did; although many consider that we brought
shame and disgrace only from thence.” The king
was not to be moved by this speech, and Finn re¬
turned home.

Then came Ogmund Skoptesson to the king ; and
Avhen he came before him he produced his errand,

SAGA XT.

Chapter

XIX.

Of the
quarrel of
King Mag¬
nus and
Skopte Og¬
mundsson.

Chaiter
XX.
Finn
Skoptes-
son’s pro¬
ceedings.

Chapter

XXI.

Ogmund

142

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XI.

Sk op les¬
son’s pro¬
ceedings.

Chaptek
XXII.
Skopte Og-
mundsson’s

voyage

abroad.

Chapter

XXIII.
Miracle of
King Olaf
the Saint
at a fire.

and begged the king to do what was right and
proper towards him and his father. The king insisted
that the right was on his side, and said they were
“ particularly impudent.’’

Then said Ogmund, “It is a very easy thing for
thee, having the power, to do me and my father in¬
justice ; and I must say the old proverb is true, that
one whose life you save gives none, or a very bad
return. This I shall add, that never again shall I
come into thy service ; nor my father, if I can help
it.” Then Ogmund went home, and they never saw
each other again.

The spring after, Skopte Ogmundsson made ready
to travel out of the country. They had five long-
ships all well equipped. His sons, Ogmund, Finn,
and Thord, accompanied him on this journey. It
was very late before they were ready, and in autumn
they went over to Flanders, and wintered there.
Early in spring they sailed westward to Yalland, and
staid there all summer. Then they sailed farther, and
through Nörfasund^; and came in autumn to Rome,
where Skopte died. All, both father and sons, died
on this journey. Thord, who died in Sicily, lived the
longest. It is a common saying among the people,
that Skopte was the first Northman who sailed
through Norfasund ; and this voyage was much cele¬
brated.

It happened once in the merchant town (Nidaros),
where King Olaf reposes, that there broke out a fire
in the town which spread around. Then Olaf’s
shrine was taken out of the church, and set up oppo¬
site the fire. Thereupon came a crazy foolish man,
struck the shrine, threatened the holy saint, and said
all must be consumed by the flames, both churches
and other houses, if he did not save them by his

* Nörfasuntt — the Streights of Gibraltar.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

143

prayers. Now the burning of the church did cease,
by the help of Almighty God ; but the insane man
got sore eyes on the following night, and he lay there
until King Olaf entreated God Almighty to be mer¬
ciful to him ; after which he recovered in the same
church.

It happened once in the merchant town that a
woman was brought to the place where the holy
King Olaf reposes. She was so miserably shaped,
that she was altogether crumpled up; so that both
her feet lay in a circle against her loins. But as she
was diligent in her prayers, often weeping and making
vows to King Olaf, he cured her great infirmities ; so
that feet, legs, and other limbs straightened, and
every limb and part came to the right use for which
they were made. Before she could not creep there,
and now she went away active and brisk to her
family and home.

When King Magnus had been nine years king of
Norway, he equipped himself to go out of the country
with a great force. He sailed out into the West sea
with the finest men who could be got in Norway.
All the powerful men of the country followed him ;
such as Sigurd Hranesson and his brother Ulf, Yid-
kunner Johnsson, Dag Eilifsson, Sorker of Sogn,
Eyvind Olboge the king’s marshal, and many other
great men. With all this armament the king sailed
west to the Orkney Islands, from whence he took
with him Earl Erlend’s sons, Magnus and Erling, and
then sailed to the southern Hebudes. But as he
lay under the Scotch land, Magnus Erlendsson ^ ran
away in the night from the king’s ship, swam to the
shore, escaped into the woods, and came at last to
the Scotch king’s court. King Magnus sailed to

SAGA XT.

Chapter
XXIV.
Miracle of
King Olaf
the Saint
on a lame
woman.

Chapter
XXV.
War in |
Ireland

* This was Saint Magnus, earl of Orkney, to whom the cathedral
of Kirkwall is dedicated, and whose miracles are equal to Saint Olaf’s,

144

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XI.

Chapter
XXVI.
King
Magnus’s
foray on
the land.

Ireland with his fleet, and plundered there. King
Moriartak came to his assistance, and they conquered
a great part of the country, both Dublin and Dyflinar-
skiri (Dublin shire). King Magnus was in winter
up in Connaught with King Moriartak, but set men
to defend the country he had taken. Towards spring
both kings went westward with their army all the way
to Ulster^, where they had many battles, subdued the
country, and had conquered the greatest part of
Ulster when Moriartak returned home to Con¬
naught, f

King Magnus rigged his ships, and intended re¬
turning to Norway, but set his men to defend the
country of Dublin. He lay at Ulster ready for sea
with his whole fleet. As they thought they needed
cattle for ship-provision. King Magnus sent a message
to King Moriartak, telling him to send some cattle
for slaughter ; and appointed the day before Bartho¬
lomew’s day as the day they should arrive, if the
messengers reached him in safety ; but the cattle had
not made their appearance the evening before Bartho¬
lomew’s mass. On the mass- day itself, when the
sun rose in the sky, King Magnus went on shore him¬
self with the greater part of his men, to look after his
people, and to carry off cattle from the coast. The
weather was calm, the sun shone, and the road lay
through mires and mosses, and there w^ere paths cut
through; but there was brushwood on each side of
the road. When they came somewhat farther, they
reached a height from which they had a wide view.
They saw from it a great dust rising up the country,
as of horsemen, and they said to each other “ That
must be the Irish army;” but others said, “ It was
their own men returning with the cattle.” They halted
there; and Eyvind Olboge said, How, sire, do you

*

Uladstir is LTster.

t Kunnacter is Connaught.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

145

intend to direct the march ? The men think we are
advancing imprudently. You know the Irish are
treacherous ; think, therefore, of a good counsel for
your men.” Then the king said, Let us draw up
our men, and be ready, if there be treachery.” This
was done, and the king and Eyvind went before the
line. King Magnus had a helmet on his head ; a red
shield, in which was inlaid a gilded lion ; and was girt
with the sword Legbiter, of which the hilt was of
tooth (ivory), and the hand-grip wound about with
gold thread ; and the sword was extremely sharp. In
his hand he had a short spear, and a red silk, short
cloak over his coat, on which, both before and behind,
was embroidered a lion in yellow silk ; and all men
acknowledged that they never had seen a brisker,
statelier man. Eyvind had also a red silk cloak like
the king’s; and he also was a stout, handsome, war¬
like man.

When the dust-cloud approached nearer they knew
their own men, who were driving the cattle. The
Irish king had been faithful to the promises he
had given the king, and had sent them. There¬
upon they all turned towards the ships, and it was
mid-day. When they came to the mires they went
but slowly over the boggy places ; and then the Irish
started up on every side against them from every
bushy point of land, and the battle began instantly.
The Korthmen were going divided in various heaps,
so that many of them fell.

Then said Eyvind to the king, “ Unfortunate is
this march to our people, and we must instantly hit
upon some good plan.”

The king answered, “ Call all the men together
with the war-horns under the banner, and the men
who are here shall make a rampart with their shields,
and thus we will retreat backwards out of the mires ;

VOL. III. L

SAGA XI.

Chapter
XXVII.
Fall of
King
Magnus.

146

CHRONICLE OE THE

SAGA XI. and we will clear ourselves fast enough when we get
upon firm ground.”

The Irish shot boldly ; and although they fell in
crowds, there came always two in the place of one.
Now when the king had come . to the nearest ditch
there was a very difiicult crossing, and few places
were passable ; so that many Northmen fell there.
Then the king called to his lenderman Thorgrim
Skindhue, who was an Upland man, and ordered him
to go over the ditch with his division. We shall
defend you,” said he, “ in the mean time, so that no
harm shall come to you. Go out then to those holms,
and shoot at them from thence ; for ye are good bow¬
men.”

When Thorgrim and his men came over the ditch
they cast their shields behind their backs, and set
off to the ships.

When the king saw this, he said, “ Thou art de¬
serting thy king in an unmanly way. I was foolish in
making thee a lenderman, and driving Sigurd Hund
out of the country ; for never would he have be¬
haved so.”

King Magnus received a wound, being pierced by
a spear through both thighs above the knees. The
king laid hold of the shaft between his legs, broke
the spear in two, and said, Thus we break spear-
shafts, my lads ; let us go briskly on. Nothing hurts
me.” A little after King Magnus was struck in the
neck with an Irish axe, and this was his death-wound.
Then those who were behind fled. Yidkunner
Johnsson instantly killed the man who had given the i
king his death-wound, and fled, after having received
three wounds ; but brought the king’s banner and !
the sword Legbiter to the ships. Yidkunner was the j
last man who fled ; the other next to him was Sigurd |
Hranesson, and the third before him Dag Eilifsson. |
There fell with King Magnus, Eyvind Olboge, Ulf |

KINGS OF NORWAY.

147

Hranesson, and many other great people. Many of saga xi.
the Northmen fell, bat many more of the Irish. The
Northmen who escaped sailed away immediately in
autumn. Erling, Earl Erlend’s^ son, fell with King
Magnus in Ireland ; but the men who fled from Ire¬
land came to the Orkney Islands. Now when King
Sigurd heard that his father had fallen, he set off im¬
mediately, leaving the Irish king^s daughter behind,
and proceeded in autumn with the whole fleet directly
to Norway.

Kin^ Mamus was ten years kin^ of Norway, and Chapter

Ö O J O J ^ ^ X V 1 11

in his days there was good peace kept within the ofKing ’
country ; but the people were sorely oppressed with
levies. King Magnus was beloved by his men, but kunner
the bonders thought him harsh. The words have
been transmitted from him that he said when his
friends observed that he proceeded incautiously when
he was on his expeditions abroad, — “that kings are
made for honour, not for long life.” King Magnus
was nearly thirty years of age when he fell. Yid-
kunner did not fly until he had killed the man who
gave the king his mortal wound, and for this cause
King Magnus’s sons had him in the most affectionate
regard.

^ Erlend^ the earl of Orkney^ who was taken in the former expedi¬
tion^ and died in Drontheim.

148

CimONICLE OF THE

SAGA XII.

Chapter

I.

Beginning
of the reign
of King
Magnus’s
sons.

XIL

SAGA OF SIGUKD THE CRUSADER, AND HIS
BROTHERS EYSTEIN AND OLAEA

After King Magnus Barefoot’s fall, Ins sons, Eystein,
Sigurd, and Olaf, took tlie kingdom of Norway.
Eystein got the northern, and Sigurd the southern
part of the country. King Olaf was then four or five
years old, and the third part of the country which
he had was under the management of his two bro¬
thers. King Sigurd was chosen king when he was
thirteen or fourteen years old, and Eystein was a year
older. When King Magnus’s sons were chosen kings,
the men who had followed Skopte Ogmundsson re¬
turned home. Some had been to Jerusalem, some to
Constantinople ; and there they had made themselves
renowned, and they had many kinds of novelties to
talk about. By these extraordinary tidings many
men in Norway were incited to the same expedition;
and it was also told that the Northmen who liked to
go into the military service at Constantinople found
many opportunities of getting property. Then these
Northmen desired much that one of the two kings,
either Eystein or Sigurd, should go as commander of
the troop which was preparing for this expedition.
The kings agreed to this, and carried on the equip¬
ment at their common expense. Many great men,
both of the lendermen and bonders, took part in
this enterprise; and when all was ready for the
journey it was determined that Sigurd should go.

They reigned from about 1103 to about 1130.

KINGS OF NOKWAY.

149

and Ey stein, in tlie mean time, should rule the king¬
dom upon their joint account.

A year or two after King Magnus’s fall, Hakon, a
son of Earl Paul, came from Orkney. The kings
gave him the earldom and government of the Orkney
Islands, as the earls before him, his father Paul or his
uncle Erlend, had possessed it ; and Earl Hakon then
sailed back immediately to Orkney.

Pour years after the fall of King Magnus, King
Sigurd sailed with his people from Norway. He had
then sixty ships. So says Thorarin Stuttfeld: —

A young king just and kind,

People of loyal mind :

Such brave men soon agree, —

To distant lands they sail with glee.

To the distant Holy Land
A brave and pious hand.

Magnificent and gay.

In sixty long-ships glide away.”

King Sigurd sailed in autumn to England, where
Henry, son of William the Bastard, was then king,
and Sigurd remained with him all winter. So says
Einar Skuleson : —

The king is on the waves !

The storm he boldly braves.

His ocean -steed,

With winged speed.

O’er the white-flashing surges,

To England’s coast he urges ;

And there he stays the winter o’er :

More gallant king ne’er trod that shore.”

In spring King Sigurd and his fleet sailed west¬
ward to Valland^, and in autumn came to Galicia f,
where he staid the second winter. So says Einar
Skuleson : —

Our king, whose land so wide
No kingdom stands beside.

* Valland, — the west of France.

I Galizo land, — the province of Galicia, in the north-west of Spain.

L 3

SAGA XII.

Chapter

II.

Of the
Earls of
Orkney.

Chapter
III.
King
Sigurd’s
journey
out of the
country.

Chapter

IV.

Of Kinff

Sigurd’s

journey.

150

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA xiL In Jacob’s land* next winter spenL

On holy things intent ;

And 1 have heard the royal youth
Cut off an earl who swerved from truth.

Our brave king will endure no ill^ —

The hawks with him will get their fill/’

It went thus : — The earl who ruled over the land
made an agreement with King Sigurd, that he should
provide King Sigurd and his men a market at which
they could purchase victuals all the winter ; but this
he did not fulfil longer than to about Yule. It be¬
gan then to be difficult to get food and necessaries,
for it is a poor barren land. Then King Sigurd with
a great body of men went against a castle which be¬
longed to the earl ; and the earl fled from it, having
but few people. King Sigurd took there a great deal
of victuals and of other booty, which he put on board
of his ships, and then made ready and proceeded
westward to Spain. It so fell out, as the king was
saihng past Spain, that some vikings who were
cruising for plunder met him with a fleet, of galleys,
and King Sigurd attacked them. This was his first
battle with heathen men ; and he won it, and took
eight galleys from them. So says Halldor Skualldre : —

“ Bold vikings^ not slow
To the death-fray to go,

Meet our Norse king by chance,

And their galleys advance.

The bold vikings lost
Many a man of their host.

And eight galleys too.

With cargo and crew.”

Thereafter King Sigurd sailed against a castle called
Sintref, and fought another battle. This castle is in
Spain, and was occupied by many heathens, who from
thence plundered Christian people. King Sigurd took
the castle, and killed every man in it, because they

* Jacob s land. Galicia is called Jacob’s land by the scald, from
Saint James of Compostella: the apostle James, whose relics are held in
veneration at Compostella in Spain. Portugal appears to have been
reckoned part of Spain, and Galicia a distinct country.

t Sintre, now Cintra, in Portugal ; then reckoned part of Spain.

KINGS OF NOEWAY.

151

refused to be baptized ; and be got there an immense
booty. So says Halldor Skualldre : —

From Spain I have much news to tell
Of what our generous king befell.

And first he routs the viking crew,

At Cintra next the heathens slew ;

The men he treated as God’s foes.

Who dared the true faith to oppose.

No man he spared who would not take
The Christian faith for Jesus’ sake.”

After this King Sigurd sailed Avith his fleet to
Lisbon, Avhich is a great city in Spain, half Christian
and half heathen ; for there lies the division betAveen
Christian Spain and heathen Spain'^, and all the
districts Avhich lie west of the city are occupied by
heathens. There Kin^ Sigurd had his third battle

o o

Avith the heathens, and gained the victory, and with
it a great booty. So says Halldor Skualldre : —

The son of kings on Lisbon’s plains
A third and bloody battle gains.

He and his Norsemen boldly land,

Running their stout ships on the strand.”

Then King Sigurd sailed westwards along heathen
Spain, and brought up at a town called Alkassi f ; and
here he had his fourth battle with the heathens, and
took the town, and killed so many people that the
town was left empty. They got there also immense
booty. So says Halldor Skualldre : —

A fourth great battle, I am told,

Our Norse king and his people hold
At Alkassi ; and here again
The victory fell to our Norsemen.”

* The heathen Spain would be the parts of the Peninsula occupied by
the Moors.

•j- There is some difficulty in finding a town corresponding to this
Alkassi. It cannot be Alkassir in Fez in Africa, as some have supposed,
as the context does not agree with it; nor with Algesiras, which is
within the Streights of Gibraltar (Norfasimd), and it would have been
so described. Alcasser de Sal lies too far inland to have been the place.
Lady Grosvenor, in her Yacht Voyage, 1841, speaks of a Moorish palace
near Seville, called Alcasir, which would correspond best with the saga
account.

L 4

SAGA XII.

Chaftes

V.

Lisbon

taken.

152

cimoNicLE or the

SAGA XIT.

Chapter

VI.

Battle in
the island
Formen-
tara.

And also this verse : —

I heard that through the town he went^

And heathen widows’ wild lament
Resounded in the empty halls ;

For every townsman flies or falls.”

King Sigurd then proceeded on his voyage, and
came to Norfa sound ^ ; and in the sound he was met
by a large viking force, and the king gave them battle :
and this was his fifth engagement with heathens since
the time he left Norway. He gained the victory here
also. So says Halldor Skualldre : —

Ye moistened your dry swords with blood.

As through Niorfa sound ye stood:

The screaming raven got a feast.

As ye sailed onward to the East.”

King Sigurd then sailed eastward along the coast
of Serklandf, and came to an island there called
Formentara. There a great many heathen Moors had
taken up their dwelling in a cave, and had built a
strong stone-wall before its mouth. It was high up
to climb to the wall, so that whoever attempted to
ascend was driven back with stones or missile wea¬
pons. They berried the country all round, and carried
all their booty to their cave. King Sigurd landed on
this island, and went to the cave ; but it lay in a pre¬
cipice, and there was a high winding path to the stone¬
wall, and the precipice above projected over it. The
heathens defended the stone-wall, and were not afraid
of the Northmen’s arms; for they could throw stones,
or shoot down upon the Northmen under their feet :
neither did the Northmen, under such circumstances,
dare to mount up. The heathens took their clothes
and other valuable things, carried them out upon the
wall, spread them out before the Northmen, shouted,

* Nörfa Sound, — the Streights of Gibraltar; so called from Norfa,
the first Norse viking who passed through it.

t Serkland is the Saracen’s land, the North of Africa ; and the inha¬
bitants bluemen, — the Moors.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

153

and defied them, and upbraided them as cowards. Then saga xh.
Sigurd fell upon this plan. He had two ship’s boats,
such as we call barks, drawn up the precipice right
above the mouth of the cave; and had thick ropes
fastened around the stem, stern, and hull of each. In
these boats as many men went as could find room,
and then the boats were lowered by the ropes down in
front of the mouth of the cave ; and the men in. the
boats shot with stones and missiles into the cave, and
the heathens were thus driven from the stone-wall.

Then Sigurd with his troops climbed up the precipice
to the foot of the stone-wall, which they succeeded in
breaking down, so that they came into the cave. Now
the heathens fled within the stone -wall that was built
across the cave ; on which the king ordered large
trees to be brought to the cave, made a great pile in
the mouth of it, and set fire to the wood. When the
fire and smoke got the upper hand, some of the
heathens lost their lives in it ; some fled ; some fell by
the hands of the Northmen ; and part were killed, part
burned ; and the Northmen made the greatest booty
they had got on all their expeditions. So says Halldor
Skualldre : —

Formentara lay
In the victor’s way;

His ships’ stems fly
To victory.

The bluemen there
Must fire bear^

And Norsemen’s steel
At their hearts feel.”

And also thus : - —

“ ’Twas a feat of renown, —
The boat lowered down.
With a boat’s crew brave.

In front of the cave ;

While up the rock scaling.
And comrades up trailing,
The Norsemen gain.

And the bluemen are slain,”

154

CimONICLE OF THE

SAGA XII.

Chapter
VII.
Of the
battles at
Ivitsa and
Minorca.

Chapter
VIII.
Earl Rocer

Ö

iTiade a
king.

And also Thorarin Stuttfeld says : —

The king’s men up the mountain’s side
Drag two boats from the ocean’s tide:

The two boats lay.

Like hill-wolves gray.

Now o’er the rock in ropes they’re swinging,

W ell manned, and death to bluemen bringing :

They hang before
The robbers’ door.”

Thereafter King Sigurd proceeded on his expedition,
and came to an island called Ivitsa (Ivica), and had
there his seventh battle, and gained a victory. So
says Halldor Skualldre : —

His ships at Ivica now ride,

The king’s, whose fame spreads far and wide ;

And here the bearers of the shield
Their arms again in battle wield.”

Thereafter King Sigurd came to an island called
Minorca, and held there his eighth battle, with hea-
then men, and gained the victory. So says Halldor
Skualldre : — -

On green Minorca’s plains
The eighth battle now he gains:

Again the heathen foe

Falls at the Norse king’s blow.”

In spring King Sigurd came to Sicily, and remained
a long time there. There was then a Duke Koger in
Sicily, who received the king kindly, and invited him
to a feast. King Sigurd came to it with a great retinue,
and was splendidly entertained. Every day Duke
Koger stood at the company’s table, doing service to
the king ; but the seventh day of the feast, when the
people had come to table, and had wiped their hands,
King Sigurd took the Duke by the hand, led him up
to the high seat, and saluted him with the title of
king ; and gave the right that there should be always
a king over the dominion of Sicily, although before’
there had only been earls or dukes over that country.*

* It appears to have been the feudal idea of the times that a title, or

KINGS OF NORWAY.

155

It is written in the chronicles, that Earl Roger let
himself first be called king of Sicily in the year of
our Lord 1102, having before contented himself with
the title of earl only of Sicily, although he was duke
of Calabria and Apulia, and was called Roger the
Great ; and when he afterwards made the king of
Tunet or Tunis tributary to him, he had these words
engraved on his sword, —

Apulus et Calaber^ Siculus mihi servit et Afer.”

King Roger of Sicily was a very great king. He won
and subdued all Apulia, and many large islands besides
in the Greek sea; and therefore he was called Roger
the Great. His son was William king of Sicily, who
for a long time had great hostility with the emperor
of Constantinople. King William had three daughters,
but no son. One of his daughters he married to the
Emperor Henry, a son of the Emperor Frederic ; and
their son was Frederic, who for a short time after was
emperor of Rome. His second daughter was married
to the Duke of Kypur.* The third daughter, Margaret,
was married to the chief of the corsairs ; but the Em¬
peror Henry killed both these brothers-in-law. The
daughter of Roger the Great, king of Sicily, was
married to the Emperor Manuel of Constantinople;
and their son was the Emperor Kirialax.'j'

In summer King Sigurd sailed across the Greek sea
to Palestine J, and came to Acre§, where he landed,
and went by land to Jerusalem. || Now when Baldwin,
king of Palestine, heard that King Sigurd would visit

dignity, must be conferred by a superior in title or dignity ; and thus a
wandering king from the North could raise the Earl Roger of Sicily to
the kingly title.

* Kypur — Cyprus.

t Kirialax. Kuriou Alexou — the Emperor Alexis Comnenis.
t Jorsalaland. — Palestine: the land of Jerusalem.

§ Akersborg — Acre.

|j Jorsalaborg — Jerusalem.

SAGA XII.

Chapter

IX.

Of King
Roger.

Chapter

X.

King Si¬
gurd’s ex¬
pedition to
Palestine.

156

CHEONICLE OF THE

SAGA XII.

Chapter

XI.

Sidon

taken.

the city, lie let valuable clothes be brought and spread
upon the road, and the nearer to the city the more
valuable ; and said, “ Now ye must know that a cele¬
brated king from the northern part of the earth is
come to visit us ; and many are the gallant deeds and
celebrated actions told of him, therefore we shall re¬
ceive him w^ell ; and in doing so we shall also know
his magnificence and power. If he ride straight on to
the city, taking little notice of these splendid prepar¬
ations, I will conclude that he has enough of such
things in his own kingdom ; but, on the other hand,
if he rides off the road, I shall not think so highly of
his royal dignity at home.” Now King Sigurd rides
to the city with great state; and when he saw this
magnificence, he rode straight forward over the clothes,
and told all his men to do the same. King Baldwin
received him particularly well, and rode with him all
the way to the river Jordan, and then back to the city
of Jerusalem. Einar Skuleson speaks thus of it: —

Good reason has the scald to sing
The generous temper of the king^

Whose sea-cold keel from northern waves
Ploughs the blue sea that green isles laves.

At Acre scarce were we made fast,

In holy ground our anchors cast,

When the king made a joyful morn
To all who toil with him had borne.”

And again he made these lines: —

To Jerusalem he came.

He who loves war’s noble game,

(The scald no greater monarch finds
Beneath the heaven’s wide hall of winds)

All sin and evil from him flings
In Jordan’s wave: for all his sins
(Which all must praise) he pardon wins.”

King Sigurd staid a long time in the land of
Jerusalem in autumn, and in the bee'inninp' of winter.

King Baldwin made a magnificent feast for King
Sigurd and many of his people, and gave him many
holy relics. By the orders of King Baldwin and the

KINGS OF NORWAY.

157

patriarch, there was taken a splinter otF the holy cross ; saga xn.
and on this holy relic both made oath, that this wood
was of the holy cross upon which God himself had
been tortured. Then this holy relic was given to
King Sigurd ; with the condition that he, and twelve
other men with him, should swear to promote Chris¬
tianity with all his power, and erect an archbishop’s
seat in Norway if he could; and also that the cross
should be kept where the holy King Olaf reposed, and
that he should introduce tithes, and also pay them
himself. After this King Sigurd returned to his ships
at Acre ; and then King Baldwin prepared to go to
Syria, to a town called Saet, which some think had
been Sidon. This castle, which belonged to the hea¬
thens, he wished to conquer, and lay under the Chris¬
tians. On this expedition King Sigurd accompanied
him with all his men, and sixty ships; and after the
kings had besieged the town some time it surrendered,
and they took possession of it, and of a great treasure
of money; and their men found other booty. King
Sigurd made a present of his share to King Baldwin.

So says Halldor Skualldre : —

He who for wolves provides the feast
Seized on the city in the Easq
The heathen nest ; and honour drew^

And gold to give^ from those he slew.”

Einar Skuleson also tells of it : —

The Norsemen’s king^ the scalds relate,

Has ta’en the heathen town of Saet :

The slinging engine with dread noise
Gables and roofs with stones destroys.

The town wall totters too, — it falls;

The Norsemen mount the blackened walls.

He who stains red the raven’s bill
Has won, — the town lies at his will.”

Thereafter King Sigurd went to his ships, and made
ready to leave Palestine. They sailed north to the
island Cyprus ; and King Sigurd staid there a while,
and then went to the Greek country, and came to the

158

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XII.

Chapter
XÍL
King Si¬
gurd’s ex¬
pedition to
Constan¬
tinople.

land with all his fleet at Engilsness.^ Here he lay
still for a fortnight, although every day it blew a
breeze for going before the wind to the north ; but
Sigurd would wait a side wind, so that the sails might
stretch fore and aft in the ship : for in all his sails
there was silk joined in, before and behind in the sail,
and neither those before nor those behind the ships
could see the slightest appearance of this, if the vessel
was before the wind ; so they would rather wait a side
wind.

When King Sigurd sailed into Constantinople, he
steered near the land. Over all the land there are
burghs, castles, country towns, the one upon the
other without interval. There from the land one
could see into the bights of the sails ; and the sails
stood so close beside each other, that they seemed to
form one enclosure. All the people turned out to see
King Sigurd sailing past. The Emperor Alexius had
also heard of King Sigurd’s expedition, and ordered
the city port of Constantinople to be opened, which is
called the Gold Tower, through which the emperor
rides when he has been long absent from Constanti¬
nople, or has made a campaign in which he has been
victorious. The emperor had precious cloths spread
out from the Gold Tower to Loktiar, which is the name
of the emperor’s most splendid hall. King Sigurd
ordered his men to ride in great state into the city,
and not to regard all the new things they might see ;
and this they did. The emperor sent singers and
stringed instruments to meet them ; and with this
great splendour King Sigurd and his followers were
received into Constantinople. It is told that King
Sigurd had his horse shod with golden shoes before he
rode into the city, and managed so that one of the

* Engilsness, — supposed to be the ness at the river Ægos^ called
Ægisnes in the Orkeyinga Saga, within the Dardanelles ; not Cape Saint
Angelo in the Morea.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

159

shoes came oiF in the street, but that none of his men saga xn.
should regard it. When King Sigurd came to the
magnificent hall, every thing was in the grandest
style ; and when King Sigurd’s men had come to their
seats, and were ready to drink, the emperor’s messen¬
gers came into the hall, bearing between them purses
of gold and silver, which they said the emperor had
sent to King Sigurd : but the king did not look upon
it, but told his men to divide it among themselves.

When the messengers returned to the emperor, and
told him this, he said, This king must be very
powerful and rich not to care for such things, or even
give a word of thanks for them;” and ordered them
to return with great chests filled with gold. They
come again to King Sigurd, and say, These gifts and
presents are sent thee from the emperor.” King
Sigurd said, This is a great and handsome treasure,
my men ; divide it among you.” The messengers
return, and tell this to the emperor. He replies, “ This
king must either exceed other kings in power and
wealth, or he has not so much understanding as a
king ought to have. Go thou now the third time, and
carry him the costliest purple, and these chests with
ornaments of gold : ” to which he added two gold rings.

Now the messengers went again to King Sigurd, and
told him the emperor had sent him this great treasure.

Then he stood up, and took the rings, and put them
on his hand ; and the king made a beautiful oration in
Greek, in which he thanked the emperor in many fine
expressions for all this honour and magnificence, but
divided the treasure again very equitably among his
men. King Sigurd remained here some time. The
Emperor Alexius sent his men to him to ask if he
would rather accept from the emperor six lispund of
gold, or would have the emperor give the games in
his honour which the emperor was used to have

160

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XII.

Chapter
XIII.
King Si¬
gurd makes
a great

played at tlie Padreimr.^ King Sigurd preferred tlie
games, and the messengers said the spectacle would
not cost the emperor less than the money offered.
Then the emperor prepared for the games, which were
held in the usual way : but this day every thing went
on better for the king than for the queen; for the
queen has always the half part in the games, and their
men, therefore, always strive against each other in all
games. The Greeks accordingly think that when
the king’s men win more games at the Padreimr than
the queen’s, the king will gain the victory when he
goes into battle. People who have been in Constanti¬
nople tell that the Padreimr is thus constructed: — A
high wall surrounds a flat plain, which may be com¬
pared to a round bare Thing-place, with earthen banks
all around at the stone-wall, on which banks the spec¬
tators sit ; but the games themselves are in the flat
plain. There are many sorts of old events represented
concerning the Asers, Yolsungers, and Giukungers, in
these games f ; and all the flgures are cast in copper, or
metal, with so great art that they appear to be living
things ; and to the people it appears as if they were
really present in the games. The games themselves
are so artfully and cleverly managed, that people
appear to be riding in the air ; and at them also are
used shot-flrej , and all kinds of harp-playing, singing,
and music instruments.

It is related that King Sigurd one day was to give
the emperor a feast, and he ordered his men to pro¬
vide sumptuously all that was necessary for the en-

* Padreimr^ or Padrennir,— the Hippodrome where the great spectacles
were given.

t It is not likely that the feats of the Asers^ Volsungers, and Giukun-
gers were represented in the games of the Hippodrome at Constantinople ;
but very likely that the Væringers^ and other Northmen there, would
apply the names of their own mythology to the representations taken
from the Greek mythology.

;|; Fire-works, or the Greek fire, probably were used.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

161

tertainment ; and when all things were provided which
are suitable for an entertainment given by a great
personage to persons of high dignity, King Sigurd
ordered his men to go to the street in the city where
iire-wood was sold, as they would require a great
quantity to prepare the feast. They said the king
need not be afraid of wanting iire-wood, for every day
many loads were brought into the town. When it
was necessary, however, to have iire-wood, it was
found that it was all sold, which they told the king.
He replied, “ Go and try if you can get walnuts. They
will answer as well as wood for fuehf They went
and got as many as they needed. Now came the
emperor, and his grandees and court, and sat down
to table. All was very splendid ; and King Sigurd re¬
ceived the emperor with great state, and entertained
him magnificently. When the queen and the em¬
peror found that nothing was awanting, she sent some
persons to inquire what they had used for fire-wood ;
and they came to a house filled with walnuts, and
they came back and told the queen. “ Truly,” said
she, “ this is a magnificent king, who spares no ex¬
pense where his honour is concerned.” She had con¬
trived this to try what they would do when they could
get no fire- wood to dress their feast with.

King Sigurd soon after prepared for his return
home. He gave the emperor all his ships ; and the
valuable figure-heads which were on the Idng’s ships
were set up in Peter’s church, where they have since
been to be seen. The emperor gave the king many
horses and guides to conduct him through all his do¬
minions, and appointed markets for him in his terri¬
tories at which he could buy food and drink. Then
King Sigurd left Constantinople; but a great many
Northmen remained, and went into the emperor’s
pay. Then King Sigurd travelled from Bulgaria, and

VOL. III. M

SAGA XII

feast for the
emperor of
Constan¬
tinople.

Chapter
XIV.
King
Sigurd the
Crusader’s
return
home.

162

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XII.

Chapter
XV.
King
Eystein’s
doings at
home in
the mean¬
time.

through Hungary, Pannonia, Suabia, and Bavaria. In
Suabia he met the Roman emperor Lotharius, who
received him in the most friendly way, gave him
guides through his dominions, and had markets esta¬
blished for him at which he could purchase all he
required. When King Sigurd came to Sleswick in
Denmark, Earl Eilif made a sumptuous feast for him ;
and it was then midsummer. In Heidaby* he met
the Danish king Nicolaus, who received him in the
most friendly way, made a great entertainment for
him, accompanied him north to Jutland, and gave
him a ship provided mth every thing needful. Erom
thence the king returned to Norway, and was joyfully
welcomed on his return to his kingdom. It was the
common talk among the people, that none had ever
made so honourable a journey from Norway as this
of King Sigurd. He was twenty years of age, and
had been three years on these travels. His brother

Olaf was then twelve vears old.

%/

King Ey stein had also effected much in the country
that was useful while King Sigurd was on his journey.
He had a large hall built in Bergen, which was the
greatest and most celebrated lodging-inn in Norway.
He also established a monastery at Nordness in Bergen,
and endowed it with much property. He also built
Michael’s church, which is a very splendid stone temple.
In the king’s house there he also built the Church of
the Apostles, and the great hall, which is the most
magnificent Avooden structure that Avas CA^er built in
NorAvay. He also built a church at Agdaness Avith a
parapet; and a harbour, AAdiere formerly there had
been a barren spot only. In Nidaros he built in the
King’s street the church of Saint Nicolas, Avhich Avas
particularly ornamented Avith carved Avork, and all
in Avood. He also built a church nortli in Yaage

* The town opposite to Slesvig, on the river She.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

163

in Halogaland, and endowed it with property and
revenues.

King Eystein sent a verbal message to the most in¬
telligent and powerful of the men of Jemteland, and
invited them to him ; received them all as they came,
with great kindness ; accompanied them part of the
way home, and gave them presents, and thus enticed
them into a friendship with him. Kow as many of
them became accustomed to visit him and receive gifts
from him, and he also sent gifts to some who did not
come themselves, he soon gained the favour of all the
people who had most influence in the country. Then
he spoke to the Jemteland people, and told them they
had done ill in turning away from the kings of Nor¬
way, and withdrawing from them their taxes and
allegiance. He represented to them how many useful
things they could get from Norway, and how incon¬
venient it was for them to apply to the Swedish king
for what they needed.^ By these speeches he brought
matters so far, that the Jemteland people of their
own accord offered to be subject to him, which they
said was useful and necessary for them; and thus, on
both sides, it was agreed that the Jemtelanders should
put their whole country under King Eystein. The
first beginning was with the men of consequence, who
persuaded the people to take an oath of fidelity to
King Eystein ; and then they went to King Eystein,
and confirmed the country to him by oath ; and this
arrangement has since continued for a long time.
King Eystein thus conquered Jemteland by his wis¬
dom, and not by hostile inroads as some of his fore¬
fathers had done.

King Eystein was the handsomest man that could
be seen. He had blue open eyes ; his hair yellow and

* The dried fish of Norway are a necessary article of food to the
people of this district_, which they cannot get from the Baltic coast of
Sweden.

M 2

SAGA XII.

Chapter
XVI.
Of King
Eystein.

Chapter
XVII.
Of King
Eystein’s

164

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XII. curling ; his stature not tall, but of the middle size,
perfe^ns He was wise, intelligent, and acquainted with the
and mind liistorj. He had much knowledge of man¬

kind, was quick in counsel, prudent in words, and
very eloquent and very generous. He was very
merry, yet modest ; and was liked and beloved, indeed,
by all the people. He was married to Ingebord, a
daughter of Guttorm son of Thorer of Steige; and
their daughter was Maria, who afterwards married
Gudbrand Skafhaugsson. King Ey stein had in many
ways improved the laws and privileges of the country
people, and kept strictly to the laws ; and he made
himself acquainted with all the laws of Norway, and
showed in every thing great prudence and under¬
standing. From this it could be easily seen what a
valuable man King Eystein was, how full of friend¬
ship, and how much he turned his mind to examining
and avoiding every thing that could be of disadvan¬
tage to his friends.

There was an Iceland man in the king’s house called
Ivar Ingemundsson. The man was witty, of great
family, and also a poet ; and the king was particularly
kind to him, which mil be seen from what we are now
going to relate. Ivar was one day out of spirits; and
when the king perceived it he called Ivar to him, en¬
tered into conversation with him, and asked him why
he was so melancholy. “ Before, when thou wast
with us, we had much amusement with thy conversa¬
tion. Art thou no longer satisfied to be with us ? ”

Ivar replied, it was not the case.

The king : “ I do not ask thee on this account ; for
I know thou art a man of too good an understanding
to believe that I would do any thing against thee.
Tell me then what it is.”

He replied, “ I cannot tell thee what it is.”

Then said the king, “ I will try to guess what it is.
Is there any man who displeases thee ? ”

KINGS OE NOEWAY.

165

To this he replied, “ No.^’ saga xh.

“ Dost thou think thou art held in less esteem by
me than thou wouldst like to be?’’

To this he also replied, “ No.”

“ Hast thou observed any thing whatever that has
made an impression on thee at which thou art ill
pleased ?”

He replied, it was not this either.

The king : “It is difficult now to guess. Is there
any girl here, or in any other country, to whom thy
affections are engaged ?”

He said it was so.

The king said, “ Do not be melancholy on that ac¬
count. Go to Iceland when springs sets in, and I
shall give thee money, and presents, and with these
my letters and seal to the men who have the principal
sway there ; and I know no man there who mil not
obey my persuasions or threats.”

Ivar replied, “ My fate is heavier, sire ; for my
omi brother has the girl.”

Then said the king, “ Throw it out of thy mind;
and I know a counsel against this. After Yule I will
travel in guest-quarters. Thou shalt come along with
me, and thou wilt have an opportunity of seeing many
beautiful girls ; and, provided they are not of the
royal stock, I will get thee one of them in marriage.”

Ivar replies, “ Sire, my fate is still the heavier; for
as oft as I see beautiful and excellent girls I only
remember the more that girl, and they increase my
misery.”

The king : “ Then I will give thee property to ma¬
nage, and estates for thy amusement.”

He replied, “ For that I have no desire.”

The king : “ Then I will give thee money, that thou
mayst travel in other countries.”

He said he did not wish this.

Then said the king, “ It is difficult for me to seek

M 3

166

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XII.

Chapter

XVIII.
Of King
Sigurd.

Chapter
XIX.
Of King
Sigurd’s
dream.

farther, for I have proposed every thing that occurs
to me. There is but one thing else ; and that is but
little compared to what I have offered thee. Come
to me every day after the tables are removed, and, if
I am not sitting upon important business, I shall talk
with thee about the girl in every way that I can think
of; and I shall do so at leisure. It sometimes happens
that sorrow is lightened by being brought out openly ;
and thou shalt never go away without some gift.”

He replied, “ This I Avill do, sire, and return
thanks for this inquiry.”

And now they did so constantly; and when the
king was not occupied with weightier affairs he talked
with him, and his sorrow by degrees wore away, and
he was again in good spirits.

King Sigurd was a stout and strong man, with
brown hair; of a manly appearance, but not handsome;
well grown; of little speech, and often not friendly,
but good to his friends, and faithful ; not very elo¬
quent, but moral and polite. King Sigurd was self-
willed, and severe in his revenge ; strict in observing
the law; was generous; and withal an able, powerful
king. His brother Olaf was a tall, thin man; hand¬
some in countenance ; lively, modest, and popular.
When all these brothers, Ey stein, Sigurd, and Olaf,
were kings of Norway, they did away with many
burthens which the Danes had laid upon the people
in the time that Swend Alfifason ruled Norway ; and
on this account they were much beloved, both by the
people and the great men of the country.

Once King Sigurd fell into low spirits, so that few
could get him to converse, and he sat but a short
time at the drinking table. This was heavy on his
counsellors, friends, and court; and they begged King
Ey stein to consider liow they could discover the cause
why the people who came to the king could get no
reply to Avhat they laid before him. King Eystein

KINGS OF NOKWAY.

167

answered them, that it was difficult to speak with saga xn.
the king about this ; but at last, on the entreaty of
many, he promised to do it. Once, when they were
both together. King Eystein brought the matter be¬
fore his brother, and asked the cause of his melan¬
choly. “ It is a great grief, sire, to many to see thee
so melancholy; and we would like to know what has
occasioned it, or if perchance thou hast heard any
news of great weight ?”

King Sigurd replies, that it was not so.

“ Is it then, brother,” says King Eystein, that
you would like to travel out of the country, and aug¬
ment your dominions as our father did ?”

He answered, that it was not that either.

“ Is it, then, that any man here in the country has
offended?”

To this also the king said “ No.”

Then I would like to know if you have dreamt
any thing that has occasioned this depression of
mind ?”

The king answered, that it was so.

Tell me then, brother, thy dream.”

King Sigurd said, “ I will not tell it, unless thou
interpret it as it may turn out ; and I shall be quick
at perceiving if thy interpretation be right or not.”

King Eystein replies, This is a very difficult
matter, sire, on both sides ; as I am exposed to thy
anger if I cannot interpret it, and to the blame of the
public if I can do nothing in the matter ; but I will
rather fall under your displeasure, even if my inter¬
pretation should not be agreeable.”

King Sigurd replies, “ It appeared to me, in a
dream, as if we brothers were all sitting on a bench
in front of Christ church in Drontheim ; and it ap¬
peared to me as if our relative King Olaf the Saint
came out of the church adorned with the royal rai¬
ment glancing and splendid, and with the most

M 4

168

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XII. delightful and joyful countenance. He went to our
brother King Olaf, took him by the hand, and said
cheerfully to him, ‘ Come with me, friend.’ On which
he appeared to stand up and go into the church.
Soon after King Olaf the Saint came out of the church,
but not so gay and brilliant as before. Now he went
to thee, brother, and said to thee that thou shouldst
go with him ; on which he led thee with him, and ye
went into the church. Then I thought, and waited
for it, that he would come to me, and meet me ; but it
was not so. Then I was seized with great sorrow,
and great dread and anxiety fell upon me, so that I
was altogether without strength; and then I awoke.”

King Ey stein replies, “ Thus I interpret your
dream, sire, — That the bench betokens the kingdom
we brothers have ; and as you thought King Olaf came
with so glad a countenance to our brother King Olaf,
he will likely live the shortest time of us brothers,
and have all good to expect hereafter ; for he is ami¬
able, young in years, and has gone but little into ex¬
cess, and King Olaf the Saint must help him. But as
you thought he came towards me, but not with so
much joy, I may possibly live a few years longer, but
not become old, and I trust his providence will stand
over me ; but that he did not come to me with the
same splendour and glory as to our brother Olaf, that
will be because, in many ways, I have sinned and
trangressed his command. If he delayed coming to
thee, I think that in no way betokens thy death, but
rather a long life: but it may be that some heavy
accident may occur to thee, as there was an unac¬
countable dread overpowering thee ; but I foretel
that thou wilt be the oldest of us, and wilt rule the
kingdom longest.”

Then said Sigurd, “ This is well and intelligibly
interpreted, and it is likely it will be so.” And now
the king began to be cheerful again.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

169

King Sigurd married Malmfrid, a daughter of King
Harald Waldemarsson eastward in Kovogorod. Wal-
demar was a son of Jorisleif the Old and Ingigerd,
daughter of the Swedish king Olaf the Swede. King
Harald Waldemarsson’s mother was Queen Gyde the
Old, a daughter of the English king Harald Godwins-
son. Queen Malmfrid’s mother was Queen Christina,
a daughter of the Swedish king Inge Steinkelsson.
Harald Waldemarsson’s other daughter, sister to
Malmfrid, was Ingeborg, who was married to Canute
Lavard, a son of the Danish king Eric the Good, and
grandson of King Swend Ulfsson. Canute’s and In¬
geborg’ s children were, the Danish king Waldemar,
who came to the Danish kingdom after Swend Erics¬
son; and daughters Margaret, Christina, and Cathe¬
rine. Margaret was married to Stig Huetaleder ; and
their daughter was Christina, married to the Swedish
king Karl Sorkvisson, King John’s father. Christina,
who was married to Earl Erling Skakke, was a
daughter of King Sigurd and Malmfrid.

The king’s relative, Sigurd Hranesson, came into
strife mth King Sigurd ; he was married to Skialdvor,
a sister of King Magnus Barefoot by the mother’s
side. He had had the Lapland collectorship * on the
king’s account, because of their relationship and long
friendship, and also of the many services Sigurd
Hranesson had done to the kings ; for he was a very
distinguished, popular man. But it happened to him,
as it often does to others, that persons more wicked and
jealous than upright slandered him to King Sigurd, and
whispered in the king’s ear that he took more of the
Laplanders’ tribute to himself than was proper. They
spoke so long about this, that King Sigurd conceived

The journey to Lapland to collect the taxes, with which a profit¬
able trade in furs was connected, was, even in the earliest times, one of
the greatest offices the king had to confer in respect of gain. Furs were
always at a high value in the middle ages for ornamental purposes.

SAGA XII.

Chapter
XX.
Of King
Sigurd’s
marriage.

Chapter
XXI.
Here be¬
gins the
account of
the cases
before the
Thing.

170

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XI I. a dislike and anger to him, and sent a message to
him. When he appeared before the king, the king
carried these feelings with him, and said, “ I did not
expect that thou shouldst have repaid me for thy
great fiefs and other dignities by taking the king’s
property, and abstracting a greater portion of it than
is allowable.”

Sigurd Hranesson replies, “It is not true that
has been told you ; for I have only taken such portion
as I had your permission to take.”

King Sigurd replies, “ Thou shalt not slip away
with this ; but the matter shall be seriously treated
before it comes to an end.” With that they parted.

Soon after, by the advice of his friends, the king
laid an action against Sigurd Hranesson at the Thing-
meeting in Bergen, and would have him made an
outlaw. Now when the business took this turn, and
appeared so dangerous, Sigurd Hranesson went to
King Ey stein, and told him what mischief King Sigurd
intended to do him, and entreated his assistance.
KingEystein replied, “ This is a ditficult matter that
you propose to me, to speak against my brother ; and
there is a great difference between defending a cause
and pursuing it in law : ” and added, that this was a
matter which concerned him and Sigurd equally.
“ But for thy distress, and our relationship, I shall
bring in a word for thee.”

Soon after Eystein visited King Sigurd, and en¬
treated him to spare the man, reminding him of the
relationship between them and Sigurd Hranesson,
who was married to their aunt Skialdvor ; and said
he would pay the penalty for the crime committed
against the king, although he could not with truth
impute any blame to him in the matter. Besides, he
reminded the king of the long friendship with Sigurd
Hranesson. King Sigurd replied, that it was better
government to punish such acts. Then King Eystein

KINGS OK NORWAY.

171

replied, “ If thou, brother, wilt follow the law, and saga xn.
punish such acts according to the country’s privileges,
then it would be most correct that Sigurd Hranesson
produce his witnesses, and that the case be judged at
the Thing, but not at a meeting ; for the case comes
under the law of the land, not under Biarkö law.” *

Then said Sigurd, “ It may possibly be so that the
case belongs to it, as thou sayest. King Eystein ; and
if it be against law what has hitherto been done in
this case, then we shall bring it before the Thing.”

Then the kings parted, and each seemed determined
to take his ovm way. King Sigurd summoned the
parties in the case before the Arnarness Thing, and
intended to pursue it there. King Eystein came also
to the Thing-place ; and when the case was brought
forward for judgment, King Eystein went to the
Thing before judgment was given upon Sigurd Hran-
esson. Now King Sigurd told the lagmen to pro¬
nounce the judgment ; but King Eystein replied
thus : “I trust there are here men acquainted suffi¬
ciently with the laws of Norway, to know that they
cannot condemn a lenderman to be outlawed at this
Thing.” j* And he then explained how the law was,
so that every man clearly understood it. Then said
King Sigurd, Thou art taking up this matter very
warmly. King Eystein, and it is likely the case will
cost more trouble before it comes to an end than we
intended ; but nevertheless we shall follow it out. I
will have him condemned to be outlawed in his native
place.” Then said King Eystein, “ There are cer¬
tainly not many things which do not succeed with

* The meaning here is not clear. It may be that higher up in the
north than Biarkö, the Thing circle and jurisdiction were not so well
established; and that there meetings and summary proceedings prevailed,
and not regular Thing-law. Biarkö-ret was a particular and old code.

t This Arnarness Thing was probably not the competent court; for
it appears by the Grey Goose that all forms and jurisdictions were
settled and highly important points in the administration of law.

172

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XII. thee, and especially when there are but few and
small folks to oppose one who has carried through
such great things.” And thus they parted, without
any thing being concluded in the case. Thereafter
King Sigurd called together a Gula Thing, went him¬
self there, and summoned to him many high chiefs.
King Eystein came there also with his suite ^ ; and
many meetings and conferences were held among peo¬
ple of understanding concerning this case, and it was
tried and examined before the lagmen. Now King
Eystein objected that all the parties summoned in
any cases tried here belonged to the Thing-district ;
but in this case the deed and the parties belonged to
Halogaland. The Thing accordingly ended in doing
nothing, as King Eystein had thus made it incompe¬
tent. The kings parted in great wrath ; and King
Eystein went north to Drontheirn. King Sigurd, on
the other hand, summoned to him all lendermen, and
also the house-servants of the lendermen, and named
out of every district a number of the bonders from
the south parts of the country, so that he had col¬
lected a large army about him ; and proceeded Avith
all this crowd nortlwards along the coast to Halo^
galand, and intended to use all his poAver to make
Sigurd Hranesson an outlaw among his OAvn relations.
For this purpose he summoned to him the Halogaland
and Numadal people, and appointed a Thing at Kraf-
nesta. King Eystein prepared himself also, and pro¬
ceeded with many people from the toAvn of Kidaros
to the Thing, where he made Sigurd Hranesson, by
hand-shake before Avitnesses, deliver oA^er to him the
folloAving and defending this case. At this Thing
both the kings spoke, each for his OAvn side. Then
King Eystein asks the lagmen, AAdiere that laAV was

* The French word suite seems connected witli the old Norman or
Icelandic word sveitir of the same meanine:.

O

KINGS OF NORWAY.

173

made in Norway which gave the bonders the right saga xh.
to judge between the kings of the country, when
they had pleas with each other. I shall bring
witnesses to prove that Sigurd has given the case
into my hands ; and it is with me, not with Sigurd
Hranesson, that King Sigurd has to do in this case.”

The lagmen said, that disputes between kings must be
judged only at the Ore Thing in Nidaros.

King Eystein said, “ So I thought that it should be
there, and the case must be removed there.”

Then King Sigurd said, “ The more difficulties and
inconvenience thou bringest upon me in this matter,
the more I will persevere in it.” And with that they
parted.

Both kings then went south to Nidaros town, where
they summoned a Thing from eight districts. King
Eystein was in the town with a great many people,
but Sigurd was on board his ships. When the Thing
was opened, peace and safe conduct were given to all ;
and when the people were all collected, and the case
should be gone into, Bergthor Bok, a son of Swend
Bryggefod, stood up, and gave his evidence that Sigurd
Hranesson had concealed a part of the Laplanders’
taxes.

Then King Eystein stood up and said, “ Tf thy
accusation were true, although we do not know what
truth there may be in thy testimony, yet this case has
already been dismissed from three Things, and a
fourth time from a town meeting; and therefore I
require that the lagmen acquit Sigurd in this case
according to law.” And they did so.

Then said King Sigurd, “ I see sufficiently. King
Eystein, that thou hast carried this case by law-
quirks*, which I do not understand. But now there

* These law-quirks show a singularly advanced state of law, and
deference to the Law Things, amidst such social disorder and misdeeds.

174

CHKONICLE OF THE

SAGA XII.

Chapter
XXIÍ.
Of King
Olaf ’s
death.

remains, King Eystein, a way of determining the
case which I am more used to, and which I shall
now apply.”

He then retired to his ships, had the tents taken
down, laid his whole fleet out at the holm, and held
a Thing of his people ; and told them that early in the
morning they should land at Ilevold, and give battle
to King Eystein. But in the evening, as King Sigurd
sat at his table in his ship taking his repast, before he
was aware of it a man cast himself on the floor of
the forehold, and at the king’s feet. This was Sigurd
Hranesson, who begged the king to take what course
with regard to him the king himself thought proper,
for he would not be the cause of any unhappy divi¬
sion between the brothers. Then came Bishop Magne
and Queen Malmfrid, and many other great personages,
and entreated forgiveness for Sigurd Hranesson; and
at their entreaty the king raised him up, took him by
the hand and placed him among his men, and took
him along with himself to the south part of the country.
In autumn the king gave Sigurd Hranesson leave to
go north to his farm, gave him an employment, and
was always afterwards his friend. After this day,
however, the brothers were never much together, and
there was no cordiality or cheerfulness among them.

In the thirteenth year of the government of the
brothers. King Olaf Magnusson fell into a sickness
which ended in his death. He was buried in Christ
church in Nidaros, and many were in great grief at
his death. King Olaf ’s mother was Sigrid, a daughter
of Saxe of Yik, a sister of Kare Ostraad, who was
called the king’s foster-father, and who was a great
and popular man. Saxe had another daughter called
Thora, who had a son called Sigurd Slembidegn, who
afterwards gave himself out for a son of King Magnus
Barefoot. Kare the king’s foster-father Avas married
to Borghild, a daughter of Dag Eilifsson ; and their

«

KINGS OF NORWAY.

175

son was Sigurd Ostraad, a lenderman, and father to
John who was married to Sigrid, a sister of King Inge
Baardsson. After Olaf’s death, Ey stein and Sigurd
ruled the country, the three brothers together having
been kings of Norway for twelve years ; namely,
five years after King Sigurd returned home, and
seven years before. King Olaf was seventeen years
old when he died, and it happened on the 24th of
December. King Eystein had been about a year in
the east part of the country at that time, and King
Sigurd was then in the north. King Eystein re¬
mained a long time that winter in Sarpsburg.

There was once a powerful and rich bonder called
Olaf of Dal, who dwelt in Great Dal in Aamord^,
and had two children, — a son called Hakon Eauk, and
a daughter called Borghild, who was a very beautiful
girl, and prudent, and well skilled in many things.
Olaf and his children were a long time in winter in
Sarpsburg, and Borghild conversed very often with
King Eystein; so that many reports were spread
about their friendship. The following summer King
Eystein went north, and King Sigurd came easDvard,
where he remained all winter, and was long in Kong-
helle, which town he greatly enlarged and improved.
He built there a great castle of turf and stone, dug
a great ditch around it, and built a church and several
houses within the castle. The holy cross he allowed
to remain at Konghelle, and therein did not fulfil the
oath he had taken in Palestine ; but, on the other
hand, he established tithe, and most of the other
things to which he had bound himself by oath. The
reason of his keeping the cross east at the frontier of
the country was, that he thought it would be a pro¬
tection to all the land ; but it proved the greatest
misfortune to place this relic within the power of the
heathens, as it afterwards turned out.

SAGA XII.

Chapter
XXIII.
Magnus
the Blind ;
his birth.

* Somewhere about Fredericstad.

176

CHllONICLE OF THE

SAGA XII.

Chapter
XXIV.
Compa-
ri.son be¬
tween the
two kings.

When Borghild, Olaf’s daughter, heard it whis¬
pered that people talked ill of her conversations and
intimacy with King Eystein, she went to Sarpsburg ;
and after suitable fasts she carried the iron as a proof
of her innocence, and cleared herself thereby fully
from all offence. When King Sigurd heard this, he
rode one day as far as usually was two days’ travelling,
and came to Dal to Olaf, where he remained all night,
made Borghild his concubine, and took her away with
him. They had a son, who was called Magnus, and
he was sent immediately to Halogaland, to be fostered
at Biarkö by Yidkun Jonsson ; and he was brought up
there. Magnus grew up to be the handsomest man that
could be seen, and was very soon stout and strong.

King Eystein and King Sigurd went both in spring
to guest-quarters in the Uplands; and each was en¬
tertained in a separate house, and the houses were
not very distant from each other. The bonders, how¬
ever, thought it more convenient that both should be
entertained together by turns in each house ; and
thus they were both at first in the house of King
Eystein. But in the evening, when the people began
to drink, the ale was not good ; so that the guests
were very quiet and still. Then said King Eystein,
“ Why are the people so silent ? It is more usual in
drinking parties that people are merry, so let us fall
upon some jest over our ale that will amuse people ;
for surely, brother Sigurd, all people are well pleased
when we talk cheerfully.”

Sigurd replies, bluntly, “ Do you talk as much as
you please, but give me leave to be silent.”

Eystein says, “It is a common custom over the
ale-table to compare one person with another, and
now let us do so.” Then Sigurd Avas silent.

“ I see,” says King Eystein, “ that I must begin
this amusement. Koav I Avill take thee, brother, to
compare myself AAnth, and Avill make it appear so as

KINGS OF NORWAY.

177

if we had both equal reputation and property, and
that there is no difference in our birth and educa¬
tion.”

Then King Sigurd replies, Do you remember that
I was always able to break your back, if I had pleased,
although you are a year older ?”

Then King Eystein replied, But I remember that
you was not so good at the games which require
agility.”

Sigurd : “ Do you remember that I could drag you
under water, when we swam together, as often as I
pleased ?”

Eystein : “ But I could swim as far as you, and
could dive as well as you ; and I could run upon snow-
scates so well that nobody could beat me, and you
could no more do it than an ox.”

Sigurd : “ Methinks it is a more useful and suit¬
able accomplishment for a chief to be expert at his
bow ; and I think you could scarcely draw my bow,
even if you took your foot to help.”

Eystein : I am not strong at the bow as you are,
but there is less difference between our shooting near ;
and I can use the snow-scates much better than you,
and in former times that was held a great accom¬
plishment.”

Sigurd : “It appears to me much better for a
' chief who is to be the superior of other men, that he
is conspicuous in a crowd, and strong and powerful
i in weapons above other men ; easily seen, and easily
known, where there are many together.”

Eystein : “ It is not less a distinction and an orna¬
ment that a man is of a handsome appearance, so
as to be easily known from others on that account ;
and this appears to me to suit a chief best, because
the best ornament is allied to beauty. I am more¬
over more knowing in the law than you, and on
every subject my words flow more easily than yours.”

VOL. III. N

SAGA XII.

178

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XII.

Sigurd : “It may be that you know more law-
quirks, for I have had something else to do ; neither
will any deny you a smooth tongue. But there
are many who say that your words are not to be
trusted; that what you promise is little to be re¬
garded ; and that you talk just according to what
those who are about you say, which is not kingly.’^

Ey stein : “This is because, when people bring their
cases before me, I wish first to give every man that
satisfaction in his affair which he desires ; but after¬
wards comes the opposite party, and then there is
something to be given or taken away very often, in
order to mediate between them, so that both may be
satisfied. It often happens too that I promise what¬
ever is desired of me, that all may be joyful about
me. It would be an easy matter for me to do as you
do, — to promise evil to all; and I never hear any com¬
plain of your not keeping this promise to them.”

Sigurd : “It is the conversation of all that the
expedition I made out of the country was a princely
expedition, while you in the mean time sat at home
like your father’s daughter.”

Ey stein : “ Now you betake yourself to your cud¬
gel. I would not have brought up this conversation
if I had not known what to reply on this point. I
can truly say that I equipped you from home like a
sister, before you went upon this expedition.”

Sigurd : “You must have have heard that on this
expedition I was in many a battle in the Saracen’s
land, and gained the victory in all ; and you must
have heard of the many valuable articles I acquired,
the like of which were never seen before in this
country, and I was the most respected wherever the
most gallant men were ; and, on the other hand, you
cannot conceal that you have only a home-bred repu¬
tation. I went to Palestine, and I came to Apulia ;
but I did not see you there, brother. I gave Roger

KINGS OF NORWAY.

179

the Great the title of king ; I won seven battles, and saga xh.
you were in none of them. I was at our Lord’s grave j
but did not see thee there, my brother. On this
expedition I went all the way to Jordan, where our
Lord was baptized, and swam across the river ; but
did not see thee there. On the edge of the river-
bank there was a bush of willows, and there I twisted
a knot of willows which is waiting thee there ; for I
said this knot thou shouldst untie, and fulhl the vow,
brother, that is bound up in it.”

Eystein : It is but little I have to set up against
this. I have heard that you had several battles
abroad, but it was more useful for the country
what I was doing in the mean time here at home.

In the north at Vaage I built fish-houses, so that all
the poor people could earn a livelihood, and support
themselves. I built there a priest’s house, and en¬
dowed a church, where before all the people almost
were heathen ; and on this account I think all these
people will remember that Eystein was once king of
Norway. The road from Drontheim goes over the
Dovrefielde, and many people had to sleep out of
doors, and make a very severe journey; but I built
inns, and supported Them with money; and all tra¬
vellers know that Eystein has been king in Norway.

Out at Agdaness was a barren waste, and no harbour,
and many a ship was lost there ; and now there is a
good harbour and ship-station, and a church also
built there. Then I raised beacons on all the high
fielde, of which all the people in the interior enjoy
the benefit. In Bergen I built a royal hall, and the
church of the Apostles, with a stair between the two;
so that all the kings who come after me will remem¬
ber my name. I built Michael’s church, and founded
a monastery beside it. I settled the laws, brother, so
that every man can obtain justice from his fellow-
man ; and according as these are observed the country

N 2

180

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XII. ^ill the better governed. I set a warping post
and iron ring in the sound of Sinsholm.^ The Jemte-
land people are again joined to this kingdom, and
more by prudence and kind words than by force and
war. Now although all this that I have reckoned up
be but small doings, yet I am not sure if the people
of the country have not been better served by it than
by your killing bluemen for the devil in the land of
the Saracens, and sending them to hell. Now if you
prize yourself on your good deeds, I think the places
I have raised for chaste people of God will serve me
not less for my souks salvation. So if you tied a
knot for me, I will not go to untie it; and if I had
been inclined to tie a knot for thee, thou wouldst not
have been king of Norway at thy return to this
country, when with a single ship you came into my
fleet. Now let men of understanding judge what
you have above me, and you will discover that here
in Norway there are men equal to you.’’

Thereupon both were silent, and there was anger
on both sides. More things passed between the bro¬
thers, from which it appeared that each of them
would be greater than the other ; however, peace was
preserved between them as long as they lived. It is
told that once when King Sigurd had taken his seat,
and Eystein had not arrived, Ingeborg, Guttorm’s
daughter, the wife of King Eystein, said to Sigurd,
“ The many great achievements, Sigurd, which you
have performed in foreign lands, will long be held in
remembrance.” He answered her in these verses: _

White was my sliield
M^hen I took the field,

And red when 1 came home :

The brave takes all
That may befall ;

Fate deals out what’s to come.

* This locality is not known. The text refers to a post and rings
for the warping vessels through some narrow sound.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

181

My men I taught^ saga xn.

In the onslaught, -

The blow to give and fend —

The weal or woe
Of every blow

Is just what God may send/"

It is told that King Sigurd was at a feast in the Chapter
Upland, and a bath was made ready for him. When
the king came to the bath, and the tent was raised
over the bathing-tub, the king thought there was
a fish in the tub beside him ; and a great laughter
came upon him, so that he Avas beside himself, and
Avas out of his mind, and often afterwards these fits
returned.

Magnus Barefoot’s daughter, Ragnhild, Avas married
by her brothers to Harald Kefia, a son of the Danish
king Eric the Good ; and their sons were Magnus,

Olaf, Canute, and Harald.

King Eystein built a large ship at Nidaros, which. Chapter
in size and shape, was like the Long Serpent Avhich omfilg
King Olaf Tryggvesson had built. At the head there

ITT IT* shipbuild-

Avas a dragon s head, and at the stern a crooked tail, ing, and of
and both were gilded over. The ship Avas high-sided ; *

but the fore and aft parts appeared less than they
should be. He also made in Nidaros many and large
dry-docks of the best material, and Avell timbered, so
that they were admired by all Avho saw them.

Six years after King Olaf ’s death, it happened that
King Eystein, at a feast at Hustad in Stein, was seized
Avith an illness which soon carried him off. He died
the 28th of August, and his body Avas carried north
to Nidaros, and buried in Christ church; and it is
generally said that so many mourners never stood
over any man’s grave in NorAvay as over King
Eystein’s, at least since the time Magnus the Good,

Saint Olaf’s son, died. Eystein had been twenty
years king of NorAvay ; and after his decease his

N 3

182

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XII.

Chapter
XXVII.
Of the bap¬
tizing the
people of
Smoland.

brother King Sigurd was the sole king of Norway as
long as he lived.

The Danish king Nicolas, a son of Swend Ulfsson,
married afterwards the Queen Margaret, a daughter
of King Inge, who had before been married to King
Magnus Barefoot ; and their son was called Magnus
Strong. King Magnus sent a message to King Sigurd
the Crusader, and asked him if he would go with him
with all his might and help to the east of the Swedish
dominion, to Smoland, to baptize the inhabitants ; for
the people who dwelt there had no regard for Chris¬
tianity, although some of them had allowed them-
selves to be baptized. At that time there were
many people all around in the Swedish dominions
who were heathens, and many were bad Christians ;
for there were some of the kings who renounced
Christianity, and continued heathen sacrifices, as Blot
Swein, and afterwards Eric Aarsal, had done. King
Sigurd promised to undertake this journey, and the
kings appointed their meeting at Ore Sound."^ King
Sigurd then summoned all people in Norway to a
levy, both of men and ships ; and when the fleet was
assembled he had about 300 ships. King Nicolas
came very early to the meeting-place, and staid there a
long time ; and the bonders murmured much, and said
the Northmen did not intend to come. Thereupon
the Danish army dispersed, and the king went away
with all his fleet. King Sigurd came there soon after¬
wards, and was ill pleased ; but sailed east to Suma-
ros, and held a House-thing, at which Sigurd spoke
about King Nicolas’s breach of flflth; and the North¬
men, on tliis account, determined to go marauding in
his country. They first plundered a village called
Tumathorp, which is not far from Lund; and then
sailed east to the merchant-town of Cahnar, where they

* Óre Souiul was the Sound, at the entrance into the Baltic.

KINGS or NORWAY.

183

plundered, as well as in Smoland, and imposed on the
country a tribute of 1500 cattle for ship provision; and
the people of Smoland received Christianity. After
this King Sigurd turned about with his fleet, and
came back to his kingdom with many valuable arti¬
cles and great booty, which he had gathered on this
expedition ; and this levy was called the Calmar levy.
This was the summer before the eclipse. This was
the only levy King Sigurd carried out as long as he
was king.

It happened once when King Sigurd was going
from the drinking-table to vespers, that his men were
very drunk and merry ; and many of them sat outside
the church singing the evening song, but their sing¬
ing was very irregular. Then the king said, Who
is that fellow I see standing at the church with a
skin jacket on ?” They answered, that they did not
know. Then the king said, —

SAGA XII.

Chapter
XXVIIÍ.
Of Tho-
rarin
Stuttfeld.

“ This skin-clad man, in sorry plight.

Puts all our wisdom here to flight.”

Then the fellow came forward and said, — -

^*^1 thought that here I might be known,

Although my dress is scanty grown.

’Tis poor, but I must be content:

Unless, great king, it’s thy intent
To give me better; for I have seen
When I and rags had strangers been.”

The king answered, “ Come to me to-morrow when
I am at the drink-table.” The night passed away; and
the morning after, the Icelander, who was afterwards
called Thorarin Stuttfeld, went into the drinking-
room. A man stood outside of the door of the room
with a horn in his hand, and said, ‘^Icelander! the
king says that if thou wilt deserve any gift from him
thou shalt compose a song before going in, and make
it about a man whose name is Hakon Serkson, and

N 4

184

CimONICLE OF THE

SAGA XII. who is called Mörstrut^; and speak about that sur-
’ name in thy song.” The man who spoke to him was
called Arne FioruskeiF. Then they went into the
room ; and when Thorarin came before the king’s seat
he recited these verses : —

Drontheim’s warrior-king has said
The scald should be by gifts repaid_,

If he before this meeting gave

The king’s friend Serke a passing stave.

The generous king has let me know
My stave, to please, must be framed so
That my poor verse extol the fame
Of one called Hakon Lump by name.”

Then said the king, I never said so, and some¬
body has been making a mock of thee. Hakon him¬
self shall determine what punishment thou shalt
have. Go into his suite.” Hakon said, “ He shall
be welcome among us, for I can see where the joke
came from ; ” and he placed the Icelander at his side
next to himself, and they were very merry. The day
was drawing to a close, and the liquor began to get
into their heads, Avhen Hakon said, Dost thou not
think, Icelander, that thou owest me some penalty ?
and dost thou not see that some trick has been played
upon thee? ”

Thorarin replies, “It is true, indeed, that I owe
thee some compensation.”

Hakon says, “ Then we shall be quits, if thou wilt
make me another stave about Arne.”

He said he was ready to do so ; and they crossed
over to the side of the room where Arne was sitting,
and Thorarin gave these verses : —

FioruskeiF has often spread.

With evil heart and idle head.

The eagle’s voidings* round the land,

Lampoons and lies, with ready hand.

^ Morstrutr is a short, fat, punchy fellow.

t The eagle’s voidings is an allusion to the story in the Edda.
When Odin, in the shape of an eagle, stole the poet’s drink from its

KINGS OF NORWAY.

185

Yet this landlouper* we all know,

In Africa scarce fed a crow.

Of all his arms used in the field,

Those in most use were helm and shield.”

Arne sprang up instantly, drew his sword, and was
going to fall upon him ; but Hakon told him to let
it alone and be quiet, and bade him remember that
if it came to a quarrel he would come off the worst
himself.

Thorarin afterwards went up to the king, and said
he had composed a poem which he wished the king
to hear. The king consented, and the song is known
by the name of the Stuttfeld Poem. The king asked
Thorarin what he intended to do. He replied, it
was his intention to go to Rome. Then the king
gave him much money for his pilgrimage, and told
him to visit him on his return, and promised to pro¬
vide for him. But it is not related whether they ever
met again.

It is the general opinion among the people, that
that there never was a king more able to act for him¬
self, or more adapted to govern, than King Sigurd ;
but latterly it happened that he could with difficulty
govern his own mind and reason, so that, now and
then, unhappy and heavy occurrences took place ;
although he was always respected as a great prince,
and stood in great reputation on account of his foreign
expedition. It is told that King Sigurd, one holiday
in Easter, sat at table with many people, among
whom were many of his friends ; and when he came
to his high seat, people saw that his countenance
was very wild, and as if he had been weeping, so that
people were afraid of what might follow. The king

owner Suttung, he voided it in his flight when he was pursued ; and
this excrement fell into the hands of the bad poets, and is their inspir¬
ation, or poet’s-drink.

* Fiöruskeifr, is a landlouper, as well as Arne’s surname.

SAGA XII.

Chapter
XXIX.
Ot Sigurd
and Ottar
Birting.

186

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XII. rolled his eyes, and looked at those who were seated
on the benches ; but none of his men ventured to
speak to him. Then he seized the holy book which
he had brought with him from abroad, and which
was written all over with gilded letters ; so that never
had such a costly book come to Norway. His queen
sat by his side. Then said King Sigurd, “ Many are
the changes which may take place during a man’s
lifetime. I had two things which were dear to me
above all when I came from abroad, and these were
this book and the queen ; and now I think the one is
only worse and more loathsome than the other, and
nothing I have belonging to me that I more detest.
The queen does not know herself how hideous she is;
for a goat’s horn is standing out on her head, and the
better I liked her before the worse I like her now ;
and as to this book, it is good for nothing.” There¬
upon he cast the book on the fire which was burning
on the hall-floor, and gave the queen a blow mth his
fist between the eyes. The queen wept ; but more at
the king’s illness than at the blow, or the affront she
had suffered.

Then a man stood up before the king : his name
was Ottar Birting; and he was one of the torch-
bearers, although a bonder’s son, and was on service
that day. He was of small stature, but of agree¬
able appearance ; lively, bold, and full of fun ; black
haired, and of a dark skin; so that it was a nick¬
name to call him Birting, — or fair. He ran and
snatched the book which the king had cast into the
fire, held it out, and said, “ Different were the days,
sire, when you came with great state and splendour
to Norway, and with great fame and honour; for
then all your friends came to meet you with joy, and
were glad at your coming. All as one man would
have you for king, and have you in the highest regard
and honour. But now days of sorrow are come over

KINGS OF NORWAY.

187

us; for on this holy festival many of your friends saga xn.
have come to you, and cannot be cheerful on account
of your melancholy and ill-health. It is much to be
desired that you would be merry with them ; and do,
good king, take this saving advice, — make peace first
with the queen, and make her joyful, whom you have
so highly affronted, with a friendly Avord; and then
all your chiefs, friends, and servants : that is my
advice.”

Then said King Sigurd, “ Dost thou dare to give me
advice, thou great lump of a houseman’s lad! — thou
peasant boy of the meanest, most contemptible race
and family I” And he sprang up, drew his sword, and
SAVung it Avith both hands, as if going to cut him
doAvn.

But Ottar stood quiet and upright ; did not stir
from the spot, nor show the slightest sign of fear;
and the king turned round the SAVord-blade Avhich he
had AAwed over Ottar’s head, and gently touched him
on the shoulder Avitli it. Then he sat doAvn in silence
on his high seat.

All Avere silent who Avere in the hall, for nobody
dared to say a Avord. Noav the king looked around
him, milder than before, and said, “ It is difficult to
knoAv Avhat there is in people. Here sat my friends,
and lendermen, marshals, and shield-bearers, and all
the best men in the land ; but none did so well
against me as this man, who appears to you of little
Avorth compared to any of you, although now I
esteem him most. I came here like a madman, and
would have destroyed my precious property ; but he
turned aside my deed, and was not afraid of death for
it. Then he made an able speech, ordering his Avords
so that they were honourable to me, and not saying
a single AVord about things Avhich could increase my
vexation ; but even avoiding what might, Avith truth,
have been said. So excellent Avas his speech, that no

188

CHKONICLE OF THE

SAGA XII. man here, however great his understanding, could have
spoken better. Then I sprang up in a pretended
rage, and made as if I would have cut him down ;
but he was as courageous as if he had nothing to
fear : and seeing that, I let go my purpose ; for he was
altogether innocent. Now ye shall know, my friends,
how I intend to reward him : he was before my torch-
bearer, and shall now be my lenderman ; and there
shall follow what is still more, that he shall be the
most distinguished of my lendermen.”

Then the king, in presence of all, thanked the
bonder’s son for having appeased his passion by sen¬
sible v/ords and steady courage, and having done
what his chief lendermen had not ventured to do;
and then made him one of his principal lender-
men.

Often these fits of insanity, and wonderful whims,
came over the king ; and when any of his lower ser¬
vants recalled him to himself, he listened to them
best, and bestowed on them property and farms. Ot-
tar became one of the most celebrated men in Nor¬
way for various good and praiseworthy deeds.

CHAPTEa Jn King Sigurd’s latter days he was once at an
ofmfg entertainment at one of his farms ; and in the morn-

Sigurd’s when he was dressed he was silent and still, so

dream. o ^ p i

that his friends were airaid he was not able to govern
himself. Now the farm-bailiff, who was a man of
good sense and courage, brought him into conversa¬
tion, and asked if he had heard any news of such
importance that it disturbed his mirth ; or if the en¬
tertainment had not satisfied him ; or if there was any
thing else that people could remedy.

King Sigurd said, that none of the things he had
mentioned was the cause. But it is, that I think
upon the dream I had in the night.”

“ Sire,” replied he, “ may it prove a lucky dream !
I would gladly hear it.”

KINGS OF NOKWAY.

189

The king: I thought that I was in Jederen, and
looked out towards the sea ; and that I saw something
very black moving itself ; and when it came near it
appeared to be a large tree, of which the branches
stretched far above the water, and the roots were
down in the sea. Now when the tree came to the
shore it broke in pieces, and drove all about the land,
both the mainland, and the out-islands, rocks, and
strands ; and it appeared to me as if I saw over all
Norway along the sea-coast, and saw pieces of that
tree, some small and some lar^e, driven into every
bight.”

Then said the bailiff, “ It is likely that you can
best interpret this dream yourself ; and I would
willingly hear your interpretation of it.”

Then said the king, This dream appears to me to
denote the arrival in this country of some man who
will fix his seat here, and whose posterity will spread
itself over the land; but with unequal power, as the
dream shows.”

It so happened once, that King Sigurd sat in a
gloomy mood among many worthy men. It was a
Friday evening, and the kitchen-master asked what
meat should be made ready.

The king replies, ‘‘What else but flesh-meat?”
And so harsh were his Avords that nobody dared to
contradict him, and all were ill at ease. Now when
people prepared to go to table, dishes of Avarm flesh-
meat Avere carried in ; but all Avere silent, and grieved
at the king’s illness. Before the blessing was pro¬
nounced * over the meat, a man called Aslak Hane
spoke. He had been a long time with King Sigurd
on his journey abroad, and Avas not a man of any
great family; and was small of stature, but fiery.

* Or rather signed over the meat ; viz. the sign of the cross made
over it.

SAGA XII.

Chapter
XXXI.
Of Aslak.
Hane.

190

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XII. When he perceived how it was, and that none dared
to accost the king, he asked, What is it, sire, that is
smoking on the dish before you ?”

The king replies, “ What do you mean, Aslak ?
what do you think it is ? ”

Aslak: “I think it is ilesh-meat ; and I would it
were not so.’’

The king : But if it be so, Aslak?”

He replied, ‘‘ It would be vexatious to know that
a gallant king, who has gained so much honour in
the world, should so forget himself. When you rose
up out of Jordan, after bathing in the same waters
as God himself, with palm-leaves in your hands, and
the cross upon your breast, it was something else
you promised, sire, than to eat flesh -meat on a Fri¬
day. If a meaner man were to do so, he would merit
a heavy punishment. This royal hall is not so beset
as it should be, when it falls upon me, a mean man,
to challenge such an act.”

The king sat silent, and did not partake of the
meat ; and when the time for eating Avas drawing to
an end, the king ordered the flesh dishes to be re¬
moved, and other food Avas brought in, such as it is
permitted to use. When the meal-time Avas almost
past, the king began to be cheerful, and to drink.
People advised Aslak to fly, but he said he Avould not
do so. “ I do not see hoAv it could help me ; and, to
tell the truth, it is as good to die noAV that I have
got my Avill, and have prevented the king from com¬
mitting a sin. It is for him to kill me if he likes.”

Towards evening the king called him, and said,
“ Who set thee on, Aslak Hane, to speak such free
Avords to me in the hearing of so many people ? ”

“No one, sire, but myself.”

The king: “ Thou Avouldst like, no doubt, to knoAV
Avhat thou art to have for such boldness : Avhat thinkest
thou it deserves?”

KINGS OF NOEWAY.

191

He replies, “If it be well rewarded, sire, I shall
be glad ; but should it be otherwise, then it is your
concern.’’

Then the king said, “ Smaller is thy reward than
thou hast deserved. I give thee three farms. It has
turned out, what could not have been expected, that
thou hast prevented me from a great crime, — thou,
and not the lendermen, who are indebted to me for
so much good.” And so it ended.

One Yule eve the king sat in the hall, and the
tables were laid out; and the king said, “Get me
ilesh-meat.”

They answered, “ Sire, it is not the custom to egt
flesh-meat on Yule eve.”

The king said, “ If it be not the custom, I will
make it the custom.”

They went out, and brought him a seal.^ The king
stuck his knife into it, but did not eat of it. Then
the king said, “ Bring me a girl here into the hall.”
They brought him a woman whose head-dress went
far down her brows. The king took her hand in
his hands, looked at her, and said, “ An ill looking

girl I ’’I

# # # * ^

saga XII.

Chapter

xxxir.

Of a
woman
brought
one night
in Yule to
the king.

Halkel Huk, a son of John Smiorbalt, who was c HAPTER
lenderman in Mære, made a voyage in the West sea,

I all the way to the South Hebudes. A man came to ^iiie

comes to

him out of Ireland called Gille Krist J, and gave him- Norway.

* The flesh of seals and porpoises appears to have been in common
I nse in that age^ and probably was not reckoned altogether flesh-meat not
to be used on Fridays or fish-days.

I What follows in this chapter is rather too coarse and indecent to
be translated, and is not necessary, nor relevant, unless as showing the
king’s insanity.

t Gilchrist?

192

CHEONICLE OF THE

SAGA XII. self out for a son of King Magnus Barefoot. His
mother came with him, and said his other name was
Harald. Halkel received the man, brought him to
Norway with him, and went immediately to King
Sigurd with Harald and his mother. When they
had told their story to the king, he talked over
the matter vdth his principal men, and bade them
give their opinions upon it. They were of different
opinions, and all left it to the king himself, although
there were several who opposed this ; and the king
followed his own counsel. King Sigurd ordered
Harald to be called before him, and told him that
he would not deny him the proof, by ordeal, of Avho
his father was ; but on condition that if he should
prove his descent according to his claim, he should
not desire the kingdom, in the lifetime of King
Sigurd, or of King Magnus : and to this he bound
himself by oath. King Sigurd said he must tread
over hot iron to prove his birth ; but this ordeal was
thought by many too severe, as he was to undergo it
merely to prove his father, and without getting the
kingdom but Harald agreed to it, and fixed on the
trial by iron : and this ordeal was the greatest ever
made in Norway ; for nine glowing ploughshares
were laid down, and Harald went over them mth
bare feet, attended by two bishops, and invoking
the holy Saint Columb. His bed was ready on the
spot.

Then said Magnus, King Sigurd’s son, “ He does
not tread on the irons in a manly way.”

The king replies, “ Evil and wicked is thy speech ;
for he has done it admirably.”

Thereupon Harald was laid in bed, and three days
after the iron trial the ordeal was taken to proof,
and the feet were found unburnt. Thereafter King
Sigurd acknowledged Harald’s relationship ; but his

KINGS OF NOEWAY.

193

son Magnus conceived a great hatred of him, and in
this many chiefs followed Magnus. King Sigurd
trusted so much to his favour with the whole peo¬
ple of the country, that he desired all men, under
oath, to promise to accept King Magnus after him
as their king; and all the people took this oath.

Harald Gille was a tall, slender-grown man, of a
long neck and face, black eyes, and dark hair, brisk
and quick ; and wore generally the Irish dress of short
light clothes. The Korse language was difficult for
Harald, and he brought out Avords which many laughed
at ; but King Sigurd did not permit this, when he
was present. Harald used to attend the king to bed
in the evening ; but it once happened that Magnus
and his people detained him, and they sat late drink¬
ing together. Harald spoke with another man about
different things in the west in Ireland ; and among
other things, said that there were men in Ireland so
swift of foot that no horse could overtake them in run¬
ning. Magnus the king’s son heard this, and said,
“ Now he is lying, as he usually does.”

Harald replies, ‘Ht is true that there are men in Ire¬
land whom no horse in Noiuvay could overtake.” They
exchanged some words about this, and both were
drunk. Magnus had got a horse he had sent for
from Gotland, — a beautiful animal, and very sAvift.
Those who were present thought that no horse was so
Í SAvift, and asked Harald’s opinion. Then said Magnus,
“ Thou shalt make a wager Avith me, and stake thy
head if thou canst not run so fast as I ride upon my
horse, and I shall stake my gold ring.”

Harald replies, “ I did not say that I could run so
i swiftly ; but I said that men are to be found in
Ireland Avho Avill run as fast; and on that I would
' wager.”

The king’s son Magnus replies, “ I will not go to
VOL. III. o

SAGA XII.

CHArXER

XXXIV.
Of a race
between
Magnus
and Harald
Gille.

194

CHEONICLE or THE

SAGA XII. Ireland about it: we are wagering here, and not
there.”

Harald on this went to bed, and would not speak to
him more about it. This was in Opslo. The follow¬
ing morning, when the early mass was over, Magnus
rode up the street, and sent a message to Harald to
come to him. When Harald came he was dressed
thus. He had on a shirt and trousers which were
bound with ribands under his foot-soles, a short
cloak, an Irish hat on his head, and a spear-shaft in
his hand. Magnus set up a mark for the race. Harald
said, Thou hast made the course too long;” but
Magnus thought if it were even longer, it would still
be too short. There were many spectators. They
began the race, and Harald followed always the horse’s
pace ; and when they came to the end of the race-course,
Magnus said, “ Thou hadst hold of the saddle-girths,
and the horse dragged thee along.” Magnus had his
smft runner, the Gotland horse. They began the
race again, and Harald ran the whole race- course before
the horse. When they came to the end Harald asked,
“ Had I hold of the saddle-girths now?”

Magnus replied, Thou hadst the start at first.”

Then Magnus let his horse breathe a while, and
when he was ready he put spurs to him, and set off
in full gallop. Harald stood still, and Magnus looked
back, and called out, “ Set off now.”

Then Harald ran quickly past the horse, and came
to the end of the course so long before him that he
lay down, and got up and saluted Magnus as he came
in.

Then they went home to the town. In the mean
time King Sigurd had been at high mass, and knew
nothing of this until after he had dined that day.
Then he said to Magnus angrily, “ Thou callest Harald
useless ; but I think thou art a great fool, and knowest
nothing of the customs of foreign people. Dost thou

KINGS OF NOEWAY.

195

not know that men in other countries exercise them¬
selves in other feats than in filling themselves with
ale, and making themselves mad, and so unfit for
every thing that they scarcely know each other?
Give Harald his ring, and do not try to make a fool
of him again, as long as I am above ground and have
the rule here.’’

It happened once that Sigurd was out in his ship,
which lay in the harbour ; and there lay a merchant
ship, which was an Iceland trader, at the side of it.
Harald Gille was in the forecastle of the king’s ship,
and Swend Rimhildsson, a son of Canute Swendsson of
Jederen, had his berth the next before him. There
was also Sigurd Sigurdsson, a gallant lenderman, who
himself commanded a ship. It was a day of beautiful
weather and warm sunshine, and many went out to
swim, both from the long-ship and the merchant
vessel. An Iceland man, who was among the swim¬
mers, amused himself by drawing those under water
who could not swim so well as himself; and at that the
spectators laughed. When King Sigurd saw and heard
this, he cast off his clothes, sprang into the water, and
swam to the Icelander, seized him, and pressed him
under the water, and held him there ; and as soon as
the Icelander came up the king pressed him down
again, and thus the one time after the other.

Then said Sigurd Sigurdsson, “ Shall we let the
king kill this man? ”

Somebody said, “ Ko one has any wish to interfere.”

Sigurd replies, that if Dag Eilifsson were here, we
should not be without one who dared.”

Then Sigurd sprang overboard, swam to the king,
took hold of him, and said, “ Sire, do not kill the
man. Every body sees that you are a much better
swimmer.”

The king replies, “Let me loose, Sigurd; I shall be
his death, for he will destroy our people under water.”

o 2

SAGA XII.

Chapter
XXXV.
Of Sigurd’s
swimming.

196

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XU.

Chapter
XXXVI.
Of Harald
and Swend
llimhilds-
son.

Sigurd says, “ Let us first amuse ourselves ; and,
Icelander, do thou set off to the land,” which he did.
The king now got loose from Sigurd, and swam to his
ship, and Sigurd went his way : hut the king ordered
that Sigurd should not presume to come into his pre¬
sence ; so he went up into the country.

In the evening, when people were going to bed,
some of the ship’s men were still at their games up in
the country. Harald was with those who played on
the land, and told his footboy to go out to the ship,
make his bed, and wait for him there. The lad did
as he was ordered. The king had gone to sleep ; and
as the boy thought Harald late, he laid himself in
Harald’s berth. Swend Himhildsson said, “It is a shame
for brave men to be brought from their farms at
home, and to have here serving boys to sleep beside
them.” The lad said that Harald had ordered him to
come there. Swend Rimhildsson said, “ We do not so
much care for Harald himself lying here, if he do not
bring here his slaves and beggars ;” and seized a riding-
whip, and struck the boy on the head until the blood
fiowed from him. The boy ran immediately up the
country, and told Harald what had happened, who
went immediately out to the ship, to the aft part of
the forecastle, and with a pole-axe struck Swend so
that he received a severe wound on his hands ; and
then Harald went on shore. Swend ran to the land
after him, and, gathering his friends, took Harald pri¬
soner, and they were about hanging him. But while
they were busy about this, Sigurd Sigurdsson went
out to the king’s ship and awoke him. When the
king opened his eyes and recognised Sigurd, he said,
“For this reason thou shalt die, that thou hast in¬
truded into my presence; for thou knowest that I
forbade thee : ” and with these words the king sprang
up.

Sigurd replied, “ That is in your power as soon as

KINGS OF NORWAY.

197

you please ; but other business is more urgent. Go to
the land as quickly as possible to help thy brother ; for
the Eogaland people are going to hang him.”

Then said the king, “God give us luck, Sigurd!
Call my trumpeter, and let him call the people all to
land, and to meet me.”

The king sprang on the land, and all who knew him
followed him to where the gallows was being erected.
The king instantly took Harald to him ; and all the
people gathered to the king in full armour, as they
heard the trumpet. Then the king ordered that Swend
and all his comrades should depart from the country
as outlaws ; but by the intercession of good men the
king was prevailed on to let them remain and hold
their properties, but no mulct should be paid for
Swend’s wound.

Then Sigurd Sigurdsson asked if the king wished
that he should go forth out of the country.

“ That will I not,” said the king ; “ for I can never
be without thee.”

There was a young and poor man called Kolbein;
and Thora, King Sigurd the Crusader’s mother, had
ordered his tongue to be cut out of his mouth, and for
no other cause than that this young man had taken a
piece of meat out of the king-mother’s tub, which he
said the cook had given him, and which the cook had
not ventured to serve up to her. This man had long
gone about speechless. So says Einar Skuleson in
Olaf ’s ballad ; —

t

The proud rich dame, for little cause.

Had the lad’s tongue cut from his jaws :

The helpless man, of speech deprived,

His dreadful sore wound scarce survived.

A few weeks since at Lid was seen.

As well as ever he had been.

The same poor lad — to speech restored
By Olaf’s power, whom he adored.”

Afterwards the young man came to Nidaros, and

SAGA XII.

Chapter
XXXVII.
Of King
Olaf’s mi¬
racle on a
man whose
tongue had
been cut
out from
the root.

198

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA Xll.

Chapter
XXXVIII.
Of King
Olaf’s mi¬
racle with
a prisoner.

watclied in the Christ church ; but at the second mass
for Olaf before matins he fell asleep, and thought he
saw King Olaf the Saint coming to him ; and that Olaf
talked to him, and took hold with his hands of the
stump of his tongue and pulled it. Kow when he
awoke he found himself restored, and joyfully did he
thank our Lord and the holy Saint Olaf, who had
pitied and helped him ; for he had come there speech¬
less, and had gone to the holy shrine, and went away
cured, and with his speech clear and distinct.

The heathens took prisoner a young man of Danish
family, and carried him to Vendland, where he was in
fetters along with other prisoners. In the day time
he was alone in irons, without a guard ; but at night
a peasant’s son was beside him in the chain, that he
might not escape from them. This poor man never got
sleep or rest from vexation and sorrow, and considered
in many ways what could help him ; for he had a great
dread of slavery, and was pining with hunger and
torture. He could not again expect to be ransomed
by his friends, as they had already restored him twice
from heathen lands with their own money; and he
well knew that it would be difficult and expensive for
them to submit a third time to this burden. It is
well with the man who does not undergo so much in
the world as this man knew he had suffered. He saw
but one way; and that was to get off and escape if he
could. He resolved upon this in the night time, killed
the peasant, and cut his foot off after killing him ; and
set off to the forest with the chain upon his leg. Now
when the people knew this, soon after daylight in the
morning, they pursued him with two dogs accustomed
to trace any one who escaped, and to find him in the
forest however carefully he might be concealed. They
got him into their hands, and beat him, and did him
all kinds of mischief; and, dragging him home, left
him barely alive, and showed him no mercy. They

KINGS OF NORWAY.

199

tortured liim severely; put him in a dark room, in saga xil
which there lay already sixteen Christian men ; and
bound him both with iron and other tyings, as fast as
they could. Then he began to think that the misery
and pain he had endured before were but shadows to
his present sufferings. He saw no man before his
eyes in this prison who would beg for mercy for him ;
no one had compassion on his wretchedness, except
the Christian men who lay bound with him, who
sorrowed with him, and bemoaned his fate together
with their own misfortunes and helplessness. One
day they advised him to make a vow to the holy King
Olaf, to devote himself to some office in his sacred
house, if he, by God’s compassion and Saint Olaf’s
prayers, could get away from this prison. He gladly
agreed to this, and made a vow, and prepared himself
for the situation they mentioned to him. The night
after he thought in his sleep that he saw a man, not
tall, standing at his side, who spoke to him thus:

“ Hear, thou wretched man ! why dost thou not get
up ? ”

He replied, “ Sir, who are you ?”

“ I am King Olaf, on whom thou hast called.”

0, my good lord ! gladly would I raise myself ; but
I lie bound with iron and Avith chains on my legs,
and also the other men Avho lie here.”

Thereupon the king accosts him with the Avords,

“ Stand up at once, and be not afraid; for thou art
loose.”

He awoke immediately, and told his comrades Avhat
had appeared to him in this dream. They told him to
stand up, and try if it was true. He stood up, and
observed that he was loose. Koav said his fellow-
prisoners this Avould help him but little, for the
door Avas locked both on the inside and on the outside.

Then an old man who sat there in a deplorable con¬
dition put in his Avord, and told him not to doubt the

o 4

200

CimONICLE OF THE

SAGA XII.

mercy of the man who had loosened his chains : For
he has wrought this miracle on thee that thou shouldst
enjoy his mercy, and hereafter be free, without suffer¬
ing more misery and torture. Make haste, then, and
seek the door; and if thou are able to slip out, thou
art saved.”

He did so, found the door open, slipped out, and
away to the forest. As soon as the Yendland people
were aware of this they set loose the dogs, and pursued
him in great haste ; and the poor man lay hid, and saw
well where they were following him. But now the
hounds lost the trace when they came nearer, and all
the eyes that sought him were struck with a blindness,
so that nobody could find him, although he lay before
their feet ; and they all returned home, vexed that
they could not find him. King Olaf did not permit
this man’s destruction after he had reached the forest,
and restored him also to his health and hearing ; for
they had so long tortured and beaten him that he
had become deaf. At last he came on board of a
ship, with two other Christian men who had been
long afflicted in that country. All of them worked
zealously in this vessel, and so had a successful flight.
Then he repaired to the holy man’s house, strong
and fit to bear arms. Now he was vexed at his vow,
went from his promise to the holy king, ran away
one day, and came in the evening to a bonder who
gave him lodging for God’s sake. Then in the night
he saw three girls coming to him ; and handsome and
nobly dressed were they. They spoke to him directly,
and sharply reprimanded him for having been so
bold as to run from the good king who had shown
so much compassion to him, first in freeing him from
his irons, and then from the prison ; and yet he had
deserted the mild master into whose service he had
entered. Then lie awoke full of terror, got up early,
and told the house-father his dream. The good man

o

KINGS OF NORWAY.

201

SAGA XII.

had nothing so earnest in life as to send him back to
the holy place. This miracle was first written down
by a man who himself saw the man, and the marks of
the chains upon his body.

In the last period of King Sigurd’s life, his new
and extraordinary resolution was whispered about, — King
that he would be divorced from his queen, and would
take Cecilia, who was a great man’s daughter, to Ceciiia.
wife. He ordered accordingly a great feast to be
prepared, and intended to hold his wedding with her
in Bergen. Kow when Bishop Magne heard this, he
was very sorry ; and one day the bishop goes to the
king’s hall, and mth him a priest called Sigurd, who
was afterwards bishop of Bergen. When they came
to the king’s hall, the bishop sent the king a message
that he would like to meet him ; and asked the king
to come out to him. He did so, and came out with a
drawn sword in his hand. He received the bishop
kindly, and asked him to go in and sit down to table
with him.

The bishop replies, “ I have other business now.

Is it true, sire, what is told me, that thou has the in¬
tention of marrying, and of driving away thy queen,
and taking another wife? ”

The king said it was true.

Then the bishop changed countenance, and angrily
replied, “ How can it come into your mind, sire, to
do such an act in our bishopric as to betray God’s
word and law, and the holy church? It surprises me
that you treat with such contempt our episcopal
oifice, and your own royal oifice. I will now do what
is my duty; and in the name of God, of the holy
King Olaf, of Peter the apostle, and of the other
saints, forbid thee this wickedness.”

While he thus spoke he stood straight up, as if
stretching out his neck to the blow, and as if ready
if the king chose to let the sword fall ; and the priest

202

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XII. Sigurd, who afterwards was bishop, has declared
that the sky appeared to him no bigger than a calf’s
skin, so frightful did the appearance of the king pre¬
sent itself to him. The king returned to the hall,
however, without saying a word ; and the bishop went
to his house and home so cheerful and gay that he
laughed, and saluted every child on his way, and was
playing with his fingers. Then the priest Sigurd
asked him the reason ; saying, “ Why are you so
cheerful, sir ? Do you not consider that the king may
be exasperated against you ? and would it not be better
to get out of the way?”

Then said the bishop, “ It appears to me more
likely that he will not act so ; and besides, what
death could be better, or more desirable, than to
leave life for the honour of God? or to die for the
holy cause of Christianity and our own office, by pre¬
venting that which is not right ? I am so cheerful
because I have done what I ought to do.”

There was much noise in the town about this. The
king got ready for a journey, and took with him corn,
malt, and honey. He went south to Stavanger, and
prepared a feast there for his marriage with Cecilia.
When the bishop who ruled there heard of this he
went to the king, and asked if it were true that he
intended to marry in the lifetime of the queen.

The king said it was so.

The bishop answers, If it be so, sire, you must
know how much such a thing is forbidden to inferior
persons. Now it appears as if you thought it was
allowable for you, because you have great power, and
that it is proper for you, although it is against right
and propriety ; but I do not know how you will do it
in our bishopric, dishonouring thereby God’s com¬
mand, the holy church, and our episcopal authority.
But you must bestow a great amount of gifts and

KINGS OF NORWAY.

203

estates on this foundation, and thereby pay the mulct
due to God and to us for such transgression.’’

Then said the said the king, Take what thou wilt
of our possessions. Thou art far more reasonable
than Bishop Magne.”

Then the king went away, as well pleased with this
bishop as ill pleased with him who had laid a pro¬
hibition on him. Thereafter the king married the
girl, and loved her tenderly.

King Sigurd improved the town of Konghelle so
much, that there was not a greater town in Norway
at the time, and he remained there long for the
defence of the frontiers. He built a king’s house
in the castle, and imposed a duty on all the districts
in the neighbourhood of the town, as well as on the
townspeople, — that every person of nine years of age
and upwards should bring to the castle five missile
stones for weapons, or as many large stakes sharp at
one end and five ells long. In the castle the king
built a cross- church of timber, and carefully put to¬
gether, as far as regards the wood and other materials.
The cross-church was consecrated in the 24th year
of King Sigurd’s reign. Here the king deposited
the piece of the holy cross, and many other holy
relics. It was called the Castle Church ; and be¬
fore the high altar he placed the tables he had got
made in the Greek country, which were of copper
and silver, all gilt, and beautifully adorned with
jewels. Here was also the shrine which the Danish
king Eric Eymund had sent to King Sigurd; and
the altar book, written with gold letters, which the
patriarch had presented to King Sigurd.

Three years after the consecration of the cross¬
church, when King Sigurd was stopping at Yiken, he
fell sick. Then his friends entreated him to separate
from his wife (Cecilia), which she herself also desired;
and she entreated the king that she might be allowed

SAGA XII.

Chapter

XL.

Improve^
ment of the
merchant
town of
Konghelle.

Chapter

XLI.

King

Sigurd’s

death.

204

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XII. to go away, as it would be most for bis advantage.

The king said, “ Little did I think that thou wouldst
leave me like the others;’’ and turned from her, and
became red as blood in the face. She went away
nevertheless. His illness now increased, and he died
of it ; and his body was removed for burial to Opslo.
He died the night before Mary’s-mass, and was buried
in Halvart’s church, where he was laid in the stone¬
wall without the choir on the south side. His son
Magnus was in the town at the time, and took pos¬
session of the whole of the king’s treasury when
King Sigurd died. Sigurd had been king of Norway
twenty- seven years from the death of his father Mag¬
nus Barefoot, and was forty years of age when he
died. The time of his reign was good for the country ;
. for there was peace, and crops were good.

KINGS OF NOEWAY.

205

XIIL

SAGA OF MAGNUS THE BLIND ^ AND OF

HARALD GILLE.f

King Sigued’s son Magnus was proclaimed in Opslo
king of all the country immediately after his father’s
death, according to the oath which the whole nation
had sworn to King Sigurd ; and many went into his
service, and many became his lendermen. Magnus
was the handsomest man then in Norway; of a pas¬
sionate temper, and cruel, but distinguished in bodily
exercises. The favour of the people he owed most to
the respect for his father. He was a great drinker,
greedy of money, hard, and obstinate.

Harald Gille, on the other hand, was very pleasing
in intercourse, gay, and full of mirth ; and so generous
that he spared in nothing for the sake of his friends.
He willingly listened to good advice, so that he allowed
others to consult with him and give counsel. With
all this he obtained favour and a good repute, and
many men attached themselves as much to him as to
King Magnus. Harald was in Tunsberg when he
heard of his brother King Sigurd’s death. He called
together his friends to a meeting, and it was resolved
to hold the Hauga Thing J there in the town. At
this Thing, Harald was chosen king of half the country,
and it was called a forced oath which had been taken
from him to renounce his paternal heritage. Then

* Reigned from 1130 to 1135. t To 1136.

J Hauga-thing means a Thing held at the tumuli or burial
mounds; but whether this was a local name at Tunsberg, or the name of
a Thing held for a solemn purpose at the burial mounds of their ances¬
tors for proclaiming a king, seems uncertain.

SAGA XIII

Chapter

I.

Magnus
and Harald
proclaimed
kings.

206

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XIII.

Chapter

11.

Of the
forces of
Harald and
Magnus.

Harald formed a court, and appointed lendermen; and
very soon he had as many people about him as King
Magnus. Then men went between them, and matters
stood in this way for seven days ; but King Magnus,
finding he had fewer people, was obliged to give way,
and to divide the kingdom with Harald in two parts.
The kingdom accordingly was so divided that each of
them should have the half part of the kingdom which
King Sigurd had possessed ; but that King Magnus
alone should inherit the fleet of ships, the table ser¬
vice, the valuable articles, and the moveable effects
which had belonged to his father King Sigurd. He
was notwithstanding the least satisfied with his share.
Although they were of such different dispositions, they
ruled the country for some time in peace. King Ha¬
rald had a son called Sigurd, by Thora, a daughter of
Guttorm Graabard. King Harald afterwards married
Ingirid, a daughter of Kognvald, who was a son of the
Swedish king Inge Steinkelsson. King Magnus was
married to a daughter of Canute Lavard, and she was
sister of the Danish king Waldemar ; but King Mag¬
nus having no affection for her, sent her back to Den¬
mark ; and from that day every thing went ill with
him, and he brought upon himself the enmity of her
family.

When the two relations, Harald and Magnus, had
been about three years kings of Norway, they both
passed the fourth winter in the town of Nidaros, and
invited each other as guests ; but their people were
always ready for a fight. In spring King Magnus
sailed southwards along the land with his fleet, and
drew all the men he could obtain out of each district,
and sounded his friends if they would strengthen him
with their power to take the Idngly dignity from Ha¬
rald, and give him such a portion of the kingdom as
might be suitable ; representing to them that King
Harald had already renounced the kingdom by oath.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

207

King Magnus obtained tbe consent of many powerful saga xm.
men. The same spring Harald went to the Uplands,
and by the upper road eastward to Viken ; and when
he heard what King Magnus was doing, he also drew
together men on his side. Wheresoever the two parties
went they killed the cattle, or even the people, upon
the farms of the adverse party. King Magnus had
by far most people, for the main strength of the coun¬
try lay open to him for collecting men from it. King
Harald was in Yiken on the east side of the fiord,
and collected men, while they were doing each other
damage in property and life. King Harald had with
him Kristrod, his brother by the mother’s side, and
many other lendermen ; but King Magnus had many
more. King Harald was with his forces at a place
called Fors in Eanrige, and went from thence towards
the sea. The evening before Saint Laurence-day they
had their supper at a place called Fyrileif, while the
guard kept a watch on horseback all around the house.

The watchmen observed King Magnus’s army hasten¬
ing towards the house, and consisting of full 6000
men, while King Harald had but 1500. Now come
the watchmen who had to bring the news to King
Harald of what was going on, and say that King
Magnus’s army was now very near the house.

The king says, “ What will my relation King Mag¬
nus Sigurdsson have? He wants not surely to fight
: me.”

Thiostolf Alesson replies, “You must certainly,
i sire, make preparation for that, both for yourself and
your men. King Magnus has been drawing together
I an army all the summer for the purpose of giving you
battle when he meets you.”

Then King Harald stood up, and ordered his men
to take their arms. “ We shall fight, if our relative
' King Magnus wants to fight us.”

Then the war-horns sounded, and all Harald’s men

208

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XIII.

Chapter

III.

Battle at
Fyrileif.

went out from the house to an enclosed field, and set
up their banners. King Harald had on two shirts of
ring-mail, but his brother Kristrod had no armour on ;
and a gallant man he was. When King Magnus and
his men saw King Harald’ s troop they drew up and
made their array, and made their line so long that
they could surround the whole of King Harald’s troop.
So says Halldor Skualdre : —

King Magnus on the battle-plain
From his long troop-line had great gain ;

The plain was drenched with warm bloody
Which lay a red and reeking flood.’"

King Magnus had the holy cross ^ carried before
him in this battle, and the battle was great and severe.
The king’s brother Kristrod had penetrated with his
troop into the middle of King Magnus’s array, and
cut down on each side of him, so that people gave
way before him every where. But a powerful bonder
who was in King’s Harald’s array raised his spear
with both hands, and drove it through between Kris¬
trod’ s shoulders, so that it came out at his breast ;
and thus fell Kristrod. Many who were near asked
the bonder why he had done so foul a deed.

The bonder replies, He knows the consequences
now of slaughtering my cattle in summer, and taking
all that was in my house, and forcing me to follow
him here. I determined to give him some return
when the opportunity came.”

After this King Harald’s army took to flight, and he
fled himself, with all his men. Many fell: and Ingemar
of Ask, a great chief and lenderman, got there his
death-wound ; and he sang while dying these verses : —

Some witch-wife’s power^

In evil hour.

* The relic brought home from Jerusalem by Sigurd the Crusader
seems here to be meant.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

209

Made me leave home, ' saga xiii.

And here to come. - -

This shaft, I know,

Shot from elm how,

Will hinder me
My Ash* to see.”

There fell nearly sixty of King Harald’s court-men,
and he himself fled eastward to Viken to his ships, and
went out of the country to King Eric in Denmark.

So says Halldor Skualldre : —

Thou who in battle-field hast striven
Now to thy ocean-steed art driven.

And o’er the blue field now must ride
To meet King Eric in his pride.

The smooth-tongued Jutland king, who reigns
O’er the brave men of Holstein’s plains,

Will give thee troops again to vie —

Again with Magnus strength to try.’’

So says also Einar Skulason : —

The youth who scatters, frank and free.

The shining gold — fire of the sea —

Seeks Scania’s sand o’er the blue meads.

The fields in which the grey fish feeds;

He who the witches’ horses stills.

Ravens and wolves, and their maws fills.

To the great king of Denmark hies, —

To get his armed aid he tries.”

King Harald sought the Danish king Eric Eyrnund,
to obtain help and aid from him ; and they met in
Smoland. King Eric received him well, and prin¬
cipally because they had sworn to each other to be as
brothers J; and gave him Halland as a fief to rule
over, and gave him seven long- ships, but without
equipment. Thereafter King Harald went northwards
through Halland, and many Northmen came to meet
him. After this battle King Magnus subdued the

* A pun seems intended on the name of his house — Ask, the ash.

■j" The whole of this strophe is merely to say that Harald sought
refuge with King Eric.

t These brotherhoods, by which one man was bound by oath to aid
or avenge another, were common in the middle ages among all ranks,

Sworn brothers ” is still a common expression with us.

VOL. HI. P

210

CimONICLE OF THE

SAGA XIII.

Chapter

IV.

Death of
Asbiorn
and of
Nereid.

whole country, giving life and safety to all who were
wounded, and had them taken care of equally with his
own men. He then called the whole country his own,
and had a choice of the best men who were in the coun¬
try. When they held a council among themselves after¬
wards, Sigurd Sigurdsson, Thorer Ingeredsson, and
all the men of most understanding, advised that they
shoidd keep their forces together in Viken, and remain
there, in case Harald should return from the south ;
but King Magnus would take his o^vn way, and went
north to Bergen. There he sat all winter, and allowed
his men to leave him ; on which the lendermen re¬
turned home to their own houses.

King Harald came to Konghelle’with the men who
had followed him from Denmark. The lendermen
and town’s burgesses collected a force against him,
which they drew up in a thick array above the to^vn.
King Harald landed from his ships, and sent a message
to the bonders, desiring that they would not deny
him his land, as he wanted no more than what of
right belonged to him. Then mediators went between
them ; and it came to this, that the bonders dismissed
their troops, and submitted to him. Thereupon he
bestowed fiefs and property on the lendermen, that
they might stand by him, and paid the bonders who
joined him the lawful mulcts for what they had lost.
A great body of men attached themselves, therefore,
to King Harald ; and he jiroceeded westwards to Yiken,
where he gave peace to all men, except to King ]\Iag-
nus’s people whom he plundered and killed wherever
he found them. And when he came west to Sarps-
burg, he took prisoners two of King Magnus’s lender-
men, Asbiorn and his brother Nereid ; and gave them
the choice that one should be halloaed, and the other
thrown into the Sarpsburg waterfall, and they might
choose as they pleased. Asbiorn chose to be thrown
into the cataract, for he was the elder of the two,

KINGS OF NORWAY.

211

and this death appeared the most dreadful; and so
it was done. Halldor Skualldre tells of this : —

Asbiorn, who opposed the king^

O’er the wild cataract they fling:

Nereid^ who opposed the king^

Must on Haghart’s high tree swing.

The king gives food in many a way
To foul-mouthed beasts and birds of prey:

The generous men who dare oppose
Are treated as the worst of foes.”

Thereafter King Harald proceeded north to Tuns-
herg, where he was well received, and a large force
gathered to him.

When King Magnus, who was in Bergen, heard
these tidings, he called together all the chiefs who
were in the town, and asked them their counsel, and
what they should now do. Then Sigurd Sigurdsson
said, “ Here I can give a good advice. Let a ship be
manned with good men, and put me, or any other
lenderman, to command it ; send it to thy relation
King Harald, and offer him peace according to the
conditions upright men may determine upon, and
offer him the half of the kingdom. It appears to me
probable that King Harald, by the words and counsel
of good men, may accept this offer, and thus there
may be a peace established between you.”

Then King Magnus replied, This proposal I will
not accept of ; for of what advantage would it be, after
we have gained the whole kingdom in summer, to
give away the half of it now? Give us some other
counsel.”

Then Sigurd Sigurdsson answered, “ It appears to
me, sire, that your lenderrnen who in autumn asked
your leave to return home will now sit at home, and
will not come to you. At that time it was much
against my advice that you dispersed so entirely the
people we had collected ; for I could well suppose that
Harald would come back to Yiken as soon as he heard

p 2

SAGA XIII,

Chapter

V.

Of the

counsels

proposed.

212

CHEONICLE OF THE

SAGA XIII that it was without a chief. Now there is still an¬
other counsel, and it is but a poor one ; but it may
turn out useful to us. Send out your pursuivants^',
and send other people with them, and let them
go against the lendermen who will not join you in
your necessity, and kill them ; and bestow their pro¬
perty on others who will give you help, although they
may have been of small importance before. Let them
drive together the people, the bad as well as the good ;
and go with the men you can thus assemble against
King Harald, and give him battle.”

The king replies, “ It would be unpopular to put
to death people of distinction, and raise up inferior
people who often break faith and law, and the country
would be still worse off. I would like to hear some
other counsel still.”

Sigurd replies, It is difficult for me now to give
advice, as you will neither make peace nor give battle.
Let us go north to Drontheim, where the main strength
of the country is most inclined to our side ; and on
the way let us gather all the men we can. It may be
that these river-borderers will be tired of such a lono’

o

stride after us.”

The king replies, “We must not fly from those
whom we beat in summer. Give some better counsel
still.”

Then Sigurd stood up, and said, while he was pre¬
paring to go out, “ I will now give you the counsel
which I see you will take, and which must have its
course. Sit here in Bergen until Harald comes with
his troops, and then you will either suffer death or
disgrace.”

And Sigurd remained no longer at that meeting.

Chapter King Haiffid caiue from the East along the coast

OfHaraid’s wltli a great army, and this winter is called on that

force.

* The Giesten or pursuivants^ were a lower class of men-at-arms
than the hirdmen^, or courtmen.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

213

account the Crowd-winter. King Harald came to
Bergen on Christmas eve, and landed with his fleet
at Floravaag ; but would not fight on account of the
sacred time. But King Magnus prepared for defence
in the to^vn. He erected a stone-slinging machine out
on the holm, and had iron chains and wooden booms
laid across over the passage from the King’s bridge to
the Korth-ness, and to the Monks’ bridge. He had
foot-traps made, and thrown into Saint John’s Field,
and did not suspend these works except during the
three sacred days of Christmas. The last holyday of
Yule, King Harald ordered his war-horns to sound
the gathering of his men for going to the town ; and,
during the Yule holy days, his army had been increased
by about 900 men.

King Harald made a promise to King Olaf the Saint
for victory, that he would build an Olaf ’s church in
the town at his own expense. King Magnus drew
up his men in the Christ-church yard ; but King
Harald laid his vessels first at the North-ness. Now
when King Magnus and his people saw that, they
turned round towards the town, and to the end of the
shore ; but as they passed through the streets many
of the burgesses ran into their houses and homes,
and those who went across the fields fell into the foot-
traps. Then King Magnus and his men perceived
that King Harald had rowed with all his men across
to Hegravik, and landed there, and had gone from
thence the upper road up the hill opposite to the
town. Now Magnus returned back again through
the streets, and then his men fled from him in all
directions ; some up to the Fielde, some up to the
neighbourhood of the convent of nuns, some to
churches, or hid themselves as they best could. King
Magnus fled to his ship ; but there was no possibility
of getting away, for the iron chains outside prevented
the passage of vessels. Fie had also but few men

SAGA Xlll.

Chapter

VII.

King Mag¬
nus taken
prisoner.

214

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XIII.

Chapter

VIII.

King

Magnus

mutilated.

with him, and therefore could do nothing. Einar
Skuleson tells of this in the song of Harald : ~

For a whole week an iron chain
Cut off all sailing to the main:

Bergen’s blue stable was locked fasC —

Her floating wains could not get past.”

Soon after Harald’s people came out to the ships,
and then King Magnus was made prisoner. He was
sitting behind in the forecastle upon the chests of the
high seat, and at his side Hakon Fauk, his mother’s
brother, who was very popular but was not considered
very wise, and Ivar Ozursson. They, and many others
of King Magnus’s friends, were taken, and some of
them killed on the spot.

Thereafter King Harald had a meeting of his
counsellors, and desired their counsel ; and in this
meeting the judgment was given that Magnus
should be deposed from his dominions, and should
no longer be called king. Then he was delivered to
the king’s slaves, who mutilated him, picked out
both his eyes, cut off one foot, and at last castrated
him. Ivar Ozursson was blinded, and Hakon Fauk
killed. The whole country then was reduced to
obedience under King Harald. Afterwards it was
diligently examined who were King Magnus’s best
friends, or who knew most of his concealments of
treasure or valuables. The holy cross King Magnus
had kept beside him since the battle of Fyrisleif, but
would not tell where it was deposited for preservation.
Bishop Keinhold of Stavanger, who was an English¬
man, was considered very greedy of money. He was
a great friend of King Magnus, and it was thought
likely that great treasure and valuables had been
given into his keeping. Men were sent for him ac¬
cordingly, and he came to Bergen, where it was
insisted against him that he had some knowledge of
such treasure ; but he denied it altogether, Avould not

KINGS OF NOKWAY.

215

admit it, and offered to clear himself by ordeal. King
Harald would not have this, hut laid on the bishop a
money fine of fifteen marks of gold, which he should
pay to the king. The bishop declared he would not
thus impoverish his bishop’s see, but would rather
offer his life. On this they hanged the bishop out on
the holm, beside the sling machine. As he was going
to the gallows he threw the sock from his foot, and
said with an oath, I know no more about King Mag¬
nus’s treasure than what is in this sock ; ” and in it
there was a gold ring. Bishop Keinhold was buried
at Korth-ness in Michael’s church, and this deed was
much blamed. After this Harald Gille was sole king
of Norway as long as he lived.

Five years after King Sigurd’s death remarkable
occurrences took place in Konghelle. Guttorm, a son
of Harald Flitter, and Sæmund Huusfreya, were at
that time the king’s officers there. Sæmund was
married to Ingeborg, a daughter of the priest Andreas
Brunsson. Their sons were Paul Flip and Gunne
Fis. Sæmund’s natural son was called Aasmund.
Andreas Brunsson was a very remarkable man, who
carried on divine service in the Cross church. His
wife"^ was called Solveig. John Loptson, who was
then eleven years old, was in their house to be fos¬
tered and educated. The priest Lopt Sæmundson,
John’s father, was also in the town at that time. It
happened now in Konghelle, the next Sunday night
after Easter week, that there was a great noise in the
streets through the whole town, as if the king was
going through with all his court-men. The dogs
were so affected that nobody could hold them, but
they slipped loose; and when they came out they ran
mad, biting all that came in their way, people and
cattle. All who were bitten by them till the blood

* The Catholic priests appear to have had wives at that time in Nor¬
way, and celibacy to have been confined to the monks.

p 4

SAGA XIII.

Chapter,
IX.
Extra¬
ordinary-
omens in
Konghelle.

216

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XIIT.

Chapter

X.

The rise
of war in
Konghelle .

came turned raging mad ; and pregnant women were
taken in labour prematurely, and became mad. From
Easter to Ascension-day, these portentous circum¬
stances took place almost every night. People were
dreadfully alarmed at these wonders ; and many made
themselves ready to remove, sold their houses, and
went out to the country districts, or to other towns.
The most intelligent men looked upon it as something
extremely remarkable ; were in dread of it ; and said,
as it proved to be, that it was an omen of important
events which had not yet taken place. And the
priest Andreas, on Whit Sunday, made a long and
excellent speech, and turned the conclusion of it to
the distressing situation of the townspeople ; telling
them to muster courage, and not lay waste their ex¬
cellent town by deserting it, but rather to take the
utmost care in all things, and use the greatest fore¬
sight against all dangers, as of lire or the enemy, and
to pray to God to have mercy on them.

Thirteen loaded merchant ships made ready to leave
the town, intending to proceed to Bergen ; but eleven
of them were lost, men and goods, and all that was in
them ; the twelfth was lost also, but the people were
saved, although the cargo went to the bottom. At
that time the priest Lopt went north to Bergen, with
all that belonged to him, and arrived safely. The
merchant vessels were lost on Saint Lawrence eve.
The Danish king Eric Eymund, and the Archbishop
Ozur*, both sent notice to Konghelle to keep watch
on their town ; and said the V endland people had a
great force on foot with which they made war far
around on Christian people, and usually gained the
victory. But the townspeople attended very little to

* This Ozur, — or Asserus, Asgerus, or Atscheriis, — was the first
archbishop of Lund in Scania^ and died anno 1138.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

217

this warning, were indifferent, and forgot more and saga xm.
more the dreadful omens the longer it was since they
happened. On the holy Saint Lawrence day, while
the words of high mass were spoken, came the Vend”
land king Eettibur to Konghelle with 250 Vendland
cutters, and in each cutter were forty-four men and
two horses. The king’s sister’s son Dunimiz, and
Unibur, a chief who ruled over many people, were
with him. These two chiefs rowed at once, with all
their troops, up the east arm of the Gotha river past
Hising Isle, and thus came down to the town ; but a
part of the fleet lay in the western arm, and came so
to the town. They made fast their ships at the piles,
and landed their horses, and rode over the height of
Bratsaas, and from thence up around the town.

Einar, a relation of priest Andreas, brought these
tidings up to the Castle church ; for there the whole
inhabitants of the town were gathered to hear high
mass. Einar came just as the priest Andreas was
holding his discourse ; and he told the people that an
army was sailing up against the toAvn with a great
number of ships of war, and that some people were
riding over Bratsaas. Many said it must be the
Danish king Eric, and from him they might expect
peace. The people ran down into the town to their
properties, armed themselves, and went down upon
the piers, whence they immediately saw there was an
enemy and an immense army. Nine East-country
trading vessels belonging to the merchants were afloat
in the river at the piers. The merchants took these,
armed themselves, and defended themselves long, well,
and manfully. There was a hard battle, and resist¬
ance, before the merchant vessels were cleared of their
men ; and in this conflict the V endland people lost
150 of their ships, with all the men on board. When
the battle was sharpest the townsmen stood upon the

218

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XIII. piers'^, and shot at the heathens. But when the tight
slackened the burgesses tied up to the town, and from
thence into the castle ; and the men took with them all
their valuable articles, and such goods as they could
carry. Solveig and her daughters, with tAvo other
women, Avent on shore, Avhen the Yendlanders took
possession of the merchant vessels. Noav the Yend¬
landers landed, and mustered their men, and dis¬
covered their loss. Some of them Avent up into the
town, some on board the merchant ships, and took all
the goods they pleased ; and then they set tire to the
toAvn, and burnt it and the ships. They hastened
then AAuth all their army to assault the castle.

Chapter Kiu^ Bettibur made an offer to those Avho Avere in
XL ®

The second the castle that they should go out, and he would give
battle. them their lives, Aveapons, clothes, silver, and gold;

but all exclaimed against it, and Avent out on the for¬
tification : some shot, some threAV stones, some sharp
stakes. It Avas a great battle, in AAdiich many fell on
both sides, but by far the most of the Yendlanders.
Solveig came up to a large farm called Solberg, and
brought the neAvs. A message Avar-token Avas there
split, and sent out to Skurhage, Avhere there happened
to be a joint ale-drinking feast, and many men AAm^e
assembled. A bonder called Olver Stormund Avas
there, A^dIO immediately sprang up, took helmet and
shield, and a great axe in his hand, and said,
“ Stand up, brave lads, and take your Aveapons. Let
us go help the toAvnspeople ; for it Avould appear
shameful to every man Avho heard of it, if Ave sit here
sipping our ale, Avhile good men in the toAAui are losing
their lives by our neglect.”

Many made an objection, and said they Avould only

* The piers here spoken of are merely wooden gangways or stages
on piles from the shore to the ship ; and every warehouse or dwelling on
the side of a river or harbour has such a pier for itself in Norway.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

219

be losing tbeir own lives, without being of any assist- saga xm.
ance to the townspeople.

Then said Olver, “ Although all of you should hold
back, I will go alone ; and one or two heathens, at any
rate, shall fall before I fallf’

He ran down to the town, and a few men after him
to see what he would do, and also whether they could
assist him in any way. When he came near the castle,
and the heathens saw him, they sent out eight men fully
armed against him ; and when they met, the heathen
men ran and surrounded him on all sides. Olver
lifted his axe, and struck behind him with the ex¬
treme point of it, hitting the neck of the man who
was coming up behind him, so that his throat and
jawbone were cut through, and he fell dead back¬
wards. Then he heaved his axe forwards, and struck
the next man in the head, and clove him down to the
shoulders. He then fought with the others, and killed
two of them ; but was much wounded himself. The
four who remained took to flight, but Olver ran after
them. There was a ditch before them, and two of the
heathens jumped into it, and Olver killed them both;
but he stuck fast himself in the ditch, so that two of
the eight heathens escaped. The men who had fol¬
lowed Olver took him up, and brought him back to
Skurhage, where his wounds were bound and healed ;
and it was the talk of the people, that no single man
had ever made such a bloody onset. Two lendermen,

Sigurd Gyrdersson a brother of Philip, and Sigaard,
came with 600 men to Skurhage ; on which Sigurd
turned back with 400 men. He was but little re¬
spected afterwards, and soon died. Sigaard, on the
other hand, proceeded with 200 men towards the
town ; and they gave battle to the heathens, and were
all slain. While the Vendlanders were storming the
castle, their king and his chiefs were out of the battle.

At one place there was a man among the Vendlanders

220

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XIII. shooting with a bow, and killing a man for every arrow ;

and two men stood before him, and covered him with
their shields. Then Sæmund Huusfreya said to his
son Aasmund, that they should both shoot together
at this bowman. “ But I will shoot at the man who
holds the shield before him.” He did so, and he
knocked the shield down a little before the man ; and
in the same instant Aasmund shot between the shields,
and the arrow hit the bowman in the forehead, so that
it came out at his neck, and he fell down dead. When
the y endlanders saw it they howled like dogs, or like
wolves. Then King Rettibur called to them that he
would give them safety and life, but they refused
terms. The heathens again made a hard assault.
One of the heathens in particular fought so bravely,
and ventured so near, that he came quite up to the
castle-gate, and pierced the man who stood outside
the gate with his sword ; and although they used both
arrow and spear against him, and he had neither
shield nor helmet, nothing could touch him, for he
was so skilled in witchcraft that weapon could not
wound him. Then Priest Andreas took consecrated
fire ; blew upon it ; cut tinder in pieces, and laid it on
the fire ; and then laid the tinder on the arrow-point,
and gave it to Aasmund. He shot this arrow at the
warlock ; and the shaft hit so well that it did its busi¬
ness, and the man of mtchcraft fell dead. Then the
heathens crowded together as before, howling and
whining dreadfully ; and all gathered about their
king, on which the Christians believed that they were
holding a council about retreating. The interpreters,
who understood the Yendland tongue, heard the chief
Unibur make the following speech : “ These people are
brave, and it is difficult to make any thing of them ;
and even if we took all the goods in their town, Ave
might Avillingiy give as much more that Ave had neA^er
come here, so great has been our loss of men and

KINGS OF NORWAY.

221

chiefs. Early in the day, when we began to assault saga xm.
the castle, they defended themselves first with arrows
and spears ; then they fought against us with stones ;
and now with sticks and staves, as against dogs. I
see from this that they are in want of weapons and
means of defence; so we shall make one more hard
assault, and try their strength.” It was as he said,
that they now fought with stakes ; because, in the first
assault, they had imprudently used up all their missile
weapons and stones ; and now when the Christians saw
the number of their stakes diminishing, they clave each
stake in two. The heathens now made a very hot
attack, and rested themelves between whiles, and on
both sides they were exhausted. During a rest the
Yendland IdngKettibur again offered terms, and that
they should retain the weapons, clothes, and silver
they could carry out of the castle. Sæmund Huus-
freya had fallen, and the men who remained gave the
counsel to deliver up the castle and themselves into
the power of the heathens : but it was a foolish coun¬
sel ; for the heathens did not keep their promises, but
took all people, men, women, and children, and killed
all of them who were wounded or young, or could
not easily be carried with them. They took all the
goods that were in the castle ; went into the Cross
church, and plundered it of all its ornaments. The
priest Andreas gave King Eettibur a silver-mounted
gilt sceptre, and to his sister’s son Dunimiz he gave a
gold ring. They supposed from this that he was a
man of great importance in the town, and held him
in higher respect than the others. They took away
with them the holy cross, and also the tables which
stood before the altar, which Sigurd had got made in
the Greek country, and had brought home himself.

These they took, and laid flat down on the steps be¬
fore the altar. Then the heathens went out of the
church. Rettibur said, This house has been adorned

222

CHRONICLE OF THE

sACxA XIII. with great zeal for the God to whom it is dedicated ;

but, methinks, he has shown little regard for the town
or house : so I see their God has been angry at those
who defended theinf’ King Kettibur gave the priest
Andreas the church, the shrine, the holy cross, the Bible,
the altar-book, and four clerks (prisoners); but the
heathens burnt the Castle-church, and all the houses
that were in the castle. As the fire they had set to the
church went out twice, they hewed the church down,
and then it burnt like other houses. Then the heathens
went to their ships with the booty ; but when they
mustered their people and saw their loss, they made
prisoners of all the people, and divided them among
the vessels. Now Priest Andreas went on board the
king’s ship with the holy cross, and there came a
great terror over the heathens on account of the por¬
tentous circumstance which took place in the king’s
ship ; namely, it became so hot that all thought they
Avere going to be burnt up. The king ordered the
interpreter to ask the priest why this happened.
He replied, that the Almighty God on Avhom the
Christians believed, sent them a proof of his anger,
that they Avho would not believe in their Creator pre¬
sumed to lay hands on the emblem of his suffering ;
and that there lay so much poAver in the cross, that
such, and even clearer miracles, happened to heathen
men Avho had taken the cross in their hands. The
king had the priest put into the ship’s boat, and the
priest Andreas carried the holy cross in his grasp.
They led the boat along past the ship’s boAv, and
then along the side of the next ship, and then shoved
it Avith a boat-hook in beside the pier. Then An¬
dreas Avent Avith the cross by night to Solberg, in
rain and dreadful Aveather ; but brought it in good
preservation. King Rettibur, and the men he had
remaining, Avent home to Vendland, and many of the
people Avho Avere taken at Konghelle Avere long after-

KINGS OF NOEWAY.

223

wards in slavery in Vendland; and those who were
ransomed, and came back to Norway to their ndal
lands and properties, throve worse than before their
capture. The merchant town of Konghelle has never
since risen to the importance it was of before this
event.

King Magnus, after he was deprived of sight, went
north to Nidaros, where he went into the cloister on
the holm, and assumed the monk’s dress. The cloister
received the farm of Great Herness in Frosta for his
support. King Flarald alone ruled the country the
following winter, gave all men peace and pardon who
desired it, and took many of the men into his court-
service who had been with King Magnus. The
priest Einar Skuleson says that King Harald had two
battles in Denmark ; the one at Huæn Isle, and the
other at Lessö Isle : —

Unwearied champion ! who wast hred
To stain thy blue-edged weapons red!

Beneath high Huæn’s rocky shore^

The faithless felt thy steel once more.”

And again, thus: —

On Lessö’s plain the foe must quail
i ’Fore him who dyes their shirts of mail.

His storm-stretched banner o'er his head
Flies straight^ and fills the foe with dread.”

King Harald was a very generous man. It is told
that in his time Magnus Einarsson came from Iceland
to be consecrated a bishop, and the king received him
well, and showed him much respect. When the bishop
was ready to sail for Iceland again, and the ship was
rigged out for sea, he went to the hall where the
I king was drinking, saluted him politely and warmly,
1 and the king received him joyfully. The queen was
sitting beside the king.

Then said the king, “ Are you ready, bishop, for
. your voyage?”

He replied that he was.

SAGA XIII;

Chapter

XII.

Of Magnus
the Blind.

224

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XIII. The king said, You come to us just now at a bad
time; for the tables are just removed, and there is
nothing at hand suitable to present to you. What is
there to give the bishop

The treasurer replies, ‘‘ Sire, as far I know, all
articles of any value are given away.”

The king: “ Here is a drinking goblet remaining ;
take this, bishop, it is not without value.”

The bishop expressed his thanks for the honour
shoAvn him.

Then said the queen, “Farewell, bishop! and a
happy voyage.”

The king said to her, “ When did you ever hear a
noble lady say so to a bishop without giving him
something ?”

She replies, “ Sire, what have I to give him ?”

The king: “ Thou hast the cushion under thee.”

Thereupon this, which was covered with costly
cloth, and Avas a valuable article, Avas given to the
bishop. When the bishop was going away the king
took the cushion from under himself and gave it him,
saying, “ They have long been together.” When the
bishop arrived in Iceland to his bishop’s see, it Avas
talked over Avhat should be done with the goblet that
would be serviceable for the king ; and Avhen the
bishop asked the opinion of other people, many thought
it should be sold, and the value bestoAved on the poor.
Then said the bishop, “ I Aviil take another plan. I
Avill have a chalice made of it for this church, and
consecrate it, so that all the saints of Avhom there are
relics in this church shall let the king have some good
for his gift every time a mass is sung over it.” This
chalice has since belonged to the bishopric of Skalholt ;
and of the costly cloth Avith AAdiich the cushions given
him by the king Avere covered, AA^ere made the choris¬
ters’ cloaks which are noAV in Skalholt. From this
the generous spirit of King Harald may be seen, as

KINGS OF NORWAY.

225

well as from many other things, of which but a few saga xm.
are set clown here.

King Harald took Thora, a daughter of Guttorm
Graabard,to be his concubine; and they had a son, who
was called Sigurd. He had also a son by Queen
Ingigerd, who was called Inge. The one of Harald’s
daughters was called Brigetta, the other Maria. His
daughter Brigetta was first married to the Swedish
king Inge Halsteinsson, then to Magnus Heinricksson, .
and lastly to Birger Brose.

There was a man, by name Sigurd, who was brought c HATTER
up in Norway, and was called Priest Adalbrekt’s son. xhf
Sigurd’s mother was Thora, a daughter of Saxe of
Yik, a sister of Sigrid, who was mother of King Olaf siem-
Magnusson, and of Kaare the king’s brother who
married Borghild, a daughter of Dag Eilifsson. Their
sons were Sigurd of Ostvaat and Dag. Sigurd of Ost-
vaat’s sons were John of Ostvaat, Thorstein, and An¬
dreas the Deaf. John was married to Sigrid, a sister
of King Inge and of Duke Skule. This Sigurd, in his
childhood, was kept at his book, became a clerk, and
was consecrated a deacon ; but as he ripened in years
and strength he became a very clever man, stout,
strong, distinguished for all perfections and exercises
beyond any of his years, — indeed, beyond any man in
Norway. Sigurd showed early traces of a haughty
ungovernable spirit, and was therefore called Slembi-
diakn.'* He was as handsome a man as could be seen,
with rather thin but beautiful hair. When it came
to Sigurd’s ears that his mother said King Mag¬
nus was his father, he laid aside all clerkship; and as
soon as he was old enough to be his own master, he
left the country. He was a long time on his travels,
went to Palestine; was at the Jordan river; and visited

* Slernbidiakn, or Slembidegn - the bad deacon.

Q

VOL. III.

22G

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XIII. man}; holy places, as pilgrims usually do. When he
came back, he applied himself to trading expeditions.
One winter he was in Orkney with Earl Harald, and
was with him when Thorkel Fostre Summarlidsson
was killed. Sigurd was also in Scotland with the
Scottish king David, and was held in great esteem
by him. Thereafter Sigurd went to Denmark; and
according to the account of himself and his men, he
there submitted to the iron ordeal to confirm his
paternal descent, and proved by it, in the presence of
five bishops, that he was a son of King Magnus Bare¬
foot. So says Ivar Ingemundsson in Sigurd’s
song : —

The holiest five
Of men alive^ —

Bishops were they, —

Solemnly say.

The iron glowing
Red hot, yet showing
No scaith on skin.

Proves cause and kin.”

King Harald Gille’s friends, however, said this was
only a lie, and deceit of the Danes against the people of
Norway. It is told before of Sigurd that he passed
some years in merchant voyages, and he came thus
to Iceland one winter, and took up his lodging mth
Thorgil Oddsson of Stadarholl in Saurbo; but very
few knew where he was. In autumn, when the
sheep were being driven into a fold to be slaughtered,
a sheep that was to be caught ran to Sigurd ; and
as Sigurd thought the sheep ran to him for protec¬
tion, he stretched out his hands to it, and lifted it
over the fold dyke, and let it run to the hills, saying,

* Every pretender to the throne appears to have had some scald,
who took his chance with his patron. This Ivar does not appear
unless as Sigurd’s scald, and as attached to his fortunes. In these
scraps of the poetry of the scalds it is necessary to recollect by whom
each is composed, and to which personage he is attached.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

227

1

I

i

i

i

r

t

[

i

1

There are not many who seek help from me, so I
may well help this one.” It happened the same win¬
ter that a woman had committed a theft, and Thor-
gil, who was angry at her for it, was going to punish
her; but she ran to Sigurd to ask his help, and he
set her upon the bench by his side. Thorgil told
him to give her up, and told him what she had com¬
mitted ; but Sigurd begged forgiveness for her, since
she had come to him for protection, and that Thorgil
would dismiss the complaint against her, but Thorgil
insisted that she should receive her punishment.
When Sigurd saw that Thorgil would not listen to
his entreaty, he started up, drew his sword, and bade
him take her if he dared ; and Thorgil seeing that
Sigurd would defend the woman by force of arms, and
observing his commanding mien, guessed who he
must be, desisted from pursuing the woman, and par¬
doned her. There were many foreign men there, and
Sigurd made the least appearance among them. One
day Sigurd came into the sitting-room, and a North¬
man who was splendidly clothed was playing chess
with one of Thorgil’ s house- servants. The Northman
called Sigurd, and asked him his advice how to play ;
but when Sigurd looked at the board, he saw the
game was lost. The man who was playing against
the Northman had a sore foot, so that one toe was
bruised, and matter was coming out of it. Sigurd,
who was sitting on the bench, takes a straw, and
draws it along the floor, so that some young kittens
ran after it. He drew the straw always before them,
until they came near to the house-servant’s foot, who,
jumping up with a scream, threw the chessmen
in disorder on the board ; and thus it was a dispute
how the game had stood. This is given as a proof of
Sigurd’s cunning. People did not know that he was
a learned clerk until the Saturday before Easter, when

Q 2

SAGA. XTII«

228

CHRONICLE OF THE

SATxA XIII.

Chapteh
XIV.
Of Sigurd
Slem-
bidiakn.

he consecrated the holy water with chant ; and the
lona’er he staid there the more he was esteemed.
The summer after, Sigurd told Thorgil, before they
parted, that he might with all confidence address his
friends to Sigurd Slembidiakn. Thorgil asked how
nearly he was related to him; on which he replies,
“ I am Sigurd Slembidiakn, a son of King Magnus
Barefoot.” He then left Iceland.

At this time Harald was sole king of Norway, and
people generally said that he was not a man of under¬
standing ; but not so cruel as his relation King Mag¬
nus Sigurdsson. When Harald Gille had been six
years King of Norway, Sigurd came to the country ;
and many gave him the counsel to go at once to King
Harald, declare his relationship to him, and try how
matters would go. Sigurd accordingly went to his
brother King Harald, and found him in Bergen. He
placed himself entirely in the king’s hands, disclosed
vvTo his father was, and asked him to acknowledge
their relationship. The king gave him no hasty or
distinct reply ; but laid the matter before his friends in
a conference at a specially appointed meeting. When
the king’s counsellors were made acquainted with it,
they said that if Sigurd was placed over the kingdom
he Avould become too great, as King Magnus had
been : and now they lived in ail quietness, and the
lendermen alone, in fact, governed the kingdom ; and
therefore they advised the king to lay a capital accu¬
sation against Sigurd, and have him put to death.
After this conference it became known that the kin^
laid an accusation against Sigurd, because he had
been at the killing of Thorkel Fostre in the West.
Thorkel had accompanied Harald to Norway when
he first came to the country, and had been one of
Ilarald’s best friends. This case was followed up so
severely, that a capital accusation against Sigurd was

KINGS OF NORWAY.

229

made, and, by the advice of the lendermen, was saga xm.
carried so far, that some of the king’s pursuivants
went one evening late to Sigurd, and called him to
them. They then took a boat, and rowed away with
Sigurd from the town north to Holdhella.^ Sigurd sat
on a chest in the stern of the boat, and had his sus¬
picions that foul play was intended. He was clothed
in blue trousers, and over his shirt he had a hood
tied with ribands, which served him for a cloak. He
sat looking down, and holding his hood-strings ;
and sometimes moved them over his head, some¬
times let them fall aofain before him. Now when
they had passed the ness, and had come nearly to
Miolk-a, they were, part of them, drunk and merry,
and part were rowing so eagerly that they were not
taking notice of any thing. Sigurd stood up, and
went on the boat’s deck; but the two men who were
placed to guard him stood up also, and followed him
to the side of the vessel, holding by his cloak, as is
the custom in guarding people of distinction. As he
was afraid that they would catch hold of more of
his clothes, he seized them both, and leaped over¬
board with them. The boat, in the mean time, had
gone on a long way, and it was a long time before
those on board could turn the vessel, and long before
they could get their own men taken on board again ;
and Sigurd dived under water, and swam so far away
that he reached the land before they could get the
boat turned to pursue him. Sigurd, who was very
swift of foot, hied up to the Fielde, and the king’s
men travelled about the whole night seeking him
without finding him. He lay down in a cleft of the
rocks; and as he was very cold he took off his trou¬
sers, cut a hole in the seat of them, and stuck his
head througli it, and put his arms in the legs of them.

* Holdhella, — now Halle, — a point of land near Bergen.

Q 3

230

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XIII.

Chapter

XV.

Treachery

towards

King

Harald.

Chatter
XVI.
Murder
of King
Harald,

He escaped with life this time ; and the king’s men
returned, and could not conceal their unsuccessful
adventure.

Sigurd thought now that it would be of no use to
seek any help from King Harald again ; and he kept
himself concealed all the autumn and the beginning
of winter. He lay hid in Bergen, in the house of
a priest. King Harald was also in the town, and
many great people with him. Kow Sigurd considered
how, with his friends’ help, he might take the king
by surprise, and make an end of him. Many men
took part in this design ; and among them some who
were King Harald’ s court-men and chamberlains, but
who had formerly been King Magnus’s court-men.
They stood in great favour with the king, and some
of them sat constantly at the king’s table. On St.
Lucia’s day, in the evening, when they proposed to
execute this treason, two men sat at the king’s table
talking together ; and one of them said to the king,
“ Sire, we two table-companions submit our dispute
to your judgment, having made a wager of a basket
of honey to him who guesses right. I say that you
will sleep this night with your Queen Ingigerd ; and
he says that you will sleep with Thora, Guttorm’s
daughter.”

The king answered laughing, and without suspect¬
ing in the least that there lay treachery under the
question, — that he who asked had lost his bet.

They knew thus where he was to be found that
night ; but the main guard was without the house in
which most people thought the king would sleep, viz
that which the queen was in.

Sigurd Slembe, and some men who were in his
design, came in the night to the lodging in which
King Harald was sleeping ; killed the watchman first ;
then broke open the door, and went in with drawn

KINGS OF NOKWAY.

231

swords. Ivar Kolbeinsson made the first attack Qn SAGA XIII.
King Harald ; and as the king had been drunk when
he went to bed he slept sound, and awoke only when
the men were striking at him. Then he said in his
sleep, “ Thou art treating me hardly, Thora.” She
sprang up, saying, They are treating thee hardly
who love thee less than I do.” Harald was deprived
of life. The men who went in with Sigurd to the
king were Ogmund, a son of Thrand Skage, Kolbein
Thorliotsson of Batalder, and Erlind, an Icelander.

Then Sigurd went out with his helpers, and ordered
the men to be called to him who had promised him their
support if he should get King Harald taken out of the
way. Sigurd and his men then went on, and took a
boat, set themselves to the oars, and rowed out in front
of the king’s house ; and then it was just beginning to
be daylight. Then Sigurd stood up, spoke to those
who were standing on the king’s pier, made known to
them the murder of King Harald by his hand, and
desired that they would take him, and choose him as
chief according to his birth. Now came many swarm¬
ing down to the pier from the king’s house ; and all
with one voice replied, that they would never give
obedience or service to a man who had murdered his
own brother. “ And if thou art not his brother,
thou hast no claim from descent to be king.” They
clashed their weapons together, and adjudged all
murderers to be banished and outlawed men. Now
the king’s horn sounded, and all lendermen and court-
men were called together. Sigurd and his comrades
saw it was best for them to get away ; and he went
northward to North Hordaland, where he held a
Thing with the bonders, who submitted to him, and
gave him the title of king. From thence he went to
Sogn, and held a Thing there with the bonders, and
was proclaimed king. Then he went north across

Q 4

232

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XIII. the Fielde, and most people supported his cause. So
says Ivar Ingemundsson : —

On Harald’s fall
The bonders all,

In Hörd and Sogn,

Took Magnus’ son.

The Things swore too
They would be true
To this new head.

In Harald’s stead.”

King Harald was buried in the old Christ church.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

233

XIV.

SAGxi OF SIGURD, IXGE, AND EYSTEIX,
THE SONS OF HARALD.^^

Queen Ingerid, and with her the lendermen and the
court which had been with King Harald, resolved
to send a fast-sailing-vessel to Drontheim to make
known King Harald’s death, and also to desire the
Drontheim people to take King Harald’s son Sigurd
for king. He was then in the north, and was fos¬
tered by Gyrder Bardson. Queen Ingerid herself pro¬
ceeded eastward immediately to Viken. Inge was the
name of her son by King Harald, and he was then
fostered by Amund Gyrdersson, a grandson of Log-
berse. When they came to Viken a Borgar-thingf
was immediately called together, at which Inge, who
was in the second year of his age, was chosen king.
This resolution was supported by Amund and Thio-
stolf Aleson, together with many other great chiefs.
Now when the tidings came north to Drontheim that
King Harald was murdered, the Drontheim people
took Sigurd, King Harald's son, who was then in his
fourth year, to be the king ; and at the Ore-thing
this resolution was supported by Ottar Birting, Peter
Sauda-Ulfsson, the brothers Guttorm of Reine and
Ottar Balle Asolfssons, and many other great cliiefs,
and many other people. Afterwards the whole nation
almost submitted to the brothers, and principally be¬
cause their father was considered holy; and the

* The period is from about 1136 to llöl.

t The Borgar-thing — a Thing at the Borg of Sarp or Sarpsborg;
one of the regular great Things of the country.

SAGA XIV.

Chapter

I.

Beginning
of the liis-
tory of the
kings Si¬
gurd and
Inge.

234

CHKONICLE OE THE

SAGA XIV.

Chapter

JI.

Of Sigurd

Slembi-

diakn.

country took the oath to them, that the kingly power
should not go to any other man as long as any of
King Har aid’s sons was alive.

Sigurd Slemhe sailed north around Stad ; and when
he came to North More, he found that letters and full
powers had arrived before him from the leaders who
had given in their allegiance to Harald’s sons; so that
there he got no welcome or help. As Sigurd himself
had but few people with him, he resolved to go with
them to Drontheim, and seek out Magnus the Blind ;
for he had already sent a message before him to
Magnus’s friends. At that time King Sigurd Haralds-
son was in the town, and many great men with him ;
so it was not easy for Sigurd Slembe to come there.
He had with him at this time many of Magnus the
Blind’s friends. Now when they came to the town,
they rowed up the river Nid to meet King Magnus,
and fastened their land-ropes on the shore at the
king’s house; but were obliged to set off immediately,
for all the people rose against them. They then
landed in Munkholm, and took Magnus the Blind out
of the cloister against the will of the monks ; for he
had been consecrated a monk. It is said by some that
Magnus willingly went with them ; althougli it was
differently reported, in order to make his cause ap¬
pear better. Sigurd, immediately after Yule, went
forth with his suite, expecting aid from his relations
and Magnus’s friends, and which they also got.
Sigurd sailed with his men out of the fiord, and was
joined afterwards by Biorn Egilsson, Gunnar of
Gimse, Haldor Sigurdsson, Aslak Hakonsson, the
brothers Benedict and Eric, and also the court which
had before been with King Magnus, and many others.
With this troop they went south to More, and down
to the mouth of Raumsdal fiord. Here Sigurd and
Magnus divided their forces, and Sigurd went imme¬
diately westwards across the sea. King Magnus again

KINGS OF NOKWAY.

235

proceeded to the Uplands, where he expected much saga xiv.
help and strength, and which he obtained. He re¬
mained there the winter and all the summer, and had
many people with him; but King Inge proceeded
against him mth all his forces, and they met at a place
called Minne. There was a great battle, at which
King Magnus had the most people. It is related that
Thiostolf Aleson carried King Inge in his belt as long
as the battle lasted, and stood under the banner ; but
Thiodolf was hard pressed by fatigue and fighting :
and it is commonly said that King Inge got his ill
health there, and which he retained as long as he
lived, so that his back was knotted into a hump, and
the one foot was shorter than the other ; and he was
besides so infirm that he could scarcely walk as long
as he lived. The defeat began to turn upon Magnus
and his men; and in the front rank of his array fell
Thorkel, Haldor Sigurdsson, Biorn Egilsson, Gunnar
of Gimse, and a great number of his men, before he
himself would take to his horse and fly. So says
Kolli the Wise : —

Thy arrow-storm on Mynna’s banks
Fast thinn’d the foemen’s strongest ranks ;

Thy good sword hewed the raven’s feast
On Mynna’s banks up in the East.

Shield clashed on shield, and bucklers broke
Under thy battle-axe’s stroke ;

While thou, uncovered, urged the fray,

Thy shield and mail-coat thrown away.”

And also this : —

The king to heaven belonging* fled,

When thouf, in war’s quick death-game bred.

Unpan zered, shieldless, on the plain
His heavy steel-clad guards hadst slain.

* Magnus, having assumed the monk’s garb, was considered as be¬
longing to heaven.

This appears to be addressed to Thiostolf Aleson, who commanded
in the battle; not to King Inge, an infant.

236

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XIV. The painted shield^ and steel-plate mail^

- Hefore tby fierce attack soon fail.

To Magnus^ who belongs to heaven^

\Fas no such fame in battle given.”

Magnus fled eastward to Gotland to Earl Karl,
Avho was a great and ambitious man. Magnus tiie
Blind and his men said, wherever they happened to
meet with chiefs, that Norway lay quite open to any
great chieftain who would attack it ; for it might
well be said there was no king in the country, and
the kingdom was only ruled by lendermen, and,
among those who had most sway, there was, from
mutual jealousy, most discord. Noav Karl, being am¬
bitious of power, listens willingly to such speeches ;
collects men, and rides west to Viken, where many
people, out of fear, submit to him. When Thiodolf
Aleson and Amund heard of this, they went with the
men they could get together, and took King Inge
with them. They met Earl Karl and the Gotland
army eastward in Krogskoven, where there was a
great battle and a great defeat. King Inge gaining the
victory. Munan Ogmundsson, Earl Karl’s mother’s
brother, fell there. Ogmund the father of Munan
was a son of Earl Orm Eilifsson, and Sigrid a daughter
of Earl Finn Arneson. Astrid, Ogmund’s daughter,
was the mother of Earl Karl. Many others of the
Gotland people fell at Krogskoven ; and the earl fled
eastward though the forest. King Inge pursued them
all the way out of the kingdom ; and this expedition
turned out a great disgrace to them. So says Kolli : —

I must proclaim how cur great lord
Coloured deep red his ice-cold sword ;

And ravens played with Gotland bones,

7\nd wolves heard Gotlanders’ last groans.

Their silly jests were v^ell repaid, —

In Kroka-skov their laugh was laid;

Thy battle power was then well tried,

And they who won may now deride.”

KINGS OF NOKWAY.

237

Magnus the Blind then went to Denmark to King
Eric Eymund, where he was well received. He
offered the king to follow him if he would invade
Norway with a Danish army, and subdue the coun¬
try; saying, that if he came to Norway with his
army, no man in Norway would venture to throw a
spear against him. The king allowed himself to be
moved by Magnus’s persuasions, ordered a levy, and
went north to Noinvay with 200 ships ; and Magnus
and his men were with him on this expedition. When
they came to Yiken, they proceeded peacefully and
gently on the east side of the fiord ; but when the
fleet came westward to Tunsberg, a great number of
King Inge’s lendermen came against them. Their
leader was Yatn-Orm Dagsson, a brother of Grego¬
rius. The Danes could not land to get water without
many of them being killed ; and therefore they went
in through the fiord to Opslo, where Thiostolf Aleson
opposed them. It is told that some people wanted to
carry the holy Halvard’s coffin out of the toAvn in the
evening when the fleet was first observed, and as
many as could took hold of it; but the coffin became
so heavy that they could not carry it over the church
floor. The morning after, however, when they saw
the fleet sailing in past the Hoved Isle, four men car¬
ried the coffin out of the town, and Thiostolf and all
the townspeople followed it. It was carried to Fors
in Kaumarige, snd was kept there three months.

King Eric and his army advanced against the town ;
and when Thiostolf made a halt outside, Eric’s men
hastened after Thiostolf and his troop ; and one of the
king’s forecastle men, vdio was called Askel, was the
first in the pursuit. Thiostolf threw a spear at him,
which hit him under the throat, so that the spear
point vrent through his neck ; and Thiostolf thought
he had never made a better spear-cast, for, except the
place he hit, there was nothing bare to be seen.

SAGA XIV.

ChA I'TER

III.

King Eric’s
expedition
to Norway.

ClIA n'ER
IV.

The town
of Opslo
burnt.

238

CimONICLE OF THE

saga XIV.

Chapter

V.

Of Sigurd

Slembi-

diakn.

Thiostolf went up to Raumarige, and collected men
during the night, with whom he returned towards
the town in the morning. In the mean time King
Eric set tire to Halyard’s church, and to the town,
which was entirely burnt. Thiostolf came soon after
to the town with the men he had assembled, and Eric
sailed oif with his fleet ; but could not land any where
on that side of the fiord, on account of the troops of
the lendermen who came down against them ; and
wherever they attempted a landing, they left five or
six men or more upon the strand. King Inge, and
his foster-father Amund Gyrdersson, came with a
great number of people into Hornborosund, where
they fought with King Eric, and killed many of his
men ; but he fled, and turned about southwards to Den¬
mark again. King Inge pursued him, and took from
him all the ships he could get hold of ; and it was a
common observation among people, that never was so
poor an expedition made with so great an armament
in another king’s dominions. King Eric was ill
pleased at it, and thought King Magnus and his men
had been making a fool of him by encouraging him to
undertake this expedition, and he declared he woidd
never again be such friends with them as before.

Now we shall continue the account of Harald’s
sons and Sigurd Slembe, according to what has been
told us by a mse and well-informed man, Eric Odds-
son; and this relation was written down from len-
derman Hakon Mage, who was present himself, and
related these events when they were first taken down.
Both he and his sons were in all these expeditions
and all these battles, and knew perfectly all about the
other expeditions.

Sigurd Slembidiakn came that summer from the West
sea to Norway, where he heard of his relation King
Magnus’s unlucky expedition; so he expected no wel¬
come in Norway, but sailed south, outside the rocks.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

239

past the land, and set over to Denmark, and went saga xiv.
into the Sound. He fell in with some Yendland cut¬
ters south of the islands, gave them battle, and gained
the victory. He cleared eight ships, killing many of
the men, and he hanged the others. Sigurd fluttered
about for some time in the South countries, as he
knew there was no help for him in Norway, on
account of the people of Drontheim and of More.

So says Ivar : —

The king from the West
Was by slander oppress’d:

In Drontheim and Mære
His party was bare;

And the bonders combined,

From prejudiced mind.

Against Magnus’s son.

Who all good people won.”

He tells also that when Sigurd withdrew from Nor¬
way he came to the Swedish king’s dominions: —

On the thundering wave
The king’s men brave
Stay-ropes make fast,

’Gainst the wild sea-blast;

Close-reef the sail.

The water bale;

And brisk the yards swing,

While sea and sky ring.

“ By the cold white crest
Of the waves oppressed.

The ship scuds fast
In tlie wdld sea-blast.

The king’s men save
Their ship from the wave.

And on Calmar strand
Their brave king land.”

Then he came to the kingdom of the Danish king,
where he made many of the principal people at the
court his friends, and the king himself among the
first ; as is here related : —

“ He who stains red
The claw and head
Of the eagle race,

W on Eric’s grace.”

240

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XIV. He also had a battle off the island Moen with the
Vendland men, and gained a victory. He then sailed
from the south, and came to the eastern arm of the
Gotha river, and took three ships of the fleet of
Thorer Huinantorda, and Olaf the son of Harald
Kesio, who was Sigurd’s own sister’s son ; for Kagn-
hild, the mother of Olaf, was a daughter of King
Magnus Barefoot. He drove Olaf up the country.
So says Ivar : —

King Sigurd sought.

In fray hard fought
At Gotha strand,

His father’s land.

The arrows flew, —

His spearmen slew ;

And many gave way
On each side that day.”

Tliiostolf was at this time in Konghelle, and had
collected people to defend the country, and Sigurd
steered thither with his fleet. They shot at each
other, but he could not effect a landing ; and, on
both sides, many were killed and many wounded.
Ulfhidin Soxolfsson, Sigurd’s forecastle man, fell
there. He was an Icelander, from the north quarter.
Sigurd continued his course northwards to Viken,
and plundered far and wide around. Kow when
Sigurd lay in a harbour called Portyria on Lungard’s
coast and watched the ships going to or coming
from Viken to plunder them, the Tunsberg men
collected an armed force against him, and came un¬
expectedly upon them while Sigurd and his men were
on shore dividing their booty. Some of the men
came down from the land, but some of the other
party laid themselves with tlieir ships right across
the harbour outside of them. Many of Sigurd’s men
fell there, among whom were Finn Geit and Askel
Smidsson ; but Sigurd ran up into his ship, and

Now Portör, near Krageiö.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

241

rowed out against them. Yatn-Orm’s ship was the
nearest, and he let his ship fall behind the line, and
Sigurd rowed clear past, and thus escaped with one
ship and the loss of many men. This verse was
made upon Y atn-Orm * : —

The water-serpenG people say.

From Portyria slipped away.”

Sigurd Slembidiakn sailed from thence to Den¬
mark ; and at that time a man was lost in his ship,
Avhose name was Kolbein Thorliotsson of Batalderf
in Hadaland. He was sitting in a boat which was
made fast to the vessel, and upset because she was
sailing quickly. When they came south to Denmark,
Sigurd’s ship itself was cast away ; but he got to
Aalburg, and was there in winter. The summer
after Magnus and Sigurd sailed together from the
south with seven ships, and came unexpectedly in the
night to Lister, where they laid their ships on the
land. Beintein Kolbeinsson, a court-man of King
Inge, and a very brave man, was there. Sigurd and
his men jumped on shore at daylight, came unex¬
pectedly on the people, surrounded the house, and
were setting lire to the buildings ; but Beintein came
out of a storehouse with his weapons, well armed, and
stood within the door with drawn sword, his shield
before him, helmet on, and ready to defend himself.
The door was somewhat low. Sigurd asked which
of his lads had most desire to go in against Beintein,
which he called brave man’s work ; but none was very
hurried to make ready for it. Beintein, who heard what
was spoken, said, “ Whoever of you comes shall find
weapons in his way.” It was dark in the store-room,

* Vatn-Orm, the name of this man, means the water-serpent, and
appears to have been a favourite name for war-ships also : hence the
pun in the lines upon Vatn-Orm.

t One of those who murdered King Harald Gille.

VOL. III. R

SAGA XIV.

Chapter

VI.

The mur¬
der of
Beintein.

242

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XIV. and he stood in the door with drawn sword. Sigurd
stood a little way from the door ; and observing that
nobody was very ready to attack, he took his wolf¬
skin coat and wound it around his arm, drew his
sword, and went up to the house. He was in his
shirt, and had nothing upon his head. He rushed
into the house, quick as an arrow, past Beintein.
Beintein struck at him, but missed him. Sigurd
turned instantly on Beintein ; and after exchanging
blows Sigurd gave him his death-stroke, and came
out presently bearing his head in his hands. From
this it may be seen what a sharp, quick, and brave
man he was. Ivar tells of it thus : —

Past Agder steering.

The East Ness clearing,

At Lister meet
Brave Sigurd’s fleet.

His men on shore
The land drive o’er:

Where houses stood
Stands smoking wood.

On the dotted plain
Lie the owners slain.

Red is the sky;

All people fly.

To the forest side
Men run to hide;

But Beintein stood.

And they spilt his blood.”

They took all the goods that were in the farm¬
house, carried the booty to their ships, and sailed
away. When King Inge and his friends, and also
Kolbein’s sons Sigurd and Gyrder the brothers of
Beintein, heard of Beintein's murder, the king sent a
great force against Sigurd Slembe and his followers ;
and also travelled himself, and took a ship from
Hakon Paulsson Pungelt, who was a daughter’s son
of Aslak a son of Erling Skialgsson of Sole, and
cousin of Hakon Mage. King Inge drove Hakon and
his followers up the country, and took all their gear.

KINGS OF NOKWAY.

243

Sigurd Stok, a son of Endrid of Gautdal, and liis saga xiv.
brother Eric Hæl, and Andreas Keldusked, son of
Grim of Ord, all fled away into the fiords. But
Sigurd Slembe, Magnus the Blind, and Thorleif
Skieppe, sailed outside the isles with three ships
north to Halogaland ; and Magnus was in winter
north in Biarko Isle with Yidkun Johnsson. But
Sigurd had the stem and stern-post of his ship cut
out, made a hole in her, and sank her in the inner
part of Egisfiord, and thereafter he passed the winter
at Tialdasund by Glufrafiord in Kinnfielde. Ear up
the fiord there is a cave in the rock : in that place
Sigurd sat with his followers, who were above twenty
men, secretly, and hung a grey cloth before the
mouth of the hole, so that no person could see them
from the strand. Thorleif Skieppe, and Einar son of
Ogmund of Sund, and of Gudrun daughter of Einar
Aresson of Reikiaholm, procured food for Sigurd
during the winter. It is said that Sigurd made the
Laplanders construct two boats for him during the
winter up in the fiord ; and they were fastened toge¬
ther with deer sinews, without nails, and with twigs
of willow instead of knees, and each boat could carry
twelve men. Sigurd was with the Laplanders while
they were making the boats ; and the Laplanders had
good ale, with which they entertained Sigurd. Sigurd
made these lines on it : —

In the Lapland tent
Brave days we spent.

Under the grey birch tree;

In bed or on bank
We knew no rank.

And a merry crew were we.

Good ale went round
As we sat on the ground.

Under the grey birch tree ;

And up with the smoke
Flew laugh and joke,

And a merry crew were we.”

R 2

244

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XIV. These boats were so light that no ship could over-
take them in the water, according to what was sung
at the time : —

Our skin-sewed Fin-boats lightly swim^

Over the sea like wind they skim.

Our ships are built without a nail;

Few ships like ours can row or sail,”

Chapter

VII.

Of Sigurd

Slembe’s

campaign.

In spring Sigurd and Magnus went south along the
coast with the boats which the Laplanders had made ;
and when they came to Yaage they killed Swein the
priest and his two sons.

Thereafter Sigurd came to Yikar, and seized King
Sigurd’s lendermen, William Skinnar and Thorold
Kieft, and killed them both. Then Sigurd turned
southwards along the coast, and met Styrkar Glæse-
rofa south of Byrda, as he was coming from the south
from the town of Nidaros, and killed him. Kow when
Sigurd came south to Yalsnes, he met Swinegrim
outside of the ness, and cut oiF his right hand. From
thence he went south to More, past the mouth of the
Drontheim fiord, where they took Hedin Hirdmaga
and Kalf Kringle-Ouge. They let Hedin escape, but
killed Kalf. When King Sig urd, and his foster-father
Sada-Gyrder, heard of Sigurd Slembidiakn’s proceed¬
ings, and what he was doing, they sent people to search
for him; and their leader was John Kanda, a son of
Kalf y range. Bishop I var’s brother, and besides the
priest John Smyrel. They went on board the ship
the Reindeer, which had twenty-two rowing benches,
and was one of the swiftest sailing vessels, to seek
Sigurd ; but as they could not find him, they returned
northwards with little glory : for people said that they
had got sight of Sigurd and his people, and durst not
attack them. Afterwards Sigurd proceeded southwards
along the coast, doing much mischief every where. He
went south to Hordaland, and came to Herdla, where
Einar a son of Laxe-Paal had a farm ; and went into

KINGS OF NORWAY.

245

Hamar’s fiord, to the Gangdaga-thing.^ They took all
the goods that were at the farm, and a long-ship of
twenty-two benches which belonged to Einar; and also
his son, four years old, who was living with one of his
labouring people. Some wanted to kill the boy, but
others took him and carried him with them. The
labouring man said, “ It will not be lucky for you to
kill the child; and it will be of no use to you to carry
him away, for it is my son, and not Einar’s.’’ And on
his word they let the boy remain, and went away.
When Einar came home he gave the labourer money
to the value of two ore of gold, thanked him for
his clever invention, and promised him his con¬
stant friendship. So says Eric Oddsson, who first
wrote down this relation ; and he heard himself
Einar Paalsson telling these circumstances in Bergen.
Sigurd then went southward along the coast all the
way east to Viken, and met Finn Sauda-Ulfsson
east at Kevelda, as he was engaged in drawing in
King Inge’s rents and duties, and hanged him. Then
they sailed south to Denmark.

The people of Yiken and of Bergen complained that
it was wrong for King Sigurd and his friends to be
sitting quietly north in the town of Nidaros, while
his father’s murderer was cruising about in the ordi¬
nary passage at the mouth of the Drontheim fiord ;
and King Inge and his people, on the other hand,
were in Yiken in the midst of the danger, defend¬
ing the country and holding many battles. Then
King Inge sent a letter north to the merchant-to-wn
Nidaros, in which were these words: ‘‘King Inge
Haraldsson sends his brother King Sigurd, as also
Sada-Gyrder, Ogmund Swipte, Ottar Birking, and all
lendermen, court-men, house-people, and all the

* Gangdaga-thing — a Thing held in the procession days of the
Ascension Week^ two weeks before Whitsuntide.

SAGA XIV.

Chapter
VIII.
Of King
Inge’s
letter to
King Si¬
gurd.

246

CHRONICLE OE THE

SAGA XIV.

Chapter

IX.

Ottar

Birting’s

speech.

PuIdIíc, rich and poor, young and old, his own and
God’s salutation. The misfortune is known to all
men that on account of our childhood — thou being
but five, and I but three years of age^ — we can under¬
take nothing without the counsel of our friends and
other good men. Now I and my men think that we
stand nearer to the danger and necessity common to
us both, than thou and thy friends ; therefore make it
so that thou, as soon as possible, come to me, and as
strong in troops as possible, that we may be assem¬
bled to meet whatever may come. He will be our
best friend who does all he can that we may be united,
and may take an equal part in all things. But if thou
refuse, and wilt not come after this message which I
send thee in need, as thou hast done before, then thou
must expect that I will come against thee mth an
armament: and let God decide between us; for we are
not in a condition to sit here at so great an expense,
and with so numerous a body of troops as are neces¬
sary here on account of the enemy, and besides many
other pressing charges, whilst thou hast all the land-
tax and other revenues of Norway. Live in the peace
of God ! ”

Then Ottar Birting stood up in the Thing, and
first of all answered thus : “ This is Kino; Sio:urd’s
reply to his brother King Inge — that God Avill reward
him for his good salutation, and likewise for the
trouble and burden which he and his friends have in
this kingdom, and in matters of necessity which afiect
them both. Although now some think there is some¬
thing sharp in King Inge’s message to his brother
Sigurd, yet he has in many respects suificient cause
for it. Now I will make known to you my opinion,
and we will hear if King Sigurd and the other people
of power will agree to it; and it is, that thou. King
Sigurd, make thyself ready, with all the people who
will follow tliee, to defend thy country ; and go as

KINGS OF NORWAY.

247

strong in men as possible to thy brother King Inge
as soon as thou art prepared, in order to assist each
other in all things that are for the common good :
and may God Almighty strengthen and assist you
both ! Now, king, we will have thy words.”

Peter, a son of Sauda-Ulf, who was afterwards called
Peter Byrdar- Swend, bore King Sigurd to the Thing.
Then the king said, “Ye must know that, if I am to
advise, I will go as soon as possible to my brother
King Inge.” Then others spoke, one after the other ;
but although each began his speech in his own way,
he ended with agreeing to what Ottar Birting had
proposed; and it was determined to call together the
war-forces, and go to the east part of the country.
King Sigurd accordingly went with a great armament
east to Yiken, and there he met his brother King
Inge.

The same autumn Sigurd Slembe and Magnus the
Blind came from Denmark with thirty ships, manned
both with Danes and Northmen. It was near to
winter. When the kings heard of this, they set out
with their people eastwards to meet them. They
met at Whale Isle, near the Grey Holm^, the day
after Martinmas, which was a Sunday. King Inge
and King Sigurd had twenty ships, which were all
large. There was a great battle ; but, after the first
assault, the Danes fled home to Denmark with eighteen
ships. On this Sigurd’s and Magnus’s ships were
cleared ; and as the last was almost entirely bare of
men, and Magnus was lying in his bed, Hreidar Griot-
gaardsson, who had long followed him, and been his
court-man, took King Magnus in his arms, and tried
to run with him on board some other ship. But
Hreidar was struck by a spear, which went between
his shoulders ; and people say King Magnus was killed

SAGa XIV.

Chapter

X.

Battle at
Holmen.
graa.

* Supposed to be two small isles near Arendal.

R 4

248

CHKONICLE OF THE

SAGA XIV. by the same spear. Hreidar fell backwards upon the
“ deck, and Magnus upon him ; and every man spoke
of how honourably he had followed his master and
rightful sovereign. Happy are they who have such
praise ! There fell, on King Magnus’s ship, Loder Sar-
prud of Linasted, Bruse Thormodsson; and the fore¬
castle-men to Sigurd Slembidiakn, Ivar Kolbeinsson
and Halvert Fæger, who had been in Sigurd Slembe’s
fore-hold. This Ivar had been the first who had gone
in, in the night, to King Harald, and had laid hands on
him. There fell a great number of the men of King
Magnus and Sigurd Slembe, for Inge’s men let not a
single one escape if they got hold of him ; but only a
few are named here. They killed upon a holm more
than forty men, among whom were two Icelanders, —
the priest Sigurd Birgthorsson, a grandson of Mard ;
the other Clemet, a son of Are Einarsson. But three
Icelanders obtained their lives ; namely, Ivar Skrau-
thank, a son of Kalf Vrange, and who afterwards was
bishop of Drontheim, and was father of the arch¬
bishop Eric. Ivar had always followed King Magnus,
and he escaped into his brother John Kande’s ship.
John was married to Cecilia, a daughter of Gyrder
Baardsson, and was then in King Inge’s and Sigurd’s
armament. There were three in all who escaped on
board of John’s ship. The second was Arnbiorn Arnbe,
who afterwards married Thorstein’s daughter in
Andsholt : the third was Ivar Dynte, a son of Storre,
but on the mother’s side of a Drontheim family, — a
very agreeable man. When the troops came to know
that these three were on board his ship, they took
their weapons and assaulted the vessel, and some
blows were exchanged, and the whole fleet had nearly
came to a fight among themselves ; but it came to an
agreement, so that John ransomed his brothers Ivar
and Arnbiorn for a fixed sum in ransom, which, how¬
ever, was afterwards remitted. But Ivar Dynte was

KINGS OF NORWAY.

249

taken to the shore, and beheaded; for Sigurd and
Gyrder, the sons of Kolbein, would not take any
mulct for him, as they knew he had been at their
brother Beintein’s murder. Ivar the bishop said, that
never was there any thing that touched him so nearly,
as Ivar’s going to the shore under the axe, and
turning to the others with the wish that they might
meet in joy hereafter. Gudrid Berg’s daughter,
a sister of Archbishop John, told Eric Oddsson that
she heard Bishop Ivar say this.

A man called Thrand Gialdker was the steersman
of King Inge’s ship. It was come so far, that Inge’s
men were rowing in small boats between the ships
after those who were swimming in the water, and
killed those they could get hold of. Sigurd Slembe
threw himself overboard after his ship had lost her
crew, stripped off his armour under the water, and
then swam with his shield over him. Some men
from Thrand’ s vessel took prisoner a man who was
swimming, and were about to kill him ; but he begged
his life, and offered to tell them where Sigurd Slembe
was, and they agreed to it. Shields and spears, dead
men, weapons, and clothes, were floating all round
on the sea about the ships. “Ye can see,” said he,
“ a red shield floating on the water : he is under it.”
They rowed to it immediately, took him, and brought
liim on board of Thrand’s ship. Thrand then sent a
message to Thiostolf, Ottar, Aasmund, and Gyrder.
Sigurd Slembe had a tinder-box on him, and the
tinder was in a walnut-shell, around which there was
wax. This is related, because it seems an ingenious
way of preserving it from ever getting wet. He swam
with a shield over him, because nobody could know
one shield from another where so many were floating
about ; and they would never have hit upon him, if
they had not been told where he was. When Thrand
came to the land with Sigurd, and it was told to the

SAGA XIV.

Chapter
XL
Sigurd
Slembe
taken pri¬
soner.

250

CHRONICLE OF THE

saga XIV

Chapter
XII.
Tortures
of Sigurd
Slembe.

troops that he was taken, the army set up a shout of
joy. When Sigurd heard it he said, “ Many a bad
man will rejoice over my head this day.’’ Then
Thiostolf Aleson went to where Sigurd was sitting,
struck from his head a silk hat edged with silver
fringes, and said, “ Why wert thou so impudent, thou
son of a slave ! to dare to call thyself King Magnus
Barefoot’s son ?”

Sigurd replied, “ Presume not to compare my
father to a slave ; for thy father was of little worth
compared to mine.”

Hall, a son of the doctor Thorgeir Steinsson, King
Inge’s court-man, was present at this circumstance,
and told it to Eric Oddsson, who afterwards Wrote these
relations in a book, which he called “ Back Pieces.”
In this book is told all concerning Harald Gille and
his sons, and Magnus the Blind, and Sigurd Slembi-
diakn, until their deaths. Eric was a sensible man,
who was long in Norway about that time. Some of
his narratives he wrote down from Hakon Mage’s
account ; some were from the lendermen of Harald’ s
sons, who along with his sons were in all this feud,
and in all the councils. Eric names, moreover, several
men of understanding and veracity, who told him
these accounts, and were so near that they saw or
heard all that happened. Something he wrote from
what he himself had heard or seen.

Hall says that the chiefs wished to have Sigurd
killed instantly; but the men who were the most
cruel, and thought they had injuries to avenge, ad¬
vised torturing him ; and for this they named Beiii-
tein’s brothers, Sigurd and Gyrder the sons of Kolbein.
Peter Byrdar-Swend would also avenge his brother
Finn. But the chiefs and the greater part of the
people went away. They broke his shin-bones and
arms with an axe-hammer. Then they stripped him,
and would flay him alive ; but when they tried to

KINGS OF NOEWAY,

251

take off the skin, they .could not do it for the gush
of blood. They took leather whips and flogged him
so long, that the skin was as much taken off as if
he had been flayed. Then they stuck a piece of
wood in his back until it broke, dragged him to a
tree and hanged him; and then cut off his head,
and brought the body and head to a heap of stones
and buried them there. All acknowledo^e, both
enemies and friends, that no man in Norway, within
memory of the living, was more gifted with all per¬
fections, or more experienced, than Sigurd; but in
some respects he was an unlucky man. Hall says
that he spoke little, and answered only a fev^, and in
single words, under his tortures, although they spoke
to him. Hall says further, that he never moved
Avhen they tortured him, more than if they were
striking a stock or a stone. This Hall alleged as a
proof that he was a brave hero, who had courage to
endure tortures; for he still held his tongue, and
never moved from the spot. And farther, he says
that he never altered his voice in the least, but spoke
with as much ease as if he was sitting at the ale-table ;
neither speaking higher nor lower, nor in a more tre¬
mulous voice than he was used to do. He spoke
until he gave up the ghost, and sang between whiles
parts of the Psalm-book, and which Hall considered
beyond the powers and strength of ordinary men. And
the priest who had the church in the neighbourhood let
Sigurd’s body be transported thither to the church.
This priest was a friend of Harald’s sons ; but when
they heard it they were angry at him, had the body
carried back to where it had been, and made the priest
pay a fine. Sigurd’s friends afterwards came from
Denmark with a ship for his body, carried it to
Aalburg, and interred it in Mary church in that
town. So said Dean Ketil, who officiated as priest
at Mary church, to Eric ; and that Sigurd was buried

SAGA XIV.

252

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XIV.

Chapter

XIII.

Eystein
Haraldsson
comes to
Norway ;
and the be¬
ginning of
Magnus
Haraldsson.

there. Thiostolf Aleson transported Magnus the
Blind’s body to Opslo, and buried it in Halyard’s
church, beside King Sigurd his father. Lodin Sar-
prud, Thorleif Bryniolfsson, and Kolbein were trans¬
ported to Tunsberg; but the others of the slain were
buried on the spot.

When the kings Sigurd and Inge had ruled over
Norway about six years, Eystein, who was a son of
Harald Gille, came in spring from Scotland. Arne
Sturleson, Thorleif Bryniolfsson, and Kolbein Kuge
had sailed westward over the sea after Eystein, ac¬
companied him to Norway, and sailed immediately
with him to Drontheim. The Drontheim people re¬
ceived him well; and at the Ore-thing of Ascension-
day he was chosen king, so that he should have the
third part of Norway with his brothers Sigurd and
Inge. They were at this time in the east part of the
country ; and men went between the kings who
brought about a peace, and that Eystein should have
a third part of the kingdom. People believed what
he said of his paternal descent, because King Harald
himself had testified to it. King Eystein’ s mother
was called Biadauk, and she followed him to Norway.
Magnus was the name of King Harald Gille’ s fourth
son, who was fostered by Orm Kyrping. He also
was chosen king, and got a fourth part of the country;
but Magnus was deformed in his feet, lived but a
short time, and died in his bed. Einar Skuleson
speaks of them : —

The generous Eystein money gave;

Sigurd in fight was quick and brave;

Inge loved well the war-alarm;

Magnus to save his land from harm.

No country boasts a nobler race

The battle-fiekh or Things to grace.

Four brothers of such high pretence

The sun ne’er shone upon at once.”

KINGS OF NOEWAY.

253

After King Harald Gille’s death, Queen Ingerid
married Ottar Birting, who was a lenderman and a
great chief, and of a Drontheim family, who strength¬
ened King Inge’s government much while he was in
his childhood. King Sigurd was not very friendly to
Ottar ; because, as he thought, Ottar always took King
Inge’s side. Ottar Birting was killed north in the
merchant town (Nidaros), in an assault upon him in
the twilight as he was going to the evening song.
When he heard the whistling of the blow he held up
his cloak with his hands against it ; thinking, no doubt,
it was a snowball thrown at him, as young boys do
in the streets. Ottar fell by the stroke ; but his son,
Alf Bode, who just at the same moment was coming
into the church-yard, saw his father’s fall, and saw
that the man who had killed him ran east about the
church. Alf ran after him, and killed him at the
corner of the choir ; and people said that he had good
luck in avenging his father, and afterwards was much
more respected than he had been before.

King Eystein Haraldsson was in the interior of the
Drontheim district when he heard of Ottar’s murder,
and summoned to him the bonder-army, with which
he proceeded to the town; and he had many men.
Ottar’s relations and other friends accused King Sigurd,
who was in the town, of having instigated this deed ;
and the bonders were much enraged against him.
But the king offered to clear himself by the ordeal
of iron, and thereby to establish the truth of his
denial ; and accordingly a peace was made. King
Sigurd went to the south end of the country, and the
ordeal was never afterwards heard of.

Queen Ingerid had a son to Ivar Snees, and he
was called Orm, and got the surname of King-brother.
He was a handsome man in appearance, and became a
great chief, as shall be told hereafter. Ingerid after¬
wards married Arne of Stodreim, who was from this

SAGA XIV.

Chapter

XIV.
Murder
of Ottar
Birting.

Chapter

XV.

Beginning
of King
Eystein
Haralds¬
son.

Chapter
XVI.
Beginning
of Orm the
King-bro¬
ther.

254

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XIV.

Chapter
XVII.
Journey of
Erling
Skakke and
Earl Rogn-
vald to
foreign
parts.

called King’s-mate ; and their children were Inge,
Nicolas, Philip of Hendsla, and Margaret, who was
first married to Biorn Buk, and afterwards to Siinun
Kaaresson.

Orm Kyrping, and Bagnhild a daughter of Sweinke
Steinarsson, had a son called Erling. Orm Kyrping
was a son of Swend Swendsson, who was a son of
Erling of Gerde. Orm’s mother was Ragnhild, a
daughter of Earl Hakon the Great. Erling was a
man of understanding, and a great friend of King
Inge, by whose assistance and counsel Erling obtained
in marriage Christina, a daughter of King Sigurd the
Crusader and Queen Malmfrid. Erling possessed a
farm at Staudla in South Hordaland. Erling left the
country; and with him went Endrid Unge and several
lendermen, who had chosen men with them. They
intended to make a pilgrimage to Jerusalem, and
went across the West sea to Orkney. There Earl
Eognvald and Bishop William joined them; and they
had in all fifteen ships from Orkney, with which they
first sailed to the South Hebudæ, from thence west
to Valland, and then the same way King Sigurd the
Crusader had sailed to Norvasund^; and they plun¬
dered all round in the heathen part of Spain. Soon
after they had sailed through the Norvasund, Endric
Unge and his followers, with six ships, separated from
them ; and then each was for himself. Earl Eognvald
and Erling Skakke fell in with a large ship of burden
at sea called a dromundf, and gave battle to it with
nine ships. At last they laid their cutters close under
the dromund ; but the heathens threAV both weapons

* The Straits of Gibraltar.

t Dromund was the name of a large class of merchant vessels in the
Mediterranean in the middle ages. The dromund appears to have
been a ship with three masts. The name is derived from the Greek,
and is of the same root as Hippodromos, and refers to its swiftness, or
its long course — dromos. Vide Spelman, Glos.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

255

and stones, and pots full of pitch and boiling oil.
Erling laid his ship so close under the dromund, that
the missiles of the heathens fell without his ship.
Then Erling and his men cut a hole in the dromund,
some working below and some above the water-mark;
and so they boarded the vessel through it. So says
Thorbiorn Skakkescald, in his poem on Erling : —

“ The axes of the Northmen hold
A door into the huge ship’s hold
Hewed through her high and curved side^

As snug beneath her bulge they ride.

Their spears bring down the astonished foe.

Who cannot see from whence the blow.

The eagle’s prey, they, man by man.

Fall by the Northmen’s daring plan.”

Audin, Eode Erling’s forecastle-man, was tbe first
man who got into the dromund. Then they carried
her, killing an immense number of people ; making an
extraordinarily valuable booty, and gaining a famous
victory. Earl Eognvald and Erling Skakke came to
Palestine in the course of their expedition, and all
the way to the river Jordan. Erom thence they
went first to Constantinople, where they left their
ships, travelled northwards by land, and arrived in
safety in Norway, where their journey was highly
praised. Erling appeared now a much greater man
than before, both on account of his journey and of
his marriage ; besides he was a prudent sensible man,
rich, of great family, eloquent, and devoted to King
Inge by the strictest friendship more than to the
other royal brothers.

King Sigurd went to a feast east in Yiken along
with his court, and rode past a house belonging to a
great bonder called Simun. While the king was
riding past the house, he heard within such beautiful
singing that he was quite enchanted with it, and rode
up to the house, and saw a lovely girl standing at
the handmill and grinding. The king got off his

SAGA XIV.

Chapter
XVIII.
Birth of
Hakon
Herdabred.

256

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XIV.

Chapter
XIX.
Of Eystein
and the
peasants of
Hisingisle.

Chapter
XX.
The war
expedition
of King

horse, and went to the girl and courted her. When
the king went away, the bonder Simun came to know
what the object of the king’s visit had been. The
girl was called Thora, and she was Simun the bon¬
der’s servant-girl. Simun took good care of her
afterwards, and the girl brought forth a male child,
who was called Hakon, and was considered King
Sigurd’s son. Hakon was brought up by Simun
Thorbergsson and his wife Gunhild. Their own sons
also, Simun, Onund, and Andreas, were brought up
with Hakon, and were so dear to him that death only
could have parted them.

While King Eystein Haraldsson was in Yiken, he
fell into disputes with the bonders of Keine and the
inhabitants of Hising Isle, who assembled to oppose
him ; but he gave them battle at a place called Leik-
berg, and afterwards burnt and destroyed all around
in Hising ; so that the bonders submitted to his will,
paid great fines to the king, and he took hostages
from them. So says Einar Skuleson : —

The Viken men
Wont strive again^

With words or blows.

The king to oppose.

None safety found
On Viken’s ground,

Till all, afraid.

Pledge and scatt paid.”

And further: —

The king came near;

He who is dear
To all good men
Came down the glen.

By Leikberg hill.

They who do ill.

The Reine folk, fly.

Or quarter cry.”

Soon after King Eystein began his journey out of
the country over sea to the W est, and sailed first to
Caithness. Here he heard that Earl Harald Mad-

KINGS' OF NOWAY.

257

dad’s son was in Thurso, to which he sailed directly in
three small boats. The earl had a ship of thirty
banks of oars, and nearly eighty men in her. But
they were not prepared to make resistance, so that
King Ey stein was able to board the ship with his
men ; and he took the earl prisoner, and carried him
to his own ship, but the earl ransomed himself with
three marks of gold : and thus the}^ parted. Einar
Skuleson tells of it thus ; —

Earl Harald in his stout ship lay
On the bright sand in Thurso bay;

With fourscore men he had no fear.

Nor thought the Norse king was so near.

He who provides the eagle’s meals
In three small boats along-shore steals;

And Maddad’s son must ransom pay
For his bad outlook that fair day.”

From thence King Eystein sailed south along the
east side of Scotland, and brought up at a merchant-
town in Scotland called Aberdeen*, where he killed
many people, and plundered the town. So says Einar
Skuleson : —

At Aberdeen, too, 1 am told.

Fell many by our Norsemen bold ;

Peace was disturbed, and blue swords broke
With many a hard and bloody stroke.”

The next battle was at Hartlepool f in the south,
with a party of horsemen. The king put them to
flight, and seized some ships there. So says Einar: —

At Flartlepool, in rank and row,

The king’s court-men attack the foe.

The king’s sharp sword in blood was red.

Blood dropped from every Norse spear-head.

Ravens rejoice o’er the warm food
Of English slain, each where he stood;

And in the ships their thirst was quenched:

The decks were in the foe’s blood drenched.”

Then he went southwards to England, and had

SAGA XIV

Eystein

Haralds-

son.

* Apardion is Aberdeen.
VOL. III.

S

I Hiartapoll — Hartlepool.

258

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XIV. his third battle at Whitby"^, and gained the victory,
and burned the town. So says Einar : —

“ The ring of swords^ the clash of shields,

Were loud in Whitby’s peaceful fields ;

For here the king stirred up the strife, —

Man against man, for death or life.

O’er roof and tower, rose on high
The red wrath-fire in the sky:

House after house the red fiend burns ;

By blackened walls the poor man mourns.”

Thereafter he plundered wide around in England,
where Stephen "j" was then the king. After this King
Eystein fought with some cavalry at Skarpa-sker. J So
says Einar : —

At Skarpa-sker the English horse
Retire before the Norse king’s force:

The arrow-shower like snow-drift fiew.

And the shield- covered foemen slew.”

He fought next at Pilavik§, and gained the vic¬
tory. So says Einar : —

At Pilavik the wild wolf feeds.

Well furnished by the king’s brave deeds:

He poured upon the grass-green plain
A red shower from the Perthmen || slain.

On westward to the sea he urges.

With fire and sword the country purges:

Langtown^ he burns; the country rang,

For sword on shield incessant clang.”

* Hvitaby — ^Vhitby. The king is stated to have gone south to
England from Hartlepool. The Saxonland appears to be distinguished
from the kingdom of Northumberland, occupied by people of Danish
descent under Danish law, and to be England proper in the saga.

Stephen reigned from 1136 to October 1154. Torfæus, in Hist.
Norv. pt. hi. lib. 9* * * § c* 10., places this, the last of the predatory expedi¬
tions of the kings of the Northmen on the English coast, in 1153.

J Skarpa-sker — the steep rock — is apparently Scarborough castle,
which answers to the name by its site.

§ Pilavik is not known, unless it be Wei wick or Balivick, two
places of which names are situated near the Spurn Head ; or it may be
Filey Bay, south of Scarborough.

II How men from Perth came to fight at Pilavik is not at all clear.

^ Langatun seems, from the scald’s allusion to the Western sea, to
be Langtown, near Carlisle; not a place in Lincolnshire near Boston, as
Schöning supposes.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

259

Here they burnt Lan^atun, a laro-e villao:e : and

K/ 0/00^

people say that the town has never since risen to its
former condition. After this King Eystein left Eng¬
land in autumn, and returned to Norway. People
spoke in various ways about this expedition.

There was good peace maintained in Norway in the
first years of the government of Elarald’s sons ; and
as long as their old counsellors were alive, there was
some kind of unanimity among them. While Inge
and Sigurd were in their childhood, they had a court
together ; but Eystein, who was come to age of discre¬
tion, had a court for himself. But when Inge’s and Si¬
gurd’s counsellors were dead, — namely, Sada Gyrder
Baardsson, Ottar Byrting, Amund Gyrdersson, Thio-
stolf Ales on, Ogmund Swipter, and Ogmund Dreng
a brother of Erling Skakke (Erling was not much
looked up to while Ogmund lived), — the two kings
Inge and Sigurd divided their courts. King Inge
then got great assistance from Gregorius Dagsson, a
son of Dag Eilifsson by Ragnhild a daughter of
Skopte Ogmundsson. Gregorius had much property,
and was himself a thriving, sagacious man. Tie
presided in the governing the country under King
Inge, and the king allowed him to manage his pro¬
perty for him according to his own judgment.

When King Sigurd grew up he was a very ungo¬
vernable, restless man in every way ; and so was King
Eystein, but Eystein was the more reasonable of the
two. King Sigurd was a stout and strong man, of a
brisk appearance ; he had light brown hair, an ugly
mouth ; but otherwise a well- shaped countenance. He
was polite in his conversation beyond any man, and
was expert in all exercises. Einar Skuleson speaks
of this : —

Sigurct expert in every way
To wield the sword in bloody fray.

Showed well that to the bold and brave
God always luck and vict’ry gave.

s 2

SAGA XIV.

ClIAI’TEa

XXI.
Of Ila-
rald’s son?.

ClIAPTEa

XXII.
Of the
habits and
manners of
Haiald’s
sons.

260

CHRONICLE or THE

SAGA XIV. In speech^ as well as bloody deeds_,

- - The king all other men exceeds ;

And when he speaks we think that none
Has said a word but he alone.”

King Ey stein was dark and dingy in complexion,
of middle height, and a prudent able man ; but what
deprived him of consideration and popularity with
those under him were his avarice and narromiess. He
was married to Kagna, a daughter of Nicolas Masa.
King Inge was the handsomest among them in coun¬
tenance. He had yellow but rather thin hair, which
was much curled. His stature was small ; and he had
difficulty in walking alone, because he had one foot
withered, and he had a hump both on his back and
his breast. He was of cheerful conversation, and
friendly towards his friends ; was generous, and al¬
lowed other chiefs to give him counsel in governing
the country. He was popular, therefore, with the
public ; and all this brought the kingdom and the
mass of the people on his side. King Harald Gille’s
daughter Brigitta was first married to the Swedish
king Inge Halsteinsson, and afterwards to Earl Karl
of Gotland, and then to the Swedish king Magnus.
She and King Inge Haraldsson were cousins by
the mother’s side. At last Brigitta married Earl
Birger Brose, and they had four sons ; namely,
Earl Philip, Earl Canute, Eolke, and Magnus. Their
daughters were Ingigerd, who was married to the
Swedish king Særkver, and their son was King John ;
a second daughter was called Christina, and a third
Margaret. Harald Gille’s second daughter was called
Maria, who was married to Siniun Skalp, a son of
Halkel Huk ; and their son was called Nicolas. Kina'

o

Harald Gille’s third daughter was called Margaret,
who was married to John Halkesson, a brother of
Simun. Now many things occurred between the
brothers which occasioned differences and disputes ;

KINGS OF NORWAY.

261

but I will only relate what appears to me to have
j)roducecl the more important events.

In the days of Harald’s sons Cardinal Nicolas came
from Eome to Norway, being sent there by the pope.
The cardinal had taken offence at the brothers
Sigurd and Ey stein, and they were obliged to come
to a reconciliation with him ; but, on the other hand,
he stood on the most affectionate terms with Kins’
Inge, whom he called his son. Now when they were
all reconciled with him, he moved them to let John
Birgisson be consecrated archbishop of Drontheim,
and gave him a vestment which is called a pallium ;
and settled moreover that the archbishop^ s seat should
be in Nidaros, in Christ church, where King Olaf the
Saint reposes. Before that time there had only been
common bishops in Norway. The cardinal introduced
also the law, that no man should go un]3unished who
appeared with arms in the merchant-town, excepting
the twelve men who were in attendance on the kins.

o

He improved many of the customs of the Northmen
while he was in the country. There never came a
foreigner to Norway whom all men respected so
highly, or who could govern the. people so well as he
did. After some time he returned to the South with
many friendly presents, and declared ever afterwards
that he was the greatest friend of the people of Nor¬
way. When he came south to Koine the former pope
died suddenly, and all the people of Koine would have
Cardinal Nicolas for pope, and he was consecrated
under the name of Adrian ; and according to the
report of men who went to Koine in his days, he
had never any business, however important, to settle
with other people, but he would break it off to speak
with the Northmen who desired to see him. He was
not long pope, and is now considered a saint.

* This cardinal was Nicholas Breakspear, an Englishman., from
St. Alban’s monastery ; afterwards Pope Adrian IV.

S 8

SAGA XIV.

Chapter,
XXIII.
Cardinal
Nicolas
comes to
the country.

262

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XIV.

Chaptes,
XXIV.
Miracle of
King Olaf.

Chapter
XXV.
Miracle of
King Olaf
on Richard.

In the time of Harald Gille’s sons, it happened that
a man called Haldor fell into the hands of the Yend-
land people, who took him and mutilated him, cut
open his neck, took out the tongue through the open¬
ing, and cut out his tongue-root. He afterwards
sought out the holy King Olaf, fixed his mind entirely
on the holy man, and weeping besought King Olaf to
restore his speech and health. Thereupon he imme¬
diately recovered his speech by the good king’s com¬
passion, went immediately into his service for all his
life, and became an excellent trustworthy man. This
miracle took place a fortnight before the last Olafs-
mas, upon the day that Cardinal Nicolas set foot on
the land of Norway.

In the Uplands were two brothers, men of great
family, and men of fortune, Einar and Andreas, sons
of Guttorm Graabard, and brothers of King Sigurd
Haraldsson’s mother ; and they had great properties
and udal estates in that quarter. They had a sister
who was very bandsome, but did not pay suificient
regard to the scandal of evil persons, as it afterwards
appeared. She was on a friendly footing with an
English priest called Richard, who had a welcome to
the house of her brothers, and on account of their
friendship for him she did many things to please him,
and often to his advantage; but the end of all this
was, that an ugly report flew about concerning this
girl. When this came into the mouth of the public,
all men threw the blame on the priest. Her brothers
did the same, and expressed publicly, as soon as they
observed it, that they laid the blame most on him.
The great friendship that was between the girl and
the priest proved a great misfortune to both, which
might have been expected, as the brothers were silent
about their secret determination, and let nothiuir be
observed. But one day they called the priest totliem,
who went, expecting nothing but good from them ;

KINGS OF NORWAY.

263

enticed him from home with them, saying that they saga xiv.
intended to go to another district, where they had
some needful business, and inviting him to go with
them. They had with them a farm-servant who knew
their purpose. They went in a boat along the shore
of a lake which is called Eands lake, and landed at a
ness called Skiftesand, where they went on shore, and
amused themselves a while. Then they went to a
retired place, and commanded their servant-man to
strike the priest with an axe-hammer. He struck the
priest so hard that he swooned ; but when he recovered
he said, Why are ye playing so roughly with me?”

They replied, “ Although nobody has told thee of it
before, thou shalt now find the consequence of what
thou hast done.” They then upbraided him ; but he
denied their accusations, and besought God and the
holy King Olaf to judge between them. Then they
broke his leg-bones, and dragged him bound to the
forest with them ; and then they put a string around
his head, and put a board under his head and
shoulders, and made a knot on the string, and bound
his head fast to the board. Then the elder brother,

Einar, took a wedge, and put it on the priest’s eye,
and the servant who stood beside him struck upon it
with an axe, so that the eye flew out, and fell upon
the board. Then he set the pin upon the other eye,
and said to the servant, “ Strike now more softly.” He
did so, and the wedge sprang from the eye-stone, and
tore the eyelid loose. Then Einar took up the eye¬
lid in his hand, and saw that the eye-stone was still
in its place ; and he set the wedge on the cheek, and
when the servant struck it the eye-stone sprang out
upon the cheek-bone. Thereafter they opened his
mouth, took his tongue and cut it off, and then untied
his hands and his head. As soon as he came to him¬
self, he thought of laying the eye-stones in their place
under the eyelids, and pressing them with both hands

s 4

264

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XIV. as much as he could. Then they carried him on hoard,
and went to a farm called Sæhiemrod, where they
landed. They sent up to the farm to say that a priest
was lying in the boat at the shore. While the message
was going to the farm, they asked the priest if he
could talk; and he made a noise, and attempted to
speak. Then said Einar to his brother, “ If he recover
and the stump of his tongue grow, I am afraid he will
get his speech again.” Thereupon they seized the
stump with a pair of tongs, drew it out, cut it twice,
and the third time to the very roots, and left him lying
half dead. The housewife in the farm was poor ; but
she hastened to the place with her daughter, and they
carried the priest home to their farm in their cloaks.
They then brought a priest, and when he arrived he
bound all his wounds ; and they attended to his com¬
fort as much as they were able. And thus lay the
wounded priest grievously handled, but trusting
alway to God’s grace, and never doubting; and
although he was speechless, he prayed to God in
thought with a sorrowful mind, but with the more
confidence the worse he was. He turned his thoughts
also to the mild King Olaf the Saint, God’s dear
favourite, of whose excellent deeds he had heard so
much told, and trusted so much more zealously on
him with all his heart for help in his necessity. As
he lay there lame, and deprived of all strength, he
wept bitterly, moaned, and prayed with a sore heart
that the dear King Olaf would help him. Kowwhen
this wounded priest was sleeping after midnight, he
thought he saw a gallant man coming to him, who
spoke these words, ‘‘ Thou art ill off, friend Eichard,
and thy strength is little.” He thought he replied to
this assentingly. Then the man accosted him again,
“Thou requirest compassion?” The priest replies,
“ I need the compassion of Almighty God and the
holy King Olaf.” He answered, “ Thou shalt get it.”
1 hereupon he pulled the tongue-stump so hard that

KINGS OF NORWAY.

265

it gave the priest pain; then he stroked with his
hands his eyes, and legs, and other wounded members.
Then the priest asked who he was. He looked at
him, and said, “ Olaf, come here from Drontheim
and then disappeared. But the priest awoke altogether
sound, and thus he spoke: “ Happy am I, and thanks
be to the Almighty God and the holy King Olaf, who
have restored me ! ’’ Dreadfully mishandled as he had
been, yet so quickly was he restored from his mis¬
fortune that he scarcely thought he had been wounded
or sick. His tongue was entire ; both his eyes were
in their places, and were clear-sighted ; his broken
legs and every other wound were healed, or were free
from pain ; and, in short, he had got perfect health.
But as a proof that his eyes had been punched out,
there remained a white scar on each eyelid, in order
that this dear king’s excellence might be manifest on
the man who had been so dreadfully misused.

King Ey stein and King Sigurd had quarrelled,
because King Sigurd had killed King Eystein’s
courtman Harald, the Yiken man, who owned a
house in Bergen, and also the priest John Tabardsson
and Biorne Sigurdsson. On account of this affair,
a conference to settle it was appointed in Avinter
in the Uplands. The two sat together in the con¬
ference for a long time, and so much was known
of their conference that all the three brothers were
to meet the following summer in Bergen. It was
added, that their conference was to the effect that
King Inge should have two or three farms, and as
much income as would keep thirty men beside him,
as he had not health to be a king. When King Inge
and Gregorius heard this report, they came to Bergen
mth many followers. King Sigurd arrived there a

These two chapters, XXIV. and XXV., are considered by Schöning
1 an interpolation, not being in any manuscript, althougli found in
‘ Peringskiold’s edition of Snorro’s work.

SAGA XIV.

Chapter,
XXVI.
The Kings
Inge and
Sigurd
hold a
Thing in
the Holm.

266

CHRONICLE OE THE

SAGA XÍV.

Chapter
XXVII.
Of Gre¬
gorius
Dagsson.

little later, and was not nearly so strong in men.
Sigurd and Inge liad then been nineteen years kings of
Norway. King Ey stein came later still from the south
than the other two from the north. Then King Inge
ordered the Thing to be called together on the holm
by sound of trumpet ; and Sigurd and Inge came to
it with a great many people. Gregorius had two
long-ships, and at the least ninety men, whom he
kept in provisions. He kept his house-men better
than other lender men ; for he never took part in
any entertainment where each guest brings his liquor,
without having all his house-men to drink with him.
He went now to the Thing in a gold-mounted helmet,
and all his men had helmets on. Then King Inge
stood up, and told the assembly what he had heard ;
how his brothers were going to use him, and depose
him from his kingdom; and asked for their assistance.
The assembled people made a good return to his
speech, and declared they would follow him.

Then King Sigurd stood up and said, it was a false
accusation that King Inge had made against him and
his brother, and insisted that Gregorius had invented
it ; and insinuated that it would not be long, if he
had his will, before they should meet so that the
golden helmet should be doffed ; and ended his speech
by hinting that they could not both live. Gregorius
replied, that Sigurd need not long so much for this, as
he was ready now, if it must be so. A few days after,
one of Gregorius’s house-men was killed out upon the
street, and it was Sigurd’s house-men who killed him.
Gregorius would then have fallen upon King Sigurd
and his people ; but King Inge, and many others, kept
him back. But one evening, just as Queen Ingigercl,
King Inge’s mother, was coming from vespers, she
came past where Sigurd Skrudhyrne, a court-man of
King Inge, ^“^v murdered. He was then an old man,
and had serveu many kings. King Sigurd’s court-

KINGS OF NORWAY.

267

men, Halyard Gumiarsson, and Sigurd a son of saga xiv.
Eystein Tropola, had killed him ; and people sus¬
pected it was done by order of King Sigurd. She
Avent immediately to King Inge, and told him he
would be a little king if he took no concern, but
alloAved his court-men to be killed, the one after the
other, like swine. The king Avas angry at her speech ;
and Avhile they Avere scolding about it, came Gre¬
gorius in helmet and armour, and told the king not
to be angry, for she was only saying the truth. “And
I am noAY,’’ says he, “ come to thy assistance, if thou
Avilt attack King Sigurd ; and here Ave are, above 100
men in helmets and armour, and Avith them Ave will at¬
tack Avhere others think the attack may be Avorst.’’ But
the most dissuaded from this course, thinking that Si¬
gurd Avould pay the mulct for the slaughter done. Koav
when Gregorius saAV that there Avould be no assault,
he accosted King Inge thus : “ Thou Avilt frighten thy
men from thee in this Avay ; for first they lately killed
my house- man, and now thy court-man, and after-
Avards they will chase me, or some other of thy len-
dermen whom thou wouldst feel the loss of, Avhen
they see that thou art indifferent about such things ;

I and at last, after thy friends are killed, they will take
j the royal dignity from thee. Whatever thy other
lenderrnen may do, I will not stay here longer to be
slaughtered like an ox ; but Sigurd the king and I
haA^e a business to settle Avith each other to-night, in
Avhatever Avay it may turn out. It is true that there
is but little help in thee on account of thy ill health,
but I should think thy Avill should not be less to hold
thy hand OA^er thy friends, and I am noAV quite ready
to go from hence to meet Sigurd, and my banner is
flying in the yard.”

Then King Inge stood up, and called for his arms,
and ordered every man Avho Avished to folloAV him to
1 get ready, declaring it Avas of no use to try to dissuade

I

268

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XÍV.

Chapter

xxvin.

Of King

Sigurd’s

fall.

him ; for he had long enough avoided this, but now
steel must determine between them.

King Sigurd sat and drank in Sigrid Sæle’s house
ready for battle, although people thought it would
not come to an assault at all. Then came King Inge
with his men down the road from the smithy shops
against the house. Arne, the king’s brother-in-law,
came out from the Sand-bridge, Aslak Erlendsson
from his own house, and Gregorius from the street
where all thought the assault would be worst. King
Sigurd and his men made many shots from the holes
in the loft, broke down the fireplaces, and threw
stones on them. Gregorius and his men cut down
the gates of the yard ; and there in the port fell
Einar, a son of Eaxe Paal, who was of Sigurd’s
people, together with Halvard Gunnarsson, who was
shot in a loft, and nobody lamented his death. They
hewed down the houses, and many of King Sigurd’s
men left him, and surrendered for quarter. Then
King Sigurd went up into a loft, and desired to be
heard. He had a gilt shield, by which they knew him ;
but they would not listen to him, and shot arrows at
him as thick as snow in a snow- shower, so that he
could not stay there. As his men had now left him,
and the houses were being hewn down, he went out
from thence, and with him his court-man Thord
Husfreya from Yiken. They wanted to come where
King Inge was to be found; and Sigurd called to his
brother King Inge, and begged him to grant him life
and safety; but both Thord and Sigurd were instantly
killed, and Thord fell with great glory. King Sigurd
was interred in the old Christ church out on the
holm. King Inge gave Gregorius the ship King
Sigurd had owned. There fell many of King Sigurd’s
and King Inge’s men, although I only name a few ;
but of Gregorius’s men there fell four ; and also some
who belonged to no party, but were shot on the piers.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

269

or out in the ships. It was fought on a Friday, and
fourteen days before Saint John the Baptist’s day.
Two or three days after, King Ey stein came from the
eastward with thirty ships, and had along with him
his brother’s son Hakon, a son of King Sigurd. Ey-
stein did not come up to the town, but lay in Flore-
vaag, and good men went between to get a recon¬
ciliation made. But Gregorius wanted that they should
go out against him, thinking there never would be a
better opportunity ; and offered to be himself the
leader. “For thou, king, shaltnotgo, for we have no
want of men.” But many dissuaded from this course,
and it came to nothing. King Eystein returned
back to Viken, and King Inge to Drontheim, and they
were in a sort reconciled ; but they did not meet each
other.

Somewhat later than King Eystein, Gregorius Dags-
son also set out to the eastward, and came to his
farm Bratsberg in Hafund ; but King Eystein was up
in the fiord at Opslo, and had his ships drawn above
two miles over the frozen sea, for there was much ice
at that time in Yiken. King Eystein went up to
Hafund to take Gregorius ; but he got news of what
was on foot, and escaped to Telemark Avith ninety
men, from thence over the Fielde, and came doAvn in
Hardanger ; and at last to Stodla in Etne, to Erling
Skakke’s farm. Erling himself had gone north to
Bergen ; but his wife Christina, a daughter of King
Sigurd, was at home, and offered Gregorius all the
assistance he wanted ; and he was hospitably received.
He got a long-ship there which belonged to Erling,
and every thing else he required. Gregorius thanked
her kindly, and allowed that she had behaved nobly,
and as might have been expected of her. Gregorius
then proceeded to Bergen, where he met Erling, who
thought also that his wife had done Avell.

SAGA XIV,

Chapter,
XXIX.
Of Gre¬
gorius
Dagsscn.

270

CHRONICLE OE THE

SAGA XIV.

Chapter
XXX.
Reconcilia¬
tion of the
Kings
Ey stein
and Inge.

Then Gregorius went north to Drontheim, and
came there before Yule. King Inge was rejoiced at
his safety, and told him to use his property as freely
as his own, King Eystein having burnt Gregorius’s
house, and slaughtered his stock of cattle. The ship-
docks which King Eystein the Elder had constructed
in the merchant town of Nidaros, and which had been
exceedingly expensive, were also burnt this winter,
toofether with some ^ood vessels belonmns; to Kino'
Inge. This deed was ascribed to King Eystein and
Philippus Gyrdersson, King Sigurd’s foster-brother,
and occasioned much displeasure and hatred. The
following summer King Inge went south with a very
numerous body of men ; and King Eystein came
northwards, gathering men also. They met in the
east at the Sæl Isles, near to the Naze; but King Inge
was by far the strongest in men. It was nearly
coming to a battle ; but at last they were reconciled
on these conditions, — that King Eystein should be
bound to pay forty-five marks of gold, of which King
Inge should have thirty marks, because King Eystein
had occasioned the burning of the docks and ships ;
and, besides, that Philippus, and all who had been
accomplices in the deed, should be outlawed. Also
that the men should be banished the country, against
whom it could be proved that they gave blow or
wound to King Sigurd ; for King Eystein accused
King Inge of protecting these men: and that Gre¬
gorius should have fifteen marks of gold for the value
of his property burnt by King Eystein. King Eys¬
tein was ill pleased with these terms, and looked
upon the treaty as one forced upon him. Erom that
meeting King Inge went eastward to Viken, and King
Eystein north to Drontheim ; and they had no inter¬
course with each other, nor were the messages which
passed between them very friendly, and on both sides
they killed each other’s friends. King Eystein, be-

KINGS OF NORWAY.

271

sides, did not pay the money; and the one accused saga xiv.
the other of not fulfilling what was promised. King
Inge and Gregorius enticed many people from King
Ey stein ; among others, Baard Standal Bryniulfsson,

Simun Skalp a son of Halkel Huk, Haldor Bryniulfs¬
son, John Halkelsson, and many other lendermen,
although we do not name them here.

Two years after King Sigurd’s fall both kings Chaiter
assembled armaments ; namely. King Inge in the east of Eyste’ia
of the country, where he collected eighty ships ; and
King Eystein in the north, where he had forty-five,
and among these the Great Dragon, which King
Eystein Magnusson had built after the Long Serpent ;
and they had on both sides many and excellent troops.

King Inge lay with his ships south at Mostr Isle, and
King Eystein a little to the north in Graningia Sound.

King Eystein sent the young Aslak Johnsson, and
Arne Sturlesson a grandson of Snæbiorn, with one
ship to meet King Inge ; but when the king’s men
knew them they assaulted them, killed many of their
people, and took all that was in the ship belonging to
them. Aslak and Arne and a few more escaped to the
land, went to King Eystein, and told him how King
Inge had received them. Thereupon King Eystein
held a House-thing, and told his followers how ill
King Inge had treated his men, and desired the troops
to follow him. I have,” said he, “ so many, and
such excellent men, that I have no intention to fly, if
ye will follow me.” But this speech was not re¬
ceived with much favour. Halkel Huk was there ;
but both his sons, Simun and John, were with King
Inge. Halkel replied, so loud that many heard him,

“ Let thy chests of gold follow thee, and let them
defend thy land.”

In the night many of King Eystein’s ships rowed j

secretly away, some of them joining King Inge, some king
going to Bergen, or up into the fiords; so that when

272

CIIEONICLE OF THE

SAGA XIV.

it was daylight in the morning the king was lying
behind with only ten ships. Then he left the Great
Dragon, which was heavy to row, and several other
vessels behind ; and cut and destroyed the Dragon,
started out the ale, and destroyed all that they could
not take with them. KingEystein went on board of the.
ship of Eindrid a son of J ohn Mörnef, sailed north into
Sogn, and then took the land-road eastwards toYiken.
King Inge took the vessels, and sailed with them out¬
side of the isles to Viken. King .Eysten had then got
east as far as Folden, and had with him 1200 men ;
but when they saw King Inge’s force, they did not
think themselves sufficiently strong to oppose him,
and they retired to the forest. Every one fled his
own way, so that the king was left with but one man.
King Inge and his men observed King Eystein’s flight,
and also that he had but few people with him, and they
went immediately to search for him. Simun Skalp met
the king just as he was coming out of a willow bush.
Simun saluted him. “ God save you, sire,” said he.

The king replied, “ I do not know if thou art not
sire here.”

Simun replied, “ That is as it may happen.”

The king begged him to conceal him, and said it
was proper to do so. “For there was long friendship
between us, although it has now gone differently.”

Simun replied, it could not be.

Then the king begged that he might hear mass
before he died, which accordingly took place. Then
Eystein laid himself down on his face on the grass,
stretched out his hands on each side, and told them
to cut the sign of the cross between his shoulders, and
see whether he could not bear steel as Kino- Ino-e’s
followers had asserted of him. Simun told the man
who had to put the king to death to do so immediately,
for the king had been creeping about upon the grass
long enougli. He was accordingly slain, and he ap¬
pears to have suffered manfully. Ilis body was car-

KINGS OF NORWAY.

273

ried to Fors, and lay all night under the hill at the saga xiv.
south side of the church. King Eystein was buried
in Fors church, and his grave is in the middle of the
church-floor, where a fringed canopy is spread over
it, and he is considered a saint. Where he was exe¬
cuted, and his blood ran upon the ground, sprang up
a fountain, and another under the hill where his body
lay all night. From both these Avaters many think
they have received a cure of sickness and pain. It is
reported by the Yiken people that many miracles were
wrought at King Eystein’s graA^e, until his enemies
poured upon it soup made of boiled dogs’ flesh. Simun
Skalp Avas much hated for this deed, which Avas gene¬
rally ascribed to him ; but some said that when King
Eystein was taken Simun sent a message to King
Inge, and the king commanded that King Eystein
should not come before his face. So King Swerrer
has caused it to be Avritten ; but Einar Skuleson tells
of it thus : —

“ Simun Skalpj the traitor bold^

For deeds of murder known of old,

His king betrayed; and ne’er will he
God’s blessed face hereafter see.”

VOL. Ill

T

274

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XV.

Chapter

I.

Beginning
of Hakon
Herda-
breid.

Chapter

II.

Of Gre¬
gorius
Dagsson.

XY.

SAGA OF HAKON HERDABREID (HAKON
THE BROAD-SHOULDERED).^

Hakon, King Sigurd’s son, was chosen chief of the
troop which had folloAved King Eystein, and his ad¬
herents gave him the title of king. He was ten years
old. At that time he had with him Sigurd, a son of
Havard Hold of Royr, and Andreas and Onund, the
sons of Simun, his foster-brothers, and many chiefs,
friends of King Sigurd and King Eystein ; and they
went first up to Gotland. King Inge took possession
of all the estates they had left behind, and declared
them banished. Thereafter King Inge went to Yiken,
and was sometimes also in the north of the country.
Gregorius Dagsson was in Konghelle, where the
danger was greatest, and had beside him a strong
and handsome body of men, with which he defended
the country.

The summer after Hakon came with his men, and
proceeded to Konghelle with a numerous and hand¬
some troop. Gregorius was then in the town, and
summoned the bonders and townspeople to a great
Thing, at which he desired their aid ; but he thought
the people did not hear him with much favour, so he
did not much trust them. Then Gregorius set off
with two ships to Yiken, and was very much cast
down. He expected to meet King Inge there, having
heard he was coming with a great army to Yiken.
Now when Gregorius had come but a short way north
he met Simun Skalp, Haldor Bryniulfsson, and Gyrder

The period is from 1157 to 11 62.

KINGS OF NOKWAY.

275

Amunclsson, King Inge’s foster-brothers. Gregorius
was much delighted at this meeting, and turned back
with them, being all in one body, with eleven ships.
As they were rowing up to Konghelle, Hakon, with
his followers, was holding a Thing without the town,
and saw their approach; and Sigurd of Koyr said,

Gregorius must to be throwing himself with

so few men into our hands.” Gregorius landed
opposite the town to wait for King Inge, for he was
expected; but he did not come. King Hakon put
himself in order in the town, and appointed Thorliot
Skaufoscald, who was a viking and a robber, to be
captain of the men in the merchant ships that were
afloat in the river ; and King Hakon and Sigurd were
within the town, and drew up the men on the piers,
for all the townspeople had submitted to King Hakon.

Gregorius rowed up the river, and let the ship
drive down with the stream against Thorliot. They
shot at each other a while, until Thorliot and his
comrades jumped overboard; and some of them were
killed, some escaped to the land. Then Gregorius
rowed to the piers, and let a gangway be cast on
shore at the very feet of Hakon’s men. There the
man who carried his banner was slain just as he was
going to step on shore. Gregorius ordered Hall, a
son of Audun Hallesson, to take up the banner, which
he did, and bore the banner up to the j)ier. Gre¬
gorius followed close after him, held his shield over
his head, and protected him as well as himself. As
soon as Gregorius came upon the pier, and Hakon’s
men knew him, they gave way, and made room for
him on every side. Afterwards more people landed
from the ships, and then Gregorius made a severe
assault with his men ; and Hakon’s men first moved
back, and then ran up into the town. Gregorius
pursued them eagerly, drove them twice from the
town, and killed many of them. By the report of

r 2

SAGA XV.

CiTAPTEll

ni.

King
Hak oil's
flight.

276

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XV.

Chapter

IV.

Fall of
Gyrder and
Havard.

all men, never was there so glorious an aíFair as this
of Gregorius ; for Hakon had more than 4000 men,
and Gregorius not full 400. After the battle, Gre¬
gorius said to Hall Audunsson, “ Many men, in my
opinion, are more agile in battle than ye Icelanders
are, for ye are not so exercised as we Norwegians ;
but none, I think, are so bold under arms as ye are.’’
King Inge came up soon after, and killed many of the
men who had taken part with Hakon ; made some pay
heavy fines, burnt the houses of some, and some he
drove out of the country, or treated otherwise very
ill. Hakon fled at first up to Gotland with all his
men ; but the winter after he proceeded by the upper
road to Drontheim, and came there before Easter.
The Drontheim people received him well, for they
had always served under that shield. It is said that
the Drontheim people took Hakon as king, on the
terms that he should have from Inge the third part of
Norway as his paternal heritage. King Inge and
Gregorius were in Viken, and Gregorius wanted to
make an expedition against the party in the north ;
but it came to nothing that winter, as many dis¬
suaded from it.

King Hakon left Drontheim in spring with thirty
ships nearly ; and some of his men sailed before the
rest with seven ships, and plundered in North and
South More. No man could remember that there
ever before had been plundering between the two
towns (Bergen and Nidaros). John the son of Hal-
kel Huk collected the bonders in arms, and proceeded
against them ; took Kolbein Oda prisoner, and killed
every woman’s son of them in his ship. Then they
searched for the others, found them all assembled in
seven ships, and fought with them ; but his father
Halkel not coming to his assistance as he had pro¬
mised, many good bonders were killed, and John
himself was wounded. Hakon proceeded south to

KINGS OF NORWAY.

277

Bergen with his forces ; but when he came to Stior-
vellta, he heard that King Inge and Gregorius had
arrived a few nights before from the east at Ber¬
gen, and therefore he did not venture to steer thi¬
ther. They sailed the outer course southwards past
Bergen, and met three ships of King Inge’s fleet,
which had been outsailed on the voyage from the
east. On board of them were Gyrder Amundsson,
King Inge’s foster-brother, who was married to Gyrid
a sister of Gregorius, and also lagman Gyrder Gun-
hildsson, and Havard Klining. King Hakon had
Gyrder Amundsson and Havard Klining put to death ;
but took lagman Gyrder southwards, and then pro¬
ceeded east to Yiken.

When King Inge heard of this he sailed east after
them, and they met east in the Gotha river. King
Inge went up the north arm of the river, and sent
out spies to get news of Hakon and his fleet ; but he
himself landed at Hising, and waited for his spies.
Kow when the spies came back they went to the king,
and said that they had seen King Hakon’ s forces, and
all his ships which lay at the stakes in the river, and
Hakon’s men had bound the stems of their vessels to
them. They had two great East-country trading vessels,
which they had laid outside of the fleet, and on both
these were built high wooden stages (castles). When
King Inge heard the preparations they had made, he
ordered a trumpet to call a House-thing of all the
men ; and when the Thing was seated he asked his
men for counsel, and applied particularly to Gregorius
Dagsson, his brother-in-law Erling Skakke, and other
lendermen and ship-commanders, to whom he related
the preparations of Hakon and his men.

Then Gregorius Dagsson replied first, and made
known his mind in the following words : “ Some¬
times we and Hakon have met, and generally they
had the most people ; but, notwithstanding, they fell

SAGA XV.

Chapter

V.

Of the con¬
sultations
of King
Inge.

278

CHRONICLE OE THE

SAGA XV.

Chapter

VI.

Erling’s

speech.

short in battle against us. Now, on the other hand,
we have by far the greatest force ; and it will appear
probable to the men who a short time ago lost gallant
relations by them, that this will be a good occasion to
get vengeance, for they have fled before us the greater
part of the summer ; and we have often said that if
they waited for us, as appears now to be the case, we
would have a brush with them. Now I will tell my
opinion, which is, that I will engage them, if it be
agreeable to the king’s pleasure; for I think it will go
now as formerly, that they must give way before us
if we attack them bravely ; and I shall always attack
Avhere others may think it most difficult.”

This speech was received with much applause, and
all declared they were ready to engage in battle
against Hakon. Then they rowed with all the ships
up the river until they came in sight of each other,
and then King Inge turned off from the river-current
under the island. Now the king addressed the lender-
men again, and told them to get ready for battle.
He turned himself especially to Erling Skakke, and
said, what was true, that no man in the army had
more understanding and knowledge in fighting battles,
although some were more hot. The king then ad¬
dressed himself to several of the lendermen, speaking
to them by name ; and ended by desiring that each
would give his opinion, and say what he thought
would be of advantage, and thereafter all would act
together.

Erling Skakke replied thus to the king’s speech :
“ It is my duty, sire, not to be silent ; and I shall give
my advice, since it is desired. The resolution now
adopted is contrary to my judgment ; for I call it fool¬
hardy to fight under these circumstances, although
we have so many and such fine men. Supposing we
make an attack on them, and row up against this river-
current ; then one of the three men who are in each

KINGS OF NOKWAY.

279

lialf room ^ must be employed in rowing only, and
another must be covering with the' shield the man
who rows ; and what have we then to fight with but
one third of our men ? It appears to me that they
can be of little use in the battle who are sitting at
their oars, with their backs turned to the enemy.
Give me now some time for consideration, and I pro¬
mise you that before three days are over I shall fall
uj)on some plan by which we can come into battle
with advantage.”

It was evident from Erling’s speech that he dis¬
suaded from an attack ; but, notwithstanding, it was
urged by many, who thought that Hakon would now,
as before, take to the land. And then,” said they,

we cannot get hold of him ; but now they have but
few men, and we have their fate in our own hands.”

Gregorius said but little ; but thought that Erling
rather dissuaded from an attack that Gregorius’s ad¬
vice should no have effect, than that he had any bet¬
ter advice to give.

Then said King Inge to Erling, “ Now we will
follow thy advice, brother, with regard to the manner
of attacking; but seeing how eager our counsellors
are for it, we shall make the attack this day.”

Erling replied, “ All the boats and light vessels we
have should row outside the island, and up the east
arm of the river, and then down with the stream
upon them, and try if they cannot cut them, loose
from the piles. Then we, with the large ships, shall
row from below here against them ; and I cannot tell,
until it be tried, if those who are now so furiously
warm will be much brisker at the attack than I am.”

This counsel was approved by all. There was a

* Tile whole room was apparently the space between two benches of
rowerSj in which the men lived ; and these were divided into half rooms,
viz. on the starboard and larboard sides, and the men belonged to the
starboard and larboard oars of the bench.

T 4

SAGA XV.

Chapter

VII.

Of Hakon’s
fleet.

280

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XV. ness stretched out between their fleet and Hakon’s,
so that they could not see each other. Now when
Hakon and his men, who had taken counsel with each
other in a meeting, saw the boat-squadron rowing
down the river, some thought King Inge intended to
give them battle ; but many believed they did not
dare, for it looked as if the attack was given up ;
and they, besides, were very confident, both in their
preparations and men. There were many great
people with Hakon : there were Sigurd of Koyr, and
Simun’s sons, Onund and Andreas ; Nicolas Skiald-
varsson ; Eindrid, a son of John Mörnef, who was
the most gallant and popular man in the Drontheim
country ; and many other lenderDien and warriors.
Now when they saw that King Inge’s men with
many ships were rowing out of the river, Hakon and
his men believed they were going to fly ; and there¬
fore they cut their land-ropes with which they lay
fast at the piles, seized their oars, and rowed after
them in pursuit. The ships ran fast down with the
stream ; but when they came farther down the river,
abreast of the ness, they saw King Inge’s main
strength lying quiet at the island Hising. King
Inge’s people saw Hakon’s ships under way, and
believed they were coming to attack them ; and now
there was great bustle and clash of arms, and they en¬
couraged each other by a great war-shout. Hakon with
his fleet turned northwards a little to the land, where
there was a turn in the bight of the river, and where
there was no current. They made ready for battle, car¬
ried land-ropes to the shore, turned the stems of their
ships outwards, and bound them all together. They
laid the large East-country traders without the other
vessels, the one above, the other below, and bound
them to the long-ships. In the middle of the fleet
lay the king’s ship, and next to it Sigurd’s; and on
the other side of the king’s ship lay Nicolas, and next

KINGS OF NOKWAY.

281

to him Eindrid Johnsson. All the smaller ships lay-
farther off, and they were all nearly loaded with
weapons and stones. *

Then Sigurd of Royr made the following speech :
“Now there is hope that the time is come which has
been promised us all the summer, that we shall meet
King Inge in battle. We have long prepared our¬
selves for this; and many of our comrades have
boasted that they would never fly from or submit to
King Inge and Gregorius, and now let them remem¬
ber their words. But we who have sometimes got
the toothach in our conflicts with them, speak less
confidently ; for it has happened, as all have heard,
that we very often have come off without glory. But,
nevertheless, it is now necessary to fight manfully,
and stand to it with steadiness; for the only escape
for us is in victory. Although we have somewhat
fewer men than they, yet luck determines which side
shall have the advantage, and God knows that the
right is on our side. Inge has killed two of his bro¬
thers; and it is obvious to all men that the mulct
he intends to pay King Hakon for his father’s murder
is to murder him also, as well as his other relations,
which will be seen this day to be his intent. King
Hakon desired from the beginning no more of Norway
than the third part, which his father had possessed,
and which was denied him ; and yet, in my opinion.
King Hakon has a better right to inherit after his
father’s brother King Eystein, than Inge or Simun
Skalp, or the other men who killed King Eystein.
Many of them who would save their souls, and yet
have defiled their hands with such bloody deeds as
Inge has done, must think it a presumption before
God that he takes the name of king ; and I wonder

^ The importance of stones, and the enormous quantity required in
the battles of those ages, form an element in the military movements of
great bodies of men in the countries in which stones are scarce, not
sufficiently considered by historians.

SAGA XV.

Chapter
VJIL
Sigurd of
Royr’s
speech.

282

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XV.

Ch a pter

IX.

Of King
Inge’s men.

God suffers such monstrous wickedness as his : but
it may be God’s will that we shall now put him
down. Let us fight then manfully, and God will
give us victory ; and, if we fall, will repay us with
joys unspeakable for noAV allowing the might of the
wicked to prevail over us. Go forth then in confi¬
dence, and be not afraid when the battle begins. Let
each watch over his own and his comrade’s safety,
and God protect us all.” There went a good report
abroad of this speech of Sigurd, and all promised
fairly, and to do their duty. King Hakon went on
board of the great East-country ship, and a shield-
bulwark was made around him ; but his standard re¬
mained on the long- ship in which it had been before.

Now must we tell about King Inge and his men.
When they saw that King Hakon and his peoj^le
were ready for battle, and the river only was between
them, they sent a light vessel to recal the rest of the
fleet which had rowed away ; and in the mean time
the king waited for them, and arranged the troops for
the attack. Then the chiefs consulted in presence of
the army, and told their opinions : first, which ships
should lie nearest to the enemy ; and then where each
should attack.

Gregorius spoke thus : “We have many and fine
men ; and it is my advice. King Inge, that you do not
go to the assault with us, for every thing is preserved
if you are safe. And no man knows where an arrow
may hit, even from the hands of a bad bowman : and
they have prepared themselves so, that missiles and
stones can be thrown from the high stages upon the
merchant ships ; so that there is less danger for those
who are farthest from them. They have not more
men than we lendermen can very well engage with.
I shall lay my ship alongside their largest ship, and I
expect the conflict between us will be but short ; for
it has often been so in our former meetings, although

KINGS OF NORWAY.

283

there has been a much greater want of men with us
than now.’’ All thought well of the advice that the
king himself should not take part in the battle.

Then Erling Skakke said, “ I agree also to the
counsel that you, sire, should not go into the battle.
It appears to me that their preparations are such,
that we require all our precaution not to suffer a
great defeat from them ; and whole limbs are the
easiest cured. In the council we held before to-day
many opposed what I said, and ye said then that I
did not want to fight ; but now I think the business
has altered its appearance, and greatly to our advan¬
tage, since they have hauled off from the piles, and
now it stands so that I do not dissuade from giving
battle ; for I see, what all are sensible of, how neces¬
sary it is to put an end to this robber band who have
gone over the whole country with pillage and de¬
struction, in order that people may cultivate the land
in peace, and serve a king so good and just as King
Inge who has long had trouble and anxiety from the
haughty unquiet spirit of his relations, although he
has been a shield of defence for the whole people, and
has been exposed to manifold perils for the peace of
the country.” Erling spoke well and long, and many
other chiefs also; and all to the same purpose — all
urging to battle. In the meantime they waited until
all the fleet should be assembled. King Inge had the
ship Beikesuden^T and, at the entreaty of his friends,
he did not join the battle, but lay still at the island.

When the army was ready they rowed briskly
against the enemy, and both sides raised a war-shout.
Inge’s men did not bind their ships together, but let
them be loose ; for they rowed right across the current,
by which the large ships were much swayed. Erling

* The name of this vessel occurs frequently. It seems to he the
Beech-sides,” or may perhaps he a local name given to the ship. It is
not explained by any commentator, and its derivation is not very clear.

SAGA XV.

CxrAFTEB

X.

Beginning
of ihe
battle.

284

CHRONICLE OF THE

AGA XV. Skakke laid his ship beside King Hakon’s ship, and
ran the stem between his and Sigurd’s ship, by which
the battle began. But Gregorius’s ship swung upon
the ground, and heeled very much over, so that at
first she could not come into the battle ; and when
Hakon’s men saw this they laid themselves against
her, and attacked Gregorius’s ship on all sides. Ivar
Hakon, Mage’s son, laid his ship so that the stems
struck together ; and he got a boat-hook fastened on
Gregorius, on that part of his body where the waist
is smallest, and dragged him to him, by which Grego¬
rius stumbled against the ship’s rails ; but the hook
slipped to one side, or Gregorius would have been
dragged overboard. Gregorius, however, was but
little wounded, for he had on a plate coat of armour.
Ivar called out to him, that he had a “thick bark.”
Gregorius replied, that if Ivar went on so he would
“ require it all, and not have too much.” It was very
near then that Gregorius and his men had sprung
overboard ; but Aslak Unge threw an anchor into
their ship, and dragged them off the ground. Then
Gregorius laid himself against Ivar’s ship, and they
fought a long while ; but Gregorius’s ship being both
higher sided and more strongly manned, many people
fell in Ivar’s ship, and some jumped overboard. Ivar
was so severely wounded that he could not take part
in the fight. When his ship was cleared of the men,
Gregorius let Ivar be carried to the shore, so that he
might escape ; and from that time they were constant
friends.

Chapter Wlieii King Iiige and his men saw that Gregorius
Kirg^’ was aground, he encouraged his crew to row to his
assistance. “ It was,” he said, “ the most imprudent
advice that we should remain lying here, while our
friends are in battle ; for we have the largest and best
ship in all the fleet. But now I see that Gregorius,
the man to whom I owe the mos^, is in need of help ;

KINGS OF NOEWAY.

285

so we must hasten to the fight where it is sharpest, saga xv.
It is also most proper that I should be in the battle ;
for the victory, if we win it, will belong to me. And if
I even knew beforehand that our men were not to
gain the battle, yet our place is where our friends
are ; for I can do nothing if I lose the men who are
justly called the defence of the country, who are the
the bravest, and have long ruled for me and my king¬
dom.’’ Thereupon he ordered his banner to be setup,
which w^as done ; and they rowed across the river.

Then the battle raged, and the king could not get
room to attack, so close lay the ships before him.

First he lay under the East-country trading ship, and
from it they threw down upon his vessel spears, iron-
shod stakes, and such large stones that it was impos¬
sible to hold out longer there, and he had to haul off.

Now when the king’s people saw that he was come
they made place for him, and then he laid alongside
of Endrid Johnsson’s ship. Now King Hakon’s men
abandoned the small ships, and went on board the
large merchant vessels ; but some of them sprang on
shore. Erling Skakke and his men had a severe con¬
flict. Erling himself was on the forecastle, and called
his forecastle-men, and ordered them to board the
king’s ship ; but they answered, this was no easy
matter, for there were beams above with an iron
comb on them. Then Erling himself went to the
bow, and staid there a while, until they succeeded in
getting on board the king’s ship ; and then the ship
was cleared of men on the bows, and the whole army
gave way. Many sprang into the water, many fell,
but the greater number got to the land. So says
Einar Skuleson : —

“ Men fall upon the slippery deck —

Men roll off from the blood-drenched wreck;

Dead bodies float down with the stream^

And from the shores witch-ravens scream. i

286

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XV. The cold blue river now runs red

- With the warm blood of warriors dead^

And stains the waves in Karmt Sound
With the last drops of the death-wound.

All down the stream^ with unmanned prow_,

Floats many an empty long-ship now.

Ship after ship, shout after shout.

Tell that King Hakon can’t hold out.

The bowmen ply their bows of elm.

The red swords flash o’er broken helm:

King Hakon’s men rush to the strand.

Out of their ships, up through the land.”

Einar composed a song about Gregorius Dagsson,
which is called the Eiver-song. King Inge granted
life and peace to Nicolas Skialdvarsson when his ship
was deserted, and thereupon he went into King
Inge’s service, and remained in it as long as the king
lived. Endrid Johnsson leaped on board of King
Inge’s ship when his own was cleared of men, and
beofiTed for his life. Kiim Ino'e wished to o:rant it :
but Havard Klining’s son ran up, and gave him a
mortal wound, which was much blamed ; but he said
Endrid had been the cause of his father’s death.
There was much lamentation at Endrid’s death, but
principally in the Drontheim district. Many of Ha¬
kon’s people fell here, but not many chiefs. Few of
King Inge’s people fell, but many were wounded.
King Hakon hed up the country, and King Inge went
north to Viken with his troops ; and he, as Avell as
Gregorius, remained in Yiken all winter. When
King Inge’s men, Bergliot and his brothers, sons of
Ivar of Elda, came from the battle to Bergen, they
slew Nicolas Skiæg, who had been Hakon’s treasurer,
and then went north to Drontheim.

King Hakon came north before Yule, and Sigurd
was sometimes home at Boyr ; for Gregorius, who was
nearly related to Sigurd, had obtained for him life
and safety from King Inge, so that he retained all his
estates. King Hakon was in the merchant-town of

KINGS OF NOKWAY.

287

Nidaros in Yule ; and one evening in tlie beginning of
Yule bis men fought in the room of the court, and in
this affray eight men were killed, and many were
wounded. The eighth day of Yule, King Hakon’s
man Alf Rode, son of Ottar Birting, with about
eighty men, went to Elda, and came in the night
unexpectedly on the people, who were very drunk,
and set fire to the room ; but they went out, and
defended themselves bravely. There fell Bergliot,
Ivar’s son, and Ogrnund his brother, and many more.
They had been nearly thirty altogether in number.
In winter died, north in the merchant-town, Andreas
Simunsson, King Hakon’s foster-brother ; and his
death was much deplored. Erling Skakke and Inge’s
men, who were in Bergen, threatened that in winter
they would proceed against Hakon and his men ; but
it came to nothing. Gregorius sent word from the
east, from Konghelle, that if he were so near as Erling
and his men, he would not sit quietly in Bergen while
Hakon was killing King Inge’s friends and their com¬
rades in war north in the Drontheim country.

King Inge and Gregorius left the east in spring,
and came to Bergen ; but as soon as Hakon and
Sigurd heard that Inge had left Viken, they went
there by land. When King Inge and his people came
to Bergen, a quarrel arose between Haldor Bryniulfs-
son and Biorn Nicolasson. Biorn’s house-man asked
Haldor’s when they met at the pier, why he looked
so pale.

He replied, because he had been bled.

could not look so pale if I tried, at merely being

bled.”

“I again think,” retorted the other, ‘‘that thou
wouldst have borne it worse, and less manfully.”
And no other beginning was there for their quarrel
than this. Afterwards one word followed another,
till from bawling they came to fighting. It was told

SAGA XV.

Chapter

XII

The con¬
flict upon
the piers.

288

CUKONICLE OF THE

SAGA XV. to Haldor Bryniulfsson, who was in the house drink-
ing, that his house-man was wounded down on the
pier, and he went there immediately. But Biorn’s
house-men had come there before, and as Haldor
thought his house-man had been badly treated, he
went up to them and beat them ; and it was told to
Biorn Buk that the people of Yiken were beating his
house-men on the pier. Then Biorn and his house¬
men took their weapons, hurried down to the pier,
and would avenge their men ; and a bloody strife
began. It was told Gregorius that his relation Hal¬
dor required assistance, and that his house-men were
being cut down in the street ; on which Gregorius and
his men ran to the place in their armour. Now it
was told Erling Skakke that his sister’s son Biorn was
fighting with Gregorius and Haldor down on the
piers, and that he needed help. Then he proceeded
thither with a great force, and exhorted the people to
stand by him ; saying it would be a great disgrace
never to be wiped out, if the Yiken people should
trample upon them in their own native place. There
fell thirteen men, of whom nine were killed on the
spot, and four died of their wounds, and many were
wounded. When the word came to King Inge that
Gregorius and Erling Avere fighting doAvn on the
piers, he hastened there, and tried to separate them ;
but could do nothing, so mad Avere they on both
sides. Then Gregorius called to Inge, and told him
to go aAvay; for it Avas in vain to attempt coming be¬
tween them, as matters noAV stood. He said it AAmuld
be the greatest misfortune if the king mixed himself
up with it ; for he could not be certain that there Avere
not people in the fray Avho Avould commit some great
misdeed if they had opportunity. Then King Inge
retired ; and Avhen the greatest tumult Avas over,
Gregorius and his men Avent to Nicolas church, and
Erling behind them, calling to each other. Tlien

KINGS OF NORWAY.

289

King Inge came a second time, and pacified them ; and
both agreed that he should mediate between them.

When King Inge and Gregorius heard that King
Hakon was in Yiken, they went east with many ships ;
but when they came King Hakon fled from them, and
there was no battle. Then King Inge went to Oplso,
and Gregorius was in Konghelle.

Soon after Gregorius heard that Hakon and his
men were at a farm called Saurbo, which lies up be¬
side the forest. Gregorius hastened there ; came in
the night ; and supposing that King Hakon and Sigurd
would be in the largest of the houses, set fire to the
buildings there. But Hakon and his men were in the
smaller house, and came forth, seeing the fire, to help
their people. There Munan fell, a son of Ale Oskein,
a brother of King Sigurd Hakon’s father. Gregorius
and his men killed him, because he was helping those
whom they were burning within the house. Some
escaped, but many were killed. Asbiorn Jalde, who
had been a very great viking, escaped from the house,
but was grievously wounded. A bonder met him,
and he offered the man money to let him get away ;
but the bonder replied, he would do what he liked
best ; and, adding that he had often been in fear of his
life for him, he slew him. King Hakon and Sigurd
escaped, but many of their people were killed. There¬
after Gregorius returned home to Konghelle. Soon
after King Hakon and Sigurd went to Haldor Bruni-
ulfsson’s farm of Vettaland, set fire to the house, and
burnt it. Haldor went out, and was cut down in¬
stantly with his house-men ; and in all there were
about twenty men killed, Sigrid, Haldor’s wife, was
a sister of Gregorius, and they allowed her to escape
into the forest in her night-shift only ; but they took
with them Amund, who was a son of GyrderAmunds-
son and of Gyred Dag’s daughter, and a sister’s son of
Gregorius, and who was then a boy about five years old.

VOL. iir. u

SAGA XV.

Chapter

XIII.

Munan’s

death.

290

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XV.

Chapter
XIV.
Of the fall
of Grego¬
rius Dags-
son.

When Gregorius heard the news he took it much
to heart, and inquired carefully where they were.
Gregorius set out from Konghelle late in Yule, and
came to Fors the thirteenth day of Yule, where he re¬
mained a night, and heard vespers the last day of Yule,
which was a Saturday, and the holy Evangel was read
before him. When Gregorius and his followers saw the
men of King Hakon and Sigurd, the king’s force ap¬
peared to them smaller than their own. There was a
river called Bifia between them, where they met ; and
there was unsound ice on the river, for there went a
stream under the ice from it. King Hakon and his men
had cut a rent in the ice, and laid snow over it, so that
nobody could see it. When Gregorius came to the ice
on the river the ice appeared to him unsound, he
said ; and he advised the people to go to the bridge,
which was close by, to cross the river. The bonder-
troops replied, that they did not know why he should
be afraid to go across the ice to attack so few people
as Hakon had, and the ice was good enough. Gre¬
gorius said it was seldom necessary to encourage him
to show bravery, and it should not be so now. Then
he ordered them to follow him, and not to be standing
on the land while he was on the ice ; and he said it
was their counsel to go out upon the dangerous ice,
but he had no msh to do so, or to be led by them.
Then he ordered the banner to be advanced, and im¬
mediately went out on the ice with the men. As soon
as the bonders found that the ice was unsound, they
turned back. Gregorius fell through the ice, but not
very deep, and he told his men to take care. There
were not more than twenty men with him, the others
having turned back. A man of King Hakon’s troop shot
an arrow at Gregorius, which hit him under the throat,
and thus ended his life. Gregorius fell, and ten men
with him. It is the talk of all men that he had been
the most gallant lenderman in Norway that any man
then living could remember ; and also he behaved the

KINGS OF NORWAY.

291

best towards us Icelanders of any chief since King
Eystein the Elder’s death. Gregorius’s body was car¬
ried to Hofund, and interred at Gimsey Isle, in a nun¬
nery which is there, of which Gregorius’s sister Bogeid
was then the abbess.

Two bailiffs went to Opslo to bring the tidings to
King Inge. When they arrived they desired to
speak to the king ; and he asked, what news they
brought.

“ Gregorius Dagsson’s death,” said they.

“ How came that misfortune ?” asked the king.

When they had told him how it happened, he said.

They gave advice who understood the least.”

It is said he took it so much to heart that he cried
like a child. When he recovered himself he said, “ I
wanted to go to Gregorius as soon as I heard of Haldor’s
murder ; for I thought that Gregorius would not sit
long before thinking of revenge. But the people
here would think nothing so important as their Yule
feasts, and nothing could move them away ; and I am
confident that if I had been there, he would either
have proceeded more cautiously, or I and Gregorius
would now have shared one lodging. Now he is gone,
— the man who has been my best friend, and more
than any other has kept the kingdom in my hands ;
and I think it will be but a short space between us.
Now I make an oath to go forth against Hakon, and
one of two things shall happen : I shall either come to
my death, or shall walk over Hakon and his people ;
and such a man as Gregorius is not avenged, even if
all were to pay the penalty of their lives for him.”

There was a man present who replied, “Ye need
not seek after them, for they intend to seek you.”

Christina, King Sigurd’s daughter and King Inge’s
cousin, was then in Opslo, The king heard that she
intended going away. He sent a message to her to
inquire why she wished to leave the town.

u 2

SAGA XV.

Chapter

XV.

King Inge
hears of
Grego¬
rius’s fall.

292

CHEONICLE OF THE

SAGA XV.

Chapter
XVL
Of King
Inge.

She thought it was dangerous and unsafe for a
female to be there.

The king would not let her go. “ For if it go
well with me, as I hope, you will be well here ; and
if I fall, my friends may not get leave to dress my
body ; but you can ask permission, and it will not be
denied you, and you will thereby best requite what I
have done for you.’’

On Saint Blasius’ day, in the evening. King Inge’s
spies brought him the news that King Hakon was
coming towards the town. Then King Inge ordered
the war-horns to call together all the troops up from
the town; and when he drew them up he could
reckon them to be nearly 4000 men. The king let
the array be long, but not more than five men deep.
Then some said that the king should not be himself
in the battle, as they thought the risk too great ;
but that his brother Orm should be the leader of the
army. The king replied, “ I think if Gregorius were
alive and here now, and I had fallen and was to be
avenged, he would not lie concealed, but would be in
the battle. Now, although I, on account of my ill
health, am not fit for the combat as he was, yet will I
show as good will as he would have had ; and it is not
to be thought of that I should not be in the battle.”

People say that Gunhild, who was married to
Simun, King Hakon’ s foster-brother, had a witch em¬
ployed to sit out^ all night and procure the victory
for Hakon ; and that the answer was obtained, that
they should fight King Inge by night, and never by
day, and then the result would be favourable. The
witch who, as people say, sat out was called Thordis
Seggia ; but what truth there may be in the report I
know not.

Simun Skalp had gone to the town, and was gone

* At sitia uti — to sit out — was a form of expression for exercising
witchcraft.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

293

to sleep, when the war-shouts awoke him. When the saga xv.
night was well advanced, King Inge’s spies came to ~
him, and told him that King Hakon and his army
were coming over the ice ; for the ice lay the whole
way from the town to Hoved Isle.

Thereupon King Inge went with his army out on
the ice, and he drew it up in order of battle in front KingingVs
of the town. Simun Skalp was in that mng of the
array which was towards Trælaberg; and on the
other wing, which was towards the Kunnery, was
Gudrod, the king of the South Hebudes, a son of
Olaf Bitling*, and John, a son of Swen Bergthor a
son of Buk. When King Hakon and his army came
near to King Inge’s array, both sides raised a war-
shout. Gudrod and John gave King Hakon and his
men a sign, and let them know where they were in
the line ; and as soon as Hakon’ s men in conse¬
quence turned thither, Gudrod immediately fled with
1500 men; and John, and a great body of men
with him, ran over to King Hakon’ s army, and as¬
sisted them in the light. When this news was told
to King Inge, he said, “ Such is the difference be¬
tween my friends. Never would Gregorius have done

^ The Chronicle of the Kings of Mann coincides with the saga.
Godredus, son of Olaf king of the South Hebudes, went in 1142, in the
lifetime of his father, to Inge (called Hinge in the Manx Chronicle)
king of Norway to do homage for Mann. His father was slain in his
absence, and he returned from Norway in 1143, and was proclaimed
king of Mann. As he treated the chiefs of the island harshly, they
joined Sumarlid, v/ith whom, after a sea-fight in 1156, he was obliged
to share his kingdom ; and in 1158 he was obliged to fiy from Mann, and
seek assistance from Norway. Sumarlid fell in a war with the Scottish
king, and in 1104 Rognvald (Reginaldus), a brother of Gudrod, seized
the sovereignty; but Gudrod returned with forces from Norway, took
his brother prisoner, mutilated him, and held the sovereignty until
1187, when he died. Gudrod appears, from this account taken from
the Manx Chronicle, to have been in Norway from 1158 to 1104; and
this battle of Opslo took place about the year ll6l, according to Tor-
feus. See note of Thorlacius at Chap. XVII. of this Saga in the folio
edition of Snorro.

U 3

294

CHKONICLE OF THE

SAGA XV.

Chapter
XVIII.
King Inge’s
fall.

SO in his life ! ’’ There were some who advised King
Inge to get on horseback, and ride from the battle up
to Raumarige; “where,” said they, “you would get
help enough, even this very day.” The king rephed,
he had no inclination to do so. “I have heard you
often say, and I think truly, that it was of little use
to my brother King Ey stein that he took to flight; and
yat he was a man distinguished for many qualities
which adorn a king. Now I, who labour under so
great decrepitude, can see how bad my fate would be,
if I betook myself to what proved so unfortunate for
him ; with so great a difference as there is between
our activity, health, and strength. I was in the second
year of my age when I was chosen king of Norway,
and I am now twenty-five ; and I think I have had
misfortune and sorrow under my kingly dignity,
rather than pleasure and peaceful days. I have had
many battles, sometimes with more, sometimes mth
fewer people ; and it is my greatest luck that I have
never fled. God Avill dispose of my life, and of how
lonff it shall be ; but I shall never betake myself to
flight.”

Now as John and his troop had broken the one
wing of King Inge^s array, many of those who were
nearest to him fled, by which the whole array was
dispersed, and fell into disorder. But Hakon and his
men went briskly forwards ; and now it was near day¬
break. An assault was made against King Inge’s
banner, and in this conflict King Inge fell ; but his
brother Orm continued the battle, while many of the
army fled up into the town. Twice Orm went to the
town after the king’s fall to encourage the people, and
both times returned, and went out again upon the ice
to continue the battle. Hakon’s men attacked the
wing of the array which Simun Skalp led; and in that
assault fell of King Inge’s men his brother-in-law.

KINGS OE NORWAY.

295

Gudbrand Skafhaugsson. Simun Skalp and Halyard
Hikre went against each other with their troops, and
fought while they drew aside past Trælaberg; and
in this conflict both Simun and Halyard fell. Orm,
the king’s brother, gained great reputation in this
battle ; but he at last fled. Orm the winter before
had been contracted with Kagna, a daughter of Mcolas
Massa, who had been married before to King Eystein
Haraldsson; and the wedding was fixed for the Sunday
after Saint Blasius’ mass, which was on a Friday.
Orm fled east to Sweden, where his brother Magnus
was then king ; and their brother Rognyald was an
earl there at that time. They were the sons of Queen
Ingerid and Henrik Halta, who was a son of the Danish
king Swell Swensson. The princess Christina took
care of King Inge’s body, which was laid in the stone
wall of Halyard’s church, on the south side without
the choir. He had then been king for twenty-three
years. In this battle many fell on both sides, but
principally of King Inge’s men. Of King Hakon’s
people fell Arne Fredriksson. Hakon’s men took all
the feast and yictuals prepared for the wedding, and a
great booty besides.

Then King Hakon took possession of the whole
country, and distributed all the offices among his own
friends, both in the towns and in the country. King
Hakon and his men had a meeting in Halyard’s church,
where they had a priyate conference concerning the
management of the country. Christina the princess
gaye the priest who kept the church keys a large sum
of money to conceal one of her men in the church, so
that she might know what Hakon and his counsellors
intended. When she learnt what they had said, she
sent a man to Bergen to her husband Erling Skakke,
with the message that he should neyer trust Hakon
or his men.

u 4

SAGA XV.

Chapter

XIX.

Of King
Hakon and
Queen
Christina.

296

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XV. It happened once in the Greek country, when
Chapter Kyrialax * * * § was emperor there, that he made an ex-
Of K^g pedition against Blökkamannaland.f When he came
oiaf’smi- to the Petzina plains Í, a heathen kino; came against
favour of him with au innumerable host. He brought with
gerslrcra- him many horsemen, and many large waggons, in
stantinopie. which Were large loop-holes for shooting through.

When they prepared for their night quarters they
drew up their waggons, one by the side of the other,
without their tents, and dug a great ditch without;
and all which made a defence as strong as a castle.
The heathen king was blind. Now when the Greek
king came, the heathens drew up their array on the
plains before their waggon-fortification. The Greeks
drew up their array opposite, and they rode on both
sides to fight with each other ; but it went on so ill
and so unfortunately, that the Greeks were compelled
to fly after suffering a great defeat, and the heathens
gained a victory. Then the king drew up an array
of Franks and Flemings, who rode against the hea¬
thens, and fought with them; but it went with them
as with the others, that many were killed, and all
who escaped took to flight. Then the Greek king was
greatly incensed at his men-at-arms ; and they replied,
that he should now take his wine-bags, the Yæringers.§
The king says that he would not throw away his
jewels, and alloAV so few men, however bold they
might be, to attack so vast an army. Then Thorer
Flelsing, who at that time was leader of the Yæringers,

* Kyrialax is the contracted pronunciation of the Greek Kurios
Alexios — the lord Alexius; and the emperor Alexius Comnenus I. is
the Alexius here meant.

I Blökkamannaland is not Ethiopia, with which Alexius I. had no
wars ; but Blachars, or Vallachars, was the name of the people of Valla-
chia, contracted by the northern Væringers into Bloku-menn.

f Pezina-völlo — the plains on the river Bezina.

§ The Frakkar and Flemingear — Franks and Flemings — appear
not to have been in the corps of Væringers, the body guards but only
Northmen.

KINGS OF NOKWAY.

297

replied to tlie king’s words, If there was burning
fire in the way, I and my people would run into it, if
I knew the king’s advantage required it.” Then the
king replied, “ Call upon your holy King Olaf for help
and strength.” The Yæringers, who were 450 men,
made a vow with hand and word to build a church in
Constantinople, at their own expense and with the
aid of other good men, and have the church conse¬
crated to the honour and glory of the holy King Olaf ;
and thereupon the Yæringers rushed into the plain.
When the heathens saw them, they told their king
that there was another troop of the Greek king’s army
come out upon the plain ; but they were only a hand¬
ful of people. The king says, “ Who is that venerable
man riding on a Avhite horse at the head of the troop?”
They replied, “We do not see him.” There was
so great a difference of numbers, that there were
sixty heathens for every Christian man ; but notwith¬
standing the Yæringers went boldly to the attack.
As soon as they met terror and alarm seized the army
of the heathens, and they instantly began to fly ; but
the Yæringers pursued, and soon killed a great num¬
ber of them. When the Greeks and Franks who before
had fled from the heathens saw this, they hastened to
take part, and pursue the enemy with the others.
Then the Yæringers had reached the waggon-fortifi¬
cation, where the greatest defeat was given to the
enemy. The heathen king was taken in the flight of
his people, and the Yæringers brought him along
with them ; after which the Christians took the camp
of the heathens, and their waggon-fortification,

*It happened at the battle of Stiklestad, as before
related, that King Olaf threw from him the sword

* This chapter and the preceding one are considered interpolations,
not being in the approved manuscripts of the Heimskringla, although in
Peringskiold’s edition.

SAGA XV.

Chapter
XXL
Of Olaf’s
miracle,

298

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XV. called Hneitir^ when he received his wound. A
Swedish man, who had broken his own sword, took it
up, and fought with it. When this man escaped with
the other fugitives he came to Sweden, and went
home to his house. From that time he kept the sword
all his days, and afterwards his son, and so relation
after relation ; and when the sword shifted its O'wner,
the one told to the other the name of the sword, and
where it came from. A long time after, in the days
of Kyrialax the emperor of Constantinople, when
there was a great body of Yæringers in the to^vn, it
happened in the summer that the emperor was on a
campaign, and lay in the camp with his army. The
Væringers who had the guard, and watched over the
emperor, lay on the open plain -without the camp.
They changed the watch with each other in the night,
and those who had been before on watch lay do^vn
and slept; but all completely armed. It was their
custom, when they went to sleep, that each should
have his helmet on his head, his shield over him,
sword under the head, and the right hand on the
sword-handle. One of these comrades, whose lot it
was to watch the latter part of the night, found, on
awaking towards morning, that his sword was gone.
He looked after it, and saw it lying on the flat plain
at a distance from him. He got up and took the
sword, thinking that his comrades who had been on
watch had taken the sword from him in a joke; but
they all denied it. The same thing happened three
nights. Then he wondered at it, as well as they
who saw or heard of it ; and people began to ask him
how it could have happened. He said that this sword
was called Hneitir, and had belonged to King Olaf
the Saint, who had himself carried it in the battle of

* Giving a name to a sword, or piece of ordnance, or to a horse, ap¬
pears to have continued to Elizabeth’s days in England. Have we
not Hiron here ? ” says Pistol.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

Stiklestad ; and he also related how the sword since
that time had gone from one to another. This was
told to the emperor, who called the man before him
to whom the sword belonged, and gave him three
times as much gold as the sword was worth ; and the
sword itself he had laid in Saint Olaf ^s church, which
the Yæringers supported, where it has been ever since
over the altar. There was a lenderman of Norway
while Harald Gillens sons, Eystein, Inge, and Sigurd
lived, who was called Eindrid Unge; and he was in
Constantinople when these events took place. He
told these circumstances in Norway, according to
what Einar Skuleson says in his song about King
Olaf the Saint, in which these events are sung.

300

CHRONICLE OF THE

XVI.

sA^vi. MAGNUS ERLINGSSON’S SAGA,^

Chapter When Erliiig got Certain intelligence of the deter-
of Magnus Lainations of Hakon and his counsellors, he sent a
Eriings- message to all the chiefs who he knew had been
ginning. steady friends of King Inge, and also to his court-
men and his retinue, who had saved themselves by
flight, and also to all Gregorius’s house-men, and
called them together to a meeting. When they met,
and conversed with each other, they resolved to keep
their men together ; and which resolution they con¬
firmed by oath and hand-shake to each other. Then
they considered who they should take to^be king.
Erling Skakke first spoke, and inquired if it was the
opinion of the chiefs and other men of power that
Simun Skalp’s son, the son of the daughter of King
Harald Gille, should be chosen king, and J ohn Hal-
kelsson be taken to lead the army ; but John refused
it. Then it was inquired if Nicolas Skialdvarsson, a
sister’s son of King Magnus Barefoot, would place
himself at the head of the army ; but he answered
thus : — It was his opinion that some one should be
chosen king who was of the royal race ; and, for
leader of the troops, some one from whom help and
understanding were to be looked for ; and then it
would be easier to gather an army.” It was now
tried whether Arne would let any of his sons. King
Inge’s brothers, be proclaimed king. Arne replies, that
Christina’s son, as she was daughter of King Sigurd

* From about 1102 to 1177j) when the Heimskringla ends; hut
Magnus Erlingsson reigned to 1184.

KINGS OK NORWAY.

301

tlie Crusader, was nearest by propinquity of descent saga xvi
to the crown of Norway. And here is also a man to be
his adviser, and whose duty it is to take care of him
and of the kingdom ; and that man is his father Erling,
who is both prudent, brave, experienced in war, and
an able man in governing the kingdom: he wants
no capability of bringing this counsel into eifect,
if luck be with him.” Many thought well of this
advice.

Erling replied to it, “ As far as I can see or hear
in this meeting, the most will rather be excused from
taking upon themselves such a difficult business.

Now it appears to me altogether uncertain, provided
we begin this work, whether he who puts himself at
the head of it will gain any honour ; or whether mat¬
ters will go as they have done before when any one
undertakes such great things, — that he loses all his
property, and possibly his life. But if this counsel
be adopted, there may be men who will undertake to
carry it through ; but he who comes under such an
obligation must seek, in every way, to prevent any
opposition or enmity from those who are now in this
council.”

All gave assurance that they would enter into this
confederacy with perfect fidelity. Then said Erling,

“ I can say for myself that it would almost be my
death to serve King Hakon ; and however dangerous
it may be, I will rather venture to adopt your advice,
and take upon me to lead this force, if that be the
will, counsel, and desire of you all, and if you will
all bind yourselves to this agreement by oath.”

To this they all agreed ; and in this meeting it was
determined to take Erling’ s son Magnus to be king.

They afterwards held a Thing in the town; and at
this Thing Magnus Erlingsson, then five years old,
was elected king of the whole country. All who had
been servants of King Inge went into his service, and

302

CHKONICLE OP THE

SAGA XVI.

CHAPTEa

II.

King Mag¬
nus goes to
Denmark.

Chapter

HI.

Battle of
Tunsberg.

each of them retained the office and dignity he had
held under King Inge.

Erling Skakke made himself ready to travel, fitted
out ships, and had with him King Magnus, together
with the household-men who were on the spot. In this
expedition were the king’s relatives, — Arne ; Ingerid,
King Inge’s mother, with her two sons ; besides John
Kurteisa, a son of Sigurd Stork, and Erling’ s house¬
men, as well as those who had been Gregorius’s house¬
men ; and they had in all ten ships. They went south
to Denmark to King Waldemar and Buris Henriks-
son. King Inge’s brother. King Waldemar was King
Magnus’s blood -relation ; for Ingeborg mother of King
Waldemar, and Malmfrid mother of Christina, King
Magnus’s mother, were cousins. The Danish king
received them hospitably, and he and Erling had pri¬
vate meetings and consultations; and so much was
known of their counsels, that King Waldemar was
to aid King Magnus with such help as might be re¬
quired from his kingdom, to win and retain Norway.
On the other hand. King Waldemar should get that
domain in Norway which his ancestors Harald Gorms-
sonand Swend Forked-beard had possessed; namely,
the whole of Viken as far north as Kygiarbit. This
agreement was confirmed by oath and a fixed treaty.
Then Erling and King Magnus made themselves ready
to leave Denmark, and they sailed out of Skagen.^

King Hakon went in spring, after the Easter week,
north to Drouth eim, and had with him the whole
fleet that had belonged to King Inge. He held a
Thing there in the merchant-town, and was chosen
king of the whole country. Then he made Sigurd
of Boyr an earl, and gave him an earldom, and after¬
wards proceeded southwards with his followers all
the way to Viken. The king went to Tunsberg; but

* Skagen — the Scaw.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

303

sent Earl Sigurd east to Konglielle, to defend the saga xvj.
country with a part of the forces in case Erling
should -come from the south. Erling and his fleet
came to Agder, and went straight north to Bergen,
where they killed Arne Brigidar- scald, King Harald’s
officer, and came back immediately against King
Hakon. Earl Sigurd, who had not observed the
journey of Erling and his followers from the south,
was at that time east in the Gotha river, and King
Hakon was in Tunsberg. Erling brought up at
Hrossaness, and lay there some nights. In the mean¬
time King Hakon made preparations in the town.

When Erling and his fleet were coming up to the
town, they took a merchant vessel, filled it with
wood and straw, and set fire to it; and the wind
blomng right towards the town, drove the vessel
against the piers. Erling had two cables brought on
board the vessel, and made fast to two boats, and
made them row along as the vessel drove. Now
when the fire was come almost abreast of the town,
those who were in the boats held back the vessel by
the ropes, so that the town could not be set on fire ;
but so thick a smoke spread from it over the town,
that one could not see from the piers where the king^s
array was. Then Erling drew the whole fleet in
where the wind carried the fire, and shot at the
enemy. When the townspeople saw that the fire was
approaching their houses, and many were wounded
by the bo^vmen, they resolved to send the priest
Hroald, the long-winded speaker, to Erling, to beg
him to spare them and the town; and they dis¬
solved the array in favour of Hakon, as soon as
Hroald told them their prayer was granted. Now
when the array of the townspeople had dispersed,
the men on the piers were much thinned; how¬
ever some urged Hakoffis men to make resistance;
but Onund Simunsson, who had most influence over

304

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XVI.

Chapter

IV.

Of Erling
and Hakon.

the army, said, I will not fight for Earl Sigurd’s
earldom, since he is not here himself.” Then Onund
fled, and was followed by all the people, and by
the king himself; and they hastened up the coun¬
try. King Hakon lost many men here ; and these
verses were made about it : —

Onund declares he will not go
In battle 'gainst Earl Sigurd’s foe_,

If Earl Sigurd does not come^

But with his house-men sits at home.

King Magnus’ men rush up the street^

Eager with Hakon's troop to meet ;

But Hakon’s war-hawks^ somewhat shy.

Turn quick about, and off they fly.”

Thorbiorn Skakke- scald also said : —

The Tunsberg men would not he slow
In thy good cause to risk a blow;

And well they knew the chief could stain
The wolves’ mouths on a battle-plain.

But the town champion rather fears
The sharp bright glance of levelled spears ;

Their steel-clad warrior loves no fight
Where bowstring twangs, or fire flies bright.”

King Hakon then took the land-road northwards
to Drontheim. When Earl Sigurd heard of this, he
proceeded with all the ships he could get the sea¬
way northwards, to meet King Elakon there.

Erling Skakke took all the ships in Tunsberg be¬
longing to King Hakon, and there he also took the
Beikesuden which had belonged to King Inge. Then
Erling proceeded, and reduced the whole of Viken in
obedience to King Magnus, and also the whole country
north wheresoever he appeared up to Bergen, where
he remained all winter. There Erling killed Ingebiorn
Sepil, King Hakon’s lenderman of the north part of
the Fiord district. In winter King Hakon was in
Drontheim ; but in the following spring he ordered a
levy, and prepared to go against Erling. He had
with him Earl Sigurd, John Swensson, Eindrid Unge,
Onund Simunsson, Philippus Petersson, Philippus

KINGS OF NORWAY. 305

Gyrdersson, Rognvald Kunta, Sigurd Kapa, Sigurd saga xvi.
Hiupa, Frederik Keina, Asbiorn of Aurland, Thor-
biorn, a son of Gunnar the treasurer, and Strad Biorn.

Erling was in Bergen with a great armament, and Chai-ter
resolved to lay a sailing prohibition on all the mer- ofEriings
chant vessels which were going north to Nidaros ; for
he knew that King Hakon would soon get tidings of
him, if ships were sailing between the towns. Besides,
he gave out that it was better for Bergen to get the
goods, even if the owners were obliged to sell them
cheaper than they wished, than that they should fall
into the hands of enemies and thereby strengthen
them. And now a great many vessels were assembled
at Bergen, for many arrived every day, and none were
allowed to go away. Then Erling let some of the
lightest of his vessels be laid ashore, and spread the re¬
port that he would wait for Hakon, and, with the help
of his friends and relations, oppose the enemy there. He
then one day called a meeting of the ship-masters, and
gave them and all the merchant ships and their steers¬
men leave to go where they pleased. When the men
who had charge of the cargoes, and were all ready to
sail away with their goods, some for trade, others on
various business, had got leave from Erling Skakke to
depart, there was a soft and favourable wind for sail¬
ing north along the coast. Before the evening all
who were ready had set sail, and hastened on as fast
as they could, according to the speed of their vessels,
the one vying with the other. When this fleet came
north to More, Hakon’s fleet had arrived there before
them ; and he himself was there fully engaged in col¬
lecting people, and summoning to him the lendermen,
and all liable to serve in the levy, without having for
a long time heard any news from Bergen, Now,
however, they heard, as the latest news, that Erling
Skakke had laid his ships up in Bergen, and there
they would find him ; and also that he had a large
VOL. III. X

306

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XVI,

Chapter

VI.

Of Erling
Skakke.

force with him. King Hakon sailed from thence to
Veöy^, and sent away Earl Sigurd and Onund Sh
munsson to gather people, and sent men also to both
the More districts. After King Hakon had remained
a few days at the town he sailed farther, and proceeded
to the South, thinking that it would both promote his
journey and enable new levies to join him sooner.

Erling Skakke had given leave on Sunday to all
the merchant vessels to leave Bergen ; and on Tues¬
day, as soon as the early mass was over, he ordered
the war-horns to sound, summoned to him the men-
at-arms and the townsmen, and let the ships which
were laid up on shore be drawn down into the water.
Then Erling held a House-thing with his men and
the people of the levy ; told them his intentions ;
named ship commanders ; and had the names called
over of the men who were to be on board of the
king’s ship. This Thing ended with Erling’s order
to every man to make himself ready in his berth
wherever a place was appointed him ; and declared that
he who remained in the town after the Beikesuden was
hauled out, should be punished by loss of life or limb.
Orm, the king’s brother, laid his ships out in the har¬
bour immediately that evening, and many others, and
the greater number were afloat before.

On Wednesday, before mass was sung in the town,
Erling sailed from Bergen with all his fleet, consisting
of twenty-one ships; and there vfas a fresh breeze for
sailing northwards along the coast. Erling had his
son King Magnus with him, and there were many
lendermen accompanied by the finest men. When
Erling came north, abreast of the Eiord district, he
sent a boat on shore to John Halkellsson’s farm, and
took Nicolas, a son of Simun Skalpe, and of Maria,
Harald Gille’s daughter, and brought him out to the

^ Veöy — now Vcdo in Raumsdal.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

307

fleet, and put him on board the king’s ship. On
F riday, immediately after matins, they sailed to Stein-
avog ; and King Hakon, with thirteen ships, was lying
in a harbour in the neighbourhood. He himself and
his men were up at play upon the island, and the
lendermen were sitting on the hill, when they saw a
boat rowing from the south with two men in it, who
were bending back deep towards the keel, and taking
hasty strokes with their oars. When they came to
the shore they did not belay the boat, but both ran
from it. The great men seeing this, said to each
other, “ These men must have some news to tell;” and
got up to meet them. When they met, Onund Si-
munsson asked, “ Have ye any news of Erling Skakke,
that ye are running so fast?”

They answered, as soon as they could get out the
words, for they had lost their breath, “ Here comes
Erling against you, sailing from the south, with
twenty-one ships, or thereabouts, of Avhich many are
great enough ; and now ye will soon see their sails.”

Then said Eindrid Unge, “Too near to the nose,
said the peasant, when his eye was knocked out.”

They went in haste now to where the games Avere
^ playing, and immediately the Avar-horns resounded,
and Avith the battle-call all the people were gathered
doAvn to the ships in the greatest haste. It was just
the time of day Avhen their meat Avas nearly cooked.
All the men rushed to the ships, and each ran on
board the vessel that Avas nearest to him, so that the
ships were unequally manned. Some took to the
oars ; some raised the masts, turned the heads of the
vessels to the north, and steered for Veoy, where they
expected much assistance from the townspeople.

Soon after they saAV the sails of Erling’ s fleet, and
both fleets came in sight of each other. Eindrid Unge
had a ship called Draglon, which Avas a large buss¬
like long-ship, but which had but a small crew ; for

X 2

SAGA xvr.

Chatter
Vll.^
Fall of
Kiiii?

O

Hakon.

308

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XVI. those who belonged to her had run on board of other
ships, and she was therefore the hindmost of Hakon’s
fleet. When Eindrid came abreast of the island Sek,
the Beikesuden, which Erling Skakke himself com¬
manded, came up with her ; and these two ships were
bound fast together. King Hakon and his followers had
arrived close to Veoy ; but when they heard the war-
horn they turned again to assist Eindrid. Now they
began the battle on both sides, as the vessels came
up. Many of the sails lay midships across the vessels ;
and the ships were not made fast to each other, but
they lay side by side. The conflict was not long
before there came disorder in Hakon’s ship; and some ^
fell, and others sprang overboard. Hakon threw over
him a grey cloak, and jumped on board another ship ;
but when he had been there a short time he thought
he had got among his enemies ; and when he looked
about him he saw none of his men nor of his ships
near him. Then he went into the Beikesuden to the
forecastle-men, and begged his life. They took him
in their keeping, and gave him quarter. In this con¬
flict there was a great loss of people, but principally
of Hakon’s men. In the Beikesuden fell Nicolas,
Simun Skalp’s son ; and Erling’ s men are accused
of having killed him themselves. Then there was a
pause in the battle, and the vessels separated. It was
now told to Erling that Hakon was on board of his
ship; that the forecastle-men had taken him, and
threatened that they would defend him with arms.
Erling sent men forwards in the ship to bring the
forecastle-men his orders to guard Hakon well, so
that he should not get £iway. He at the same time
let it be understood that he had no objection to giving
the king life and safety, if the other chiefs were willing,
and a peace could be established. All the forecastle-
men gave their chief great credit and honour for these
words. Then Erling ordered anew a blast of the

KINGS OF NOEWAY.

309

war-horns, and that the ships should be attacked saga xvi.
which had not lost their men ; saying that they would
never have such another opportunity of avenging
King Inge. Thereupon they all raised a war-shout,
encouraged each other, and rushed to the assault. In
this tumult King Hakon received his death- wound.

When his men knew he had fallen they rowed with
all their might against the enemy, threw away their
shields, slashed with both hands, and cared not for
life. This heat and recklessness, however, proved
soon a great loss to them ; for Erling’s men saw the
unprotected parts of their bodies, and w^here their
blows would have effect. The greater part of Hakon’s
men who remained fell here ; and it was principally
owing to the want of numbers, as they were not
enough to defend themselves. They could not get
quarter, also, excepting those whom the chiefs took
under their protection and bound themselves to pay
ransom for. The following of Hakon’s people fell :

Sigurd Kapa, Sigurd Hiupa, and Rognvald Kunta;
but some ships’ crews got way, rowed into the fiords,
and thus saved their lives. Hakon’s body was carried
to Raumsdal, and buried there; but afterwards his
brother. King Sverrer, had the body transported
north to the merchant town Nidaros, and laid in the
stone-wall of Christ church south of the choir.

Earl Sigurd, Eindrid Unge, Onund Simunsson, Chapter
Erederik Keina, and other chiefs kept the troop to- Flight of
gether, left the ships in Raumsdal, and went up to
the Uplands. King Magnus and his father Erling Hakon’s
sailed with their troops north to Nidaros in Dron-
theim, and subdued the country as they went along.

Erling called together an Ore-thing, at which King
Magnus was proclaimed king of all Norway. Erling,
however, remained there but a short time ; for he
thought the Drontheim people were not well affected

X 3

310

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XVI.

Chapter

IX.

Of King

Sigurd’s

beginning.

Chapter

X.

Earl Si-

towards him and his son. King Magnus was then
called king of the whole country.

King Hakon had been a handsome man in appear¬
ance, well grown, tall and thin; but rather broad-
shouldered, on which account his men called him
Herdabreid. As he was young in years, his lendermen
ruled for him. He was cheerful and friendly in con¬
versation, playful and youthful in his ways, and Avas
much liked by the people.

There Avas an Upland man called Marcus of Skog,
Avho Avas a relation of Earl Sigurd. Marcus brought
up a son of King Harald Sigurdsson, Avho AA^as also
called Sigurd. This Sigurd Avas chosen king by the
Upland people, by the advice of Earl Sigurd and the
other chiefs Avho had followed King Hakon. They
had noAV a great army, and the troops Avere divided
in two bodies ; so that Marcus and the king Avere less
exposed where there Avas any thing to do, and Earl
Sigurd and his troop, along Avith the lendermen,
Avere most in the Avay of danger. They Avent Avith
their troops mostly through the Uplands, and some¬
times eastAvards to Yiken. Erling Skakke had his
son King Magnus ahvays Avith him, and he had also
the Avhole fleet and the land defence under him. He
Avas a while in Bergen in autumn ; but Avent from
thence eastAvard to Yiken, Avhere he settled in Tuns-
berg for his Avinter quarters, and collected in Yiken
all the taxes and revenues that belonged to Magnus
as king ; and he had many and very fine troops. As
King Sigurd had but a small part of the country, and
kept many men on foot, he soon Avas iiiAvant of money;
and AAdiere there Avas no chief in the neighbourhood
he had to seek money by unlaAvful Avays, — sometimes
by unfounded accusations and fines, sometimes by
open robbery.

At that time the realm of Koinvay Avas in great
prosperity. The bonders Avere rich and poAA^erful,

KINGS OF NORWAY.

311

unaccustomed to hostilities or violence, and the op¬
pression of roving troops ; so that there was soon a
great noise and scandal when they were despoiled
and robbed. The people of Yiken were very friendly
to Erling and King Magnus, principally from the
popularity of the late King Inge Haraldsson ; for the
Viken people had always served under his banner.
Erling kept a guard in the town, and twelve men
were on watch every night. Erling had Things
regularly with the bonders, at which the misdeeds
of Sigurd’s people were often talked over; and by
the representations of Erling and his adherents, the
bonders were brought unanimously to consider that
it would be a great good fortune if these bands should
be rooted out. Arne the king’s relation spoke w^ell and
long on this subject, and at last severely; and required
that all who were at the Thing, — men-at-arms, bonders,
townsmen, and merchants, — should come to the reso¬
lution to sentence according to law Earl Sigurd and
all his troop, and deliver them to Satan, both living
and dead. From the animosity and hatred of the
people, this was agreed to by all ; and thus the un¬
heard-of deed was adopted and confirmed by oath, as
if a judgment in the case was delivered there by the
Thing according to law. The priest Harald the Long-
winded, who was a very eloquent man, spoke in the
case ; but his speech was to the same purpose as that
of others who had spoken before. Erling gave a feast
at Yule in Tunsberg, and paid the wages of the men-
at-arms at Candlemas.

Earl Sigurd went with his best troops down to
Yiken, where many people were obliged to submit to
his superior force, and many had to pay money. He
drove about thus widely higher up the country, pene¬
trating into different districts. But there were some
in his troop who desired privately to make peace with
Erling ; but they got back the answer, that all who

X 4

SAGA XVI.

gurd’s con¬
demnation.

Chapter

XL

Of Erling.

312

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XVI.

Chapteii

XII.

Erling gets
news of

Earl Si¬
gurd.

asked for their lives should obtain quarter, but they
only should get leave to remain in the country who
had not been guilty of any great oifences against
Erling. And when Sigurd’s adherents heard that they
would not get leave to remain in the country, they
held together in one body; for there were many
among them who knew for certain that Erling would
look upon them as guilty of offences against him.
Philippus Gyrdarsson made terms with Erling, got
his property back, and went home to his farm ; but
soon after Sigurd’s men came there, and killed him.
They committed many crimes against each other, and
many men were slain in their mutual persecution ;
but here what was committed by the chiefs only is
written down.

It was in the beginning of Lent that news came to
Erling that Earl Sigurd intended to come upon him ;
and news of him came here and there, sometimes
nearer, sometimes farther off. Erling sent out spies
in all quarters around to discover where they were.
Every evening he assembled all the men-at arms by
the war-horn out of the town ; and for a long time in
the winter they lay under arms all night, ready to be
drawn up in array. At last Erling got intelligence
that Sigurd and his followers were not far distant, up
at the farm Ke. Erling then began his expedition
out of the town, and took with him all the towns¬
people who were able to carry arms and had arms,
and likewise all the merchants ; and left only twelve
men behind to keep watch in the town. Erling
went out of the town on Thursday afternoon, in
the second week of Lent ; and every man had two
days’ provisions with him. They marched by night,
and it was late before they got out of the town
with the men. Two men were with each shield and
each horse ; and the people, when mustered, were
about 1300 men. When they met their spies, they

KINGS OF NOKWAY.

313

were informed that Sigurd was at Re, in a house
called Ramnes, and had 500 men. Then Erling called
together his people ; told them the news he had re¬
ceived ; and all were eager to hasten their march, fall
on them in the houses, or engage them by night.

Erling replied to them thus : “ It is probable that
we and Earl Sigurd shall soon meet. There are also
many men in this band whose handywork remains in
our memories ; such as cutting do^vn King Inge, and
so many more of our friends, that it would take long
to reckon them up. These deeds they did by the
power of Satan, by witchcraft, and by villany ; for it
stands in our laws and country rights, that however
highly a man may have been guilty, it shall be called
villany and cowardly murder to kill him in the night.
This band has had its luck hitherto by following the
counsel of men acquainted with mtchcraft and fight¬
ing by night, and not in the light of day ; and by this
proceeding have they been victorious hitherto over
the chiefs whose heads they have laid low on the
earth. Now we have often seen, and proved, how un¬
suitable and improper it is to go into battle in the
night-time; therefore let us rather have before our
eyes the example of chiefs better known to us, and
who deserve better to be imitated, and fight by open
day in regular battle array, and not steal upon sleep¬
ing men in the night. We have people enough against
them, so few as they are. Let us, therefore, wait
for day and daylight, and keep together in our array
in case they attack us.”

Thereafter the whole army sat down. Some opened
up bundles of hay, and made a bed of it for them¬
selves ; some sat upon their shields, and thus waited
the day-dawn. The weather was raw, and there was
a wet snow-drift.

Earl Sigurd got the first intelligence of Erling’s
army, when it was already near to the house. His men

SAGA XVI.

CuArXEK

Xlll.
Of Earl

314

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XVI.

Sigurd’s

battle

array.

Chapter
XIV.
Earl Si¬
gurd’s fall.

got ii]3, and armed themselves ; but not knoAving hoAV
many men Erling had Avith him, some AA^ere inclined
to fly, but the most determined to stand. Earl Sigurd
Avas a man of understanding, and could talk Avell, but
certainly Avas not considered brave enough to take a
strong resolution ; and indeed the earl shoAved a great
inclination to fly, for Avhich he got many stinging
Avords from his men-at-arms. As day daAvned, they
began on both sides to draAV up their battle array.
Earl Sigurd placed his men on the edge of a ridge be-
tAveen the river and the house, at a place at Avhich a
little stream runs into the river. Erling and his people
placed their array on the other side of the river ; but
at the back of his array Avere men on horseback Avell
armed, Avho had the king Avith them. When Earl Si¬
gurd’s men saAV that there Avas so great a Avant of men
on their side, they held a council, and Avere for taking
to the forest. But Earl Sigurd said, Ye alleged
that I had no courage, but it Avill noAV be proved ; and
let each of you take care not to fail, or fly, before I
do so. We have a good battle-field. Let them cross
the bridge ; but as soon as the banner comes over it
let us then rush doAvn the hill upon them, and none
desert his neighbour.”

Earl Sigurd had on a red-broAvn kirtle, and a red
cloak, of Avhich the corners Avere tied and turned back ;
shoes on his feet ; and a shield and SAvord called Bas¬
tard. The earl said, “ God knoAvs that I Avould rather
get at Erling Skakke Avith a stroke of Bastard, than
receive much gold.”

Erling Skakke’ s army Avished to go on to the bridge ;
but Erling told them to go up along the river, Avhich
Avas small, and not difficult to cross, as its banks Avere
flat ; and they did so. Earl Sigurd’s array proceeded
up along the ridge right opposite to them; but as the
ridge ended, and the ground Avas good and level over
the river, Erling told his men to sing a Paternoster,

KINGS OF NORWAY.

315

and beg God to give them the victory who best de- saga xvi.
served it. Then they all sang aloud “ Kyrie Eleison/’
and struck with their weapons on their shields. But
with this singing 300 men of Erling’s people slipped
away and tied. Then Erling and his people went
across the river, and the earl’s men raised the war-
shout ; but there was no assault from the ridge down
upon Erling’s array, but the battle began upon the
hill itself. They first used spears, then edge weapons;
and the earl’s banner soon retired so far back, that
Erling and his men scaled the ridge. The battle lasted
but a short time before the earl’s men fied to the
forest, which they had close behind them. This was
told Earl Sigurd, and his men bade him fly ; but he
replied, “ Let us on while we can.” And his men
went bravely on, and cut down on all sides. In this
tumult fell Earl Sigurd and John Sweinsson, and
nearly sixty men. Erling lost few men, and pursued
the fugitives to the forest. There Erling halted his
troops, and turned back. He came just as the king’s
slaves were about stripping the clothes off Earl Sigurd,
who was not quite lifeless. He had put his sword
Bastard in the sheath, and it lay by his side. Erling
took it, struck the slaves with it, and drove them
away. Then Erling, with his troops, returned, and
sat down in Tunsberg. Seven days after Earl Sigurd’s
fall Erling’s men took Eindrid Unge prisoner, and
killed him, with all his ship’s crew.

Marcus of Skog, and King Sigurd his foster-son, Cimi^er
rode down to Viken towards spring, and there got a of Marcus
ship; but when Erling heard it he went eastwards
against them, and they met at Konghelle. Marcus spurd
fled with his followers to the island Hising;_ and there
the country-people of Hising came down in swarms,
and placed themselves in Marcus’s and Sigurd’s array.

Erling and his men rowed to the shore ; but Marcus s
men shot at them. Then Erling said to his people.

316

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XVI.

ClIAPTEll
XVI.
Beginning
of Arch¬
bishop
Eystein,

Let us take tkeir ships, but not go up to fight Avith
a land force. The Hisingers are a bad set to quarrel
with, — hard, and without understanding. They Avill
keep this troop but a little while among them, for
Hising is but a small spot.” This was done : they
took the ships, and brought them over to Konghelle.
Marcus and his men Avent up to the forest districts,
from which they intended to make assaults, and they
had spies out on both sides. Erhng had many
men-at-arms with him, Avhom he brought from other
districts, and they made attacks on each other in
turn.

Eystein, a son of Erlend Himald, Avas selected to be
archbishop, after Archbishop Johan’s death ; and he
Avas consecrated the same year King Inge Avas killed.
Noav Avhen Archbishop Eystein came to his see, he
made himself beloved by all the country, as an excel¬
lent active man of high birth. The Drontheim people,
in particular, received him AAuth pleasure ; for most of
the great people in the Drontheim district were con¬
nected Avith the archbishop by relationship or other
connection, and all were his friends. The archbishop
brought forward a request to the bonders in a speech,
in which he set forth the great want of money for the
see, and also how much greater improvement of the
revenues would be necessary to maintain it suitably,
as it Avas noAV of much more importance than formerly
Avhen the bishop’s see Avas first established. He
requested of the bonders that they should give him,
for determining laAV-suits, an ore of silver A^alue,
instead of Avdiat they had before paid, Avhich Avas an
ore of judgment money, of that kind Avhich Avas paid
to the king in judging cases ; and the difference
betAveen the tAVO kinds of ore Avas, that the ore he
desired was a half greater than the other. By help
of the archbishop’s relations and friends, and his o^yn
activity, this Avas carried ; and it Avas fixed by laAV

KINGS OF NORWAY.

317

in all the Drontheim district, and in all the districts saga xvi.
belonging to his archbishopric.

When Sigurd and Marcus lost their ships in the Chapter
Gotha river, and saw they could get no hold on Erling, of Marcus
they went to the Uplands, and proceeded by land
north to Drontheim. Sigurd was received there joy¬
fully, and chosen king at an Ore-thing; and many
gallant men, with their sons, attached themselves to
his party. They fitted out ships, rigged them for a
voyage, and proceeded when summer came southwards
to More, and took up all the royal revenues where¬
soever they came. At this time the following lender-
men were appointed in Bergen for the defence of the
country : — Nicolas Sigurdsson, Nokve Paalsson, and
several military leaders ; as Thoralf Dryll, Thorbiorn
Skatemester, and many others. As Marcus and Sigurd
sailed south, they heard that Erling’s men were
numerous in Bergen ; and therefore they sailed outside
the coast-rocks, and southwards past Bergen. It was
generally remarked, that Marcus’s men always got a
fair wind, wherever they wished to sail to.

As soon as Erling Skakke heard that Sigurd and Chapter

o o X. VIII

Marcus had sailed southwards, he hastened to Yiken, Marcus
and drew together an armed force ; and he soon had
a great many men, and many stout ships. But when tilled,
he came farther in Yiken, he met with a strong con¬
trary wind, which kept him there in port the whole
summer. Now when Sigurd and Marcus came east
to Lister, they heard that Erling had a great force in
Yiken ; so they turned to the north again. But when

The penalties on offences against the law, and the fees for deter¬
mining cases in the Things, appear to have been a main source of the
revenues of the kings. On the establishment of bishops there appear to
have been bishops’ courts for judging of cases coming within clerical
jurisdiction, of which the fees and penalties belonged to the bishopric
revenue. It does not appear that the king’s courts ceased in those dis¬
tricts, as in Drontheim, which had bishops; but only that the fees and
penalties in certain cases belonged to the bishop, not to the king.

318

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XVI.

Chapter
XIX.
Of Erling
and the
people of
Hising
Isle.

they reached Hordaland, with the intention of sailing
to Bergen, and came opposite the town, Nicolas and
his men rowed out against them, with more men and
larger ships than they had. Sigurd and Marcus saw
no other way of escaping but to row away south¬
wards. Some of them went out to sea, others got
south to Sund, and some got into the Fiords. Marcus,
and some people with him, sprang upon an isle called
Skarpa. Nicolas and his men took their ships, gave
John Halkelsson and a few others quarter, but killed
the most of them they could get hold of. Some days
after Eindrid Heidafyla found Sigurd and Marcus, and
they were brought to Bergen. Sigurd was beheaded
outside of Gravdal, and Marcus and another man were
hanged at Hruarfsnes. This took place on Michaelmas
day, and the band which had followed them was dis-

Frederik Keina and Biorne the Bad, Onund Si-
munsson and Arnolf Skarpa, had rowed out to sea
with some ships, and sailed outside along the land to
the east. Wheresoever they came to the land they
plundered, and killed Erling’s friends. Now when
Erling heard that Sigurd and Marcus were killed, he
gave leave to the lendermen and people of the levy to
return home ; but he himself, with his men, set his
course eastward across the Folde fiord for he heard
of Marcus’s men there. Erling sailed to Konghelle,
where he remained the autumn ; and in the first week
of winter Erling went out to the island Eiising with
his men, and called the bonders to a Thing. When
the Hising people came to the Thing, Erling laid his
law-suit against them for having joined the bands of
Sigurd and Marcus, and having raised men against
him. Ozur was the name of one of the greatest of
the bonders on the island, and he answered Erling on

* Folde fiord was the mouth of Christiania fiord.

KINGS OK NORWAY.

319

account of the others. The Thing was long assembled ;
but at the close the bonders gave the case into EiTing’s
own power, and he appointed a meeting in the town
within one week, and named fifteen bonders who
should appear there. When they came, he condemned
them to pay a penalty of 300 head of cattle ; and the
bonders returned home ill pleased at this sentence.
Soon after the Gotha river was frozen, and Erling’s
ships were fast in the ice ; and the bonders kept back
the mulct, and lay assembled for some time. Erling
made a Yule feast in the town ; but the Rising people
had joint-feasts with each other, and kept under arms
during Yule. The night after the fifth day of Yule
Erling went up to Rising, surrounded Ozur’s house,
and burnt him in it. Re killed one hundred men in
all, burnt three houses, and then returned to Kong-
helle. The bonders came then, according to agree¬
ment, to pay the mulct.

Erling Skakke made ready to sail in spring as soon
as he could get his ships afloat for ice, and sailed from
Konghelle ; for he heard that those who had formerly
been Marcus’s friends were marauding in the north of
Viken. Erling sent out spies to learn their doings,
searched for them, and found them lying in a harbour.
Onund Simunsson and Arnolf Skarpa escaped, but
Frederik Keina and Biorne the Bad were taken, and
many of their followers were killed. Erling had Ere-
derik bound to an anchor and thrown overboard; and
for that deed Erling was much detested in the Dron-
theim country, for the most powerful men there were
relatives of Frederik. Erling ordered Biorne the Bad
to be hanged ; and he uttered, according to his custom,
many dreadful imprecations during his execution.
Thorbiorn Skakke-scald tells of this business : —

East of the Fiord beyond the land.

Unnoticed by the pirate band,

Erling stole on them ere they knew.

And seized or killed all Kæne’s crew.

SAGA XVI.

Chapter
XX.
Of the
death of
Frederik
Keina and
Biorne.

320

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XVI.

Chaptek

xxr.

Conference
between
Erling
Skakke
and Arch¬
bishop
Eystein.

Kæne, fast to an anchor bound,

Was thrown into the deep blue Sound ;

And Biorn swung high on gallows-tree,

A sight all good men loved to see.”

Onund and Arnolf, with the band that had escaped,
fled to Denmark; but were sometimes in Gotland, or
in Yiken.

Erling Skakke sailed after this to Tunsberg, and
remained there very long in spring ; but when summer
came he proceeded north to Bergen, where at that
time a great many people were assembled. There
Avas the legate from Borne, Stephanus ; the Archbishop
Eystein, and other bishops of the country. There
Avas also Bishop Brand, who was consecrated bishop of
Iceland, and John Loptsson, a daughter’s son of King
Magnus Barefoot ; and on this occasion King Magnus
and John’s other relations acknowledged the relation¬
ship Avith him.

Archbishop Eystein and Erling Skakke often con¬
versed together in private ; and, among other things,
Erling asked one day, “Is it true, sir, Avhat people
tell me, — that you have raised the value of the ore
upon the people north in Drontheim, in the laAV cases
in Avhich money-fees are paid you? ”

“ It is so,” said the archbishop, “ that the bonders
have alloAved me an advance on the ore of laAV casual¬
ties ; but they did it Avillingly, and Avithout any kind
of compulsion, and have thereby added to their honour
for God and the income of the bishopric.”

Erling replies, “ Is this according to the laAV of the
holy Olaf ? or have you gone to Avork more arbitrarily
in this than is Avritten doAvn in the laAV-book ? ”

The archbishop replies, “ King Olaf the Holy fixed
the laws, to Avhich he received the consent and aifirm-
ative of the people ; but it Avill not be found in his
laAvs that it is forbidden to increase God’s right.”

Erling : “If you augment your right, you must
assist us to augment as much the king’s right.”

KINGS OF NORWAY.

321

The archbishop : “ Thou hast already augmented saga xvt.
enough thy son’s power and dominion; and if I have
exceeded the law in taking an increase of the ore
from the Drontheim people, it is, I think, a much
greater breach of the law that one is king over the
country who is not a king’s son, and which has neither
any support in the law, nor in any precedent here in
the country.”

Erling: “When Magnus was chosen king, it was
done with your knowledge and consent, and also of all
the other bishops here in the country.”

Archbishop: “You promised then, Erling, that
provided we gave you our consent to electing Magnus
king, you would, on all occasions, and with all your
power, strengthen God’s rights.”

Erling: “I may well admit that I have promised
to preserve and strengthen God’s commands, and the
laws of the land with all my power, and with the
king’s strength; and now I consider it to be much
more advisable, instead of accusing each other of a
breach of our promises, to hold firmly by the agree¬
ment entered into between us. Do you strengthen
Magnus in his dominion, according to what you have
promised; and I will, on my part, strengthen your
power in all that can be of advantage or honour.”

The conversation now took a more friendly turn ;
and Erling said, “ Although Magnus was not chosen
king according to what has been the old custom of
this country, yet can you with your power give him
consecration as king, as God’s law prescribes, by
anointing the king to sovereignty ; and although I
be neither a king, nor of kingly race, yet most of the
kings, within my recollection, have not known the
laws or the constitution of the country so well as I do.

Besides, the mother of King Magnus is the daughter
of a king and queen born in lawful wedlock, and

VOL. in. Y

322

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XVI.

Chapter
XXII.
King Mag¬
nus’s con¬
secration.

Magnus is son of a queen and a lawfully married
wife. Now if you will give him royal consecration,
no man can take royalty from him. William Bastard
was not a king’s son ; but he was consecrated and
crowned Idng of England, and the royalty in England
has ever since remained with his race, and all have
been crowned. Now we have here in Norway an
archiepiscopal seat, to the glory and honour of the
country ; let us also have a crowned king, as well as
the Danes and Englishmen.”

Erling and the archbishop afterwards talked often
of this matter, and they were quite agreed. Then
the archbishop brought the business before the legate,
and got him easily persuaded to give his consent.
Thereafter the archbishop called together the bishops,
and other learned men, and explained the subject to
them. They all replied in the same terms, that they
would follow the counsels of the archbishop, and all
were eager to promote the consecration as soon as the
archbishop pleased.

Erling Skakke then had a great feast prepared in
the king’s house. The large hall was covered with
costly cloth and tapestry, and adorned with great
expense. The court-men and all the attendants were
there entertained, and there were numerous guests,
and many chiefs. Then King Magnus received the
royal consecration from the Archbishop Eystein ; and
at the consecration there were live other bishops and
the legate, besides a number of other clergy. Erling
Skakke, and with him twelve other lendermen, admi¬
nistered to the king the oath of the law ; and the day
of the consecration the king and Erling had the
legate, the archbishop, and all the other bishops as
guests ; and the feast was exceedingly magnificent,
and the father and son distributed many great pre¬
sents. King Magnus was then eight years of age,
and had been king for three years.

ívINGS OF NOWAY.

323

When the Danish king Waldemar heard the news
from Norway that Magnus was become king of the
whole country, and all the other parties in the country
were rooted out, he sent his men with a letter to King;
Magnus and Erling, and reminded them of the agree¬
ment which Erling had entered into, under oath, with
King Waldemar, of which we have spoken before ;
namely, that Viken from the east to Kygiarbet should
be ceded to King Waldemar, if Magnus became the
sole king of Norway. When the embassadors came
forward and showed Erling the letter of the Danish
king, and he heard the Danish king’s demand upon
Norway, he laid it before the other chiefs by whose
counsels he usually covered his acts. All, as one man,
replied that the Danes should never hold the slightest
portion of Norway ; for never had times been worse
in the land than when the Danes had power in it.
The embassadors of the Danish king were urgent with
Erling for an answer, and desired to have it decidedly ;
but Erling begged them to proceed with him east to
Viken, and said he would give his final answer when
he had met with the men of most understanding and
influence in Viken.

Erling Skakke proceeded in autumn to Viken, and
staid in Tunsberg, from whence he sent people to
Sarpsburg to summon a Thing of four districts ; and
then Erling went there with his people.

When the Thing was seated Erling made a speech,
in which he explained the resolutions which had been
settled upon between him and the Danish king, the
first time he collected troops against his enemies. I
will,” said Erling, “keep faithfully the agreement
which we then entered into with the king, if it be
your will and consent, bonders, rather to serve the

SA-GtA. XVI*

Chapter
XXIIL
King Wal-
demar’s
embassy.

Chapter
XXIV.
Of Erling
and the
people of
Viken,

* This reference to a Thing of the people in the affairs of the coun¬
try is a striking example of the right of the Things being recognised, in
theory at least, as fully as the right of our parliaments in later times.

Y 2

324

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XVI.

Chapter
XXV.
Of the
letters of
the Dron-
thelm
people.

Danish king than the king who is now consecrated
and crowned king of this country.”

The bonders replied thus to Erling’s speech : “ Never
will we become the Danish king’s men, as long as one
of us Yiken men is in life.” And the whole assembly,
with shouts and cries, called on Erling to keep the
oath he had taken to defend his son’s dominions,
“ should we even all follow thee to battle.” And so
the Thing was dissolved.

The embassadors of the Danish king then returned
home, and told the issue of their errand. The Danes
abused Erling, and all Northmen, and declared that
evil only proceeded from them ; and the report was
spread, that in spring the Danish king would send
out an army and lay waste Norway. Erling returned
in autumn north to Bergen, staid there all winter,
and gave their pay to his people.

The same winter some Danish people came by land
through the Uplands, saying they were to go, as was
then the general practice, to the holy King Olaf’s
festival. But when they came to the Drontheim
country, they went to many men of influence, and
told their business ; which was, that the Danish king
had sent them to desire their friendship, and consent,
if he came to the country, promising them both power
and money. With this verbal message came also the
Danish king’s letter and seal, and a message to the
Drontheim people that they should send back their
letters and seals to him. They did so, and the most
of them received well the Danish king’s message ;
whereupon the messengers returned back towards
Lent. Erling was in Bergen ; and towards spring
Erling’s friends told him the loose reports they had
heard by some merchant vessels that had arrived from
Drontheim, that the Drontheim people were in hostility
openly against him; and had declared that if Erling
came to Drontheim, he should never pass Agdanes

KINGS OF NORWAY.

325

in life. Erling said this was mere folly and idle talk.
Erling now made it known that he would go to
Unarheim to the Gangadag-thing ^ ; and ordered a
cutter of twenty rowing benches to be fitted out, a
boat of fifteen benches, and a provision-ship. When
the vessels were ready, there came a strong southerly
gale. On the Thursday of the Ascension week, Erling
called his people by sound of trumpet to their depar¬
ture ; but the men were loath to leave the town, and
were ill inclined to row against the wind. Erling
brought his vessels to Biskopshafn. “Well,” said
Erling, “ since ye are so unwilling to row against the
wind, raise the mast, hoist the sails, and let the ship
go north.” They did so, and sailed northwards both
day and night. On Wednesday, in the evening, they
sailed in past Agdanes, where they found a fleet
assembled of many merchant vessels, rowing craft,
and boats, all going towards the to^vn to the celebra¬
tion of the festival, — some before them, some behind
them ; so that the townspeople paid no attention to
the long-ships coming.

Erling came to the town just as vespers was being
sung in Christ church. He and his men ran into the
town, to where it was told them that the lenderman
Alf Rode, a son of Ottar Birting, was still sitting at
table, and drinking with his men. Erling fell upon
them ; and Alf was killed, with almost all his men.
Few other men were killed; for they had almost all
gone to church, as this was the night before Christ’s
ascension day. In the morning early, Erling called all
the people by sound of trumpet to a Thing out upon
Ore. At the Thing Erling laid a charge against the
Drontheim people, accusing them of intending to
betray the country, and take it from the king; and
named Baard Standal, Paal Andresson, and Raza

* Gangadag-thing — a Thing held on the procession days in Ascen¬
sion week.

Y 3

SAGA XVI.

Chapter
XXVL
Of Erling
and the
people of
Drontheim.

326

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XVI.

Chapter
XXVII.
Of King
Wal de-
mar’s ex¬
pedition to
Norway.

Baard, who then presided over the town’s affairs,
and many others. They, in their defence, denied the
accusation; but Erling’s writer stood up, produced
many letters with seals, and asked if they acknowledged
their seals which they had sent to the Danish king ;
and thereupon the letters were read. There was also
a Danish man with Erling who had gone with the
letters in winter, and whom Erling for that purpose
had taken into his service. He told to these men the
very words which each of them had used. And you.
Baza Baard, spoke, striking your breast ; and the very
words you used were, ^ Out of this breast are all these
counsels produced.’ ” Baard replied, “ I was wrong
in the head, sirs, when I spoke so.” There was now
nothing to be done but to submit the case entirely
to the sentence Erling might give upon it. He took
great sums of money from many as fines, and con¬
demned all those who had been killed as lawless, and
their deeds as lawless ; making their deaths thereby
not subject to mulct. Then Erling returned to
Bergen.

The Danish King Waldemar assembled in spring a
great army, and proceeded with it north to Yiken.
As soon as he reached the dominions of the kino; of
Norway, the bonders assembled in a great multitude.
The king advanced peacefully ; but when they came to
the mainland, the people shot at them even when there
were only two or three together, from which the ill-
will of the country-people towards them was evident.
When they came to Tunsberg, King Waldemar sum¬
moned a Hauga-thing ; but nobody attended it from
the country parts. Then Waldemar spoke thus to his
troops : “ It is evident that all the country-people are
against us ; and now we have two things to choose :
the one to go through the country, sword in hand,
sparing neither man nor beast ; the other is to go
back without effecting our object. And it is more my

KINGS OF NOEWAY.

327

inclination to go with the army to the East against the
heathens, of whom we have enough before us in the
East country, than to kill Christian people here,
although they have well deserved it.” All the others
had a greater desire for a foray ; but the king ruled,
and they all returned back to Denmark without eifect-
ing their purpose. They pillaged, however, all around
in the distant islands, or where the king was not in
the neighbourhood. They then returned south to
Denmark without doing any thing.

As soon as Erling heard that a Danish force had
come to Viken, he ordered a levy through all the land,
both of men and ships, so that there was a great
assemblage of men in arms ; and with this force he
proceeded eastward along the coast. But when he
came to Lindisness, he heard that the Danish army
had returned south to Denmark, after plundering all
around them in Yiken. Then Erling gave all the
people of the levy permission to return home ; but he
himself and some lendermen, with many vessels, sailed
to J utland after the Danes. When they came to a place
called Dyrsaa, the Danes who had returned from the
expedition lay there with many ships. Erling gave
them battle, and there was a fight, in which the
Danes soon fled with the loss of many people ; and
Erling and his men plundered the ships and the town,
and made a great booty, with which they returned to
Norway. Thereafter, for a time, there was hostility
between Norway and Denmark.

The princess Christina went south in autumn to
Denmark, to visit her relation King Waldemar, who
was her cousin. The king received her kindly, and
gave her fiefs in his kingdom, so that she could sup¬
port her household well. She often conversed with
the king, who was remarkably kind towards her. In
the spring following Christina sent to Erling, and
begged him to pay a visit to the Danish king, and

Y 4

SAGA XVI.

Chapter
XXVIIL
Of Erling’s
expedition
to Jutland.

Chapter
XXIX.
Of Erling’s
expedition
to Den¬
mark.

328

CI-mONICLE OF THE

SAGA XVI. enter into a peace with him. In summer Erling was
in Viken, where he fitted out a long-ship, manned it
with his finest lads, and sailed (a single ship) over to
Jutland. When he heard that the Danish king
Waldemar was in Randeros"^, Erling sailed thither,
and came to the town just as the king sat at the
dinner-table, and most of the people were taking their
meal. When his people had made themselves ready
according to Erling’s orders, set up the ship-tents,
and made fast the ship, Erling landed with twelve
men, all in armour, with hats over their helmets, and
swords under their cloaks. They went to the king’s
lodging, where the doors stood open, and the dishes
were being carried in. Erling and his people went in
immediately, and drew up in front of the high seat.
Erling said, “ Peace and safe conduct we desire, king,
both here and to return home.”

“The king looked at him, and said, “Art thou
here, Erling ? ”

He replies, “ Here is Erling ; and tell us, at once, if
we shall have peace and safe conduct.”

There Avere eighty of the king’s men in the room,
but all unarmed. The king replies, “ Peace ye shall
have, Erling, according to thy desire ; for I Avill not
use force or villany against a man Avho comes to visit
me.”

Erling then kissed the king’s hand, Avent out, and
doAvn to his ship. Erling staid at Randeros some
time Avith the king, and they talked about terms of
peace betAveen them and between the countries. They
agreed that Erling should remain as hostage AAdth the
Danish king ; and that Asbiorn Snare, Bishop Absa-
lon’s brother, should go to Noiuvay as hostage on the
other part.

Chapter In a conference Avhich Kinsr Waldemar and Erlinof

XXX ^ ^

Conversa- oiice had together, Erling said, “ Sire, it a|)pears to

tion be-

* Randeros — town of Randers in North Jutland.

KINGS OK NOEWAY.

329

me likely that it might lead to a peace between the
countries if you got that part of Norway which was
promised you in our agreement ; but if it should be
so, what chief would you place over it? Would he be
a Dane?’’

“No,” rephed the king ; “no Danish chief would go
to Norway, where he would have to manage an obsti¬
nate hard people, when he has it so easy here with
me.”

Erling: “ It was on that very consideration that I
came here; for I would not on any account in the
world deprive myself of the advantage of your friend¬
ship. In days of old other men, Hakon Ivarsson
and Finn Arneson, came also from Norway to Den¬
mark, and your predecessor King Swend made them
both earls. Now I am not a man of less power in
Norway than they were then, and my influence is not
less than theirs ; and the king gave them the province
of Halland to rule over, which he himself had and
owned before. Now it appears to me, sire, that you,
if I become your man and vassal, can allow me to
hold of you the fief which my son Magnus will not
deny me, by which I will be bound in duty, and ready,
to undertake all the service belonging to that title.”

Erling spoke such things, and much more in the
same strain, until it came at last to this, that Erling
became Waldemar’s man and vassal; and the king led
Erling to the earl’s seat one day, and gave him the
title of earl, and Yiken as a fief under his rule. Earl
Erling went thereafter to Norway, and was earl after¬
wards as long as he lived; and also the peace with the
Danish king was afterwards always well preserved.
Earl Erling had four sons by his concubines. The one
was called Keidar, the next Ogmund ; and these by
two different mothers : the third was called Finn; the
fourth Sigurd : these were younger, and their mother
was Asa the Fair. The princess Christina and Earl

SAGA XVI.

tween King
Waldemar
and Erling.

330

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XVI.

Chapter
XXXI.
Beginning
of Olaf.

Chapter
XXXIL
Of Erling.

Erling had a daughter called Eagnhild, who was mar¬
ried to John Thorbergsson of Eaudaberg. Christina
went away from the country with a man called Grim
Eusli ; and they went to Constantinople, where they
were for a time, and had some children.

Olaf, a son of Gudbrand Skafhaug, and Maria, a
daughter of King Eystein Magnusson, were brought up
in the house of Sigurd Agnhatt in the Uplands. While
Earl Erling was in Denmark, Olaf and his foster-father
gathered a troop together, and many Upland people
joined them; and Olaf was chosen king by them. They
went with their bands through the Uplands, and some¬
times down to Yiken, and sometimes east to the forest
settlements ; but never came on board of ships. Kow
when Earl Erling got news of this troop, he hastened
to Yiken with his forces; and was there in summer in
his ships, and in Opslo in autumn, and kept Yule
there. He had spies up the country after this troop,
and went himself, along with Orm the King -brother,
up the country to follow them. Now when they came
to a lake in Sweden called Yæneren, they took all the
vessels that were upon the lake.

The priest who performed divine service at a place
called Eydiokul, close by the lake, invited the earl to
a feast at Candlemas. The earl promised to come ;
and thinking it would be good to hear mass there, he
rowed with his attendants over the lake the night
before Candlemas day. But the priest had another
plan on hand. He sent men to bring Olaf news of
Earl Erling’s arrival. The priest gave Erling strong
drink in the evening, and let him have an excessive
quantity of it. When the earl wished to lie down
and sleep, the beds were made ready in the drinking-
room ; but when they had slept a short time the earl
awoke, and asked if it was not the hour for matins.
The priest replied, that only a small part of the night
was gone, and told him to sleep in peace. The earl

KINGS OF NORWAY.

331

replied, I dream of many things to-night, and I
sleep ill.” He slumbered again, but awoke soon, and
told the priest to get up and sing mass. The priest
told the earl to sleep, and said it was but midnight.
Then the earl again lay down, slept a little while, and,
springing out of bed, ordered his men to put on their
clothes. They did so ; took their weapons, went to
the church, and laid their arms outside while the
priest was singing matins.

As Olaf got the message in the evening, they tra¬
velled in the night six miles which people considered
an extraordinarily long march. They arrived at Ry-
diokul while the priest was still singing mass, and it
was pitch-dark. Olaf and his men went into the
room, raised a war-shout, and killed some of the earl’s
men who had not gone to the early mass. Now when
Erling and his men heard the war-shout, they ran to
their weapons, and hastened down to their ships.
Olaf and his men met them at a fence, at which there
was a sharp conflict. Erling and his men retreated
along the fence, which protected them. Erling had
far feAver men, and many of them had fallen, and still
more Avere Avounded. What helped Earl Erling and
his men the most was, that Olaf’s men could not dis¬
tinguish them, it was so dark ; and the earl’s men
Avere always draAving doAvn to their ships. Are
Thorgeirsson, father of Bishop Gudmund, fell there,
and many others of Erling’ s court-men, Erling him¬
self was wounded in the left side ; but some say he
did it himself in drawing his sword. Orm the King-
brother was also severely wounded ; and with great
difficulty they escaped to their ships, and instantly
pushed off from land. It was generally considered
as a most unlucky meeting for Olaf’s people, as Earl
Erling Avas in a manner sold into their hands, if they

SAGA XVI.

Chapter
XXXIII.
Battle at
Rydiokul.

About forty “three English miles.

332

CHKONICLE OF THE

SAGA XVI.

Chapter
XXXIV.
Battle at
Stanger.

Chapter

XXXV.

Harald’s

death

had proceeded with common prudence. He was after¬
wards called Olaf the Unlucky ; but others called his
people Hat-lads. They went with their bands through
the Uplands as before. Erling again went down to
Yiken to his ships, and remained there all summer.
Olaf was in the Uplands, and sometimes east in the
forest districts, where he and his troop remained all
the next winter.

The following spring the Hat-lads went down to
Viken, and raised the king’s taxes all around, and
remained there long in summer. When Earl Erling
heard this, he hastened with his troops to meet them
in Yiken, and fell in with them east of the Eiord, at
a place called Stanger ; where they had a great battle,
in which Erling was victorious. Sigurd Agnhat, and
many others of Olaf’s men, fell there; but Olaf escaped
by flight, went south to Denmark, and was all winter
in Aalborg in Jutland. The following spring Olaf
fell into an illness which ended in death, and he was
buried in the Maria church ; and the Danes call him
a saint.

King Magnus had a lenderman called Nicolas Ku-
fung, who was a son of Paul Skoptesson. He took
Harald prisoner, who called himself a son of King
Sigurd Haraldsson and the princess Christina, and a
brother of King Magnus by the mother’s side. Nicolas
brought Harald to Bergen, and delivered him into
Earl Erling’s hands. It was Erling’s custom when
his enemies came before him, that he either said no¬
thing to them, or very little, and that in all gentleness,
Avhen he had determined to put them to death ; or rose
with furious words against them, when he intended
to spare their hves. Erling spoke but little to Harald,
and many, therefore, suspected his intentions ; and
some begged King Magnus to put in a good word for
Harald with the earl : and the king did so. The earl
replies, “ Thy friends advise thee badly. Thou wouldst

KINGS OF NORWAY.

333

govern this kingdom but a short time in peace and
safety, if thou wert to follow the counsels of the heart
only.’’ Earl Erling ordered Harald to be taken to
the North-ness, where he was beheaded.

There was a man called Eystein, who gave himself
out for a son of King Eystein Harald sson. He was
at this time young, and not full-grown. It is told of
him that he one summer appeared in Sweden, and
went to earl Birgar Brose, who was then married to
Eystein’ s aunt, a daughter of King Harald Gille.
Eystein explained his business to them, and asked
their assistance. Both Earl Birgar and his wife
listened to him in a friendly way, and promised him
their confidence, and he staid with them a while.
Earl Birgar gave him some assistance of men, and a
good sum for travelling expenses ; and both promised
him their friendship on his taking leave. Thereafter
Eystein proceeded north into NoiAvay, and when he
came down to Yiken people flocked to him in crowds ;
and Eystein was there proclaimed king, and he re¬
mained in Yiken in winter. As they were very poor
in money, they robbed all around, wherefore the len-
dermen and bonders raised men against them ; and
being thus overpowered by numbers, they fled away
to the forests and deserted hill grounds, where they
lived for a long time. Their clothes being worn out,
they wound the bark of the birch-tree about their
legs, and thus were called by the bonders Birke-
beiners."^ They often rushed down upon the settled
rlistricts, pushed on here or there, and made an assault
where they did not find many people to oppose them.
They had several battles with the bonders with various
success ; and the Birkebeiners held three battles in
regular array, and gained the victory in them all.
At Krogskoven they had nearly made an unlucky

SAGA xvr.

Chapter
XXXVI.
Of Eystein
Eysteins-
son and
the Birke¬
beiners.

* Birkebeinar-— Birch-legs.

334

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XVI.

Chapter
XXXVIL
Of the
Birke-
beiners,
King Eys-
tein, and
Erling
Skakke.

expedition, for a great number of bonders and men-
at-arms were assembled there against them; but the
Birkebeiners felled brushwood across the roads, and
retired into the forest. They were two years in Yiken
before they showed themselves in the northern parts
of the country.

Magnus had been king for thirteen years when the
Birkebeiners first made their appearance. They got
themselves ships in the third summer, with which
they sailed along the coast gathering goods and men.
They were first in Yiken ; but when summer advanced
they proceeded northwards, and so rapidly that no
news preceded them until they came to Drontheim.
The Birkebeiners’ troop consisted principally of bill-
men and river-borderers, and many were from Thele-
mark ; and all were well armed. Their king, Ey stein,
was a handsome man, with a little but good counte¬
nance ; and he was not of great stature, for his men
called him Eystein the Small. King Magnus and
Earl Erling were in Bergen when the Birkebeiners
sailed past it to the north ; but they did not hear of
them.

Earl Erling was a man of great understanding and
power, an excellent leader in war, and an able and
prudent ruler of the country ; but he had the charac¬
ter of being cruel and severe. The cause of this was
principally that he never allowed his enemies to remain
in the country, even when they prayed to him for
mercy ; and therefore many joined the bands which
were collected against him. Erling was a tall, strong-
made man, somewhat short-necked and high-shoulder¬
ed ; had a long and sharp countenance of a light com¬
plexion, and his hair became very grey. He bore his
head a little on one side ; was free and agreeable in
his manners. He wore the old fashion of clothes, —
long body-pieces and long arms to his coats, foreign
cloak, and high shoes. He made the king wear the

IQNGS OF NORWAY.

335

same kind of dress in his youth ; hut when he grew
up, and acted for himself, he dressed very sump¬
tuously.

King Magnus was of a light turn of mind, full of
jokes ; a great lover of mirth, and not less of women.

Nicolas was a son of Sigurd Hranesson and of
Skialdvor a daughter of Bryniolf Ulfalde, and a sister
of Haldor Bryniolfsson by the father’s side, and of
King Magnus Barefoot by the mother’s side. Nicolas
was a distinguished chief, who had a farm at Aungul
in Halogaland, which was called Steig. Nicolas had
also a house in Nidaros, below Saint John’s church,
where Thorgeir the scribe lately dwelt. Nicolas was
often in the town, and was the president of the towns¬
people. Skialdvor, Nicolas’s daughter, was married
to Eric Arneson, who was also a lenderman.

As the people of the town were coming from matins
the last day of Marymas, Eric came up to Nicolas,
and said, “ Here are some fishermen come from the
sea, who report that some long- ships are sailing into
the fiord; and people conjecture that these may be
the Birkebeiners. It would be advisable to call the
townspeople together with the war-horns, to meet
under arms out on the Ore.”

Nicolas replies, “ I don’t go after fishermen’s re¬
ports ; but I shall send out spies to the fiord, and in
the mean time hold a Thing to-day.”

Eric went home; but when they were ringing to
high mass, and Nicolas was going to church, Eric
came to him again, and said, “ I believe the news to
be true ; for here are men who say they saw them
under sail: and I think it would be most advisable to
ride out of town, and gather men with arms ; for it
appears to me the townspeople will be too few.”

Nicolas replies, “ Thou art mixing every thing to¬
gether : let us first hear mass, and then take our
resolution.”

SAGA XVI.

Chapter
XXXV TIL
Of Nicolas.

Chapter
XXXIX.
Of Eric and
Nicolas.

336

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA xvr.

Chapter

XL.

The fall of
Nicolas.

Chapter

XLI.

Eystein

proclaimed

king.

Nicolas then went into the church. When the
mass was over Eric went to Nicolas, and said, “ My
horses are saddled ; I will ride away.’’

Nicolas replies, “ Farewell, then: we mil hold a
Thing to-day on the Ore, and examine what force of
men there may he in the to^vn.”

Eric rode away, and Nicolas went to his house, and
then to dinner.

The meat was scarcely put on the table, when a
man came into the house to tell Nicolas that the
Birkebeiners were rowing up the river. Then Nicolas
called to his men to take their weapons. When they
were armed Nicolas ordered them to go up into the
loft. But that was a most imprudent step ; for if they
had remained in the yard, the townspeople might have
come to their assistance ; but now the Birkebeiners
filled the whole yard, and from thence scrambled from
all sides up to the loft. They called to Nicolas, and
offered him quarter, but he refused it. Then they
attacked the loft. Nicolas and his men defended
themselves with bow-shot, hand-shot, and stones of
the chimney ; but the Birkebeiners hewed down the
houses, broke up the loft, and returned shot for shot
from bow or hand. Nicolas had a red shield in which
were gilt nails, and about it was a border of stars.
The Birkebeiners shot so that the arrows went in up
to the arrow-feather. Then said Nicolas, “ My shield
deceives me.” Nicolas and a number of his people
fell, and his death was greatly lamented. The Birke¬
beiners gave all the townspeople their lives.

Eystein was then proclaimed king, and all the people
submitted to him. He staid a while in the town, and
then went into the interior of the Drontheim land,
where many joined him, and among them Thorfin
Swart of Snaas with a troop of people. When the
Birkebeiners, in the beginning of winter, came again
into the town, the sons of Gudrun from Saltness,

KINGS OF NORWAY.

337

John Kettling, Sigurd, and William joined them; saga xvi.
and when they proceeded afterwards from Nidaros
up Orkadal, they could number nearly 2000 men.

They afterwards went to the Uplands, and on to
Thoten and Hadaland, and from thence to Uin-
garige, and subdued the country wheresoever they
came.

King Magmus went eastward to Yiken in autumn (::h after
with a part of his men, and with him Orm the king’s The fail ’
brother ; but Earl Erling remained behind in Bergen
to meet the Birkebeiners in case they took the sea
route. King Magnus went to Tunsberg, where he and
Orm held their Yule. When King Magnus heard that
the Birkebeiners were up in Be, the king and Orm
proceeded there with their men. There was much
snow, and it was dreadfully cold. When they came to
the farm they left the beaten track on the road, drew
up their array outside of the fence, and trod a path
through the snow with their men, who were not quite
1500 in number. The Birkebeiners were dispersed
here and there in other farms, a few men in each
house. When they perceived King Magnus’s army
they assembled, and drew up in regular order ; and as
they thought their force was larger than his, which it
actually was, they resolved to tight ; but when they
hurried forward to the road only a few could advance
at a time, which broke their array, and the men fell
who first advanced upon the beaten Avay. Then the
Birkebeiners’ banner was cut down ; those Avho Avere
nearest gave way, and some took to flight. King
Magnus’s men pursued them, and killed one after
the other as they came up with them. Thus the
Birkebeiners could never form themselves in array;
and being exposed to the weapons of the enemy
singly, many of them fell, and many fled. It hap¬
pened here, as it often does, that although men be

VOL. III. z

338

CHRONICLE OF THE

SAGA XVI. brave and gallant, if they have once been defeated
• and driven to flight, they will not easily be brought
to turn round. Now the main body of the Birke-
beiners began to fly, and many fell ; because Magnus’s
men killed all they could lay hold of, and not one of
them got quarter. The whole body became scattered
far and wide. Ey stein in his flight ran into a house,
and begged for his life, and that the bonder would
conceal him ; but the bonder killed him, and then
went to King Magnus, whom he found at Kamnes,
where the king was in a room warming himself by
the fire along with many people. Some went for the
corpse, and bore it into the room, where the king told
the people to come and inspect the body. A man
was sitting on a bench in the corner, and he was a
Birkebeiner, but nobody had observed him ; and when
he saw and recognised his chief’s body he sprang up
suddenly and actively, rushed out upon the floor, and
with an axe he had in his hands made a blow at
King Magnus’s neck between the shoulders. A man
saw the axe swinging, and pulled the king to a side,
by which the axe struck lower in the shoulder, and
made a large wound. He then raised the axe again,
and made a blow at Orm the King-brother, who was
lying on a bench, and the blow was directed at both
his legs ; but Orm, seeing the man about to kill him,
drew in his feet instantly, threw them over his head,
and the blow fell on the bench, in which the axe stuck
fast ; and then the blows at the Birkebeiner came so
thick that he could scarcely fall to the ground. It
was discovered that he had dragged his entrails after
him over the floor ; and this man’s bravery was highly
praised. King Magnus’s men followed the fugitives,
and killed so many that they were tired of it. Thor-
finn of Snaas, and a very great number of Drontheim
people, fell there.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

339

The faction which called itself the Birkebeiners had
gathered together in great numbers. They were a
hardy people, and the boldest of men under arms;
but wild, and going forward madly when they had a
strong force. They had few men in their faction who
were good counsellors, or accustomed to rule a country
by law, or to head an army ; and if there were such
men among them who had more knowledge, yet the
many would only allow of those measures which they
liked, trusting always to their numbers and courage.*
Of the men who escaped many were wounded, and
had lost both their clothes and their arms, and were
altogether destitute of money. Some went east to
the borders, some all the way east to Sweden ; but
the most of them went to Telemark, where they had
their families. All took flight, as they had no hope
of getting their lives from King Magnus or Earl
Erling.

King Magnus then returned to Tunsberg, and got
great renown by this victory ; for it had been an ex¬
pression in the mouths of all, that Earl Erling was
the shield and support of his son and himself. But

SAGA XVI.

Chapter
XLIII.
Of the
Birke¬
beiners.

Chapter
XLIV.
Of King
Magnus
Erlingsson.

* This faction of the Birkebemers_, of which the origin is here re¬
lated by Snorro, became very celebrated under another leader_, Swerrer,
whom they raised to the throne upon a very doubtful title; and it was
predominant for about ninety years, or until the death of Hakon
Hakonson, in the affairs of Norway. Their opponents were called the
Cowl-men at first, afterwards the Baglers; and the conflicts between
these two factions occupy much of the interesting sagas of King
Swerrer and his successors, for a century after the period at which
Snorro^s chronicle ends. They well deserve a translation, especially
Swerrer’s saga. The two factions, the Birkebeiners and Baglers, appear
to have become at last the king’s party and the church’s party, in the
contention for power between the state and the church which was car¬
ried on in every country of Europe in the 12th and 13th centuries.
The Birkebeiners enabled King Swerrer to oppose the churchmen much
more successfully than any contemporary sovereigns. These Birke¬
beiners, the vikings of the forest, were bred under him, and attached to
him and his race alone.

z 2

CHRONICLE OF THE KINGS OF NORWAY.

after gaining a victory over so strong and numerous
a force with fewer troops, King Magnus was con¬
sidered by all as surpassing other leaders, and that he
would become a warrior as much greater than his
father Earl Erling as he was younger.

END OF THE HEIMSKRINGLA.

APPENDIX.

Z 3

4 ■■»'•• -y ’^w

:kv:'

-'r.H’U 'i

.<s;l

-13^

* “ i^; í 1.^

• - ^ \

>1 i

t\

fir. ^:.', _.i .•./•1»'..;, ;>« Vd- ’ijhtf.

^•{i '' , ; -Irí ,1,^ . •: -•K'^-'

• >^-r

ý. *

t':'

-tt . ^írNíJt:* < n‘< •._.f- u. ♦3í';.v-..', -», V _

' :.í *" -f'CIÉ.t' ■• i ' ' *fiU HhJÍ^

> T. ,. í|*>_

#*<*»<.

l

■ í •':

\ i'.

#f . •

. y •

. f

■ ■ - -■ -T«

4*; ‘ -. '■ " • 'Íí

X'h*' ■ ■’“ -
V' •*:"', ' -• ,

■ fðiLi' « • /'" > -*

Si.

Q '/í il '1 T A

^ >% , ■ » *' • .

'(^f

*

I «

•Ji

i

♦*Aí‘rf7»'

■ ^•i'

«1 .

i t.

.•4 *

■^. ^ *ý!k.gitf , ^ í;ýý

APPENDIX.

APPENDIX.

In 1697 Peringskiold published the first edition of the
Heimskringla,” with a Swedish and a Latin translation.
The manuscripts which he used are not now extant^ or are
not known; but are considered by Icelandic scholars^ from
orthographical and other variations, not to have been ancient,
nor faithful copies of the most ancient manuscripts. The
edition commenced in 1777 by Schoning under the aus¬
pices of the Danish government, and finished 1826 by Thor-
lacius and Werlauf (the death of Schoning having suspended
the publication), in six volumes folio, was formed from the
collation of three ancient manuscripts in the Arnæi Magnei
Collection, and from Peringskiold’s edition. The following
eight chapters are considered by the antiquaries an interpola¬
tion by the writer of the manuscript which Peringskiold had
before him, not being in the other three manuscripts extant ;
but they are admitted to be of an age prior to the end of the
14th century, being found verbatim in the Codex Flatoy-
ensis,” which was written between 1387 and 1395 in the
saga of Olaf Tryggvesson. If they were not used by Snorro
Sturleson himself, the just inference is, not that they were of
later date than his time, but that they were not materials
connected with his work — • with a chronicle of the kings of
Norway. Where they are placed in Peringskiold’s Heim¬
skringla” they are evidently an interpolation, breaking the
continuity of the story of Olaf Tryggvesson immediately
after Chapter CIV. with new persons and events never re¬
curring again, in a way which the natural tact and taste of
Snorro never allow him to do. They are not the less remark¬
able as being certainly committed to writing between 1387
and 1395, and in Iceland, a century nearly before Columbus,
in 1477, repaired to that country to obtain the nautical in¬
formation on which he proceeded in his first voyage of disco¬
very in 1492. The following are the eight chapters.

There are other interpolations in the manuscript from

z 4

344

CHRONICLE OF THE

APPENDIX.

Chatter

I.

Of the
voyage of
Biarnö the
son of
Heriulf.'

which Peringskiold published his edition of the Heim-
skringla” — such as the twentieth chapter of Harald Herda-
breid’s saga, and the twenty-fourth and twenty-fifth of the
saga of Sigurd, Inge, and Eystein, all containing miracles of
Saint Olaf ; and chapter 1 02. of Harald Haardrades’s saga,
containing genealogies, and probably other passages con¬
cerning Saint Olaf ’s sanctity ; but as these are short, do
not, like the eight chapters, break the continuity of narrative,
and do not stand totally unconnected with what goes before or
comes after, and with the personages in Snorro’s work, they
are admitted into the body of the work in all the translations
of the Heimskringla.”

Heriulf was a son of Bard Heriulfsson, who was a rela¬
tion of Ingolf the landnaman.* Ingolf gave Heriulf land
between Vog and Beikaness. Heriulf dwelt first at Drop-
stock. His wife was called Thorgird, and their son was
called Biarne. He was a promising young man. In his
earliest youth he had a desire to go abroad, and he soon
gathered property and reputation ; and he was by turns
a year abroad, and a year with his father. Biarne was soon
possessor of a merchant ship of his own. The last winter,
while he was in Norway, Heriulf prepared to go to Green¬
land Avith Eric, and gave up his dwelling. There Avas a
Christian man belonging to the Hebudes along Avith Heriulf,
who composed the lay called the Hafgerdingar f Song, in
which is this stave : —

‘‘ May He whose hand protects so well
The simple monk in lonely cell,

And o’er the world upholds the sky,

His own blue hall, still stand me by !”

Heriulf settled at Heriulfsness J, and became a very distin¬
guished man. Eric Bed took up his abode at Brattalid, and
was in great consideration, and honoured by all. These Avere
Eric’s children, — Leif, Thorvald, and Thorstein; and his
daughter Avas called Ereydis. She Avas married to a man

* The original settlers in Iceland were called Landnamen.

■)■ Hafgerding means the circle of high waves raised by currents in
particular spots in the ocean.

f Heriulfsness, Brattalid, Gardar, are localities in Greenland not now
known.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

345

called Thorvald ; and they dwelt at Gardar, which is now a
bishop’s seat. She was a haughty proud woman ; and he was
but a mean man. She was much given to gathering wealth.
The people of Greenland were heathen at this time.

Biarne came the same summer with his ship to the strand *
which his father had sailed abroad from in spring. He
was much struck with the news, and would not unload his
vessel. When his crew asked him what he intended to do,
he replied, that he was resolved to follow his old custom of
taking up his winter abode with his father. “ So I will steer
for Greenland, if ye will go with me.” They one and all
agreed to go with him. Biarne said, Our expedition will be
thought foolish, as none of us have ever been on the Green¬
land sea before.” Nevertheless they set out to sea as soon as
they were ready, and sailed for three days, until they lost
sight of the land they had left. But when the wind failed,
a north wind with fog set in, and they knew not where they
were sailing to ; and this lasted many days. At last they
saw the sun, and could distinguish the quarters of the sky ;
so they hoisted sail again, and sailed a whole day and night,
when they made land. They spoke among themselves about
what this land could be, and Biarne said that, in his opinion,
it could not be Greenland. On the question, if he should sail
nearer to it, he said, It is my advice that we sail close up to
this land.” They did so ; and they soon saw that the land
was without mountains (fielde), was covered with wood, and
that there were small hills inland. They left the land on the
larboard side, and had their sheet on the land side. Then
they sailed two days and nights before they got sight of land
again. They asked Biarne if he thought this would be
Greenland; but he gave his opinion that this land was no
more Greenland than the land they had seen before. For on
Greenland, it is said, there are great snow-mountains.” They

* Æyrar. This is not the name of a place, — for Heriulf dwelt in
Iceland at a place called Dropstock, — but of a natural feature of ground;
Eyri, still called an ayre in the Orkney Islands, being a flat sandy
tongue of land, suitable for landing and drawing up boats upon. All
ancient dwellings in those islands, and probably in Iceland also, are
situated so as to have the advantage of this kind of natural wharf; and
the spit of land called an ayre very often has a small lake or pond
inside of it which shelters boats.

APPENDIX.

346

CHRONICLE OF THE

APPENDIX.

Cxi AFTER

II.

Of Leif
Ericsson’s
discovery of
land.

soon came near to this land, and saw it was flat and covered
with trees. Now, as the wind fell, the ship’s people talked
of its being advisable to make for the land ; but Biarne
would not agree to it. They thought they would need wood
and water; but Biarne said, Ye are not in want of either.”
And the men blamed him for this. He ordered them to hoist
the sail, which was done. They now turned the ship’s bow
from the land, and kept the sea for three days and nights
with a fine breeze from south-west. Then they saw a third
land, which was high and mountainous, and with snowy
mountains. Then they asked Biarne if he would land here ;
but he refused altogether. For in my opinion this land is
not what we want.” Now they let the sails stand, and kept
along the land, and saw it was an island. Then they turned
from the land, and stood out to sea with the same breeze ;
but the gale increased, and Biarne ordered a reef to be taken
in, and not to sail harder than the ship and her tackle could
easily bear. After sailing three days and nights they made,
the fourth time, land ; and when they asked Biarne if he
thought this was Greenland or not, Biarne replies, This is
most like what has been told me of Greenland ; and here we
shall take to the land.” They did so, and came to the land
in the evening under a ness, where they found a boat. On
this ness dwelt Biarne’s father Heriulf ; and from that it
is Heriulfsness. Biarne went to his father’s, gave up sea¬
faring, and dwelt with his father Heriulf as long as he lived ;
and after his father’s death continued to dwell there when at
home.*

It is next to be told that Biarne Heriulfsson came over
from Greenland to Norway on a visit to Earl Eric, who
received him well. Biarne tells of this expedition of his, on
which he had discovered unknown lands ; and people thought
he had not been very curious to get knowledge, as he could
not give any account of those countries, and he was some¬
what blamed on this account. Biarne was made a court-man
of the earl, and the summer after he went over to Greenland ;
and afterwards there was much talk about discoveriiiii un-

* This voyage and discovery of America by Biarne Heriulfsson is
supposed by the northern antiquaries to have taken place in the year
986.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

347

known lands. Leif, a son of Eric Red of Brattalid, went appendix.
over to Biarne Heriulfsson and bought the ship from him,
and manned the vessel, so that in all there were thirty-five
men on board. Leif begged his father Eric to go as com¬
mander of the expedition, but he excused himself ; saying he
was getting old, and not so able as formerly to undergo the
hardships of a sea voyage. Leif insisted that he among all
their relations was the most likely to have good luck on such
an expedition : and Eric consented, and rode from home with
Leif when they had got all ready for sea ; but when they
were coming near to the ship the horse on which Eric was
riding stumbled, and he fell from the horse and hurt his foot.

It is not destined,” said Eric, that I should discover more
lands than this of Greenland, on which we dwell and live ;
and now we must not run hastily into this adventure.” Eric
accordingly returned home to Brattalid ; but Leif, with his
comrades, in all thirty-five men, rigged out their vessel.

There was a man from the South country called Tyrker with
the expedition. They put the ship in order, and went to sea
when they were ready. They first came to the land which
Biarne had last discovered, sailed up to it, cast anchor, put out
a boat, and went on shore ; but there was no grass to be seen.

There were huge snowy mountains up the country ; but all
the way from the sea up to these snowy ridges the land was
one field of snow, and it appeared to them a country of no ad¬
vantages. Leif said, It shall not be said of us, as it was of
Biarne, that we did not come upon the land ; for I will give
the country a name, and call it Helloland.* Then they went
on board again, put to sea, and found another land. They
sailed in towards it, cast anchor, put out a boat, and landed.

The country was flat and overgrown with wood ; and the
strand far around consisted of a white sand, and low towards
the sea. Then Leif said, “We shall give this land a name
according to its kind, and call it Markland.”t Then they
hastened on board, and put to sea again with an on-shore
wind from north-east, and were out for two days, and made
land. They sailed towards it, and came to an island which

* Helloland is a naked land of rocks — Hellr.

t Markland, a wooded country. Mark is the woodland of a farm.

The antiquaries consider Helloland to have been Newfoundland, and
Markland some part of Nova Scotia, from the description.

348

CHRONICLE OE THE

APPENDIX.

Chapter

III.

Leif win¬
ters in this
country,
and calls It

lay on the north side of the land, where they landed to wait
for good weather. There was dew upon the grass ; and
having accidentally got some of the dew upon their hands
and put it to their mouths, they thought they had never
tasted any thing so sweet as it was. Then they went on
board, and sailed into a sound that was between the island
and a ness which went out northwards from the land, and
sailed west past the ness. There was very shallow water in
ebb-tide, so that their ship lay dry ; and there was a long
way between their ship and the water. They were so de¬
sirous to get to the land that they would not wait till their
vessel floated, but ran to the land, to a place where a river
comes out of a lake. As soon as their ship was afloat, they
took the boats, rowed to the ship, towed her up the river,
and from thence into the lake, where they cast anchor, carried
their beds out of the ship, and set up their tents. They re¬
solved to put things in order for wintering there, and they
erected a large house. They did not want for salmon, both
in the river and in the lake ; and they thought the salmon
larger than any they had ever seen before. The country
appeared to them of so good a kind, that it would not be ne¬
cessary to gather fodder for the cattle for the winter. There
was no frost in winter, and the grass was not much withered.
Day and night were more equal than in Greenland or Ice¬
land ; for on the shortest day the sun was in the sky between
the Eyktarstad and the Dagmalastad. Now when they were
ready with their house-building, Leif said to his fellow-tra¬
vellers, Now I will divide the crew into two divisions,
and explore the country : half shall stay at home and do the
work, and the other half shall search the land ; but so that
they do not go farther than that they can come back in the
evening, and that they do not wander from each other.”
This they continued to do for some time. Leif changed
about, sometimes with them, and sometimes with those at
home. Leif was a stout and' strong man, and of manly ap¬
pearance ; and he was besides a prudent sagacious man in all
respects.

It happened one evening that a man of the party was
missing ; and it was the South-country man, Tyrker. Leif
was very sorry for it; because Tyrker had been long in his
father’s house, and he loved Tyrker in his childhood. Leif

KINGS OF NORWAY.

349

blamed his comrades very much, and prepared to go with
twelve men on an expedition to find him ; but they had gone
only a short way from the station before Tyrker came to
meet them, and he was joyfully received. Leif soon per¬
ceived that his foster-father was merry. Tyrker had a high
forehead, sharp eyes, with a small face, and was little in size
and ugly ; but was very dexterous in all feats. Leif said to
him, Why art thou so late, my foster-father? and why
didst thou leave thy comrades ? ” He spoke at first long in
Turkish*, rolled his eyes, and knit his brows; but they
could not make out what he was saying. After a while and
some delay, he said in Norse, 1 did not go much farther
than they ; and yet I have something altogether new to relate,
for I found vines and grapes.” Is that true, my foster-
father?” said Leif. Yes, true it is,” answered he; ^Yor I
was born where there is no scarcity of vines and grapes.” Now
they slept all night, and next morning Leif said to his men.
Now we have two occupations to* attend to, and day about;
namely, to gather grapes or cut vines, and to fell wood in the
forest to load our vessel.” And this advice was followed. It
is related that their stern-boat was filled with grapes, and
then a cargo of wood was hewn for the vessel. There was
also self-sown wheat in the fields, and a tree which is called
Massur. Of all these they took samples ; and some of the
trees were so large that they were used in houses. Towards
spring they made ready and sailed away ; and Leif gave the
country a name from its productions, and called it Vinland.
They put to sea, and had a favourable breeze until they came
in sight of Greenland and the fielde below the snow-covered
mountain range. Then one of the men said to Leif, Why
do you bear away so much?” Leif replied, I mind my
helm, but I attend to other things too ; do you see nothing
strange ? ” He answered that he saw nothing to speak of. I

* Thyrsko the language, and the man’s name Tyrker, must mean
that the man and the language were Turkish ; that is, Hungarian, or
from Constantinople. The Teutonic or German could not have been
a foreign and unknown language ; and would have been called Saxon
(Saxneskr), not Thyrskr. The communications with Constantinople
through the Northmen in the Væringers’ corps, would make it as likely
that a native of those eastern countries should be in Greenland, as that
a native of the south of Germany should be there.

APPENDIX.

Vinland ;
then sails
home to
Greenland,
and rescues
shipwreck¬
ed men.

350

CHRONICLE OF THE

APPENDIX.

ClTAPTER

IV.

Of Tlior-
vald Erics¬
son, Leif’s
brother ;
and of the
Skræ-
lingers.

don’t know/’ said Leif^ whether it be a ship or a rock I see
there.” Then they all looked, and said it was a rock. But
he saw so much sharper than they did, that he could distin¬
guish people upon the rock. Now I will put the vessel
before the wind,” says Leif, so that we may get close to
them, in case they are people who want to meet us and need
our help ; and if they are not men of peace, it is in our power
to do as we please, and not in theirs.” Now they came up
to the rock, let down the sail, cast anchor, and put out
another little boat which they had with them. Then Tyrker
hailed them, and asked who was the commander of these
people. He called himself Thorer, and said he was a Nor¬
wegian. And what,” said he, is your name ?” Leif told
his name. Are you a son of Eric Bed of Brattalid?”
Leif replied it was so. And now,” said Leif, I invite you
all to come on board my ship, with all your goods that the
vessel can stow.” They accepted the offer ; and then they
sailed to Ericsfiord, and ryatil they came to Brattalid, where
they discharged the cargo. Leif offered Thorer and his
wife Gfudrid, and three others, lodging with himself, and
found lodging elsewhere for the rest of the people, both of
Thorer’s crew and his own. Leif took fifteen men from the
rock, and was thereafter called Leif the Lucky. After that
time Leif advanced greatly in wealth and consideration.
That winter a sickness came among Thorer’s people, and he
himself and a great part of his crew died. The same winter
Eric Bed also died. This expedition to Yinland was much
talked of; and Leif’s brother Thorvald thought that the
country had not been explored enough in different places.
Then Leif said to Thorvald, You may go, brother, in my
ship to Yinland if you like ; but I will first send the ship for
the timber which Thorer left upon the rock.” And so it was
done.

Now Thorvald made ready for his voyage with thirty men,
after consulting his brother Leif. They rigged their ship, and
put to sea. Nothing is related of this expedition until they
came to Yinland, to the booths put up by Leif, where they
secured the ship and tackle, and remained quietly all win¬
ter, and lived by fishing. In spring Thorvald ordered the
vessel to be rigged, and that some men should proceed in the
long-boat westward along the coast, and explore it during the

KINGS OF NORWAY.

351

summer. They thought the country beautiful and well appendix.

wooded, the distance small between the forest and the sea,

and the strand full of white sand. There were also many

islands, and very shallow water. They found no abode for

man or beast ; but upon an island far towards the west they

found a corn-barn constructed of wood. They found no other

trace of human work, and came back in autumn to Leif’s

booths. The following spring Thorvald with his merchant

ship proceeded eastwards, and towards the north along the

land. Opposite to a cape they met bad weather, and drove

upon the land and broke their keel, and remained there a

long time to repair the vessel. Thorvald said to his comrades.

We will stick up the keel here upon the ness, and call the
place Keelness * ; ” which they did. Then they sailed away
eastward along the country, which was every where covered
with wood. They moored the vessel to the land, laid out
gangways to the shore, and Thorvald with all his ship’s
company landed. He said, Here it is beautiful, and I
would willingly set up my farm here.” They afterwards went
on board, and saw three specks upon the sand within the point,
and went to them, and found these were three skin-boats,
with three men under each boat. They divided their men,
and took all of them prisoners except one man, who escaped
with his boat. They killed eight of them, and then went to
the point and looked about them. Within this fiord they
saw several eminences, which they took to be habitations.

Then a heavy drowsiness came upon them, and they could
not keep themselves awake, but all of them fell asleep. A
sudden scream came to them, and they all awoke ; and mixed
with the scream they thought they heard the words, “ Awake,

Thorvald, with all thy comrades, if ye will save your lives.

Go on board your ship as fast as you can, and leave this
land without delay.” In the same moment an innumerable
multitude from the interior of the fiord came in skin-boats,
and laid themselves alongside. Then said Thorvald, “We
shall put up our war-screens along the gunwales, and defend
ourselves as well as we can ; but not use our weapons much
against them.” They did so accordingly. The Skrælingers

* Kiolrness is supposed by the antiquaries to be the present Cape
Cod.

352

CimONICLE OF THE

APPENDIX.

Chapter

V.

Of Thors,
teiii Erics¬
son, Leif’s
brother,
and his
voyage to
Vinland.

shot at them for a while, and then made off as fast as they
could wherever they saw the way was open to fly. Then
Thorvald asked if any one was wounded, and they said no¬
body was hurt. He said, I have got a wound under the
arm. An arrow flew between the gunwale and the shield
under my arm : here is the arrow, and it will be my death-
wound. Now I advise you to make ready with all speed to
return ; but ye shall carry me up to the point which I thought
would be so convenient for a dwelling. It may be that it was
true what I said, that here I would dwell for a while. Ye
shall bury me there, and place a cross at my head and another
at my feet, and call the place Crossness.”* Christianity had
been established in Greenland at this time; but Eric Eed
was dead before Christianity was introduced. Now Thorvald
died, and they did every thing as he had ordered. Then
they went away in search of their fellow-travellers ; and they
related to each other all the news. They remained in their
dwelling all winter, and gathered vines and grapes, and put
them on board their ships. Towards spring they prepared
to return to Greenland, where they arrived with their vessel,
and landed at Ericsfiord, bringing heavy tidings to Leif.

In the meantime it had happened in Greenland that
Thorstein of Ericsfiord had married, and taken to wife
Gudrid, the daughter of Thorbiorn, who had been married,
as before related, to Thorer the Northman. Thorstein Erics¬
son bethought him now that he would go to Yinland for his
brother Thorvald’s body. He rigged out the same vessel,
and chose an able and stout crew. He had with him
twenty-five men, and his wife Gudrid; and as soon as
they were ready he put to sea, and they lost sight of
land. They drove about on the ocean the whole summer,
without knowing where they Avere ; and in the first Aveek
of Avinterf they landed at Lysefiord in Greenland, in the
western settlement. Thorstein looked for lodgings for his
men, and got his whole ship’s crcAV accommodated, but not
himself and his wife ; so that for some nights they had to
sleep on board. At that time Christianity Avas but young in
Greenland. One day, early in the morning, some men came

* Crossness is supposed by the antiquaries who find nothing but
truth in this saga to be Gurnet Point.

f The Icelanders reckoned winter from the first Saturday after the
20th of October.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

353

to their tent, and the leader asked them what people were in
the tent. Thorstein replies, Two : who is it that inquires ?”

Thorstein,” was the reply ; “ and I am called Thorstein the
Black, and it is my errand here to oiFer thee and thy wife
lodging beside me.” Thorstein said he would speak to his
wife about it ; and as she gave her assent, he agreed to it.

Then I shall come for you to-morrow with my yoke, for I
do not want means to entertain you ; but few care to live in
my house, for I and my wife live lonely, and I am very
melancholy. I have also a different religion from yours,
although I think the one you have the best.” Now the
following morning he came for them with horses; and they
took up their abode with Thorstein Black, who was very
friendly towards them. Gudrid had a good outward appear¬
ance, and was knowing, and understood well how to behave
with strangers. Early in winter a sickness prevailed among
Thorstein Ericsson’s people, and many of his fellow-travellers
died. He ordered that coffins should be made for the bodies
of the dead, and that they should be brought on board, and
stowed carefully. For I will transport all the bodies to
Ericsfiord in summer.” It was not long before sickness broke
out also in Thorstein Black’s house ; and his wife, who was
called Grimhild, fell sick first. She was very stout, and as
strong as a man, but yet she could not bear up against the
illness. Soon after Thorstein Ericsson also fell sick, and
they both lay ill in bed at the same time ; but Grimhild,
Thorstein Black’s wife, died first. When she was dead Thor¬
stein went out of the room for a skin to lay over the corpse.
Then Gudrid said, My dear Thorstein, be not long away
which he promised. Then said Thorstein Ericsson, Our
goodwife is wonderful ; for she raises herself up with her
elbows, moves herself forward over the bed-frame, and is
feeling for her shoes.” In the same moment Thorstein the
goodman came back, and instantly Grimhild laid herself
down, so that it made every beam that was in the house
crack. Thorstein now made a coffin for Grimhild’s corpse,
removed it outside, and buried it. He was a stout and strong
man, but it required all his strength to remove the corpse
from the house. Now Thorstein Ericsson’s illness increased
upon him, and he died, which Gudrid his wife took with
great grief. They were all in the room, and Gudrid had set

VOL. III. A A

APPENDIX.

354

CHRONICLE OF THE

APPENDIX.

Chapter

VI.

OFThorfinn
Karlsefne.
How he
went toViu-

herself upon a stool before the bench on which her husband
Thorstein’s body lay. Now Thorstein the goodman took
Gudrid from the stool in his arms, and set himself with her
upon a bench just opposite to Thorstein’s body, and spoke
much with her. He consoled her, and promised to go with
her in summer to Ericsfiord, with her husband Thorstein’s
corpse, and those of his fellow-travellers. And,” said he,
I shall take with me many servants to console and assist.”
She thanked him for this. Thorstein Ericsson then raised
himself up and said, Where is Gudrid ? ” And thrice he
said this ; but she was silent. Then she said to Thorstein the
goodman, “ Shall I give answer or not ? ” He told her not to
answer. Then went Thorstein the goodman across the room,
and sat down in a chair, and Gudrid set herself on his knee ;
and Thorstein the goodman said, What wilt thou make
known ? ” After a while the corpse replies, I wish to tell
Gudrid her fate beforehand, that she may be the better able
to bear my death ; for I have come to a blessed resting-place.
And this I have now to tell thee, Gudrid, that thou wilt be
married to an Iceland man, and ye will live long together ;
and from you will descend many men, brave, gallant, and
wise, and a well-pleasing race of posterity. Ye shall go from
Greenland to Norway, and from thence to Iceland, where
ye shall dwell. And long will ye live together, but thou
wilt survive him ; and then thou shalt go abroad, and go
southwards, and shalt return to thy home in Iceland. And
there must be a church built, and thou must remain there,
and be consecrated a nun, and there end thy days.” And
then Thorstein sunk backwards, and his corpse was put in
order and carried to the ship. Thorstein the goodman held
all that he had promised. He sold in spring his land and
cattle, and went with Gudrid and all her goods ; made ready
the ship, got men for it, and then went to Ericsfiord. The
body was buried at the church. Gudrid went to Leif’s at
Brattalid ; and Thorstein the Black took his abode in Erics¬
fiord, and dwelt there as long as he lived; and he was reckoned
an able man.

That same summer came a ship from Norway to Green¬
land. The man was called Thorfinn Karlsefne who steered
the ship. He was a son of Thord Hesthöfde, a son of Snorro
Thordarson from Hofda. Thorfinn Karlsefne was a man of

KINGS OF NORWAY.

355

great wealth, and was in Brattalid with Leif Ericsson. Soon
he fell in love with Gudrid and courted her, and she referred
to Leif to answer for her. Afterwards she was betrothed to
him, and their wedding was held the same winter. At this
time, as before, much was spoken about a Vinland voyage ;
and both Gudrid and others persuaded Karlsefne much to
that expedition. Now his expedition was resolved upon,
and he got ready a crew of sixty men and five women ; and
then they made the agreement, Karlsefne and his people, that
each of them should have equal share in what they made of
gain. They had with them all kinds of cattle*, having the

* The most surprising circumstance in this saga, and which throws
a shade over the credibility of the whole of it, is the account of the
cattle which Karlsefne and Gudrid took with them. That they would
take live cattle with them, whether they intended to settle in Vinland
or not, — as where salt was scarce it would be the easiest way of car¬
rying meat for a short time, — is not improbable, provided they had the
cattle to take. But that cattle could have been kept in the old colony
of Greenland, is the improbable circumstance. De Fries, Mr. Arne,
Mr. Kielsen, and all who describe the remains of the buildings and set¬
tlements of the ancient colonists along the fiords, concur in observing,
that there is little or no grass — that the ground is either a bare thin
layer of peat-mould upon sand, and totally barren ; or is covered with
naked stones, small or great, without any vegetation ; or is overgrown
with dwarf willow (vidiekrat), and a brush of low juniper and berry¬
bearing shrubs ; and all about the ruins of the houses nothing but this
brush-wood is found. They are careful in telling of every appearance
of grass they meet with. In the present settlements it is understood
that very few cattle can be kept for want of provender. A few were
kept at Igalikko fiord by a retired merchant in 1830, but it is a soli¬
tary case. In that latitude, with a winter of nine months, a large stock
of provender is required to keep cattle ; and from the nature of the soil
and country, grass for pasture and hay does not appear to exist' —
although in Iceland it is produced in some abundance. In the month
of August even the missionaries (see Nordisk Tidskrift for Oldkyn-
dighed, 1834) seem never to have met with so much grass, even where
there were remains of twelve or fourteen houses together, as would have
kept a cow for a couple of days. How could Karlsefne have taken

cattle of all kinds” with him, and provender for them, at the end of
a long winter, from any locality in Greenland No bones of cattle
have ever been discovered in the country, although human bones, fish
bones, and ruins of houses have been found. This is a very awkward
discrepancy between the saga account and the actual nature of the
country. It looks as if the saga-relator was applying his ideas formed
on Iceland, where cattle and food for them are not scarce, to a country
by nature so totally different as Greenland, and that he did not know of
the difference.

APPENDIX.

land; and of
the Skrælin-
gers.

A A 2

356

CHRONICLE OF THE

APPENDIX, intention to settle in the land if they could. Karlsefne
asked Leif for his houses in Vinland, and he said he would
lend them, but not give them. Then they put to sea with
the ship, and came to Leif’s houses safe, and carried up their
goods. They soon had in hand a great and good prize ; for a
whale had driven on shore, both large and excellent. They
went to it and cut it up, and had no want of food. Their
cattle went up into the land; but soon they were unruly,
and gave trouble to them. They had one bull with them.
Karlsefne let wood be felled and hewed for shipping it, and
had it laid on a rock to dry. They had all the good of the
products of the land which were there, — both grapes, and
wood, and other products. After that first winter, and when
summer came, they were aware of Skrælingers being there ;
and a great troop of men came out of the woods. The cattle
were near to them, and the bull began to bellow and roar
very loud, and with that the Skrælingers were frightened,
and made off with their bundles, — and these were of furs, and
sables, and all sorts of skins ; and they turned to Karlsefne’s
habitation, and wanted to go into the houses, but Karlsefne
defended the doors. Neither party understood the language
of the other. Then the Skrælingers took their bundles and
opened them, and offered them, and wanted to have weapons
in exchange for them ; but Karlsefne forbade his men to sell
weapons. And then he took this plan with them, that he
told the women to bear out milk and dairy products to
them ; and when they saw these things they would buy them,
and nothing else. And now the trade for the Skrælingers
was such, that they carried away their winnings in their
stomachs ; and Karlsefne and his comrades got both their
bags and skin-goods, and so they went away. And now it is
to be told that Karlsefne let a good strong fence be made
round the habitation, and strengthened it for defence. At
this time Gudrid, Karlsefne’s wife, lay in of a male child,
and the child Avas called Snorro. In the beginning of the
next winter came the Skrælingers again to them, and in
much greater numbers than before, and with the same kind
of wares. Then said Karlsefne to the Avomen, “ Now ye
shall carry out the same kind of food as Avas best liked the
last time, and nothing else.” And when they saw that, they
threAV their bundles in over the fence : and Gudrid sat in the

KINGS OF NORWAY.

357

door within, by the cradle of Snorro her son. Then came a appendix,
shadow to the door, and a woman went in with a black kirtle
on, rather short, with a snood around her head ; clear yellow
hair ; pale ; with large eyes, so large that no one ever saw such
eyes in a human head. She went to where Gudrid was
sitting, and said, “ What art thou called ? ” I am called

Gudrid; and what art thou called?” I am called Gudrid,”
said she. Then the goodwife Gudrid put out her hand to her,
that she might sit down beside her. And at the same time
Gudrid heard a great noise, and the woman had vanished;
and at the same moment one of the Skrælingers was killed
by one of Karlsefne’s housemen, because he was about to
take one of their weapons ; and they made olF as fast as pos¬
sible, leaving behind them clothes and goods. No one had
seen this woman but Gudrid. Now,” says Karlsefne, ^^we
must be cautious, and take counsel ; for I think they will
come the third time with hostility and many people. We
shall now take the plan, that ten men go out to that ness and
show themselves there, and the rest of our men shall go into
the woods, and make a clearance for our cattle against the
time the enemy comes out of the forest ; and we shall take
the bull before us, and let him go in front.” And it hap¬
pened so that at the place they were to meet there was a lake
on the one side, and the forest on the other. The plan which
Karlsefne had laid down was adopted. The Skrælingers
came to the place where Karlsefne proposed to fight; and
there was a battle there, and many of the Skrælingers fell.

There was one stout and handsome man among the Skrælingers’
people, and Karlsefne thought that he must be their chief.

One of the Skrælingers had taken up an axe and looked at it
a while, and wielded it against one of his comrades, and cut
him down, so that he fell dead instantly. Then the stout
man took the axe, looked at it a while, and threw it into the
sea as far as he could. They then fled to the forest as fast as
they could, and so closed the battle. Karlsefne remained
there with his men the whole winter ; but towards spring he
made known that he would not stay there longer, and would
return to Greenland. Now they prepared for their voyage,
and they took much goods from thence, — vines, grapes, and
skin wares. They put to sea, and their ship came safe to
Ericsfiord, and they were there for the winter.

A A 3

358

CHRONICLE OF THE

APPENDIX.

Chapter

VII.

Of Freydis,
Eric’s
daughter,
and her
voyage to
Vinland,
and her
misdeeds.

Now the conversation began again to tuni upon a Vinland
voyage^ as the expedition was both gainful and honourable.
The same summer that Karlsefne returned from Vinland, a
ship arrived in Greenland from Norway. Two brothers com¬
manded the ship, Helge and Finboge ; and they remained that
winter in Greenland. The brothers were of Icelandic descent,
from Eastiiord. It is now to be told that Freydis, Eric’s
daughter, came home from Garde, and went to the abode of
Helge and Finboge, and proposed to them that they should go
to Vinland with their vessel, and have half with her of all the
goods they could get there. They agreed to this. Then she
went to the abode of her brother Leif, and asked him to give
her the houses he had built in Vinland ; and he answered as
before, that he would lend, but not give the houses. It was
agreed upon between the brothers and Freydis that each
should have thirty fighting men, besides women. But Freydis
broke this, and had five men more, and concealed them ; and
the brothers knew nothing of this until they arrived in Vin¬
land. They went to sea, and had agreed beforehand that
they should sail in company, if they could do so : and the
difference was but little, although the brothers came a little
earlier, and had carried up their baggage to Leif’s houses.
And when Freydis came to the land, her people cleared the
ship, and carried her baggage also up to the house. Then
said Freydis, Why are ye carrying your things in here ? ”
“ Because we thought,” said they, that the whole of the
agreement with us should be held.” She said, Leif lent the
house to me, not to you.” Then said Helge, In evil we
brothers cannot strive with thee and bore out their luggage,
and made a shed, and built it farther from the sea on the
borders of a lake, and set all about it in good order. Freydis
let trees be cut down for her ship’s cargo. Now winter set
in, and the brothers proposed to have some games for amuse¬
ment, and to pass the time. So it was done for a time till
discord came among them, and the games were given up, and
none went from the one house to the other ; and things went
on so during a great part of the winter. It happened one morn¬
ing that Freydis got out of her berth, and put on her clothes,
but not her shoes ; and the weather was such that much dew
had fallen. She took the cloak of her husband over her, and
went out, and went to the house of the brothers, and to the

KINGS OF NORWAY.

359

door. A man had gone out a little before, and left the door
behind him half shut. She opened the door, and stood in the
doorway a little, and was silent. Finboge lay the farthest
inside in the hut, and was awake. He said, What wilt thou
have here, Freydis ? ” She said, I want thee to get up and
go out with me, for I would speak with thee.” He did so.
They went to a tree that was lying under the eaves of the
hut, and sat down. How dost thou like this place ? ” said
she. He said, The country, methinks, is good ; but I do not
like this quarrel that is come among us, for I think there is
no cause for it.” “ Thou art right,” says she, “ and I think
so too ; and it is my errand to thy dwelling that I want to
buy the ship of you brothers, as your ship is larger than
mine, and I would break up from hence.” I will let it be
so,” said he, if that will please thee.” Now they parted so,
and she went home, and Finboge to his bed. She went up
into her berth, and with her cold feet wakened Thorvald, who
asked why she was so cold and wet. She answered with
great warmth, I went to these brothers,” says she, to treat
about their ship, for I want a larger ship ; and they took it so
ill that they struck and abused me. And thou, useless man !
wilt neither avenge my affront nor thy own ; and now must I
feel that I am away from Greenland, but I will separate from
thee if thou dost not avenge this.” And now he could not
bear her reproaches, and told his men to rise as fast as possible
and take their weapons. They did so, and went to the tents
of the brothers, and went in as they all lay asleep and seized
them all, and bound them, and led them out bound, one after
the other ; and Freydis had each of them put to death as he
came out. Now all the men were killed ; but the women were
left, and nobody would kill them. Then said Freydis, Give
me an axe in my hand.” This was done, and she turned on
those five women, and did not give over till they were all dead.
Now they returned to their own huts after this evil deed ; and
people could only observe that Freydis thought she had done
exceedingly well ; and she said to her comrades, If it be our
lot to return to Greenland, I shall take the life of the man
who speaks of this affair ; and we shall say that we left them
here when we went away.” Now they got ready the ship
early in spring which had belonged to the brothers, with all
the goods they could get, or that the ship could carry, sailed

A A 4

APPENDIX.

360

CHRONICLE OF THE

APPENDIX.

Cmapter
VTir.
Of Thor-
finn KarU
sefne and
his descen ¬
dants.

out to sea, and had a good voyage ; and the ship came early in
summer to Ericsfiord. Karlsefne was there still, and had his
ship ready for sea, but waited a wind ; and it was a common
saying, that never had a richer ship sailed from Greenland
than that which he steered. Freydis went home now to her
house, which had stood without damage in the mean time.
She bestowed many gifts on her followers that they might
conceal her wickedness ; and she remained now on her farm.
All were not so silent about their misdeed and wickedness,
that sometliing did not come up about it. This came at last
to the ears of Leif her brother, and he thought this report
was very bad. Leif took three men of Freydis’s followers,
and tortured them to speak, and they acknowledged the whole
affair, and their tales agreed together. I do not care,” says
Leif, to treat my sister Freydis as she deserves ; but this I
will foretell of them, that their posterity will never thrive.”
And it went so that nobody thought any thing of them but
evil from that time.

Now we have to say that Karlsefne got ready his ship and
sailed out to sea. He came on well, and reached Norway
safely, and remained there all winter and sold his wares ; and
he and his wife were held in esteem by the most considerable
people in Norway. Now in the following spring he fitted out
his ship for Iceland; and when he was quite ready, and his
ship lay outside the pier waiting a wind, there came to him a
South-country man from Bremen in Saxonland, who would
deal with him for his house-besom.* I will not sell it,”
said he. “ I will give thee a half mark of gold for it,” said
the South- country man. Karlsefne thought it was a good
offer, and sold it accordingly. The South-country man Avent
away Avith the house-bar, and Karlsefne did not knoAv what
the wood was. It was massur-AVOod from Yinland. Noav
Karlsefne put to sea, and his ship came to land north at
Skagafiord, and there he put up his vessel for the winter. In
spring he purchased Glambæirland, where he took up his
abode, and dwelt there as long as he lived, and Avas a man of

* Husasnotrii is translated house-besom^ the exact meaning of the
word not being known. A besom shaft would be too small, however
rare the wood, to be made into any thing. The bar for securing the
house-door was as common and necessary in every house, and is pro¬
bably meant.

KINGS OF NOKWAY.

361

great consideration ; and many men are descended from liim
and his wife Gudrid^ and it was a good family. When
Karlsefne died Gudrid took the management of his estate,
and Snorro her son, who was born in Yinland, And when
Snorro was married Gudrid went out of the country, and
went to the south, and came back again to Snorro’s estate, and
he had built a church at Glambæ. Afterwards Gudrid became
a nun, and lived a hermit-life, and did so as long as she lived.
Snorro had a son called Thorgeir, who was father to Bishop
Brand’s mother Ingveld. The daughter of Snorro Karlsefnesson
was called Halfrid. She was mother of Bunolf, the father of
Bishop Thorlak. Karlsefne and Gudrid had a son also called
Biorn. He was father of Thoruna, the mother of Bishop
Biorn. Many people are descended from Karlsefne, and his
kin have been lucky ; and Karlsefne has given the most par¬
ticular accounts of all these travels of which here something
is related.

APPENDIX.

ADDITIONAL

NOTES

['l

< ^

f

• .:..v

. n

^“í •’

{ 4-n* >1-^

AÉtíÍt

^ <>

í*. M 'í

s. *

• 'í' .

Y. %

';f‘

i-’sk . ■ . 'f-, ‘‘ ..V’>(1‘.

^ A ««

J

if: V

i-*# • ■ 'I^

í‘4‘-

w-r '• - ■ ^■'‘*51

■^37f:ii^Vi^ -fyy^ jpwiií^ jíiX.

iiiv--^ V-‘ff ’■'#« 1

' •- *•* - ^ tí # M_r I V iiv^T' “T e

j .^’ ■' . '*' ^

»w*-y|K3**V'^8<i^< • ■ *••'

v'<-1k4 - Kf‘^í»í^*S • ■ ■ • * -

f . >f4\ ^ÍSjÍ

'í'- -/I Í4<^ JÍH.^H V

■=i

Í M fl

lo

• * t?-'

*-, - -.„ji ♦J'í'-

i

u'.r-

i

>. »':■• 14- ; s --./ií ^>^í3«?3t'tírTP«jí/rv.'M* t..f.^. Jt*.r'H,7C ^

ð

^•F. *

»

«• r

*A ,**.:f' ^«L“-

-.; ■ _ >'<M ■♦f

'.f^ Z .'- .--C'^’l^* V

’

- ^'1 -''’ ■
- ■ :,»•% • -'

- >'íTíi| ,
1í>

■ ‘^v

--6 ••: ^

/ r .'- -.u ?. í, ■^♦>‘^:(í£K

• - »

,-.-!V >>' ' - "- , , *'■ - .' ’r

»»á i t?ir Ö.

'-. «. ,:Vm a*ítií7^3d

-■- -'- ., i' ,- ’*.. ft**. *•■■■ í.. '■ ■•^*-

^ .J: •. ■.■'\fi/<.^- - :: :. 4^

* .* ■ '^].V> ^ . •' ' '••■.. '< i' 44|i;;Í’á»-

* ; í.. ií ’ ’ "

•-r^ji'iJ:!, « ; ‘‘ifi * . I.j r -A^4.

áA-

.4t J*ki*^J

ADDITIONAL NOTES.

I.

The most learned Scandinavian antiquaries of our times
have ascertained to their own satisfaction that three distinct
populations have inhabited the North: — a Mongolian race,
of which the type is to be found in the Laplander, the
Samoeid, the Esquimaux ; a Celtic race ; and a Caucasian
race which, almost within the limits of northern history,
came from Asia, drove out or extirpated the Celtic and Lap-
landic races, and are the present inhabitants. It appears
that Professors Pask and Petersen come to this conclusion on
philological and mythological grounds ; Professors Molbech,
Nilsson, and Finn Magnusen come to the same conclusion on
archæological grounds, from the relics of the former inhabit¬
ants, their arms, utensils, and ornaments, discovered from
time to time, and collected in museums.* The mythological
grounds, — that is, the similarity of worship and belief in
religion, — are the least conclusive, perhaps ; because in all
natural religions, and in all superstitions, there is a common
principle — an attempt to express a sentiment common to all
races of rational men, it being part and parcel of mind itself :
viz. a sentiment of divine power. This innate movement of
mind common to all creatures endowed with mind, however
imperfectly developed, must produce very striking analogies
between the religious ideas and worship of men living in the
most widely-separated corners of the earth ; but these ana¬
logies do not prove that these populations have had any con¬
nection or communication with each other in some distant
age, but only that the human mind every where, and in all
ages, is labouring to express a sentiment common to all men ;
and, excepting where the revealed religion of the Gospel has
penetrated, with only the same means to express it. It is
thus that Budha or Yudha, and Wodin or Odin, appear to

See Runamo og Runerne ved Finn Magnuson. Kiopenhavn, 1841,
p. 534.

NOTES.

366

CHRONICLE OF THE

NOTES.

have mythological analogies and connection of some obscure
kind; but it is not the connection of the one mythology
being derived from the other, but that of both springing
from a common root in the mind of man, and which makes
them therefore necessarily alike. The philological researches
give more distinct results. When we find words significant
in the Laponic or Celtic languages used as names of places,
or of natural objects, in situations far removed from the
known seats of those races, we may reasonably infer that at
some unknown period those races have been the original
occupants of the country. Thus the word ‘^trask” is used
in the island of Gotland in the Baltic, as well as in Lapland
itself, to denote a small lake ; and the word belongs to the
Laponic, not to the Gothic or Celtic languages. The words
Ben,” Tind,” and others, applied to mountains of peculiar
size or shape in the district of Bergen, as well as in Wales
or in the Highlands of Scotland, where the words are signifi¬
cant of the peculiar feature of country, are of some weight in
proving a former occupancy by a Celtic race, who have given
names to localities adopted by their successors. The word
tarn,” used for a small mountain lake in Cumberland and
Northumberland, is used in the same sense in Norway; and
would have some weight, if historical proof were wanting, in
showing that, at some period, people speaking the N orwegian
tongue occupied the land. The archæological antiquaries,
without reference to any theory derived from mythology or
from languages, have found that their subjects of study, the
relics of antiquity, naturally fall into three divisions : — that
of an age prior to the use of metals in arms or utensils, when
bone and stone were the materials used ; and in that age burn¬
ing appears to have been the way of disposing of the dead, less
perhaps from any observance connected with religion, than
from the want of metal tools to dig the soil with so as to
inter the dead ; — that of an age when bronze was used in
arms and utensils, that is, a mixture of metals to give hard¬
ness to copper or other soft metals ; and in which age the use
of stone for hammers, arrow-points, or spear-heads, was still
mixed with the use of metals ; — and lastly, an age when iron
was applied to these purposes, although bronze, and even stone
and bone, were still in use, from the want, no doubt, of a suffi¬
cient supply of iron, and from the great consumpt of it in mis-

KINGS OF NOOTAY.

367

sile weapons. Although dates cannot be assigned to these
three ages, and they run into each other, yet the mass of
relics of ancient times so clearly falls into these three divi¬
sions, that the Museum of Northern Antiquities at Copen¬
hagen is divided and arranged upon this principle, and with
the fullest approbation of the learned antiquaries of the
North. The division coincides with and confirms the re¬
sults of the mythological and philological researches. These
epochs, however, are beyond the pale of chronology. The
successions only, as in those of geological science, can be
made out with considerable probability. The date cannot
be affixed even to the beginning of the last inhabitation by
the iron-using Caucasian race — the followers of Odin from
Asia. Phrenological science, perhaps, or that branch of it
called craniology, might be applied with advantage to dis¬
cover if the sculls, or other human remains, found in the
oldest depositaries, in which articles of stone or bone only
have been found, belong to the Mongolian, viz. the Laponic
or Celtic, or to the Caucasian, viz. the Gothic type. The
difference would be as evident as between the sculls of the
African and American races. But as burning must of neces¬
sity have been the general mode of disposing of the dead
when iron tools for digging were rare, undoubted specimens
of human skeletons of the times when stone, bone, or even
bronze were only used, must be scarce. The Jettestuer
(jette or giant rooms) found in Jutland, and all over the
North, are by many ascribed to an age prior to the general
use of metals, or at least of iron, the articles found in them
being of stone, bone, or of bronze, — rarely, if ever, of iron ;
and burnt bones or ashes indicating that they belong to an
age when the dead were burnt before interment. These Jette¬
stuer appear to be identical with what are called Piets’ houses
in the north of Scotland ; viz. small chambers constructed of
stones laid rudely together, so as to contain a small round
space covered with a single flag-stone, and sufficient to hold
the ashes, but not the entire bodies of the dead. They are
numerous in the three northern counties of Scotland; and,
from ashes and burnt earth being found in them, are supposed
by the common people to have been the dwellings of a pigmy
race called Pechts or Piets. They deserve the investigation
of the antiquary, and a comparison with the Jettestuer of

NOTES.

368

CHRONICLE OF THE

NOTES.

Jutland. The antiquary might thereby throw some light
upon the disputed question, whether the Piets were a Celtic
or Grothic people; and whether the Piets were not a race
who had expelled a still older race, the Laponic, and had
themselves been extirpated by a Caucasian or Gothic race,
the followers of Odin. This last succession of inhabitants in
Scandinavia is evidently an historical event, although wanting
an historical date, and to us only mythological. Manners,
customs, laws, and religious and social institutions, existing in
Iceland, yet evidently derived from and more adapted to a
people in the plains of Asia, and by tradition and religious
belief received through their Scandinavian ancestors from
Asia, must surely be of Asiatic origin, although the date of
the migration from the original seat of those manners, cus¬
toms, and institutions cannot be assigned. How could the
symbolical use of horse-flesh at religious festivals be an obser¬
vance in Iceland or Norway, where the horse is, from the
climate, not in such numbers as to have ever been slaughtered
for food, if not a religious ordinance in commemoration of an
original country in which the horse was generally used for
food ? How could the great and connected mass of tradition
and mythology, all referring to an Asiatic origin and home,
have arisen in Norway, Sweden, and Iceland, if not founded
upon some real event and connection? The event itself is
probably not so far distant from historical times as antiquaries
imagine. The account which Snorro gives in the fifth chap¬
ter of the Ynglinga Saga, and also in the Edda attributed to
him, of Odin having been driven northwards by the increas¬
ing power of the Romans in the countries in which he origin¬
ally lived, may not be so wide of the true date, nor so much
too near times of well-ascertained historical truth, as many
antiquaries suppose. Torfæus, reckoning upon extravagant
assumptions of longevity in the genealogies given in the Saga,
supposes in his history of Norway that Odin came to Scandi¬
navia in the time of Darius Hydaspes, about 520 years before
the Christian æra. But in his Series Begum et Dynas-
tarum Daniæ,” lib. iii. cap. 2., he reckons back from Harald
Haarfager, who was born 853, to Odin, twenty-six gene¬
rations, son succeeding father, and allows thirty-five years to
each generation, which brings Odin to about fifty-seven years
before the Christian æra. He is obliged, therefore, to sup-

KINGS OF NORWAY.

369

pose another Odin or two to have flourished 500 or 1000 notes.
years earlier; and by assuming that King On or Ane, of
whom the Ynglinga Saga makes mention in the twenty-ninth
chapter, reached the age of 210 years, he stretches his gene¬
alogical chronology far enough. But twenty-six reigns, son
succeeding father, — and the reigns are all we know of these
mythological personages, or rather the names only, — never did
follow each other in this unquiet world; and an average of
thirty-five years for human life, during twenty-six generations,
would not accord with any experience or calculation of human
life. The Odin of Snorro lived, as he tells us distinctly in
the Edda, about the time when the Romans under Pompey
ravaged Asia. In Florus, lib. hi. cap. 4., we find that Lucul-
lus in this war with Mithridates, came ad terminum gentium
Tanaim lacumque Mæotim.” This was about 7 0 years before
Christ. Kone of the genealogical deductions admit even of
so ancient a date. If we take the Saxon genealogies, we find
Cerdic called the ninth in descent from Woden, and he lived
about the year 495 ; Ida was called the tenth in descent, and
he lived about 547 ; and Ella was called the eleventh, and
he lived about 560. If we even adopt the extravagant sup¬
position that these descents were not of reign succeeding
reign in tm-bulent unsettled times, but of son succeeding
father uninterruptedly, and each living thirty-five years on an
average, we bring Odin down to between 175 and 197 years
after our æra. If we value these mythological genealogies in
years according to any rational principle, we must take some
fixed point in chronology, and from it upwards to the end of
the doubtful mythological, and to the beginning of the certain
historical reigns, take the average duration of reigns, and from
the same point downwards take the average of a similar num¬
ber of reigns. We would thus get a measure to apply to the
mythological period, formed upon the duration of reigns in
times similar in unsettled government to the more ancient
mythological. The battle of Stikiestad, at which King Olaf
the Saint fell, appears to be such a fixed chronological point.

It is stated by Snorro, that the battle took place on Wed¬
nesday the IV. of the Calends of August, viz. the 29th
July. Now the IV. Calends of August did fall on a Wed¬
nesday in the year 1030. In the Saga of Harald Haardrade,

King Olaf’s half-brother, who was killed at the battle of

YOL. III.

B B

370

CHRONICLE OF THE

NOTES. Stanford Bridge near York, Snorro tells us that this event
took place thirty-five years after the battle of Stiklestad, at
which this King Harald, then a youth, was present. Now
the battle of Stanford or Battle Bridge was fought on Mon¬
day the 25th September, nineteen days before the battle of
Hastings, which took place on Saturday the 14th October, in
the year 1066, which brings the battle of Stiklestad, fought
thirty -five completed years before, to 1030, The saga¬
reckoning of years is so many winters ; and thirty-five win¬
ters had passed between the battle of Stiklestad in autumn
1030, and the battle of Stanford Bridge in autumn 1066.
The Saxon Chronicle also gives the year 1030 as the date of
the battle in which King Olaf fell: and this Chronicle,
giving nothing but the dates and events, without any relation
of causes or results, or any attempt at giving any tlfing more
than the event and date, is unquestionably the best historical
authority for the time and fact. During the battle of Stikle¬
stad a total solar eclipse is understood by antiquaries, from
the text of Snorro, to have taken place ; and this would have
fixed the day and year beyond all question. But on the lY.
Calends of August, 1030, there was no full moon, and conse¬
quently there could be no total solar eclipse ; and there is no
getting rid of Snorro’s distinct day, Wednesday thelY. Calends
of August, and of that lY. Calends of August in 1030 actually
falling upon a Wednesday in that year. Professor Hansten
of Christiania has, it is said, calculated that a total eclipse of
the sun did take place in the latitude of Stiklestad, 63° 40'
north, on the 31st of August, 1030; but that would be a
Monday, not a Wednesday. The only other near eclipse is
one on the 29th June, 1033, and some antiquaries have
removed the battle for the sake of the eclipse to the year
1033; but the eclipse fell on a Friday the 29th June, not
on a Wednesday the lY. Calends of August; and Snorro is
distinct about his Wednesday, and that it was Wednesday
the lY. Calends of August. It has been suggested to the
translator by Professor Kelland, that possibly it may have
been a fog, and not an eclipse at all; and, on considering
Snorro’s description of what took place, this conjecture ap¬
pears highly probable. The duration of the obscurity, viz.
from half-past 1 to half- past 3, as stated in the Saga, exceeds
greatly the duration of the obscurity produced by a total

KINGS OF NORWAY,

371

eclipse. The degree of obscurity produced by a total eclipse
is not such that objects at the distance of 40 or 50 yards are
undistinguishable, so that the use of the bow or movements
in the field, such as the advance of Dag Ringson, as stated in
Chapter 139., could be impeded or suspended by it; but these
circumstances would apply perfectly to a dense fog. The red¬
ness of the air and the light, although the sky was without a
cloud, and the sun shone clear, applies perfectly to the land being
enveloped in a dense mist, through wliich the rays of the sun
could not penetrate; and the gradual coming on of this
obscurity, until at last people could not see each other for
two hours distinctly, is exactly what might occur in a very
thick fog, although the sun and sky were not obscured by
clouds ; but could not occur from the obscurity of a few
minutes’ duration attending a total eclipse, and which is not a
darkness sufifcient to obstruct any work or movement out of
doors like the obscurity of a thick mist. Whether the ob¬
scurity Avas caused by fog or by an eclipse, and whether the
day was the 29 th of July or the 31st of August, the year is
fixed as Avell as any chronological point can be to the year
1030. Now going upwards from this point, we find —

Olaf the Saint had reigned when he fell
Earls Swend and Hakon, whom he expelled -
Earl Eric, their father » - _

Olaf Tryggvesson - - _ -

Earl Hakon the Great - _ _

Harald Graafeld and Gunhild’s sons -
Hakon Athelstan’s foster-son
Harald Haarfager, who lived 83 years, reigned

15 years.
2 —
12

4 —

17 —
14 —

26 —
73 —

NOTES.

We have here eight reigns, including one of very unusual
duration, averaging 20f years. Going downwards from the
same point, we find —

SAvend Alfifason, for his father Canute the Great
Magnus the Good and his uncle Harald Haar-
drade - - » _ -

Harald Haardrade, after the death of Magnus,
alone - _ - - -

Magnus his son, jointly with Olaf Kyrre
Olaf Kyrre alone - _ - ~

Magnus Barefoot _ - - »

7 years.
12 —

19 — -

3 —

24 —

10 —

B B 2

372

CHRONICLE OF THE

NOTES.

Sigurd the Crusader, with Eystein and Olaf,

his brothers - - - - 27 years.

Magnus the Blind - - - - 5 —

We have here eight reigns, averaging I of years each; and
in the 272 years between the accession of Harald Haarfager
in 863, and the mutilation and deposition of Magnus the
Blind in 1135, we have sixteen reigns, averaging seventeen
years. Now Harald Haarfager, according to Torfæus and
Schoning, was born in 853, and was the twenty-sixth in
descent from Odin. If we apply this reasonable measure of
seventeen years as the average duration of reigns in the my¬
thological period immediately before, as it is in the historical
period immediately after Harald Haarfager, whose reign
began in 863, we bring Odin to 442 years before liis reign,
that is, to the year 421 of our æra. If we apply the same
measure to the Saxon genealogies of Cerdic, Ida, and Ella,
who in the years 495, 547, and 560, were reckoned the 9th,
10th, and 11th in descent respectively from Woden, we bring
the Saxon Woden to the year 342, or 377, or 373 ; that is, to
within the span of a man’s life of from 44 to 7 9 years of the date
of the Scandinavian Odin. It appears to have been some kind
of antiquarian vanity that led the early northern antiqua¬
ries to place Odin or Woden as far back as possible among
the mists of antiquity, and to reject every reasonable measure
of the length of reigns, or of human life, that brought him
within the Christian æra.

The religion of Odin itself bears strong internal evidence
of having borrowed doctrines, institutions, and ceremonies
from Christianity, — of having been impressed by some rude
notions adopted from the Christian church. In Haar the
High, Jafnhaar the Equal to the High, and Thredde the
Third, we find a rude idea of the Trinity in the Edda. Adam
of Bremen, who lived about the time of the introduction of
Christianity into Sweden, and wrote in the year 1075, de¬
scribes the temple at Upsal as exhibiting this rude idea of the
Trinity. It had three idols, he says, of which that of Thor
was in the middle and on the highest throne, and those of
Odin and Fryggia on either side. Odin himself, an incarna¬
tion of divine power, and one of this trinity, attended by hi^
tAvelve companions or godars, and establishing a religion and
religious government, is a coincidence with our Saviour and

KINGS OP NORWAY.

373

the twelve apostles too strong to be merely accidental, notes.
Some imperfect knowledge and rude imitation of Chris¬
tianity are evidently at the bottom of this form of heathenism.

It will also be observed that in all the forms of heathenism
that existed before Christianity, the priesthood, whether here¬
ditary or dedicated by selection to their vocation, were all
a temple-priesthood. They belonged to particular services, ^

gods, and temples ; and not to any territorial district like a
parish, or to any particular group of people like a congre¬
gation. Christianity, however, from the first appears to have
been altogether congregational. The bishops, elders, and
deacons belonged to particular congregations in particular
localities, within which they taught and governed in things
spiritual. If the Christian church lost this original and cha¬
racteristic formation at Rome, it was by imitating and adopting,
some centuries after its first establishment, the former heathen
establishment of a temple-priesthood, a pontifical college, and
a pontifex maximus. Odinism appears to have been formed,
like early Christianity, and no doubt an imitation of it, upon
the congregational principle. The godar had under his
charge a certain portion of territory called a godard, similar
to a Christian parish. The inhabitants of this locality paid
him certain dues as their priest and local judge. Each godard
appears to have had its own Thing, or court, for admi¬
nistering the laws of the general or district Thing, for appor¬
tioning dues or taxes, and the levies of men and ships. To
this early and complete arrangement of the country and popu¬
lation into godards, or parishes, may be ascribed the great
military and naval achievements of the pagan Northmen. It
was an effective military arrangement of the whole people.

As an arrangement connected with religion, its principle is
evidently congregational, and derived from Christianity in the
early ages when it had no hierarchy. The godard, that is,
the right to jurisdiction and certain dues for civil and ecclesi¬
astical function within a locality, appears to have become a
saleable transferable property at last, just like an advowson to
the cure of souls in an English parish at the present day. So
perfectly similar were the arrangements of Odinism and
Christianity, that a century after the establishment of Chris¬
tianity and Christian church institutions in Iceland, Bishop
Isleif held a godard as quite compatible with his functions.

n B 3

374

CHRONICLE OF THE

NOTES.

The apostolic succe^ion also, if it may be so termed, from
the twelve original godars the companions of Odin, or a
qualification derived from them, appears to have been consi¬
dered, just as a true apostolic succession is considered in Eng¬
land at the present day, necessary for holding the office of
nodar. These are coincidences with the Christian church
which can scarcely be accidental. The use of the sign of the
cross also as a religious symbol appears to have prevailed in
Odinism in the earliest times, and must have been borrowed
from Christianity. Antiquaries call it the sign of Thor’s
hammer, not of the cross ; but the use of any sign as a reli¬
gious symbol by which people of the same faith might recog¬
nise each other, although necessary in the persecutions of the
early Christians, could only arise from imitation among the
the followers of Odin-worship, and especially of the same sign.
It would naturally be adopted, however, from a superstitious
belief that there was some virtue in the sisrn itself. The use

O

of water also in giving a name — and in the earliest historical
period we find that Harald Haarfager, with whom history
commences in Norway, had water poured over him and a name
given him in infancy — is a rite evidently borrowed from
Christianity. It has no meaning in Odinism. It is a remark¬
able circumstance in the mythology of the Odin religion, that
there was no god particularly connected with water, or the
sea, or the winds ; and the circumstance is a very strong proof
that the Odin religion was not indigenous in Scandinavia, in
which the people in all ages must necessarily have been sea¬
faring, and dependent on the elements, and that this religion
had its origin, as the tradition states it, in the inland parts of
Asia, where sea and wind, and the interests connected with
these elements, were unknown or unimportant. The use of
water at the ceremony of giving a name, without any sacra¬
mental meaning or symbolical reference to their own mytho¬
logy, seems to prove a mere imitation of the Christian cere¬
monial by a later religion. It is, indeed, possible that all the
jiassages in which baptism by water are mentioned may have
been interpolated by the scalds or saga-men, in compliment to
the kings descended from those pagans, and to please their
family pride with the idea that their remote pagan ancestors
had not died unbaptized, and consequently out of the pale of
Christian salvation, according to the ideas of those times, in

KINGS OF NORWAY.

375

which the mere ceremony of baptism was synonymous with
Clmistianity. But this is merely conjecture, not sanctioned
by any antiquarian authority.

These are not analogies common to all forms of religion,
because arising from a common root — the sense of religion in
the mind of man; nor are they coincidences which may be coin™-
mon to two religions totally unconnected with each other, be¬
cause formed among two bodies of mankind living under
physical and social circumstances very similar, although in
very different times and totally distinct countries ; but they
are palpable imitations of ceremonial and arrangement, prov¬
ing that the one religion has been impressed by the other-—
has adopted ceremonies, observances, institutions, and doc¬
trines, from some obscure knowledge of the other. Mahomet,
some centuries after Odin, has drawn much from Christianity.
The true historical place of Odin, or rather of Odinism, — for
Odin may not have been, like Mahomet, an historical per¬
sonage, but merely a name given to several distinct con¬
querors known only by tradition, — would appear to be after
Christianity and before Mahometanism ; and as the gene¬
alogies indicate, if fairly measured, about the 5th century,
Hengist and Horsa are stated in the Saxon Chronicle to have
been the sons of Wihtgils, who was the son of Witta; and
Witta was the son of Wecta, a son of Woden. This gene¬
alogy is rejected, because it brings Woden so near to his¬
torical times, making Hengist and Horsa the fourth in
descent from the god or warrior Woden. Yet if we apply
the same measure of seventeen years to each of these descents
from the time of Hengist and Horsa (the year 449) upwards,
we find a wonderful coincidence with the other Saxon gene¬
alogies of Cerdic, Ida, and Ella, and come within eight years
of the two latter. One man of 79 years of age might have
been the Odin or Woden of the Scandinavian genealogies, and
of the Saxon — the ancestor of Hengist, Cerdic, Ella, and of
Harald Haarfager, Gorm, Canute, if he had been born about
the year 342, and had died about 421. But were the
numerous followers of Odin without any religion before the
4th or 5th century? By no means; not more than the
followers of Mahomet before his appearance in the 6th cen¬
tury. Odinism is a new patch upon an old garment. There
has been evidently a polytheism, — a worship of Thor,

B B 4

NOTES.

376

CHRONICLE OF THE

NOTES. Lock, of a good and evil principle ; and a more ancient
mythology, upon which the incarnation of Odin, the rude idea
of a "trinity, the twelve godars, and other ideas and forms of
belief and observance borrowed from the Christian church in
the early ages of Christianity, have been stitched in the 4th
or 5th century.

11.

IvAR ViDFADME is Said, in the forty- fifth chapter of the
Ynglinga Saga, to have conquered a fifth part of England.
This is is the first mention made in the saga of expeditions to
England ; and in the saga the fifth part of England is gene¬
rally applied as synonymous with the kingdom of Northum¬
berland. When did this Ivar live ? and how does his date
correspond with that given by the Saxon Chronicle, and all
our English historians on its authority, as that of the first
appearance of the Danes in England, viz. the year 787 ?

Harald Haarfager was born, according to Torfæus, in his

Series Eegum Daniæ,” anno 853. Gorm the Old, king of
Denmark, Harald’s contemporary, was born 830. By the
genealogies of both these kings, taken by Torfæus from the
Codex Flatoyensis, the Langfiedgatal a genealogical table
preserved in it, and from Snorro’s Ynglinga Saga, both kings
were the sixth in descent from Ivar Yidfadme. Allowino;
seventeen years to each reign or descent, we have the year
728 or 751 as the time of Ivar Yidfadme. This is a genera¬
tion too early for the year 787. The king who was reigning
at either of these dates, 728 or 751, could scarcely be landing
for the first time in England in 787 ; and 793 appears to be
the next date of the appearance of these heathen men, and it
was not before the next quarter of a century that they had
any footing in England.

If we turn to the Saxon Chronicle, we find no ground at all
for the inference drawn by all our liistorians from the passage
under the date 787, viz. that the first invasion or piratical
incursion of the Danes was in the year 787. The passage is
this : —

“ An. DCCLXXXVii. Her nom Beorhtric cyning Offan
dohtor Eadburhge. And on his dagum cwomon ærest III
scipu Nord-nianna of Heredalande. And tha se gerefa thær

KINGS OF NOKWAY.

377

to rad. hi wolde diyfan to thæs cyninges tune, thy the he
niste hwæt hi wæron. liine mon of-sloh tha. That wæron
tha ærestan scipu Deniscra monna the Angel-cynes lond
gesohton.”

Anno 787. Here took (in marriage) Beorhtric the king
OiFa’s daughter Eadburhga. And in his days came first three
ships of Northmen of Heredaland. And then the sheriff rode
thereto : he would drive them to this king’s town, because he
would inquire what they were. This man they slew. These
were the first ships of Danish men who sought the English
king’s land.”

The following is the Latin version of the passage, given by
Gibson : —

An. 787. Hoc anno ceplt (in uxorem) Beorhtricus Bex
Offæ filiam Eadburgam. Ejus autem temporibus venerunt
primum tres naves Norweglorum de Herethorum terra. Turn
eo (regis) præpositus equo vectus illos molitus est compellere
ad regis villam, propterea quod nesciret unde essent : ibi autem
is occisus est. Istæ primæ fuerunt naves Danorum quæ
Anglorum nationem peterent.”

Now this passage appears not to allow of the strict inter¬
pretation given to it by our historians. It says that in the
year 787 Beorhtric married Offa’s daughter, and in his days
— not specially in the year 787 — came the three ships; but
Beorhtric lived to the year 800. The three ships are stated
first to be of Northmen or Norwegians of Heredaland. Here¬
daland is either Hördaland, an ancient district of Norway
of great note in the sagas, — so great that, in the poetry, king
of Hördaland is frequently used for king of Norway, — and
situated where South Bergen province now is; or it may
be the country on the south side of the Drontheim fiord,
still called the Heredland, or the Inhered, comprehending
several extensive parishes, and where formerly the main
power of the kings of Norway lay ; or Heredalande may
mean the king’s demesne lands to which the men be¬
longed. In either interpretation these Northmen of Horda-
land were strangers on the coast ; and the king’s officer went
to inquire what they were. But Danes from Jutland or
Sleswick, who had from the year 450 to the year 585 or 600^
when the kingdom of Mercia was established, been yearly
coming over the sea in colonies from those coasts (tor the

NOTES.

378

CHRONICLE OF THE

NOTES Anglo-Saxons all came from that coast), could not suddenly
have lost the art of navigating vessels so entirely, that in 180
years afterwards they would be a strange people to the Saxon
inhabitants of England, whose great grandfathers, in some of
the latest settled kingdoms of the Heptarchy, must have been
born in that very country. But Northmen from Hordaland,
who had to cross the North sea at once from Norway to
Northumberland, instead of coasting along from the mouth of
the Eyder or of the Elbe to the mouth of the Bhine and the
coast of Flanders, from whence a run across to the south-east
coast of England is an affair of a couple of days, might very
well be an unknown and strange people, before the year 787,
to the inhabitants of Northumberland. It is for the Anglo-
Saxon scholar to determine whether there may not be a mis¬
take in transcribing the original manuscripts of the Saxon
Chronicle, with respect to the word Deniscra. If it could
be omitted, so as to read that the^e were the first ships of
these men, — viz. of Northmen from Heredaland, — who came
to England, it would make sense of the passage. As it stands,
the specification of three ships of Northmen or Norwegians,
from Heredaland or Hordaland, does not agree with the term
Danish men ; as the Danish kingdom or name did not in those
ages, in the 8 th or in the 9 th century, either as a whole or in
parts under tributary kings, extend to the north of the Gotha
river in the Scandinavian peninsula. In the cognate language,
the old Norse, the difference of a letter or two would change
the demonstrative pronoun expressing that kingdom, viz. of
Hordaland or Heredaland, into Danish kingdom. If such a
reading could be admitted, of wliich the Anglo-Saxon scholar
only can judge, it would both give sense to the passage, and
would agree with what must have been the natural course of
events, — viz. that at all times after the establishment of the
Heptarchy, as well as before, there were piratical expeditions
or commercial communications between the mother country
of Holstein, Sleswick, and Jutland, viz. the Danish kingdom
and the colonies from it in England, to the extent at least
that Danes could not be an unknown people, and confounded
with Northmen from the north of Norway, or from Horda¬
land. It is to be observed also, that in 793, 794, and in all
the notices in the first half of the following century of
piratical invaders in the Saxon Chronicle, they are eddied

KINGS OF NORWAY.

'379

heathen, not Danish men, who maraud in Northumberland
or east of the Thames ; while those who apparently coasted
along the continent before crossing over, and ravaged in the
south and west of England, in Kent, Dorsetshire, and even
in Cornwall, are generally called Danes. If this reading be
admissible, it would remove the difficulty with regard to the
time when Ivar Vidfadme or his descendant Kagnar Lodbrok
marauded in England. They were Danes, or people from
the same coast from which the Anglo-Saxons themselves
originally came as marauders and colonists into England ;
and the limitation in the passage of the Saxon Chronicle
under the year 787 would apply, as the sense of the passage
seems to require, only to the Northmen from Hördaland or
Heredaland, who first came in that year to the shores of
England ; not to the Danes from J utland, Slesvick, and Hoi-
stein, who, it is reasonable to suppose, must from the days of
Hengist have been in the hal^it of visiting England from the
same coast from which he and so many expeditions after his
sailed, either to trade with their kinsmen or plunder them.
We see no reasonable ground for believing that after so many
naval expeditions to England from that coast, during the
centuries subsequent to the year 450, the art of navigating
from the same coast to England was so entirely lost that in
the year 787 the Danes, — that is, the inhabitants of the coasts
from which the Anglo-Saxons originally embarked, — were an
unknown people to their own posterity in England. But the
Northmen from Heredaland might very well be strangers ;
and the year 787 might very well be the first of the appear¬
ance of those northern marauders, who immediately after¬
wards laid waste the country by their expeditions.

III.

The 3 2d chapter of the Knytlinga Saga, — that is, of the
saga of the family of Knut or Canute the Great, — is a very
curious and important historical document. It is a kind of
statistical account of the military force and organization of
Denmark in the time of Saint Canute. He was the son and
successor of King Swend, a sister’s son of Canute the Great.

NOl'EvS.

^80

CHKONICLE OF THE

NOTES.

This Swend was a son of the Earl IJlf, who, after the battle
of Helge-a, was assassinated in the church of Saint Lucius
in Roskilde, in the winter of 1027, hj order of Canute the
Great ; and to whom Canute’s sister Astrid,. a daughter of
King Swein the first Danish conqueror of England, was
married. On the death of Canute the Great in 1035, his son
Hardacanute succeeded to the Danish, and his son Harald to
the English crown. In 1040 Hardacanute, by the death of
his brother Harald, succeeded to England also ; and on his own
death in 1042 King Magnus the Good of Norway claimed
the kingdom of Denmark, in virtue of an agreement made in
1036 between him and Hardacanute, and ratified by the chief
people of each country, that the survivor of the two kings should
succeed to the kingdom of the other in default of heirs male.
Earl Swend, however, the son of Earl Ulf, nephew of Canute
the Great, and next heir of that line, wrested the kingdom
from the Norwegian king, and died in 1075, or 40 years after
Canute the Great, and was succeeded by his son Harald
Hein, and on his death in 1080 by his next son Saint Canute.
During the forty-five years between Canute the Great and
Saint Canute, the kingdom was in too distracted a state, from
the wars relative to the succession, for any such general or¬
ganization of its military force into districts, and fixed quota
of vessels to be furnished by each in a levy. We must go back
for the origin and establishment of this regular organization to
the pagan times preceding King Canute and his father Swein,
or Swend Forked-beard, the conqueror of England, who
was born a pagan; and it enables us to account for their
military power. The Godards and Thingsteds at which the
people within each circle or godard assembled, were evidently
the bishoprics, parishes, and churches of the Christian organiz¬
ation of the country, with the numbers of ships e ch terri¬
torial division had to furnish to a levy, remaining as in the
pagan times, and described as belonging to each church-circle
or godard. This chapter tells us that the most southerly
bishopric of Denmark was Heidaby, viz. Sleswick, the old
town of Heidaby having been on the bank of the Slie, opposite
to the present town of Sleswick ; and that it had 350 churches,
that is, Thingsteds, or head places of assembling the commu¬
nity of the godards, and furnished 130 ships to the king on
a levy. Kiben, a bishopric in Jutland next to it, liad 324

KINGS OF NOKWAY.

381

churches, and furnished 110 ships, Aros, a third bishopric
also in Jutland, had 210 churches, and furnished 90 ships.
The fourth bishopric was Wyburg, also in Jutland, which
furnished 100 ships. It then describes Lymfiord, an inlet
from the Baltic reaching almost to the North sea, and only
divided from it by a narrow neck of sand, over which Harald
of Norway drew his vessels when blockaded by King Swend
Ulfsson’s fleet in the fiord, and thus escaped into the North
Sea. It then goes on to describe the bishoprics north of this
inlet; viz. Hiorrung, with 160 churches, furnishing as its
quota in a levy 50 ships. The sixth bishopric is Odense, in
the island of Fyen, with 300 churches, furnishing 100 ships.
The seventh is Boskilde, in the island of Seland, with 411
churches, furnishing 120 ships ; and the eighth is the bishopric
of Lund in Scania, across the Sound, with 353 churches, and
furnishing 150 ships.

We have here 2358 districts, or churches, furnishing 850
ships to the king on a general levy, which appears to have
been called out almost every summer. From this minute ac¬
count of the available naval force of Denmark alone, we see
that there is probably no exaggeration in the accounts of the
immense number of vessels collected on the naval expeditions
of those times. Canute, we are told in the saga, had 1200
vessels in his fleet at the battle of Helge-a, which startles the
historical reader; but when we find 850 of these vessels were
only the regular levy furnished by Denmark, and that he had
all the shipping of England also at his command, the number
is quite credible. These vessels may have been very small ;
but the smallest could scarcely have had less than ten men oi
a standing crew to row and manage them, besides the fighting
men. This would make a greater sea force than Denmark
possesses at the present day, including her German territories
of Holstein and part of Sleswick, and the considerable ship¬
ping towns of Altona, Kiel, Flensburg belonging to it. The
registered seamen belonging to Denmark, and available for
the service of the crown if called on, amount at present only
to 6650 men; and the sea-force, it is stated by statistical
writers, could not be raised to 8000 men, without taking all
the men from the commercial marine of the country. Den¬
mark has been positively, as well as comparatively, a greater
naval power in the 11th than in the 19th century. She has

NOTES.

382

CHEONICLE OF THE

NOTES. larger vessels now, but fewer sea-going men. She wants,

' like all the Continental countries, the basis of a naval power, —

a numerous population engaged in coasting trade, fishing, and
employment with small vessels ; and the very improvement of
agriculture, roads, and means of living on land diminishes the
employment of a seafaring coasting population with them ;
while the very same improvement, from the shape of the
country, diversity of products in different quarters of it, and
the nature of our staple products, — coal, metals, and other
heavy or bulky commodities, — increases the employment and
numbers of a coasting seafaring population with us. When
the employment of marauding on the coasts of other countries,
the viking-trade, fell into disuse, there was no employment for
a seafaring population in Denmark, in which, from the simi¬
larity of products over all, there is no constant demand in one
quarter for what another quarter could spare.

The vessels employed in these war expeditions must have
been of a size to keep the sea, and stow the arms, water, and
provisions of a considerable body of men. Ships of twenty
benches of oars, — and we read of such belonging to bonders, —
carried sixty men when in fighting equipment ; for we find
from Erling Skakke’s speech, in Chapter 6. of Hakon Herda-
breid’s Saga, that three men belonged to each oar — one to row,
one to shoot, and one to cover those two with a shield. If
we suppose the whole of the vessels of a levy to have averaged
this size, about 51,000 men would be the number raised by a
general levy. When we consider that this was a beneficial
and favourite summer employment for the whole population
between seed-time and harvest, interfering- in no way with
their usual occupations and habits, this number does not ap¬
pear extravagantly great ; but it is probable that by far the
greater proportion of the vessels of a levy were not of a size
to convey sixty men, with their bulky arms, missiles, provi¬
sions, and water, but were merely transports, or large half¬
decked boats. But such a class of vessels could scarcely have
fewer than ten men to row them. If we allow half of the
850 vessels to have been of this class, and the other half fiolit.
ing vessels with an average complement of sixty men, we find
that about 30,000 men may have been raised by a general
levy in the dominions of Swein or Canute. This force ap¬
pears inconsiderable ; but it is probable that long after the

KINGS OF NOEWAY.

383

kingdoms of the Heptarchy in England had been united, the
force of the country as a whole remained in a very ineffec¬
tive state, and not so fully organized that any considerable
body could be drawn together suddenly to any locality ; and
the Danes having the command of the sea, and their ships to
retire to, could always invade, with superior numbers and
superior supply of missiles, any part of the coast they pleased.

lY.

In the following chronological notes the fixed dates are taken
from the chronological tables by Schöning and Thorlacius,
affixed to the folio edition of the Heimskringla,” 1777; and
in what is mythological or of uncertain date, it is to be re¬
membered that the authority of these great antiquaries, and
of Torfæus, should be of great weight, even if we differ from
them on the data from which they assume a vast antiquity for
Odin, and the mythology of the Odin worship and history.

A man born about the year 333, and dying 78 years of age
in 411, would, in respect of time, perfectly represent the per¬
sonage whom the Scandinavian genealogies and the Saxon
concur in calling Odin and Woden, and to whom they reckon
up as the root of their royal dynasties. The genealogy of
Harald Haarfager, 26th in descent from Odin, and that of
Hengist and Horsa the 4th in descent, of Cerdic the 9th, of
Ida the 10th, of Ella the 11th in descent from Woden, all
concur within that period — the last half of the 4th century —
if the reasonable allowance of eighteen years be made as the
average length of each step in the genealogies. It appears,
therefore, more reasonable to assume this date for the his¬
torical Odin or Woden, than the year 105 before Christ,
which is given by Schoning ; or 70 years after Christ, which
is given by Torfæus, with a supplemental Odin four or five
hundred years earlier.

Ivar Yidfadme, the 6th step above Harald Haarfager in
the series, and who is said in the Ynglinga Saga to have con-
Cjuered or marauded in England, would, according to the
same allowance to each step, have to be placed in the year
745, although the Saxon Chronicle states the year 787 as
that of the first visit of the Northmen.

NOTES.

384

CHRONICLE OF THE

NOTES.

853. Is the year of Harald Haarfager’s birth.

863. Harald succeeded to his father Halfdan the Black.

864. One Grardar went to Iceland, which had been disco¬

vered in 861 by Nadodd.

867. Flakke went to Iceland.

875. Ingulf went as a colonist to occupy Iceland.

885. The battle in Hafursfiord, by which Harald Haarfager
became supreme king of Norway.

895. Harald Haarfager’s expedition to Orkney. The ba¬
nishment of Bolf Ganger from Norway is placed in
this year.

898. Eric Bloody axe was born.

923. Hakon, called afterwards Athelstan’s foster-son, born.

931. Hakon sent to England.

936. Death of Harald Haarfager.

937. Hakon, Athelstan’s foster-son, king.

941. Athelstan king of England died.

963. Hakon, Athelstan’s foster-son, killed in the battle at
Stord.

968. The Emperor Otto’s first expedition to Denmark.

969. Olaf Tryggvesson born.

970. Earl Hakon fled to Denmark.

971. Earl Hakon returned to Drontheim.

976. The Emperor Otto’s second expedition to Denmark.

977. King Harald Graafeld killed.

978. Hakon made earl of Norway.

988. The Emperor Otto’s third expedition to Denmark.

993. Birth of King Olaf the Saint.

994. The battle of Earl Hakon with the Jomsburg vikings.

996. Earl Hakon killed, and Olaf Tryggvesson made king

of Norway.

iOOO. The battle at Svoldr, in which King Olaf Tryggves¬
son fell.

1008. King Swein Forked-beard died this year, according to
the dates deduced from the Saga ; but accordino* to
the Saxon Chronicle, unquestionably a much higher
authority for the dates. King Swein died at Candle¬
mas, 1014.

1012. The death of Ethelred is placed in this year by Snorro
and the Sagas ; but according to the Saxon Chro¬
nicle he died in 1016.

KINGS OF NORWAY.

385

1014. King Olaf went to Norway from the coast of North¬
umberland this year, took Earl Hakon prisoner, and
was received as king.

1016. Harald Haardrade born.

1017. Canute married Emma, widow of King Ethelred, and

daughter of Kichard duke of Normandy. During
this year the negotiations relative to a marriage be¬
tween King Olaf of Norway and Ingegird, the
daughter of Olaf king of Sweden, appear to have
taken place.

1018. Sigurd Syr, King Olaf’s step-father, died.

1019. The marriage of Astrid with King Olaf; and peace

was concluded between King Olaf of Sweden and
King Olaf of Norway.

1022. King Olaf of Sweden died, and his son Onund suc¬
ceeded.

1024. King Magnus the Good born.

1025. A treaty between King Olaf and King Onund. King

Canute the Great came to Denmark, and wintered
there.

1026. Canute returned to England.

1027. The kings Olaf and Onund joined their forces, and

laid waste Sealand. The battle of Helge-a was
fought. This battle is also mentioned in the Saxon
Chronicle, but under the year 1025.

The next year, however, under which any event is dated
being 1028, it may be presumed that the battle, being a
foreign event not connected with English history, is merely
stated in the Saxon Chronicle as something that took place
between 1025 and 1028. It states also that Ulf and Eglaf,
viz. Olaf, were joined against King Canute; which may be
accounted for by Earl Ulf ’s attempt to set up Hardacanute
as king of Denmark against Canute his father, and Ulf’s
assassination by Canute’s order in the church of St. Lucius,
at Koskilde, after the battle of Helge-a. Snorro’s account of
this transaction, which is taken from the Knytlinga Saga, is
much more distinct and probable ; as the Danish levy which
Ulf and Hardacanute had raised was evidently in Canute’s
fleet, not with King Olaf and King Onund. As the Saxon
Chronicle is evidently wrong about an event which had not
taken place on its own shores, the Sagas are evidently wrong

VOL. III. C C

NOTES,

386

CHRONICLE OF THE

NOTES,

in the dates, or succession of events, of what took place in
England. There is great discrepancy between them as to the
dates or succession of events in the first twenty-seven years
after the year 1000 ; and the Saxon Chronicle may reason¬
ably be taken as the best authority. The Sagas, in fact, and
Snorro’s work founded on them, and which is to be considered
as one great saga put together from many smaller, are not
history so much as historical biographies ; not very dissimilar,
as a class of hterary compositions, to the historical novels and
dramas of a later age. They have a literary aim predomi¬
nating over historical accuracy ; and attempt by speeches, re¬
flections, poetry, anecdotes, to make an agreeable narrative
out of historical facts. They are certainly not of equal au¬
thority with the chronicles written prior to the 13th century,
which had no higher aim or merit than to string the events
chronologically together. As literary compositions, they show
a much more manly taste and turn of mind, than the prurient
tales or mawkish lays which are given in the Fablieaux et
Contes de XII. et XIII. Siecle,” as the compositions of the
troubadours and scalds or minstrels of Provence and the
south of France in the 12th or 13th century. The discrepancy
of the sagas with chronological history appears in the date of
Swein’s death, which took place the 11th February, 1014,
and of Ethelred’s, who succeeded him, and died 1016. But
Olaf is stated in the saga to have come to Norway in autumn,
1014, and the battle of London Bridge could not have taken
place before 1016 ; and if the battle of Hringmaraheide in
Ulfkel’s land be the same as that of Assandown in Essex,
which was in UffkeFs land, these events, and the marriage
of Canute with Emma the widow of Ethelred, which took
place in 1017, ai:e confusedly stated in the saga as events
which took place before 1014. Olaf is stated in the saga to
have passed two summers and a winter in the West, in Val-
land, after the battle of London Bridge ; and to have come to
Rouen after the death of King Edmund, which was in 1016 ;
and to have met there the sons of Ethelred, whom Canute
had expelled, and joined them in an attempt to regain their
kingdom the following summer. After their defeat in a
battle at a place called J ungofurda, Olaf left them, and set off
for Norway ; but this could not have been before the year
1017, although the year 1014 must be taken for that of his
arrival in Norway, in order to agree with the succession of

KINGS OF NORWAY.

387

events there. In 1019, King Canute appears by the Saxon
Chronicle to have visited Denmark. In 1025, or between
1025 and 1027, the battle of Helge-a appears to have been
fought. But some antiquaries of great note — Gramm and
Schöning — think that King Canute himself went on a pil¬
grimage toKome in 1027. There is no mention in the Saxon
Chronicle nor in Snorro, but there is in the Knytlinga Saga,
of this journey of Canute to Home. It does not appear that
there could have been time for any such pilgrimage in
Canute’s life; for in 1027 and 1028 he appears to have been
certainly in the Baltic, and to have driven Olaf to Russia.
It is very remarkable that the Knytlinga Saga does not give
Canute the Great, nor his father King Swein, nor his prede¬
cessors Harald or Gorm, the credit of having been very wise
men. It says of Canute, “ Ekki var hann storvitr madr, ok
sua Sweinn konungr med sama hætti, ok enn adr Haraldr
ok Gormr, at their voru ongir spekingar at viti.”

1030. King Olaf returned from Russia, and was slain at the
battle of Stiklestad on the 29th July of this year.

1034. Einar Tambarskelver and Kalf Arneson appear to have

come to Russia in the autumn of this year, to offer
their aid to King Magnus, the son of Saint Olaf.
Harald Haardrade, the half-brother of Saint Olaf,
appears to have gone from Russia to Constantinople
this year. Romanus Argyropolis was then emperor,
and was succeeded by Michael Paphlago.

1035. King Magnus, then in his eleventh year, was received

as king in Norway. Swend Alfifason, the son of
Canute, was driven out to Denmark. Canute the
Great died on the 13th November of this year, and
was succeeded in England by his son Harald, and in
Denmark by his son Hardacanute.

1036. Swend Alfifason died. A peace concluded between

King Magnus of Norway and Hardacanute, with the
condition that the survivor of the two should succeed
to the dominions of the other.

1040. According to Snorro’s account, (but 1039, on the 17th
March, according to the Saxon Chronicle,) King
Harald of England, called Harefoot, died, and was
succeeded by his brother Hardacanute of Denmark.

C C 2

NOTES.

388

CHRONICLE OF THE

NOTES.

1042. According to Snorro’s narrative, (but 1041, on the 8th

of June, according to the Saxon Chronicle,) Harda-
canute died. King Magnus went to Denmark with
a fleet to take possession of that kingdom in virtue
of the agreement made in 1036.

1043. King Magnus appointed Swend Ulfsson, the nephew

of Canute the Great, to be regent of Denmark.

1044. In spring King Magnus destroyed the castle of the

Jomsburg vikings, supposed to have been in the
island of Kugen or of Wollen, on the coast of Es-
thonia. In autumn he gained the battle of Lyrskog
Heath in Jutland, against the people of Yendland; and
in winter the battle of Aarhus, against Swend Ulfson,
who had assumed the sovereignty of Denmark.

1046. Harald Haardrade, who returned two years before from

Constantinople, is received by his nephew King Mag¬
nus as joint king of Norway.

1047. King Magnus died 25th October in Jutland, and

Harald Haardrade became sole king of Norway.
Swend Ulfsson becomes sole king of Denmark, by
King Magnus on his death-bed renouncing his right
derived from Hardacanute.

1061. King Harald being blockaded by Swend’s fleet in
Lymflord, drew his vessels across the narrow neck
of sand which divided it from the North sea, and
escaped. This fact is remarkable, as showing that
neither the rising of the land above the level of the
sea which modern geologists suppose, nor any change
in the features of the north sea-coast of Jutland and
Sleswick which historians assume took place, owing
to extraordinary inundations or high tides in the
13th or 14th century, had altered the shape or nature
of this low feature of the country during 800 years.
This low sandy neck of land was only washed away
in our times, viz. about 1816 ; and there is now a
channel with eight or nine feet depth of water where
this narrow land-road, dividing the Lymflord from
the North sea, existed from the earliest historical times
to 1816.

1062. The battle of Nizaa on the 10th August, when Harald
captured seventy vessels from the Danes.

KINGS OF NOKWAY.

389

1064. Peace concluded between King Harald and Swend, notes.
and the right of the latter to the Danish crown
recognised.

1066. Edward the Confessor, king of England, died 5th

January ; and Harald, son of Earl Godwin, suc¬
ceeded.

Harald, king of Norway, came in August with a fleet
of 200 vessels to Orkney, and marauded along the
coasts of Scotland and England.

On the 20th September he had a battle on the Ouse
with earls Walthiof and Morcar.

On Sunday the 24th September he had a battle at
Stanford-bridge, near York, with the people of that
city.

On Monday the 25th September he was surprised and
killed in battle by King Harald, the son of Godwin,
near York. Earl Toste, brother of King Harald,
son of Godwin, had joined Harald king of Norway
in this invasion, and was killed also in the battle.

Olaf, Harald’s son, and his brother Magnus, succeeded
Harald Haardrade as joint kings of Norway.

On the 14th October Harald, son of Godwin, fell in the
battle of Hastings, and William the Conqueror ac¬
quired the kingdom of England.

1067. The sons of Earl Toste, Skule and Ketil, came to

Norway, and settled there.

1069. Magnus, the son of Harald Haardrade, died; and his
brother Olaf, called Kyrre, or the Tranquil, became
sole king of Norway.

1073. Magnus, called Magnus Barefoot afterwards, was born.

1077. The stone church in Drontheim called Christ church
was consecrated.

1080. Harald Hein, king of Denmark, died. He was son of
King Swend Ulfsson, who died 1076; and Harald
Hein was succeeded by his brother Saint Canute.

1086. Saint Canute was killed by his subjects.

1089. King Eystein was born, a son of Magnus Barefoot ; but

Magnus could only have been sixteen years of age
by the account of the saga.

1090. Sigurd the Crusader was born.

C C 3

390

CHRONICLE OF THE

NOTES. 1093. King Olaf the Tranquil died, and was succeeded by

Magnus Barefoot, his son, who appears to have been
on a marauding expedition in the spring and summer
of this year in the Hebudes.

1096. King Magnus was on an expedition to the Hebudes,
and subdued Islay, Man, and Anglesey.

1098. King Magnus appears to have made a third expedition

to the Orkney Islands, and from thence to have gone
to the Hebudes and Ireland. On this expedition the
circumstance appears to have taken place of his sitting
in his boat, and being drawn across the isthmus of
the Mull of Cantire, and claiming all that lay to the
westward of what he passed through with his ship.
His son Sigurd, then nine years of age, was betrothed
on this expedition to Biadmynia, a daughter of an
Irish king called Myriartak in the saga.

1099. King Magnus returned from this expedition.

1101. A meeting at the Gotha river between King Eric the

Good of Denmark, Inge the Swedish king, and King
Magnus.

1 102. King Magnus went on another expedition to Ireland.

1103. King Magnus was killed in Connaught, with many of

his troops. Sigurd his son left Biadmynia his Irish
wife, and returned to Norway ; and the three sons of
Magnus, Ey stein, Sigurd, and Olaf, were made joint
kings.

1107. King Sigurd set out on his expedition to the Holy
Land.

1110. King Sigurd was in Sicily, and assisted, according to

the saga, at the coronation of Count Boger as king
of Sicily.

1111. Sigurd returned by land from Constantinople to Norway.
1114. Sigurd married Malmfrid, a daughter of Harald king

of Novogorod.

1116. Olaf, one of the sons of Magnus Barefoot, and one of
the joint kings of Norway, died.

1118. Magnus, called King Magnus the Blind, was born.
1122. Ey stein, the other son of Magnus Barefoot, and joint
king with Sigurd, died.

1126. Harald Gille, calling himself a bastard son of Magnus

KINGS OF NORWAY.

391

Barefoot, came from Ireland, and was acknowledged note«
by King Sigurd as his brother.

1130. King Sigurd the Crusader died. Magnus his son, called
the Blind, was taken by half the country as king, and
Harald Grille by another part of the country.

1132. Magnus married Christina, a daughter of Canute
Lavard, duke of Sleswick, but sent her away the
following year.

1134. Magnus expelled Harald Gille, and remained sole king

of Norway.

1135. Harald Gille returned, and surprised King Magnus in

Bergen ; put out his eyes, castrated him, and put him
into a monastery ; and became sole king.

King Inge the Hunchback was born.

1136. Sigurd Slembidiakn, calling himself a son of Magnus

Barefoot, and brother of Harald Gille, appeared ; and
on the 13th December killed King Harald Gille at
Bergen, but was not supported by the people, and
fled. Sigurd and Inge, sons of Harald Gille, were
made joint kings ; Sigurd being then four years of
age, and Inge one year old.

1137. Sigurd Slembidiakn took Magnus the Blind out of the

monastery at Drontheim ; but not being supported
by the people, Magnus retired to the Uplands, and
Sigurd to Orkney.

1139. Sigurd Slembidiakn and Magnus the Blind, having
obtained assistance from Denmark, fought a battle
with the kings Inge and Sigurd, and were defeated.

Magnus the Blind was slain, and Sigurd Slembidiakn
tortured to death.

1142. Ey stein, a son of Harald Gille, came from Scotland,
and was made king of a third of Norway.

1147. Hakon Herdabreid, or the Broad-shouldered, was born.

1151. Swerrer, afterwards king of Norway, was born.

1152. Nicolas Breakspear, an Englishman, came as cardinal

to Norway. He was afterwards pope under the title
of Adrian IV.

1153. King Eystein went to Orkney, and appears by the saga

to have marauded along the coast of Scotland and Eng¬
land as far south as Scarborough. This appears to have

392

CHRONICLE OF THE

NOTES.

been among the last of the marauding expeditions of
the Northmen. The Saxon Chronicle ends about
this year, and does not mention it ; but in the tumults
and domestic warfare at the end of King Stephen’s
reign, it might have been overlooked among the
calamities of the year.

1155. King Sigurd was slain by his brother Inge at Bergen.

1156. Swerrer, who was afterwards king, was taken by his

mother to the Feroe Islands.

Magnus, the son of Christina, a daughter of Sigurd
the Crusader by Erling Skakke, and who in right
of his mother was made king on the death of Hakon
Herdabreid, was born.

1157. King Ey stein was defeated, and put to death by order

of King Inge his brother. Hakon Herdabreid was
proclaimed king by the followers of King Ey stein.

1161. Gregorius, the step-father of King Inge, was killed in a

conflict with Hakon’s troops. In tlie same winter
King Inge was defeated and killed in a battle on the
ice at Opslo. The followers of Inge took Magnus
the son of a lenderman, Erling Skakke, and of
Christina the daughter of Sigurd the Crusader, as
king. Hakon, however, drove Erling and his son out
of Norway.

1162. Erling, coming suddenly on King Hakon in Steinavog,

defeated and slew him; and Magnus, the son of
Erling, was sole king of Norway.

1164. Magnus Erlingsson was anointed and consecrated king
of Norway, being then eight years of age, by Stephen
the legate of the pope, and was the first king who
had been crowned with that ceremony.

1172. Harald, a son of Christina, the mother of King Magnus

Erlingsson by King Sigurd, was taken and executed
at Bergen by order of Erling. Christina, the wife
of Erling, and mother of King Magnus, left her
husband and went to Constantinople, where she died
in 1178.

1173. Ey stein, who gave himself out for a son of King

Ey stein Haraldsson, made his appearance with a
troop, who were called Birkebeiners from the poverty

KINGS OF NORWAY.

393

of their dress, having birch-bark bound round their
legs instead of stockings or boots.

1176. Swerrer, who was afterwards leader of the Birkebeiners,

and by them raised to the throne of Norway, came
over from the Feroe Islands. His claim to any affinity
with the royal race was very slender.

1177. King Magnus Erlingsson defeated the troop of Birke-

beiners which Eystein had assembled, and killed
Eystein himself at Be. Swerrer succeeded to the
command of the Birkebeiners. This is the last event
of Snorro Sturleson’s Heimskringla.

1178. Snorro Sturleson was born.

1221. Snorro probably about this time began to write his
work, having then returned from a long residence in
Norway.

1241. This was the date of the murder of this very remark¬
able man of the thirteenth century. His work stands
unrivalled in the middle ages. In that class of
literary production — the lively representation of
historical events by incidents, anecdotes, speeches,
touches true to nature, bringing out strongly the
character and individuality of each eminent actor in
historical events — it may be doubted if, even since
the middle ages, any, excepting Shakspeare and Sir
Walter Scott in their historical representations, have
surpassed Snorro Sturleson.

NOTES.

THE END.

London :

nted by A. Spottiswoode.
New- Street- Square.

CT.

•' ifk

■

•

w>

' 'i

K

,L .•■>,

f

*

\

- <■',

•f

rt' ’’-r ^ ■

V'V./- / ■- . / ■ . ^

>•** ’•'"■■••

I ■

■ i

J

\Sr

\

I

» t

9^- .

»

■' -■ ■'*- ...

•■%

<

■ X . ...

>: é-íitiÆtí'í

ik>

.'m

"I

■';* ....

•át/'